Revit MEP 2009

Imperial Tutorial

April 2008

©

2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Getting Chapter 1

Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Performing Common Tasks in Revit MEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Chapter 2 Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Creating a Supply Air System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Secondary Supply Air System . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for the Secondary Supply Air System . Creating the Primary System Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Primary System Equipment . . . . . . . . . Inspecting and Color Coding the System . . . . . . . . . Creating Electrical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Switch Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Electrical Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 . 26 . 31 . 35 . 39 . 45 . 47 . 47 . 57 . 60 . 63 . 72

Developing Your MEP Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

v

Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning a Color Scheme to Zones . . . . . . . . . Performing a Heating and Cooling Loads Analysis .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. 77 . 88 . 94 . 95

Chapter 4

Mechanical Systems: Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Designing Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing the Primary Duct: Velocity Method . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method . Inspecting Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Air Conditioning Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 . 101 . 108 . 112 . 136 . 141 . 148 . 153 . 156 . 160 . 162 . 168 . 185

Chapter 5

Mechanical Systems: Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Designing Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Piping Views . . . . . . . . . . Placing Radiators and a Boiler . . . . . . Creating the Piping Systems . . . . . . . Creating Pipe Runs . . . . . . . . . . . . Resolving Pipe Interference . . . . . . . Connecting the Boiler . . . . . . . . . . Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Placing Circulator Pumps . . . . . . . . Inspecting Piping Systems . . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 . 189 . 196 . 200 . 204 . 217 . 230 . 249 . 252 . 260 . 263

Chapter 6

Electrical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Planning Electrical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Electrical Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Required Lighting Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Space Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels . Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels . . . Designing the Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Lighting Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Power Receptacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Switch Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Circuit Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 . 269 . 274 . 280 . 281 . 284 . 284 . 291 . 296 . 303 . 304 . 309 . 314 . 320 . 325 . 331 . 338

Chapter 7

Plumbing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Planning Plumbing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Plumbing Plan . . . . . . . . . Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems . Designing Plumbing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 . 344 . 345 . 346

vi | Contents

Add Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . Begin Creating the Sanitary System . . . . Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System . Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . Refining the Urinal Lines . . . . . . . . . . Adding Vents to the System . . . . . . . . Create the Cold Water System . . . . . . . Create the Hot Water System . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 346 . 352 . 359 . 371 . 376 . 382 . 390 . 398

Chapter 8

Fire Protection Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Designing Fire Protection Systems . . . . . . . . . Starting the Fire Protection Project . . . . . Placing Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Creating the Fire Protection Dry System . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 . 406 . 410 . 432 . 445 . 451 . 458

Chapter 9

Creating Revit MEP Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Modifying Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying a Fan Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Fan Powered VAV Box with Electric Heat Family . Modifying Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying a Water Closet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying a Diffuser Annotation Tag Family . . . . . . . . . Modifying a Light Fixture Annotation Tag Family . . . . . . Creating Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Light Fixture Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flange Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Annotation Symbol Family . . . . . . . . . . . . Revit MEP Family Editor Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lookup Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameter Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Light Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Part Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470 . 470 . 474 . 483 . 488 . 491 . 493 . 498 . 498 . 507 . 518 . 555 . 561 . 561 . 568 . 568 . 568 . 569 . 570 . 571 . 571

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575 Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577 . 577 . 582 . 589 . 595 . 599 . 599 . 602 . 605 . 607 . 610 . 615 . 615

Contents | vii

Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619 Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623 Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626

Chapter 11

Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631 . 631 . 637 . 641 . 644 . 644 . 649 . 651 . 654 . 656 . 662 . 670 . 673 . 673 . 675 . 678 . 682 . 682 . 684 . 684

Chapter 12

Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687 . 688 . 692 . 692 . 702 . 704 . 709 . 712 . 713

Chapter 13

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719
Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719 . 720 . 727 . 731 . 732 . 735 . 737 . 741 . 742 . 742 . 743 . 745

Chapter 14

Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761 . 761 . 767 . 767 . 769

viii | Contents

Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . Creating a Component Legend . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . Importing from Other Applications . . Importing Image Files . . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. 769 . 773 . 779 . 779 . 781 . 783 . 784 . 790 . 791 . 791 . 792

Chapter 15

Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797 Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813 Chapter 16 Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815
Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Detail Groups . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . . . . Using Attached Detail Groups . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815 . 815 . 823 . 827 . 830 . 830 . 833 . 836 . 836

Chapter 17

Sharing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Working Individually with Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839 . 840 . 840 . 844 . 848 . 851 . 856

Chapter 18

Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861 . 862 . 872 . 879

Chapter 19

Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890

Chapter 20

Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 894 . 894 . 903 . 906

Contents | ix

Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 908 . 911 . 911 . 913 . 916 . 918 . 919

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 923 Chapter 21 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 925
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 925 . 925 . 927 . 929 . 930 . 933 . 933 . 937 . 939 . 942 . 947 . 949 . 950 . 953 . 953 . 954 . 959 . 961 . 964 . 965 . 967

x | Contents

Getting Started

1

2

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit MEP 2009 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit MEP works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to use the Revit MEP tutorials, including where to find the training files and how to create a new Revit MEP project from a template file. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit MEP projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\Training. Training files are grouped into 3 folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix.

3

■ ■

Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a training file?
A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing training file. Open a training file 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of training file.

4 Click the training file name, and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt. For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template 7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing training file, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse. 10 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates. 11 In the Choose Template dialog, review the Revit MEP templates. Templates are available for specific building types: commercial, construction, and residential. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. For most tutorial projects, you will use the default template, and customize the project as necessary. 12 Select default.rte, and click Open. 13 Click OK.

Understanding the Basics
In this lesson, you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. You learn the terminology, the hierarchy of elements, how to navigate the user interface, and how to perform some common tasks in the product.

What is Revit MEP 2009?
The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design, drawings, and schedules required for a building project. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design, scope, quantities, and phases when you need it. In the Revit MEP model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and schedule views, Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views, drawing sheets, schedules, sections, and plans.

Understanding the Basics | 5

What is meant by parametric?
The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In mathematics and mechanical CAD, the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters; hence, the operation of the software is parametric. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project, and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. The following are examples of these element relationships:

The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. If you move the partition, the door retains this relationship to the partition. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed, the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the floor or roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.

How does Revit MEP 2009 keep things updated?
A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. When you change something, Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do, without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.

Element behavior in a parametric modeler
In projects, Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements:

Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. They display in relevant views of the model. For example, walls, windows, doors, and roofs are model elements. Datum elements help to define project context. For example, grids, levels, and reference planes are datum elements. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. They help to describe or document the model. For example, dimensions, tags, and 2D detail components are view-specific elements.

6 | Chapter 1 Introduction

There are 2 types of model elements:

Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. For example, walls and roofs are hosts. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. For example, windows, doors, and cabinets are model components.

There are 2 types of view-specific elements:

Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. For example, dimensions, tags, and keynotes are annotation elements. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. Examples include detail lines, filled regions, and 2D detail components.

This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. In Revit MEP, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning 2 walls, for example.

Understanding Revit MEP 2009 terms
Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common, industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. However, some terms are unique to Revit MEP. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. Project: In Revit MEP, the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. The project file contains all information for the building design, from geometry to construction data. This information includes components used to design the model, views of the project, and drawings of the design. By using a single project file, Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views, elevation views, section views, schedules, and so forth). Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements, such as roofs, floors, and ceilings. Most often, you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. You

Understanding the Basics | 7

create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building; for example, first floor, top of wall, or bottom of foundation. To place levels, you must be in a section or elevation view.
Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan next to it

Element: When creating a project, you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories, families, and types.

Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. For example, categories of model elements include walls and beams. Categories of annotation elements include tags and text notes. Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties), identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties, but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. For example, 6-panel colonial doors could be considered one family, although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Families are either component families or system families:

Component families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family.

8 | Chapter 1 Introduction

System families include walls, dimensions, ceilings, roofs, floors, and levels. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files.
■ ■

Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For example, the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system. However, you can create different types of walls with different compositions. System families can be transferred between projects.

Type: Each family can have several types. A type can be a specific size of a family, such as a 30” X 42” title block or a 32" x 84" door. A type can also be a style, such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances).

Navigating the User Interface
One of the advantages of Revit MEP is its ease of use, specifically its clear user interface. The Revit MEP window is arranged to make navigation easy. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled, making it easy to understand what each button represents. Revit MEP uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions, learning Revit MEP is much easier. In the following illustration, the user interface is labeled. In the steps that follow, you navigate and become familiar with the user interface.

Navigating the User Interface | 9

Many of the commands have shortcut keys. The title bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open. There are several toolbars across the top of the window beneath the menu bar. You can control the visibility of the toolbars and turn 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction . This creates a new project based on the default template. Click View menu ➤ Zoom.Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. click (New). which are listed on the menu. The Menu Bar 3 The menu bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. By default. new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. For example. Another time-saving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. The Title Bar 2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface. A shortcut menu displays a list of available commands. Edit. the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR. The Toolbar 4 Click Window menu ➤ Toolbar. depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. While working in the drawing area. and View. the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. In addition. The toolbar buttons represent common commands. you type the required key combination to perform the command. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based.

The bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. Navigating the User Interface | 11 . The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. 6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector.the text labels on or off using the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors. When you select the Door tool. The design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. The list of elements in the Type Selector is identical to the elements listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. On the left side of the Options Bar. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available in the project. a door type is specified.

You can use the Type Selector in 2 ways: ■ You can select an element type before you add the element to the building model. you can select any element and then change its type using the Type Selector. 9 In the Type Selector. select the drop-down list to see the walls that are available. the door type that displays in the Type Selector is the door type that will be added to the building model. ■ The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction .8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. In the drawing area. For example. when you add a door. The Show Design Bars dialog displays. You can use the Type Selector to change an element type after it has been added to the building model.

■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: commands for creating most basic building model components View tab: commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab: commands to create model elements Drafting tab: commands for adding annotation symbols and creating sheet details for construction documents Rendering tab: commands for creating rendered images Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab: commands for creating conceptual designs with masses Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans Structural tab: commands for adding structural components to the project Construction tab: commands for creating construction industry information ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To access the commands in a tab. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar. immediately below the Type Selector. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog. click the tab in the Design Bar. 11 Click OK. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu bar. containing buttons grouped by function. Navigating the User Interface | 13 .The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. The respective commands display on the Design Bar.

and rename views. delete. families. sheets. and groups. schedules. 14 | Chapter 1 Introduction .TIP You can control the visibility of each tab by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the shortcut menu. In the Project Browser. select Views (all). You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. families. reports. and groups of your current project: ■ Right-click in the browser to add.

After creating a browser organization scheme. Do not click. 14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. and group name. click Cancel. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog. scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser. 3D). To open a view. ■ ■ ■ 13 In the Type Selector. windows). elevations. walls. Expand or collapse the browser list by clicking the + or – next to the name.■ The browser is organized by view type (floor plans. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. so you can reposition it by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. The browser is dockable. The cursor displays as a pencil. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. double-click its name. family category (doors. Navigating the User Interface | 15 . You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for views and sheets. The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Wall.

Elevations : Elevation : Elevation 3. you can use the status bar and TAB to switch between elements and select the desired element. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. the status bar provides information regarding what you should do next. When attempting to select a specific element in a complex or crowded view. Help is available online at all times during a Revit MEP session. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. 20 Press TAB. find a keyword on the Index tab. You can control the status bar visibility from the Window menu. and notice that the highlighted element switches to the main elevation symbol. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. It highlights when the cursor is over it. In the status bar. Make sure you place the cursor over the elevation directional arrow. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. notice that the name of the highlighted element is Views : Elevation : West. click Modify to end the Wall command. it highlights and the status bar displays the element name. The status bar also provides information. There are several tools that help you find information. When you place the cursor over an element. in conjunction with tooltips. The elevation symbol consists of two parts: the main symbol and the elevation directional arrow (a triangle). 18 On the Design Bar. In this case. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction .In the bottom left corner of the window. You can use this tri-pane. regarding selected elements in a view. Revit MEP 2009 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit MEP 2009 Help.

and the topic specific to the dialog opens. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. click on the Standard toolbar. click Training Files.rvt. There are several ways to access zoom options. In the following steps. and then click a specific menu command or button for help.In addition. For example. press F1 for context-sensitive help. press F1 for help. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. and open Imperial\i_Cohouse. Performing Common Tasks in Revit MEP | 17 . Use zoom commands to adjust the view In the tutorials. context-sensitive help is available for many parts of the user interface. Click the Help button. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. You can also press SHIFT+F1. If no Help button displays. Tooltips: To see tooltips. Toolbar: From the toolbar. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom menu. After you are familiar with these tasks. Performing Common Tasks in Revit MEP In this exercise. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. You can access context-sensitive help in the following ways: ■ Dialogs: Many dialogs include Help buttons. TIP You can control the level of tooltip assistance using Settings menu ➤ Options. Windows: From any window. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit MEP Help window. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the tooltip displays.

18 | Chapter 1 Introduction . When you release the mouse button. The view of the building model is sized to fit the available window. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. the view zooms in on the selected area. 6 Click Zoom To Fit. 5 On the View toolbar. NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the Zoom In Region command. the view zooms out from the building model. this is referred to as a crossing selection. and type the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). 7 Click in the drawing area. 8 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify.The zoom menu lists the zoom options and their shortcut keys. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. In the drawing area.

12 Click and hold the mouse button. 10 To display SteeringWheels. 13 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. on the View toolbar. To define settings for SteeringWheels. As you move the mouse. use a zoom menu command or the toolbar option to zoom out. NOTE As you zoom in and out. and click the SteeringWheels tab. 11 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. click the pull-down menu on the Full Navigation wheel. To modify or add snap increments. 15 To exit the wheel. For more information about SteeringWheels. click Settings menu ➤ Options. and then using the Zoom tool again. click The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. moving the wheel to the desired location. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. Performing Common Tasks in Revit MEP | 19 . press ESC. and click Help. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. 14 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. . Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. If you do not have a wheel mouse. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool.9 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button.

21 Select the Craftsman02 table. display along the ends. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. click (Move). and select the wall. Similar controls. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . bottoms. to lengthen the wall. and tops of selected walls in elevation views and 3D views. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. expand Views (all). Cnst. 19 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. Small blue dots. 17 Type ZR. and double-click 2nd Flr. expand Floor Plans. These are the drag controls. and on the Tools toolbar. When drawing or modifying a building model. display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. 18 Click and drag the left control. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. Move an element 20 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan. referred to as shape handles. moving the cursor to the left horizontally. called drag controls. as shown.Resize elements using drag controls 16 In the Project Browser.

In this case. such as Move and Copy. Performing Common Tasks in Revit MEP | 21 . Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. for example. 22 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table. you want to move the table closer to the wall. click to specify the starting position. The table moves down. and drag it on top of the table. require 2 clicks to complete the command. After selecting the element to move. 23 Click next to the lower wall.Some commands. 24 Select the plant. as shown. and click again to specify the ending position.

End a command 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Undo commands 25 On the Standard toolbar. select the second item in the list. click Modify. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. 29 To end the command. 28 Click in the drawing area to start the line. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). click Lines. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to draw lines. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. 26 On the Undo menu. The table and plant are returned to their original locations. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command. All changes you make to a project are tracked. such as the Lines command. Move. Press ESC twice. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. on the Standard toolbar. 30 Close the file without saving your changes. Some commands. On the Design Bar. and click again to end it. 22 | Chapter 1 Introduction . In this example. click the Undo command. you decide that you prefer the table in its original position. or press CTRL+Z.

Express Workshop 23 .

24 .

you create a supply air system that consists of 2 low pressure. and to place and size ductwork. The model you use in this lesson contains the secondary system Mechanical Supply Air 1. you will have a basic understanding of Revit MEP design and documentation tools. 25 . an HVAC system is a logical connection between air terminals and HVAC mechanical equipment. After air terminals and mechanical equipment are placed in a model. as well as some of the best practices that help you efficiently design and develop an MEP project. and exhaust systems using these components. return. Creating a Supply Air System In this lesson. high pressure system. you can create supply. To create Mechanical Supply Air 2.Express Workshop 2 The Express Workshop tutorials focus on specific areas of Revit MEP functionality and highlight powerful features that are integral to the most common MEP workflows. secondary supply air systems and a primary. you add and connect the air handler. connect it to existing air terminals. Finally. and size the ductwork. You then create the main trunk line for Mechanical Supply Air 3 and connect it to the 2 secondary systems. which is the physical representation of the system. The systems are used to perform calculations and analysis. Each tutorial demonstrates tools you can use to complete tasks that are common to an overall workflow. you place the variable air volume (VAV) box. In Revit MEP. When you have finished these tutorials. creating the primary supply system.

right-click the Design Bar. 2 If the Mechanical tab is not displayed on the Design Bar. you create the logical system shown above on the left. You then define a logical connection between the VAV box and 4 existing air terminals. fan-powered. If necessary. click Training Files.Creating a Secondary Supply Air System In this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Mechanical. 26 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . The Mechanical commands are displayed. VAV box in the model. the model contains one completed secondary supply air system. Display the Mechanical commands 1 On the Design Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen. you place a parallel. click the Mechanical tab. scroll until the folder is displayed. creating a secondary supply system. ■ Open the i Express Workshop Supply Air System. At the beginning of this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt file located in the Imperial folder. In this exercise.

Add a VAV box 7 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. Then.In this tutorial. you find the command at the far left of the screen. 6 Click to specify the lower-right corner of the zoom region. Adjust the zoom for the model 3 Type ZE to zoom out to the extents of the model. when you want to change the area of the model you are working on. 4 Type ZR. hold the wheel down and drag. To zoom in and out. click Mechanical Equipment. when you are instructed to click a command on the Design Bar. enter ZR and specify a zoom region to zoom in. you can enter ZE to zoom out. 5 Click as shown to specify the upper-left corner of the zoom region. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. The model zooms to the specified area. The entire model displays on the screen. To pan. In this tutorial. roll the wheel. Creating a Secondary Supply Air System | 27 . You can also zoom and pan using the mouse wheel.

8 In the Type Selector. The cursor displays as the VAV box outline. click Modify to end the command.8 inch Inlet. 9 Move the cursor to the area near the interior door of the room between grid lines 3 and 4. 12 On the Design Bar. 28 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . the Type Selector displays the mechanical equipment that is pre-loaded in the model. 11 Click to place the VAV box in the location shown. 10 Press SPACEBAR once to rotate the VAV box 90 degrees.Directly above the Design Bar. select Parallel Fan Powered VAV : Size 3 . but do not click. on the Options Bar.

200000 (20%). 16 Press ESC to clear the selection of the VAV box. indicating that it has been selected.) ■ Under Mechanical . 18 Click to select the air terminal.Airflow. The air terminal turns red. Verify that the PrimaryToSupplyRatio is 0. 19 Move the cursor off the air terminal. ■ 15 Click OK. This value is built into the family type for the VAV box. Create the system 17 Move the cursor over the leftmost supply air terminal in the model to highlight it. This value is built into the family type for the VAV box. enter 10' 0". this value is automatically updated to reflect the supply airflow requirement. you can enter 10 0 without units. or just 10. for Offset. Creating a Secondary Supply Air System | 29 . 14 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. verify that SupplyAirFlow is set to 900 CFM. You do not need to enter the units. and click Element Properties. After the system is created. This value places the VAV box in the plenum space (between the Level 1 ceiling and the Level 2 floor.13 Right-click the VAV box.

27 On the Options bar. When you release CTRL and move the cursor away from the 4 selected air terminals. Verify the elements of the system 26 Select an air terminal that is an element of the system you just created. The red sketch graphics show the logical connection between the components of the system. 24 Select the VAV box you just placed. click Modify to end the command. select the 2 supply air terminals to the right. click (Edit System). click 23 On the Options Bar. The Options Bar displays system information such as the system name. the air terminals display in red. 25 On the Design Bar. move the cursor over the supply air terminal to the right. 22 On the Options Bar directly above the drawing area. 30 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 21 While pressing CTRL. and the number of elements that make up the system. indicating that they are selected. click (Select Equipment For System). the equipment supplying the system. (Create Supply Air System).20 While pressing CTRL. and click to select it. You have created a secondary supply air system that includes 4 air terminals and a VAV box.

Creating Ductwork for the Secondary Supply Air System | 31 . In this tutorial. 28 In the Supply Air : Mechanical Supply Air 2 dialog. you complete the secondary system by adding ductwork. for Solution Type.rvt. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Do not click. You could change the name by overwriting it. Creating Ductwork for the Secondary Supply Air System The model now contains the logical connection for Mechanical Supply Air System 2. click (Layout Path). 3 On the Options Bar. The sketch graphics highlight. Next. however. you leave it unchanged. the ductwork. the secondary supply air system shown below on the left.Revit MEP automatically named the system Mechanical Supply Air 2. In this exercise. 30 Press TAB. Verify the connections between the system elements 29 Move the cursor over an air terminal in the system to highlight it. click Finish. you create the physical connection for the system. showing the logical connection between the components of the system. Specify the layout 1 Select an air terminal in the system you created. 31 Move the cursor off the air terminal. 2 On the Options Bar. i Express Workshop Supply Air System. select Network.

4 On the Options Bar. Specify the layout path settings 6 On the Options Bar. The layout path settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. ■ ■ ■ ■ Under System Type: Supply Air. select Branch. 7 In the left pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog. 32 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 11 On the Design Bar. (Show Next Solution) to display other suggested network 5 Click until the network solution shown below displays. 8 In the right pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ Under System Type: Supply Air. for Duct Type. thus maintaining the consistency of these systems within the project. click Settings. select Main. Verify that Flex Duct Type is set to Flex Duct Round : Flex . Verify that Offset is 10' 0". piping. 10 Click OK. click Finish Layout.Round. verify that Round Duct: Tees is selected. 9 In the left pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog. which is located to the far left of the drawing area. and fire protection systems. Verify that the Maximum Flex Duct Length is 2’ 0”.A network layout solution displays with main segments in blue and branch segments in green. verify that Round Duct: Tees is selected. Verify that Offset is 10' 0". for Duct Type. plumbing. Configuring the layout path settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during the project. click solutions.

17 Click to select the highlighted system. fittings. Equal Friction. 15 Press TAB again to highlight the next level of connections. select Friction. or click in an empty part of the drawing area. and equipment is highlighted. If the entire network does not highlight.08 in-wg/100ft. click Sizing. Select Duct Fittings. A disconnection will negatively impact calculations involving this system. 20 Click OK. Size the duct system 21 On the Options Bar. The branch to which the duct is connected highlights. click View menu ➤ Shading with Edges. and a disconnection exists at the point where the highlighting stops. click 19 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). Velocity. You will use TAB to examine the hierarchy of the system components. Creating Ductwork for the Secondary Supply Air System | 33 . and enter . Select Ducts. and type SD.Revit MEP automatically creates and initially sizes all of the ducts and fittings required to connect the components of the system. Check the connectivity of the system You can check the connectivity of ducts and fittings using the TAB key. Click Check None. 16 Press TAB until the entire hierarchy of connected ducts. the system has not been created properly. 18 On the Options Bar. 12 If the ductwork displays in wireframe instead of with shading. Revit MEP supports 4 of the most common sizing methods: Friction. and Static Regain. Do not click. 13 Highlight a segment of the newly created ductwork by moving the cursor over it. 22 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ Under Sizing Method. 14 Press TAB. Select Flex Ducts.

24 On the Design Bar. Next. 30 Select the segment of duct shown. the adjusted SupplyAirFlow value of 625 CFM for the VAV reflects the supply airflow values calculated for the system. click (Element Properties). 34 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .■ ■ Verify that Only is selected. 33 Click OK. 37 Click OK. click Modify to end the command. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. for Branch Sizing.08 inches of water column per 100 feet of ductwork. In the Element Properties dialog. 26 On the Options Bar.Airflow. 35 Select the VAV box in the system. 32 In the Element Properties dialog.Airflow. The ductwork is automatically updated with all the necessary fittings. 36 On the Options Bar. 34 Press ESC to clear the selection. 31 On the Options Bar. click (Element Properties). The Flow value of 300 CFM is the sum of the 2 air terminals. 29 Press ESC to clear the selection. Verify the calculated airflow value for the VAV box. 38 Press ESC to clear the selection. under Mechanical . The ductwork is sized using the friction method at . select the segment of duct shown.Airflow. click (Element Properties). scroll to Mechanical . you create the ductwork for the primary system and connect it to the 2 secondary systems. Verify the sizing 25 In the system you created. scroll to Mechanical . 23 Click OK. 28 Click OK. Under Constraints. select Calculated Size Only. The Flow value of 150 CFM matches the required flow for the air terminal.

Creating the Primary System Ductwork In this exercise. select 10' 0". For Offset. select Round Duct : Taps. you create the main trunk line for the primary system and connect the 2 secondary systems. and click to place the second segment of ductwork and end the run. click near the door in the room to the left of the secondary systems. ■ The cursor displays as a pencil. 2 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ In the Type Selector. 4 Click in the location shown to end the first segment of ductwork. in the location shown by the pencil. For D:. 3 To start the duct run. This specifies the duct diameter. select 12". Create the primary air duct 1 On the Design Bar. 5 Move the cursor past the rightmost VAV. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Duct. Creating the Primary System Ductwork | 35 .rvt. i Express Workshop Supply Air System.

as described above. click (Undo) to undo the last segment of duct. you must place end caps on all open ends of the ductwork except for the end that connects to the air source. Draw the main trunk line again. 9 On the Design Bar. click Duct Fitting. The model is zoomed to the end of the duct. Add an end cap Before you size the ductwork for a system. and specify a zoom region at the end of the trunk line.6 Press ESC twice to end the command. 8 Type ZR. 7 If your trunk line does not match the above illustration and you want to draw it again. do the following: ■ On the toolbar above the Options Bar. ■ ■ Click again to undo to first section of duct. select Round Duct Endcap : Standard. This determines airflow direction and ensures accurate duct sizing. 36 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 10 In the Type Selector. The ductwork and the proper fittings are automatically created. 11 Place the cursor over the end of the duct to display an endpoint snap point.

click Modify to end the command. 18 In the Select Connector dialog. In addition to the graphic at the cursor. closing the right end of the duct run. select Connector 0 : Supply Air: Round : 8" Primary Air Connector. 15 Type ZP to zoom to the previous view. (Connect Into). 16 Select the leftmost VAV. 14 On the Design Bar. the type of snap point is also identified in the tooltip and on the status bat at the lower-left corner of the screen. 20 Select the primary air duct. 17 On the Options Bar. This connects the end cap to the ductwork. 13 Click to place the end cap.12 Press TAB until the point snap graphic shown below displays. First. Creating the Primary System Ductwork | 37 . Connect one secondary system You will use 2 methods of drawing a duct from a VAV box to the trunk line. click 19 Click OK. you use the Connect Into tool to automatically draw the duct.

23 Right-click the 8” inlet supply connector. and zoom in on the rightmost VAV box. Connect the other secondary system Next. 21 Type ZR. 38 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 22 Select the VAV box.Ductwork is automatically created to connect the VAV to the primary air flow supply with a tap connection. and click Draw Duct. you manually draw the connecting duct.

primary system. Adding the Primary System Equipment | 39 . i Express Workshop Supply Air System. 3 Move the cursor to the location shown. select Air Handler : 10 ton. Do not click. 2 In the Type Selector. you place an air handler and connect it to the main trunk line to complete the high pressure. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you add and connect the air handler for the primary system.24 Click on the center of the primary duct in the location where the intersection snap (an X) displays.rvt. click Mechanical Equipment. 26 Type ZP to zoom to the previous view. The ductwork is created with a tap connection. Next. click Modify to end the command. 25 On the Design Bar. Adding the Primary System Equipment In this exercise. Place the air handler 1 On the Design Bar.

7 On the Design Bar.The cursor displays as the air handler outline. 4 Press SPACE BAR as needed to rotate the air handler 90 degrees. 40 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 6 Click to place the air handler. click Modify to end the command. 5 Move the air handler to the location shown. Create a vertical section of duct 8 Move the cursor over an edge of the air handler to highlight it. Do not click.

The connectors on the top of the unit are displayed. click (Apply Current Offset). 10 Move the cursor over the 24" x 24" supply connector. and exhaust. These are the connectors for the air handler supply. The connectors on the front of the unit. On the Options Bar. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ In the Type Selector. are also visible. for the hydronic supply and return. return. and click Draw Duct. ■ Adding the Primary System Equipment | 41 . intake. Under Offset.9 Click to select the air handler. 11 Right-click the connector. select Rectangular Duct/Radius Elbows Tees. select 10' 0".

The vertical section of duct you just created is visible.A vertical section of duct is created. 16 Close the 3D HVAC view. and click Draw Duct. 15 Double-click 3D HVAC. past the end of the primary duct. 13 Press ESC. Attach a rectangular duct 17 Select the vertical duct you just created. 42 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 19 Move the cursor to the right. which is located directly to the left of the drawing area. 14 In the Project Browser. 18 Right-click the center point of the duct. expand Mechanical ➤ 3D Views. and click.

20 Press ESC twice to end the command. 25 Select the air handler. 26 On the Options Bar. Create the main system logical connection 21 While pressing CTRL. (Select Equipment for System). The sketch graphics show the logical connection between the components. select the leftmost VAV box. click (Element Properties). ■ 23 Select the air handler. 22 On the Options bar: ■ Click Click (Create Supply Air System). and then select the rightmost VAV box. 24 Press ESC. Adding the Primary System Equipment | 43 .

click (Trim/Extend). 30 On the Options Bar. under Mechanical . click (Element Properties). notice that the value for SupplyAirFlow is 32. 35 On the Options Bar. click System Browser. 34 Select the air handler. under Mechanical .Airflow. 37 Press ESC to clear the selection.In the Element Properties dialog. View the system components 38 On the Design Bar. 44 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . This is the capacity of the air handler.815 CFM. the value for SupplyAirFlow has been updated based upon the primary to supply ratio you specified in the element properties of the 2 VAV boxes. Connect the ductwork 29 On the Tools toolbar located above the Options Bar. 33 On the Design Bar. The ducts are trimmed and connected with the proper fittings. 36 Click OK.Airflow. verify that (Trim/Extend to Corner) is selected. 28 Click in an empty part of the drawing area to clear the selection. In the Element Properties dialog. 27 Click OK. 31 Select the 24" x 24" rectangular supply duct by clicking a point on the duct between the air handler and the primary trunk line. click Modify to end the command. 32 Select the primary 12" round duct.

Inspecting and Color Coding the System | 45 . close the System Browser. discipline-specific list of all the components in the model.rvt. 41 When you are done. 40 Expand any Supply Air system to view its HVAC components. click (System Inspect). 3 On the Options Bar. Elements are listed by the system they belong to. Elements that do not belong to a system are listed as unassigned elements. 2 Select a section of a secondary system.The System Browser is a tool that displays a hierarchical. the secondary system that you created in an earlier exercise. and double-click 3D HVAC. i Express Workshop Supply Air System. Next. The browser displays 3 mechanical systems: the primary system that you just created. you inspect part of the system you created. you inspect the system and color code the ductwork. You then add a legend to automatically color code the ductwork based on specific calculated values. Inspecting and Color Coding the System In this exercise. expand Mechanical ➤ 3D Views. and the secondary system that was already in the model when you opened it. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. expand Mechanical (3 systems). Inspect the completed supply air system 1 In the Project Browser. 39 In the System Browser.

7 Close the 3D HVAC view. 6 On the Design Bar. 11 Click OK. 8 On the Design Bar. Delete the legend and remove color coding from the ductwork 12 Select the legend.The selected system maintains its appearance. 5 Move the cursor over a section of the system. Place a legend and color code the ductwork Color coding the ductwork provides a quick. The inspection tag describes the section that is being inspected. click Inspect. visual indication of a system’s air flow. the red arrows indicate critical flow path. click Duct Color Scheme Legend.Flow. static pressure. select Duct Color Fill . The legend is added and the ductwork is automatically color coded based on the actual flow values. including flow. The flow arrows indicate flow direction. 4 On the Design Bar. under Color Scheme. 46 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 9 Click in the drawing area to place the legend to the left of the air handler. and pressure loss. click Cancel Inspector. the other systems are displayed in half tone. 10 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog.

click No. and the color scheme is removed from the legend. Creating Lighting Circuits In this exercise. and insulation type). lighting fixtures. . Creating Electrical Systems | 47 . under Schemes. and switches. You have completed the first Express Workshop lesson. click 15 Click OK. Wiring types (including material. junction boxes. 18 When prompted to save the model. (Delete) to delete the legend. you create the physical connections between the components: the wiring. and a 480V panelboard that have already been placed in the model. 14 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. temperature rating. and demand factors have been defined. select none. As you create circuits. click 17 Click File menu ➤ Close. Creating Electrical Systems In this lesson. One circuit connects the 4 lighting fixtures on one side of a room in the model. you create 2 lighting circuits using lighting fixtures. You use the System Browser to view the created circuits. junction boxes. receptacles. The model already contains the electrical components you use to create the systems. You then automatically balance the electrical loads on a panelboard. The legend remains selected. Revit MEP ensures that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. including power panels. The color is removed from the ductwork. Electrical settings have already been specified for the model. power circuits.13 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Standard toolbar at the top of the window. After creating the logical connections. voltage definitions. the other circuit connects the 4 lighting fixtures on the other side of the room. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. Creating a Supply Air System. distribution systems.

The Electrical commands are displayed. right-click the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. when you are instructed to click a command on the Design Bar. In this tutorial. you find the command at the far left of the screen. scroll until the folder is displayed. ■ Open the i Express Workshop Electrical Systems. Display the Electrical commands 1 On the Design Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen. If necessary. 2 If the Electrical tab is not displayed on the Design Bar. 48 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . click Training Files. click the Electrical tab. and click Electrical.rvt file located in the Imperial folder.

In this tutorial. To zoom in and out. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. The model zooms to the specified area. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. To pan. Create a lighting circuit 7 Move the cursor over the lighting fixture in the upper-left corner of the large room in the model. You can also zoom and pan using the mouse wheel. Then. hold the wheel down and drag. The entire model displays on the screen.Adjust the zoom for the model 3 Type ZE to zoom out to the extents of the model. 4 Type ZR. enter ZR and specify a zoom region to zoom in. roll the wheel. Creating Lighting Circuits | 49 . when you want to change the area of the model you are working on. 6 Click to specify the lower-right corner of the zoom region. 5 Click as shown to specify the upper-left corner of the zoom region. you can enter ZE to zoom out.

The lighting fixture turns red.The lighting fixture highlights. move the cursor over the lighting fixture below the selected lighting fixture. 11 While pressing CTRL. they display in red. 10 While pressing CTRL. 50 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . indicating that they are selected. 8 Click to select the lighting fixture. When you release CTRL and move the cursor away from the 4 selected lighting fixtures. 9 Move the cursor off the lighting fixture. indicating that it has been selected. select the 2 lighting fixtures that are located immediately to the right of the previously selected 2 lighting fixtures. and click to select it.

which is the logical connection between the elements. Creating Lighting Circuits | 51 . The red sketch graphics show the created circuit. 13 On the Options Bar.12 On the Options Bar directly above the drawing area. click 14 Select lighting panel LP-1. (Select a Panel for the Circuit). click (Create Power Circuit). The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel.

17 When you release the mouse button. 52 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Create a second lighting circuit 16 Place the cursor above and to the left of the 4 lighting fixtures on the right side of the room.15 Press ESC to clear the sketch graphics. all the elements within the window are selected. and then drag diagonally to create a selection window that includes all 4 lighting fixtures as shown.

18 On the Options Bar. Click Check None. (Select a Panel for the Circuit). Click OK. Select Lighting Fixtures. 20 While pressing CTRL. click 23 Select lighting panel LP-1. which is the logical connection between the elements. Creating Lighting Circuits | 53 . The lighting fixtures remain selected. 21 On the Options Bar. click the junction box located among the lighting fixtures to select it. The sketch graphics show the created circuit. 22 On the Options Bar. click (Create Power Circuit). click 19 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection).

25 Move the cursor over a lighting fixture in the leftmost circuit so that the lighting fixture highlights. 26 Press TAB to display the circuit. Do not click.The sketch graphics show the logical circuit with a home run. 54 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . you have created 2 lighting circuits. Modify a circuit At this point. The components include the 4 lighting fixtures and the junction box. 24 Press ESC to clear the sketch graphics.

30 Select the junction box located among the lighting fixtures. click (Edit Circuit). Creating Lighting Circuits | 55 . Verify the modified circuit 32 Highlight the junction box in the circuit and press TAB. click (Add To Circuit). 29 In the Power : 1 dialog. 31 In the Power : 1 dialog. 28 On the Options Bar. click Finish.The circuit includes 4 lighting fixtures. 27 Click to select the highlighted circuit.

you assign switches to control the lighting fixtures. discipline-specific list of all the components in the model. You can display the logical connections using the TAB key. Display the electrical systems The lighting circuits you created are called electrical systems in Revit MEP. 37 Expand the 2 circuits to view their electrical components. 35 On the Design Bar. click System Browser. expand Electrical (7 Systems) ➤ Power ➤ LP-1. the wiring. 34 Select lighting panel LP-1. and you can view the system components using the System Browser. The circuits become visible when the physical connections. 56 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Elements that do not belong to a system are listed as unassigned elements. At this point. are created. only the logical connections between the elements exist.The modified circuit is highlighted. 33 Move the cursor away from the circuit to remove the highlighting. close the System Browser. The System Browser is a tool that displays a hierarchical. 38 When you are done. 36 In the System Browser. Next. Elements are listed by the system they belong to.

4 In the Switch System dialog. Creating Switch Systems | 57 . you create switch systems to define switching behavior. Create a switch system 1 Select the lighting fixture in the upper-left corner of the room. click (Edit Switch System). (Select Switch). i Express Workshop Electrical Systems. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. click (Create Switch System). click 5 Select the switch as shown. and the 4 lighting fixtures on the right are controlled by another switch. All elements in the drawing except the selected lighting fixture display in halftone. 2 On the Options Bar. The 4 lighting fixtures on the left of the room are controlled by one switch.Creating Switch Systems In this exercise. The sketch graphics show the only currently selected component of the system. The switches have already been placed in the model.rvt.

and the lighting fixture displays in full tone in the drawing area. under Electrical .Lighting. 7 One by one. Verify the switch system 12 Move the cursor over the switch to highlight it. click (Add to System). 10 Click OK. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. Assign an identifier to the switch 8 In the Switch System dialog. click (Switch Properties). 6 In the Switch System dialog. select the 3 remaining lighting fixtures on the left side of the room. click Finish.The Options Bar displays the selected switch and the number of lighting fixtures currently selected (1). 58 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . the Number of Fixtures count on the Options Bar is updated. for Switch ID. The switch system highlights. enter A. 11 In the Switch System (A) dialog. As you select each lighting fixture. The identifier A is assigned to the switch for reference purposes. 13 Press TAB.

under Electrical . Click Check None.14 Move the cursor away from the switch system to remove the highlighting. Creating Switch Systems | 59 . 20 In the Switch System dialog. click 21 Select the switch as shown. Assign an identifier to the switch 22 In the Switch System dialog. click 17 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). enter B. Select Lighting Fixtures. click (Create Switch System). for Switch ID. 25 In the Switch System (B) dialog. (Select Switch). 18 On the Options Bar. Click OK. Create a second switch system 15 Drag to draw a selection window that includes the 4 lighting fixtures on the right side of the room. The 4 lighting fixtures remain selected. 16 On the Options Bar.Lighting. (Edit Switch System). click (Switch Properties). The selection is filtered. click 19 On the Options Bar. The identifier B is assigned to the switch for reference purposes. 24 Click OK. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish.

clear Leader.rvt. The lighting fixture is labeled with an automatically generated tag. you define the lighting fixture types for the room. Next. Then. i Express Workshop Electrical Systems. 2 On the Options Bar. 3 Select the upper-left lighting fixture. 60 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you define lighting fixture types and tag the lighting fixtures. you add a tag to each lighting fixture that identifies its type and the switch that controls it. Tagging Lighting Fixtures In this exercise.Verify the switch system 26 Move the cursor over the switch and press TAB to highlight the switch system. The lighting requirements for the left side of the room are different from the lighting requirements for the right side of the room. click Tag ➤ By Category. so each side of the room requires a different lighting fixture type. Tag the lighting fixtures 1 On the Design Bar.

10 In the Name dialog: ■ ■ Enter 2x4 3Lamp A. 4 One by one. Click OK. 5 Press ESC to end the command. Create a new lighting fixture type 6 Select the upper-left lighting fixture. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 Press ESC to clear the selection. which you have not yet defined. enter A. click Duplicate. click OK. 7 On the Options Bar. click Edit/New. 8 In the Element Properties dialog.The bottom part of the tag displays the identifier (A) for the switch that controls the lighting fixture. The top part of the tag displays the identifier for the lighting fixture type. The selected lighting fixtures are tagged. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. for Type Mark. Tagging Lighting Fixtures | 61 . select (Element Properties). 12 Click OK. under Identity Data. select the remaining 7 lighting fixtures in the room. 9 In the Type Properties dialog.

20 On the Options Bar. select Troffer Corner Insert . Change the type for the remaining lighting fixtures 19 While pressing CTRL. click (Match Type). 16 Select the lighting fixture shown to specify the lighting fixture type to be matched.Hosted : 2x4 3Lamp B. For each lighting fixture.Hosted : 2x4 3Lamp A) is automatically updated to display type mark A. 18 Press ESC twice to end the command. Change the type for some lighting fixtures 15 On the Tools toolbar. The 4 selected lighting fixtures are changed to the specified type. The cursor displays as an eyedropper. 62 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . and their tags are automatically updated. 17 Select the other 3 lighting fixtures on the left side of the room. in the Type Selector. select the 4 lighting fixtures on the right side of the room. the type is changed. and the tag is updated.The top part of the tag for the lighting fixture with the new type (Troffer Corner Insert .

on the Annotation Categories tab. The lighting fixture tags are no longer displayed in the model. select the 2 receptacles in the small room. i Express Workshop Electrical Systems. 23 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.21 Press ESC to clear the selection. Turn off the tags 22 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. You then connect the 2 circuits to create a multi-circuit home run. Creating Power Circuits In this exercise. 25 Click OK. you use electrical receptacles and a 208 volt panelboard that have already been placed in the model to create 2 electrical circuits with arc type wiring.rvt. One circuit connects 2 electrical receptacles in a small room. Next. Creating Power Circuits | 63 . while the other connects the 8 receptacles in the adjoining large room. scroll to Lighting Fixture Tags. you create electrical circuits with wiring. Create a power circuit with wiring 1 While holding down CTRL. 24 Clear Lighting Fixture Tags.

click (Create Power Circuit). The sketch graphics show the logical created circuit. (Select a Panel for the Circuit). 3 On the Options Bar.2 On the Options Bar. click 4 Select power panel PP-1. 64 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . The sketch graphics show the created circuit home run.

You can also specify the zoom region by clicking in one corner and dragging to the other corner. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. 8 Click to specify the upper-left and lower-right corners of the zoom region shown. The circuit wiring with a homerun is created. Creating Power Circuits | 65 .5 In the drawing area near the created circuit. click as shown to create arc type wiring. 6 Press ESC to clear the selection. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom to Region command. View conductor information 7 Type ZR.

11 In the Element Properties dialog. verify the number of conductors of each type (hot. 66 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 13 Press ESC to clear the selection. 10 On the Options Bar. under Electrical . neutral.Loads. The tick marks indicate the number of conductors (3) for the wire. 14 Type ZP to zoom to the previous view. click (Element Properties). Create a second circuit with wiring 15 In the large room. 12 Click OK. and ground).9 Select the wire shown. select the receptacle as shown.

16 While pressing CTRL. (Select a Panel for the Circuit). 18 On the Options Bar. The sketch graphics show the circuit. select the remaining receptacles in the large room. Creating Power Circuits | 67 . click 19 Select power panel PP-1. 17 On the Options Bar. The sketch graphics show the circuit and home run. click (Create Power Circuit). for a total of 8 receptacles.

click as shown to create arc type wiring. 68 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . The circuit wiring with a homerun is created. The single arrow at the end of the home run wire indicates a single-circuit home run.20 In the drawing area near the created circuit.

Creating Power Circuits | 69 . Rewire a circuit 22 Select the home run wire for the small circuit. click Wire. 24 Type ZR. and click Delete. The cursor displays as a pencil with arc type wiring.21 Press ESC to clear the selection. and zoom in on the region shown. 23 Right-click. 25 On the Design Bar. The wire is deleted.

If the cursor is positioned as shown. click to place the end of the wire. but the point snap graphic is not displayed. press TAB until the graphic displays. In addition to the graphic in the drawing. 29 With the point snap graphic displayed. The cursor is correctly positioned when the point snap graphic displays. the displayed snap point is also identified in the tooltip and on the status bar at the lower-left corner of the screen.26 Move the cursor to the location shown. If the cursor is positioned as shown. 28 Move the cursor to the location shown. but the point snap graphic is not displayed. 70 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 27 With the point snap graphic displayed. press TAB until the graphic displays. click to place the end of the wire.

Tag the wires 32 On the Design Bar. View the multi-circuit home run 31 Type ZP to zoom to the previous view. The wires in the circuit have been automatically resized to accommodate the demand created by the new multi-circuit home run. 33 On the Options Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category. 30 On the Design Bar. Creating Power Circuits | 71 . The 2 arrows on the large circuit home run indicate that it is now a multi-circuit home run.The two circuits are automatically connected. creating a multi-circuit home run. click Modify to end the command. select Leader. 34 Highlight a wire in the small circuit as shown.

which is located directly to the left of the drawing area.The temporary label shows the circuit the circuit number (5) and the power panel name (PP-1). and expand Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. 35 Click to place the label.rvt. 3 In the Project Browser. click (Panel Schedule Report). 37 Click to place the label. Next. scroll down as needed. 38 On the Design Bar. PP-1 is highlighted to show that it is the currently displayed view. Balancing Electrical Loads In this exercise. you balance the electrical loads on panelboard PP-1. you view the panel schedule report for panelboard PP-1 and balance the electrical loads on this panel. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. The Panel Schedule Report view opens. The temporary label shows the 2 circuits (5 and 6) and the power panel name (PP-1). i Express Workshop Electrical Systems. 2 On the Options Bar. 72 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 36 Highlight a wire in the large circuit as shown. View the panel schedule report 1 Select power panel PP-1. click Modify to end the command.

and the circuit structure is automatically reorganized. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. and the current loads on phases. 11 In the Edit Circuits dialog. under Other. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. (Edit Circuits on Panel). The loads are balanced across each phase. Balance the loads on the panel 9 Select power panel PP-1. under Panel Schedule. for Appearance on Sheet. click OK. click Edit. 10 On the Options Bar. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. and C. and click Properties. right-click PP-1. 12 Click OK. All the circuits connected to the panel are listed. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 Close the Panel Schedule Report view. A. click The Edit Circuits dialog displays. B. 6 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog. are shown. click OK.4 In the Project Browser. click Rebalance Loads. Balancing Electrical Loads | 73 .

14 When prompted to save the model. click No. 74 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . You have completed the Express Workshop lesson Creating Electrical Systems.The reorganized circuit structure is reflected in the wire labels. 13 Click File menu ➤ Close.

Developing Your MEP Designs 75 .

76 .

you design a mechanical system for an office building. In this exercise. This information is used for heating and cooling load analysis.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. as most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. After applying a color scheme to the zones. you create a plenum level and place various types of spaces. you plan the system by first placing spaces in the building. In this lesson. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. If the tutorial datasets are not present. methodology. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Revit MEP 2009.autodesk. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Revit MEP 2009. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided dataset. After finishing each exercise. You can search this directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded. you place spaces in the areas of the building model. 77 . NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. you perform a heating and cooling load analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. you can choose to save your work. Dataset ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Then. By following the recommended workflow. you configure the linked architectural model.Mechanical Systems 3 In this tutorial. you will understand the process. as with any design project. you first carefully plan the system. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spacial environment. The datasets that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. Planning Mechanical Systems To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. This system consists of a VAV duct system and a hydronic piping system. At the end of this tutorial. As you create the mechanical system. go to http://www. you learn system design best practices while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. and contain information about the locations in which they are placed. First. However.

you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. click Modify. Next. not in the MEP dataset. and double-click East . Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels to place spaces in the plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor) of the building. and click OK twice. make certain that the roof is defined as room-bounding. 6 In the Project Browser.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. click Edit/New. The elevation view opens. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans ➤ 1 Mech. right-click. The Status Bar located below the Design Bar and a tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. click the Training Files icon. and that the ceiling is defined as non room-bounding. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to achieve an accurate heating and cooling load analysis. and click Element Properties.■ ■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. NOTE When working with a linked file. select Room Bounding. These components are defined in the architectural dataset. The level 1 floor plan of the linked model displays. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. you add a level for plenums. The linked model is configured. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 On the Basics tab of the Design bar. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). This makes the architectural components (such as walls and floors) room-bounding so that they are recognized as boundaries for spaces. 78 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems .Mech. Open the i Spaces. In this section. Configure the linked model The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. and after the linked model highlights.

In the View Range dialog. verify that 0' 0" is specified. and in the Plan View Types dialog clear Ceiling Plan. If asked to rename the corresponding level and views. and press ENTER. Scroll down to the Extents category. 11 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 7. 8 In the Type Selector. expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. and enter an Offset value of 0 0. For Offset. and click Edit for View Range. 9 On the Options Bar. verify that Associated Level (Level 1 Plenum) is specified with a 0' 0" offset.7 On the Basic tab of the Design Bar. select Level Above (Level 2). verify that Associated Level (Level 1 Plenum) is specified with a 0' 0" offset. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. and click Properties. For Cut plane. verify that Level : Plenum is selected. Under Identity Data. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ Click OK twice. select HVAC for Sub Discipline. and its listed in the Project Browser under Mechanical ➤ ???. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. click Level. and click OK. do the following: ■ ■ Under Graphics. click Yes. enter an Offset of 1' 0" For Bottom. Under View Depth. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that (Draw) is selected. for Level. enter Level 1 Plenum for View Name. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. Click Plan View Types. ■ 10 Draw a plenum level 8' 6" above Level 1. Placing Spaces | 79 . A new plenum floor plan view named Level 7 is created. for Top.

verify that New is selected. 18 On the Options Bar. The Space tool is also on MEP-specific Design Bar tabs. select Level 1 Plenum. 17 Verify that Space Tag is selected in the Type Selector. Verify that Leader is cleared. The Space box contains all unplaced spaces (spaces that were placed in unbounded areas). This action specifies the vertical extent of the space.Mech view is not maximized or the elevation view was closed. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. the 1 . If Close Hidden Windows is unavailable.Mech. enter 0' 0" . In the Space box. double-click 1 .The Level 1 Plenum floor plan is now listed under HVAC ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 14 Click Windows menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows to close the elevation view. and maximize the window. Place a space in an office area and in an open area 13 In the Project Browser. 16 On the Basic tab of the Design Bar. 15 Use the mouse scroll wheel. ■ ■ ■ ■ 19 Place the cursor in the office area located in the upper-left corner of the building until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements. and zoom the office area located in the upper-left corner of the building. For Upper Limit. Notice that the level is renamed in the elevation view. click Space. For Offset. New indicates that a new space is being placed. Verify that Horizontal is selected in the tag location box. 80 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems .

You activate this visibility later in this exercise. and after the space snaps to the room-bounding elements. click to place a space as shown. Only the space tag displays because the visibility for the interior fill and reference lines is not activated. enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. and click Zoom to Fit. Later in the exercise. 22 Move the cursor to the large open area in the center of the floor plan. This displays the entire floor plan and centers it in the drawing area. TIP You can also right-click in the drawing area. you will separate the open space near the entrance and place a space there. 21 With the Space tool open. Placing Spaces | 81 . Make certain that you place the space to the center-right of the open space as shown.20 Click to place the space.

A text box appears. 24 Zoom in on the space tag in the upper left hand corner office. 82 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems .23 Click Modify. 25 Click the space tag name. Next. you rename the 2 spaces.

30 Click OK. and select Color Fill. and rename the space in the open area. The 2 spaces display in the floor plan view. Open 104. you activate spaces visibility. expand Spaces. enter VG on the keyboard. Placing Spaces | 83 . The Interior option displays space shading. You apply color fill to spaces in a later exercise. Reference displays space reference lines (cross hairs). enter 101 in the text box.Enter Office. and Reference. 27 Repeat this method. Interior. 29 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overides dialog. 28 With the view active. 26 Double-click the space tag number. and click in the drawing area. and press ENTER. Color Fill displays space color fill when it is applied. Next.

enter ZR. click Space Separation. The entrance area is bound only by the radius wall—this area is considered semi-bounded. right-click the Design Bar. and draw a zoom region around the upper-corner of the radius wall as shown.Place a space in the entrance area You need to place a space in the area next to the building entrance becaue this entrance area will be heated and cooled more often than the rest of the open space. you need to make this area fully-bounded by drawing space separation lines.Mech view active. Chain. NOTE If the Mechanical tab is not available on the Design Bar. 32 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that (Draw). and click Mechanical. 31 With the 1 . For Offset. To place a space in the entrance area. and (Line) are selected. 84 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . 33 On the Options Bar. verify that 0' 0" is specified.

and after the end point snap displays. If the space and space tag are inside the new area. 39 Move the cursor to the left 4' 0" (which is located over the lower-end of the radius wall). click to specify the end point for the last line segment.■ Verify that Radius is cleared. Placing Spaces | 85 . select and drag both of them. The Draw tool remains open. click to specify the start point for the first space separation line segment. and click to specify the end point of the third line segment. NOTE If the space or the space tag is inside the smaller area. and click to specify the end point for the second line segment. 35 Use the mouse scroll wheel to zoom out the view. 40 Press ESC twice to close the Draw tool. and after the end point snap displays. 38 Draw the line down 32' 0". and type 4' 0" (notice the text entry box called a dimension listener that pops up). 34 Place the cursor over the upper-corner of the radius wall. 36 Draw the line up. click Move to Space. If you see a warning that the space tag is outside of its space. 37 Move the cursor to the right to draw a horizontal line 32' 0". select the space (reference line) or the space tag. Notice that the Open 104 space adjusted its boundaries so that it is not in the new area. and drag it to the larger open area. and press ENTER to specify the end point for the first line segment. The space separation line created a new fully-bounded area within the large open area.

space separation lines are not recognized in Revit Architecture. verify that Horizontal is selected in the tag location box. 41 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ For Number. Although room separation lines are recognized in Revit MEP. spaces can be placed in them. verify that Leader is cleared. 42 On the Options Bar. enter 121. For Name. 46 In the Element Properties dialog. and verify that New is slected in the Space box. 43 Place a space in the entrance area. after the space reference lines highlight. select Level 1 Plenum for Upper Limit. 86 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . under Identity Data. 45 Place the cursor over the space. click Space. 44 Click Modify. Next. After the areas are separated. right-click and click Element Properties.NOTE Space separation lines are MEP-specific room-bounding lines that separate areas where a wall is not desired or not possible. enter Entrance. you place a space in the entrance area. enter 0 0 for Offset.

The plenum space displays in the floor plan view.47 Click OK. 49 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. select Level 2 for Upper Limit. 52 Press Esc. This is because the walls prevent space placement. All other Option Bar settings are the same as when you placed the other spaces. The offset places the space 2 feet above the roof. under Floor Plans. 53 Rename the space. 55 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. expand Spaces. 56 On the Options Bar. and select Interior and Reference. and enter 0 0 for Offset. click Space. Place a space in a chase area 48 Zoom in on the chase that is located to the right of the Mechanical room. The space is renamed Entrance 121. click Space. Roof is specified for the upper limit because the chase area spans multiple levels and ends at the roof level. and enter 2 0 for Offset. 50 On the Options Bar. and click to place a space. All other Option Bar settings are the same as when you placed the other spaces. 58 With the Level 1 Plenum view active. select Roof for Upper Limit. Place a space in a plenum area 54 In the Project Browser. Chase 118. double-click Level 1 Plenum. 57 Place the cursor in the plenum area. Placing Spaces | 87 . 51 Place a space in the chase area. 60 Click OK. Notice that the plenum space is not in the mechanical room or in the stairwell. 59 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overides dialog.

click System Browser. you can choose to save your work. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. and verify the zones in the System Browser. 1 In the Project Browser. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. 2 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. Finally. In the next exercise. In this exercise. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. that action removes the space from the Default zone. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the dataset that Autodesk provides. In the left pane of the Open dialog. When you add a space to a zone. you modified the spaces visibility for the views. you assign spaces to zones in the building. Open the i Zones.Mech to make it the active view. Otherwise. 88 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. navigate to the folder of your choice. Zones allow you to control the spacial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. 62 In the Save As dialog. However. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. and click Save. click File menu ➤ Save. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. You can click Reference under Spaces on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog (View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics) to display space reference lines. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. In this exercise.61 If you want to save your work. Creating Zones After spaces are placed in the building. and double-click 1 . click the Training Files icon. you add spaces to zones in order to control the spacial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. You used space separation lines to create a new fully-bounded area that was part of a larger area. NOTE After finishing each exercise. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the dataset to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. close the file. enter Spaces Training for File name.

Notice that Default is currently the only zone. The title bar displays the name of the new zone. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. and a new zone is created. This removes the space from the Default zone. NOTE The Zone toolbar provides zone tools and information. Using the Zone toolbar. and click View ➤ Zones. place the cursor on Office 101 located in the upper-left corner of the building until the space highlights.NOTE You can also press F9 (with the drawing area active) or click Window menu ➤ System Browser to open the System Browser. the Zone toolbar displays. 6 On the Zone toolbar. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. You work with one zone until you click Finish. verify that (Add a Space to the Zone) is selected. click Zone. you can add or remove a space from the zone. Assign a zone to spaces on the same level 5 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. Creating Zones | 89 . After a space is placed in an area. The Zone tool opens. 3 Right-click in Systems Browser. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. 7 In the drawing area. As you do this. you assign spaces to a zone. Next. it is automatically added to the Default zone. and modify the zone properties. This is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model.

and click OK. In the System Browser. 90 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . click (Zone Properties). expand HVAC Zones. click Interior Fill and Reference Lines. 11 With the Zone toolbar open. for Name enter 1 . and click OK. you rename the zone. 9 With the drawing area active. enter VG. TIP You can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. you need to activate the zone visibility which you do next. under Identity Data. Notice that the zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. 10 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overides dialog. Next. add the Office 102 and Office 103 spaces to the zone. 14 Expand the 1 . expand the new zone and notice that the Office 101 space is added to it and removed from the Default zone.8 Click the space to add it to the zone.West Offices. To view the zone in the drawing area. The new zone name displays in the Zone toolbar and the space is renamed in the System Browser. The new zone displays.West Offices zone in the System Browser to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. 12 On the Zone toolbar. 13 In the Element Properties dialog.

click Zone. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans.Mech to make it the active view. you activate zones visibility for the view. expand HVAC Zones. enter VG. and click OK. 21 Zoom in on each floor plan. 27 On the Zone toolbar. 19 Click Windows menu ➤ Floor Plan: 1 .15 On the Zone toolbar. Assign a zone for spaces on different levels 16 In the Project Browser. 23 On the Zone toolbar. Creating Zones | 91 .Mech floor plan. and double-click Level 1 Plenum to open the view. click Interior Fill and Reference Lines. click in the Level 1 Plenum view to make it active. Next. 17 With the drawing area active. verify that ■ ■ ■ ■ (Add a Space to the Zone) is selected. 26 Add the L1 Plenum 122 space to the zone. click Finish. 25 With the Zone toolbar open. 22 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. add the following level 1 spaces to the zone: Open 104 Men’s Room 105 Mech/Elec 106 Ladies Room 107. 18 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overides dialog. click Finish. 24 On the 1 . 20 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows.

under Identity Data. you cannot open the Zone tool as this will create a new zone. Next. select the reference line to the zone that you created. However. 30 On the Zone toolbar. 28 In either view. click Edit Zone. for Name. you edit the zone to rename it.You need to rename the zone. 92 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . The Zone tool opens. Notice that the Zone toolbar displays the name of the zone that you are editing. 31 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Zone Properties). enter 1 . TIP You can also access zone properties by right-clicking the zone in the System Browser.Open Offices. and click Properties. 29 On the Options Bar. and click OK.

West Offices Chases 34 If you want to save your work. 32 On the Zone toolbar. Complete the zones for the building 33 For additional practice. Spaces Offices 111. L1 Plenum 122 Offices 115.Open Offices 1 . 211.Entrance 1 . In this exercise. You activated zone visibility in the views. You can expand the 1 . proceed to the next step.East Offices 1 . Ladies’ Room 107.Open Offices 2 .North Offices 2 . Elec/Mech 106. close the file. 116. use the methods that you learned and assign zones for all the spaces in the building. Office 209 Open 204. 202. 35 In the Save As dialog. Men’s Room 105. Elec/Mech 206. The table below lists all spaces and the zones. 102. navigate to the folder of your choice.South Offices 1 .The new zone name displays in the Zone toolbar and the space is renamed in the System Browser. 110 Open 104. 103 Stairwells 114. 119. Ladies Room 207. 112. 216 Offices 201. click File menu ➤ Save.Conference Room 2 . 212 Lounge 208. enter Zones Training for File name. you assigned zones to the spaces that were on the same level and on different levels of the building. L2 Plenum 217 Offices 215.East Offices 2 .South Offices 2 .West Offices Stairwells 2 . 213 Conference 214 Offices 210. All zones will be provided in the dataset for the next exercise. click Finish. 203 Chases 118. Otherwise. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and Creating Zones | 93 . Men’s Room 205. 120 Zones 1 .Open Offices zone in the System Browser to view the 5 spaces in it. 109. 117 Offices 101. 113 Entrance 121 Offices 108.North Offices 1 . Make certain that you verify the spaces in the floor plan views and in the System Browser If you prefer not to continue with this practice. and click Save.

94 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . NOTE If the Drafting tab is not available on the Design Bar.in the System Browser. click Color Scheme Legend. and click to place the legend. Open the i Zone Color Scheme. you apply a color scheme to the zones that you created in the previous exercise. 4 In the Type Selector. Apply the color scheme 5 Move the cursor in the drawing area and notice that the color scheme legend outline indicates that no color scheme has been assigned to the view. Click OK.Mech view. Create a new color scheme legend type 1 In the Project Browser. In the next exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than you using space schedules or accessing element properties. NOTE All zone reference lines and shading have been hidden in this dataset to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. click the Training Files icon. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select HVAC Zones for Space Type. 7 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog. verify that Color Scheme Legend : 1 is selected. right-click the Design Bar. Verify that Schema 1 is selected for Color Scheme. 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. you assign a color scheme to these zones in preparation for laying out a VAV duct system. and double-click 1 . Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 6 Position the color scheme legend outline at the top-right corner of the floor plan. Assigning a Color Scheme to Zones In this exercise. and click Drafting. The color scheme outline follows the cursor movement to help you accurately position the legend.Mech to make it the active view. The zones are also listed in the System Browser. The color scheme is applied to the zones in the 1 . You can click Reference Lines and Interior Fill under HVAC Zones on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overides dialog (View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics) to display zone reference lines and shading.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder.

You then perform a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. and view the loads report. 2 In the Element Properties dialog under Energy Analysis. In this exercise. For Postal Code. In the next exercise. 10 In the Save As dialog. use the method that you learned and add a color scheme for the zones on the 2 . and on the Place tab of the Manage Place and Locations dialog.Mech.8 For additional practice. If you prefer not to continue with this practice. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Office is specified for Building Type. space. Performing a Heating and Cooling Loads Analysis | 95 . Level 1 Plenum. 9 If you want to save your work. enter 03101. ■ Click for Location. and Level 2 Plenum floor plan views. navigate to the folder of your choice. All color schemes will be provided in the dataset for the next exercise. select Manchester. click Edit for Energy Data. you verify the building. click the Training Files icon. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. proceed to the next step. and zone information. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. Specify Project Settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click File menu ➤ Save As. NH for City. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. and click Save. and view the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. Performing a Heating and Cooling Loads Analysis In this exercise. enter Zone Color Scheme Training for File name. Open the i Energy Analysis.

verify that Manchester. if you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate.Single Duct is selected. verify that VAV . Verify building information 6 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. Next. You can also access the building information by clicking Settings menu ➤ Project Information. After opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. Verify that 1' 0" is specified for Sliver Space Tolerance. Click OK twice. Verify area and volume setting 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. verify that Office is selected. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. select Level 1. NH is selected. A preview pane displays the model and 2 tabs contain heating and cooling information for the building. 7 Click the Building tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. and do the following: ■ ■ For Building Type. For Place and Location. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Construction Settings). and click OK.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that VAV . Revit MEP stores this information as project information. (Building ■ ■ For Building Service (Default Space Service). you need to select this option. Verify that <Building> is specified for Building Construction. Verify that Shading surfaces is selected. You have verified the building information.Single Duct is specified for Building Service. click Edit for Energy Data. 5 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. Default Space Construction. click Heating and Cooling Loads. 96 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . For Building Construction. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. Then. verify that <Building> is selected. For Ground Plane. Verify that New Construction is selected for Project Phase. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). under Energy Analysis.

9 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. The Highlight tool allows you to verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. 11 Expand the 1 . Performing a Heating and Cooling Loads Analysis | 97 . and select Office 111. spin the model as shown. TIP You can use the View Cube mouse to spin. click the Spaces/Zones tab. 13 Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. 10 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). verify that Wireframe is selected (default setting). The space for Office 111 highlights in red. while pressing SHIFT and the mouse scroll wheel. you isolate a space. Next. 12 Click (Highlight).East Offices zone. NOTE Wireframe displays the analytical volume of a space. and zoom the model to better view the space. The Spaces and Zones tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them.View a space 8 In the preview pane. pan. The analytical volume is bounded by the center plane of walls and the top plane of roofs and floors.

14 With Office 111 selected. you verify space information. roofs. click (Isolate). The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces that normally would be obstructed by other spaces or by the architecture which would normally make it difficult to view. highlight and isolate the space for Office 111 to view its inner volume. and other room-bounding components. NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. Next. 15 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. Office 111. 16 On the View Selector . you view the volume of the space differently. Verify space information 19 On the Spaces/Zones tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 17 Using the methods that you learned. Below the list of spaces and zones. the space information displays for the selected space. This space information will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. 98 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . select Office 111. 18 Next. floors. click Shading.

This zone contains 3 spaces. and repeat the above steps to view the inner volumes of the spaces in the 1 -East Offices zone. This displays the analytical volume of the spaces in the selected zone. select 1 .00 °F : 54.00 °F : 90. You can also click (Zone Properties) on the Zone toolbar to access the zone information. verify the following space information: ■ <Building> is specified for Space Type and Construction Type.East Offices. You can also access the space and zone information by selecting a space or zone in the drawing area or System Browser. ■ ■ IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains space and zone information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. This specified the number of people or the area per person for the space. view other spaces and zones in the building model. you verify the zone information. and verify the space and zone information. Lighting Loads: <Default> : Power Loads: <Default> is specified for Electrical Data. This specifies the cooling set point. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. <Default> is specified for People Data. The space and zone information is located under Energy Analysis in the Element Properties dialog. and humidification set point. use the (Highlight) and volume of the spaces in the selected zone. cooling air temperature. the zone information displays for the selected zone. 25 Click 1 . This specifies the outdoor air per person. and air changes per hour.East Offices. and clicking Element Properties. View other spaces and zones 27 Using the methods that you learned. Next. ■ ■ View a zone and zone information 21 On the View Selector . 22 On the Spaces/Zones tab. 70. N/A : N/A : N/A is specified for Outdoor Air Information. respectively.00 °F : N/A for Heating Information. outdoor air per area.East Offices.20 Under the list of spaces and zones. (Isolate) tools to view the analytical 24 Click (Shading).East Offices zone: ■ ■ <Building> is specified for Service Type. 1 . right-clicking. Revit MEP stores this space and zone information as space and zone properties. click Wireframe. 23 As you did earlier. Performing a Heating and Cooling Loads Analysis | 99 . 74.00 °F : N/A for Cooling Information. including Office 111. Below the list of spaces and zones. This zone information will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the spaces in the zone. and dehumidification set point. This specifies the heating set point. 26 Verify the following zone information for the 1 . This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. heating air temperature.

You then performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. click Calculate. RELATED <Virtual Environment> allows you to either export the building and space information to the IES <Virtual Environment> program to perform an energy analysis and create an IES model. and a loads report displays.You may need to spin. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. navigate to the folder of your choice. NOTE If you select multiple spaces or zones that contain different information. 29 Review the loads report. if 2 spaces are selected each having different people data. 31 In the Save As dialog. enter Energy Analysis Training for File name. or zone information. TIP You can select multiple spaces or zones by pressing CTRL and selecting them. or zoom the view to see the selected space or zone. Now that the project. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. Otherwise. space. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. For example. space. you can perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. and zone information has been verified. or by pressing SHIFT to select a range of spaces or zones. weather. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. you verified building. After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. or import the IES model that has already been created. or make any changes to the model. space. this report includes project. close the file. You must have IES <VE> installed. building. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. space. Various factors are analyzed including analytical and inner volumes of the spaces. and zone information. and zone information for the building model. Revit MEP performs a heating and cooling loads analysis using the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool that was developed in partnership with IES (Integrated Environmental Solutions). This product is not included with Revit MEP. the People Data option becomes blank. 100 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . that information does not display. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. 30 If you want to save your work. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 28 On the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. In the next lesson. click File menu ➤ Save. pan. and click Save. In this exercise.

click the Training Files icon. and double-click 1 . sizing ductwork. and learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. 2 Right-click in the drawing area. 101 . adding AC units. Open the i Air Terminals.Ceiling Mech to make it the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. you continue designing by resolving routing conflicts. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding the VAV boxes.Mechanical Systems:Air 4 Designing Air Systems Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. and click View Properties. Modify a ceiling plan view 1 In the Project Browser. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. Placing Air Terminals In this exercise. Then. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Ceiling Plans. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you will create supply air systems. modify air terminal parameters. As you place the air terminals.Ceiling Mech view in the Project Browser and click (Properties). and then you validate your air system design. After system creation. you create the secondary and primary supply air system and ductwork to connect the components that you added. After completing the air systems lesson. You can also select the 1 .rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. you create new views. In this lesson.

separate the value with a space.3 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 4 Scroll down to the Extents category and click Edit for View Range. 11 Click to place the supply air terminal in the upper left office as shown. click Air Terminal. and enter 8' 7" for Offset. 5 In the View Range dialog. do the following: ■ ■ Select Level 1 for Underlay. and enter 8 7 for Offset. For example. Under Primary Range. You will now use this ceiling plan to place the level 1 air terminals. 9 In the Type Selector. or enter 12 3 1/2 for 12' 3 1/2". You specify 8' 7" so that your view captures the air terminals (which will be located at the ceiling height of 8' 6") and not other system components that may be above the air terminals and in the same level. you can enter 8 7 and press Tab for 8' 7". specify the following: ■ Under Primary Range.Hosted: Workplane-based Supply Diffuser. for the Level parameter. Add a supply air terminal 7 Verify that 1 . ■ ■ TIP When entering a value. 6 Click OK twice. NOTE The ceiling hosts the diffuser. These components would obstruct your view of the air terminals. you do not need to type measurement symbols instead. Verify that Reflected Ceiling Plan is selected for Underlay Orientation. Under View Depth. verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected. 102 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . under Graphics. 10 On the Options bar.Ceiling Mech is the active view. make sure that Place on Face is selected. select Supply Diffuser . for the Cut plane parameter. enter 0 for Offset. verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected. for the Top parameter.

17 Move the air terminal to the location shown. Move the supply air terminal 15 With the air terminal selected. Since snaps are not available here.use the arrow keys for fine movement control. enter 300 CFM for Flow. verify that Constrain is cleared and Copy is selected. 16 Move the cursor to the bottom right corner of the air terminal. Placing Air Terminals | 103 . 19 On the Options Bar. Notice that the selected air terminal turns red. and then click Modify. the command in progress terminates. click (Move) on the Edit toolbar. You can also press Esc to accomplish this result. TIP To use the Move tool. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the air terminal without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. click Modify. 20 Select the bottom-right corner of the air terminal as the copy start point. The start point aligns with the end point when the move is completed. then select Multiple. you first specify a start point on the component that you want to move and then you specify an end point for the destination. TIP When you click Modify. First specify a copy start point on the component that you want to copy and then specify the copy end point (or destination). click (Copy) on the Edit toolbar. Modify the supply air terminal flow and offset parameters 13 Select the supply air terminal that you just placed. and after the (geometry) end point snap displays. you may have to move it to center it -.12 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. click to specify the move start point. TIP You use the same procedure with the Copy tool as with the Move tool. and then click the midpoint of the Office 102 and then of the Office 103 ceiling grids to specify copy end points. Move the diffuser so that it fits squarely inside a ceiling tile. Copy the supply air terminal 18 With the Office 101 air terminal selected.

and then copy it to the Men’s Room (lower restroom) as shown.Copies of the air terminal are placed immediately after you specify each end point. 104 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air .Hosted: Workplane-based Exhaust Diffuser. 22 In the Type Selector. Notice that after you specify the copy start point. 23 Using the add-move-copy placement method. listening dimensions display to aid placement. place an exhaust air grill in the Ladies’ Room (upper restroom). click Air Terminal. TIP You can enter SM to override all other snaps and display midpoint snaps only. select Exhaust Diffuser . Note that snap overrides deactivate after you make a selection. Add exhaust air grills and return air terminals 21 On the Mechanical tab on the Design Bar.

make certain that you specify the airflow parameter to 250 CFM.Before you copy the exhaust diffuser. place 3 return air terminals in the open space to the left of the restrooms.Hosted: Workplane-based Return Diffuser. 24 In the Type Selector. and specify a 325 CFM airflow for each of them. 25 Using the same placement method. Placing Air Terminals | 105 . select Return Diffuser .

and click OK.26 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. right-click. clear the UpArrow check box. Modify the airflow display arrows 27 Select the Office 101 supply air terminal and use the Copy tool to place a copy below the Men’s Room in the Open 1 area. under Mechanical. TIP Notice that each air terminal type is identified by a different symbol. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. 28 Select the air terminal that you just placed. and click Element Properties. 106 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air .

The next exercise starts with a completed drawing. 30 Select the Office 101 air terminal. continue laying out the level 1 supply system. Placing Air Terminals | 107 . Optional: Create the level 2 air terminal layout For additional practice of the techniques you have learned so far. You can safely skip this section if you have mastered the design process. remember to modify the airflow display arrows for air terminals that need 2-way and 3-way blow patterns. do the following for level 2: ■ Make 2 . After you place the supply air terminals. click on the Edit toolbar. 31 Place copies of this supply air terminal at the ceiling grid intersections as shown below. You can safely skip this section if you have mastered the design process. The next exercise starts with a completed drawing.Optional: Complete the level 1 supply air terminal layout For additional practice of the techniques you have learned so far. 32 Using the placement method that you learned for level 1.Ceiling Mech the active view. create the level 2 supply system.

and learned a method for precise placement. In this exercise. collapse the ceiling plan views in the Project Browser. you create schedules and use them as not only as documents but as design tools. specify the same view parameters as 1 . you create a schedule for the supply air system project. In this exercise. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. and to quickly and accurately make real-time system modifications across the entire Revit MEP project. Modify the airflow display arrows for air terminals that need 2-way and 3-way blow patterns. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click File menu ➤ Save. Specify 325 CFM airflow for the supply and return diffusers. you create the air systems. In the next exercise. Use the add-move-copy placement method to place the same type of air terminals on level 2 that you did on level 1. click the Training Files icon. you placed air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. and click Save. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. The schedule as a dynamic design tool is a very powerful method to monitor system requirements. ■ ■ After you finish the level 2 air terminal layout. and 250 CFM airflow for the exhaust diffusers. modified the air terminal parameters. 33 If you want to save your work. You will be using different views to design the systems. 34 In the Save As dialog. you can modify this information directly within a schedule making the schedule a design tool. The completed level 2 air terminal layout is as shown. navigate to the folder of your choice. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 108 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool Schedules allow you to document the mechanical system components and heating and cooling requirements. enter Air Terminals Training for File name. In the next exercise.Ceiling Mech but use Level 2 as an Underlay and verify that Associate Level (Level 2) is set for the view range parameters.■ In the Element Properties dialog. More importantly. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model.

5 Under Select available fields from. Verify that Formula is selected. 8 Select a field and click Move Up and Move Down to arrange the Scheduled fields list as follows: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Space: Number Space: Name Mark System Type Flow Space: Actual Supply Airflow Space: Calculated Supply Airflow If you need to remove a field. Define schedule type 2 In the New Schedule dialog.■ Open the i Air System Schedules. select the field and click Remove. ■ ■ Define columns 3 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. and click Add to add the Flow field to the list of scheduled fields to include in the schedule. and that Show categories from all disciplines is cleared. Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool | 109 . Click OK. select Space. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Actual Calculated Airflow for Name.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. 4 Add Mark and System Type. Select Air Flow for Type. 10 In the Calculated Value dialog. 1 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. select Flow. do the following: ■ Under Category. Select HVAC for Discipline. Create a calculated value parameter 9 Click Calculated Value. under Available fields. click Schedule/Quantities. 6 While pressing Ctrl. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. Notice that the content of the Available fields list changes to fields associated with spaces. Notice that the schedule name and the phase is automatically added. select the following fields from the Available fields list: ■ ■ ■ ■ Space: Actual Supply Airflow Space: Calculated Supply Airflow Space: Name Space: Number 7 Click Add to add them to the Scheduled fields list. select Air Terminals.

The red values in the Actual Calculated Airflow column immediately report that the actual amount of air being supplied to the room does not yet meet the design airflow requirements within the range of plus or minus 35 CFM. Click OK twice. This schedule is not only a construction document but also a design tool. you use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow for an air terminal to satisfy the design requirements. Notice that the conditions that you specified display under Conditions to Use. and Itemize every instance is selected. Click OK. equals. Select Not Between for Test. select System Type for Filter by. in the Fields list. Verify that Grand totals is cleared. This is because you are modifying the digital database of building information. Notice that the data is sorted according to room number. ■ ■ The Actual Calculated Airflow calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what rooms do not meet the design requirements as they are red in the schedule. Enter -35 CFM and 35 CFM for Value. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project.■ Use the button on the right to enter Space: Actual Supply Airflow . A new view opens called Air Terminal Schedule and is located under Schedules/Quantities in the Project Browser. and select Supply Air. The Actual Calculated Airflow calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list) and will display as a column in the schedule. Select Footer. select Actual Calculated Airflow. click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. Select Blank line. Verify that (none) is selected for Then by. On the Filter tab. Click the Background Color and select Red in the Color dialog. Organize the data 14 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog.Space: Calculated Supply Airflow for Formula. Format the calculated value parameter 12 On the Formatting tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Next. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Actual Calculated Airflow is selected for Field. and Count and totals. Verify that Ascending is selected. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). 13 In the Conditional Formatting dialog. Use the schedule as a design tool 15 With the Air Terminal Schedule view active. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Space: Number for Sort by. and click Conditional Format. 110 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . You can change one or more entries in the schedule to modify your system. 11 Click OK.

19 In the schedule. 18 Enter WT to tile the 2 views. and press Tab. the associated system component is immediately selected and modified in the project as if you used the Element Properties dialog. Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool | 111 . NOTE If a different project is also open. This allows you to use schedules to make multiple modifications in one view. 25 Modify the other supply air terminal Flow parameters for both floors so that the airflow design requirements are met. Tagging an Air Diffuser 21 Select Tag from the Mechanical tab on the Design bar. The Actual Calculated Airflow value displays in white indicating that it now complies with the Office 101 airflow design requirements. click Leader to clear this option. the selected air terminal displays in red. NOTE After you select and modify data in a schedule. 23 On the Options bar. and click File menu ➤ Close to close the project. 17 Enter ZR. under Views ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. rather than one by one in a drawing. 16 In the Project Browser. 24 Click on a diffuser to add a tag. Optional: Modifying Other Parameters The drawing for the next exercise provides completed values. speeds the design process. TIP Editing diffuser tags in schedules. 20 Delete 300 CFM enter 250. These changes dynamically propagate throughout your project because you are changing the digital database of building information. Notice that the Flow column parameters are the only parameters that you can define in the schedule. A cursor displays in the selected cell in the schedule enabling you to modify the parameter. double-click 1 Mech to make it the active view. click Window menu and select the project to make it the active view. and draw a zoom region around Office 101 located on the left outer wall of the floor plan.This closes all open windows that are hidden by the schedule. and if you click in the floor plan to make it active. 22 Select By Category. The schedule and the floor plan display simultaneously in the drawing area. The other parameters are design or calculated parameters. select the 300 CFM Flow parameter (in the Flow column) for the Office 101 air terminal.

click the Training Files icon. 3 In the Element Properties dialog.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. you are changing the air terminal connector size. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. Under Primary Range. enter an Offset value of 10 0. In the next exercise. click File menu ➤ Save. After you modify the airflow parameters. 27 If you want to save your work. enter Using Schedules Training for File name. you also use the System Browser to validate your systems.Mech to make it the active view. and maximize the 1 . During this exercise. After creating the logical connection. and double-click 1 . do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected for the view range parameters. This is the Revit MEP recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation. 2 Right-click in the drawing window. This occurred because you were modifying the digital database of building information that the project sources. However. You then used this schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow so that it meets the design requirements. 28 In the Save As dialog. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either to a system that you create or to a default system. you create air systems. IMPORTANT By modifying each supply air terminal airflow parameter. under Extents.Mech floor plan view. A system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including energy analysis. 112 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . you created a schedule to assess airflow for each room in the building. and click View Properties. You modified the airflow parameters directly in the schedule and all changes occurred dynamically and propagated throughout the project. click Edit for View Range. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. This is the power of BIM. and then create the logical connection between the system components. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. all Actual Calculated Airflow parameters display in white. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Unlike logical connections. for the Top parameter. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. navigate to the folder of your choice. Modify a floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. Air terminal connector sizes are used to calculate airflow but are also used to calculate ductwork sizing. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. and click Save. Open the i Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 In the View Range dialog.NOTE Do not modify the return or exhaust air terminals as these are not supply air terminals and do not affect the supply airflow. 26 Close the schedule view. they are necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical geometry such as sizing.

each default system category would not contain any system components and would be considered empty. then press F9. This assignment occurred because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. They remain in the default systems category until you assign them to their proper system. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Supply Air system category located in the Unassigned folder. click System Browser. 7 On the Annotation Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overides window. notice that all of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder.5 Click OK twice. The System Browser is a powerful tool that allows you to validate and confirm air systems.Mech view. and so on) to a system either by creating a logical connection (or system) between the system components or by assigning a system component to an existing system. IMPORTANT In the System Browser. air terminals. Different building professionals use different views during the course of the building project. and expand each default systems to view all of the air terminals that you placed in the building. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 113 . enter ZR. right-click the title and select View ➤ Systems. 10 Expand the Unassigned systems folder. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create your systems. after you placed the diffusers. 6 Type VG on the keyboard. uncheck Air Terminal tags. You assign a system component (mechanical equipment. and sketch a zoom region around Office 101 located in the top-left corner of the floor plan. You will learn more about systems in this exercise. You will create the level 1 supply air systems in the 1 . TIP You can also press F9 (Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. click in the drawing area to make it active. 9 If the System Browser title says Zones. As you assign diffusers to systems. So. The cursor changes to a magnifying glass when Zoom in Region is activated. the assigned diffusers move from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. and click OK. Place a VAV (variable air volume) box 11 With the view active. If the System Browser does not respond. Explore the System Browser 8 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. You use multiple views to clearly and effectively communicate different systems information. if all system components are assigned. For now. Thus.

enter 9 6 for Offset. system specific tools display on the Options Bar. click to place the VAV box. you can identify a room by placing the cursor over the room component. click (Select Equipment for System).Parallel Fan Powered : Size 3 . press Spacebar twice to rotate VAV box 180 degrees. click Mechanical Equipment. Next. Notice that the VAV box listing is placed in the Unassigned folder under the Default Supply Air system in the System Browser. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. You created a system that includes the air terminal. IMPORTANT After you select a system component. 14 Move the cursor to the right of the office door. Note that the VAV will detect the downstream airflow when connected to diffusers. Create a secondary air system containing one diffuser 17 Select the Office 101 rectangular diffuser. you can add room tags to the mechanical floor plans using the Room Tag tool on the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. select VAV Unit . click (Create Supply Air System). do the following: ■ Under Constraints. 114 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the room name and number. 19 On the Options Bar. and press Esc twice. you add the VAV to this system. If desired.8 inch Inlet. and click Element Properties. Modify VAV box parameters 15 Right-click the VAV box. 13 In the Type Selector.TIP Although this view does not contain room tags. 12 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. ■ The offset value places the VAV box in the plenum space (between the level 1 ceiling and the level 2 floor and above the level 1 air terminals). This VAV box services only Office 101 so the VAV airflow equals that of the air terminal. and select the VAV box. This is because you have yet to assign it to a system. Click OK. 18 On the Options Bar.

This display indicates that the new system is selected. Notice that the air terminal listing moved to the assigned system but the VAV box is also listed under Unassigned. This system tool displays along with the other Options Bar system tools. Next you create the ductwork to physically connect the air system components (air terminal and VAV). place the cursor over the Office 101 air terminal and press Tab. This is because you have yet to assign the VAV primary and return air connections to their systems. the air terminal (the child) with the system between (connecting) them. Create the ductwork 20 With the new system selected. They remain assign to their respective default systems. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 115 . and click Select to select the system. Default Supply Air and Default Return Air. click (Layout Path) on the Options Bar. and cleared from the Options Bar.Notice that only mechanical equipment highlight and can be selected when using the Select Equipment for System tool. select an air terminal that you added to the system. IMPORTANT The new system named Mechanical Supply Air 1 is now listed in the System Browser under Supply Air in the Mechanical folder. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the highlighted system clears. You can also right-click the Mechanical Supply Air 1 listing in the System Browser. It does not indicate a ductwork layout path. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. the VAV (the parent) to downstream. and select the system. The newly created system that logically connects the air terminal to the VAV box displays in red. The organization is from upstream.

select Main. NOTE Configuring the duct conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. select Branch. 25 Under System Type: Supply Air. Select Flex Duct Round : Flex . refer to Help. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Rectangular Duct: Radius Elbows / Taps is selected for Duct Type. 27 Under System Type: Supply Air. You can also configure these settings in the Mechanical Settings dialog by clicking Mechanical Settings on the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar (or Settings ➤ Mechanical Settings) before beginning your project. Enter 9' 6" for Offset. 23 On the Options Bar. 26 In the left pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog. You can also view possible layout path solutions by pressing the left and right arrow keys on your keyboard. 28 Click OK. 116 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . click Settings.Round for Flex Duct Type. For more information. Verify that 6' 0" is selected for Maximum Flex Duct Length. Notice that Solutions is selected. and select solution 2. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Rectangular Duct: Radius Elbows / Taps is selected for Duct Type. 29 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. 21 On the Options Bar. click Finish Layout. 24 In the left pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog. ■ Click (Next Solution). do the following: 22 ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. Enter 9' 6" for Offset.The Layout Path tab appears on the Design Bar providing various layout tools.

Check duct connectivity 31 Place the cursor over the VAV box and after it highlights. TIP You can easily change the duct geometry representation. and Medium or Fine detail level for 2-line. This is because the System Browser lists system components and systems. IMPORTANT Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. and press Tab twice. Note that the arrow over the duct is the diffuser airflow display arrow and not the supply airflow direction in the duct. For example. For example. NOTE All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. a transition connecting the elbow was automatically added. you can delete ductwork and the system remains. thus it is not part of the system. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 117 . The ductwork is a physical not a logical connection. Change the geometry display 30 On the View Control Bar located below the bottom left of the drawing area. select Medium for Detail Level. select Coarse detail level for single line. On the View Control Bar. as was the elbow itself. The duct geometry now displays in 2-line enabling you to better view the ductwork.The physical connection composed of ducts and fittings is created.

This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. Verify that Only is selected. IMPORTANT When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. Other sizing methods and values can also be used as well.08 inches of water column per 100 feet of ductwork. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing. and enter . Under Constraints. 118 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . Do not highlight or select the VAV box. under Sizing Method. click Sizing. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. 34 In the Duct Sizing dialog. You can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. fittings. and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. Size the duct 32 Place the cursor over the duct.08 in-wg/100ft. Click OK. and press Tab twice to highlight the duct and the air terminal. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then press Tab. If the entire network does not highlight. and equipment. and click to select them. 33 On the Options Bar. The first time you press Tab. Rerouting usually correct this issue. ■ The Office 101 low pressure secondary air system ductwork is sized using the Friction method at . do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Friction. then you know that a disconnection exists.The system components and ductwork highlight indicating that they are physically connected.

and sketch a zoom region around Offices 102 and 103 (the offices immediately below Office 101). You can also right-click the second VAV box listed. 40 Move the cursor to the right of the Office 102 door. 36 Click Cancel. select VAV Unit . click Mechanical Equipment. double-click the second VAV box listed. right-click and select Element Properties.8 inch Inlet. 41 In the left column of the System Browser. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct. in the Unassigned folder under Default Supply Air. 38 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar.Parallel Fan Powered: Size 3 . 39 In the Type Selector. Create a secondary air system containing 2 diffusers 37 Click in the drawing area. click to place the VAV box. and click Element Properties. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 119 . the required airflow for the space and the airflow assigned to the diffusers.IMPORTANT The Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. Note that the airflow is set to 250 CFM . and click Modify on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 35 With the VAV selected. press Spacebar twice to rotate VAV box 180 degrees. enter ZR.

You can verify this new system in the System Browser. a new system is immediately created. TIP You can verify the airflow for the air terminals by opening the Air Terminal Schedule that you created in a past exercise. enter 9' 6" for Offset. TIP To locate a system component in the System Browser. and click OK. 46 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. 42 In the Element Properties dialog. NOTE After you select a system component. You can also select the diffuser and click (Create Supply Air System) on the Options Bar. and number of elements in the active being edited. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. and click Create Supply Air System from the context menu. or select an air terminal and the airflow displays on the Options Bar. If not. right-click the component in the left column. under Constraints. click Add To System. right-click. NOTE Remember that after select Create Supply Air System from the context menu or click on the Options Bar. System components that were not selected for this system are grayed out.IMPORTANT Remember that all system components that you have not assigned to a system are placed in the Unassigned folder in the System Browser. Note that the correct view must be active to see the highlighted component. This system includes the selected system component(s). The component highlights in the drawing area. 47 Place the cursor over the Office 103 rectangular diffuser. 45 Click (Edit System). and click Select from the context menu. click Show from the context menu to open the appropriate window and zoom in on the selected system component. The Edit System tab appears on the Design Bar providing various system editing tools. The selected diffuser and its connector highlights. 120 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . 43 Select the Office 102 rectangular diffuser. 44 Place the cursor over the diffuser connector. the selected component and its connector(s) highlight. system equipment.

Notice that the cursor changes indicating that Select Equipment is active. The bottom diffuser is no longer grayed out as it is now part of the system. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 121 . On the Options Bar. 51 Place the cursor over the VAV box located outside Office 102. the number of elements has increased to 2. 50 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. 52 Select the VAV box. 49 Select the Office 103 rectangular diffuser. click (Select Equipment).48 Notice that the cursor changes to indicate that Add To System is active.

55 Click to select the system. a tooltip displays the system name as Duct Systems : Mechanical Supply Air 2. the selected VAV is listed for System Equipment. 54 Place your cursor over the Office 102 rectangular diffuser and press Tab to display the new system. 122 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air .On the Options Bar. click Finish. If you leave the mouse stationary. 53 On the Edit System toolbar. The system displays in red.

Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 123 . You already configured the duct conversion settings for the first system. verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. click Finish Layout. 58 Use the left or right arrow keys on your keyboard to view the various layout solutions. You can click in the drawing area to close the warning. These settings remain the same and do not need to be changed. 57 On the Options Bar. Ignore the warning reporting that no auto-route solution was found. click Layout Path. and select solution 3. The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green.Modify the layout path and create the ductwork 56 On the Options Bar. 59 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar.

select or modify a different layout solution using the Layout Path tool. 124 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . it is because the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. or modify the duct manually. This was the reason for the warning message. if a layout solution causes errors (not warnings) while attempting create duct. If a warning occurs. select Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard. So. 63 Move the cursor over the end of the main. and after the end point snap displays. 61 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. you are creating the physical duct and not altering the logical system. or click in the drawing area to close the warning and continue your work. You can either relocate the VAV box. Add an endcap 60 Zoom in on the open (left) end of the main duct in Office 102. 62 In the Type Selector.The ductwork physically connecting the system components is created. Remember to check duct connectivity after modifying ductwork. IMPORTANT When creating layouts. click Duct Fitting. Notice that the main is open and an endcap is needed to close the duct. you can review it and take action if necessary. NOTE It is highly recommended to zoom the view to accurately place an endcap. click to place the endcap.

68 On the Options Bar. and click to select them.08 in-wg/100ft. ■ Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 125 . Do not highlight or select the VAV box. and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Friction. click Sizing. right-click and select Element Properties. Click OK. Under Constraints. and press Tab twice to highlight the duct and the air terminals.Notice that the centerline snap displays to aid in fitting placement. 64 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool. 66 Click Cancel. Size the duct 67 Place the cursor over the duct. Notice the airflow value of 530 CFM. Verify that Only is selected. 65 With the VAV selected. under Sizing Method. 69 In the Duct Sizing dialog. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing. and enter .

and press Tab twice. The VAV box. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct. Check duct connectivity 70 Place the cursor over the VAV box and after it highlights.08 inches of water column per 100 feet of ductwork. and ductwork highlight indicating that they are physically connected. IMPORTANT Remember that the Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. air terminals. 126 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air .The low pressure secondary air system ductwork for Offices 102 and 103 is sized using the Friction method at .

76 Move the cursor to the left of the air terminals.Parallel Fan Powered: Size 3 . click Mechanical Equipment. click Zoom in Region from the context menu. this time you will add the component after the ductwork has been created. sketch a zoom region around the air terminals in Open 1 (the large open space). 74 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. Create and modify a secondary supply air system containing multiple diffusers 71 Right-click in the drawing area.Mech view. 75 In the Type Selector. 72 In the 1 . However.Next. and click to place the VAV box.8 inch Inlet. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 127 . you create a low pressure secondary air system in which you modify the layout path and add a new system component to it. select VAV Unit. 73 Use your mouse scroll wheel to adjust the view as shown below.

Do not select the air terminal in the upper-right corner. 80 While pressing CTRL. 128 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . and on the Options Bar. The selected diffusers highlight in red (shown here as circled). 79 In the Element Properties dialog.77 Click Modify on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 78 Select the VAV. under Constraints. and click OK. 81 On the Options Bar. click (Create Air Supply System). click (Element Properties). enter 9' 6" for Offset. select the 4 air terminals above and to the right of the VAV. You will add this later. The new supply air system displays in red. and click again to deselect the VAV.

Remember that this display indicates that the new system is selected. do the following: ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. place the cursor over one of the air terminals in the system. click to select the system. Click . and select solution 1. click Modify. The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. Modify the layout path and create the ductwork 84 With the system selected. Then. ■ 86 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. 85 On the Options Bar.The new system named Mechanical Supply Air 3 is now listed in the System Browser under Supply Air in the Mechanical folder. Next. and press TAB once to highlight the system. 82 On the Options Bar. and the red system display cleared. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 129 . It does not indicate a ductwork layout path. click Layout Path on the Options Bar. You have logically connected the air system components. The system displays in red and now includes the VAV. 83 Select the VAV to add it to the system. you create the ductwork to physically the system components. Notice that the selected diffusers are included in the system. click (Select Equipment for System).

88 Click the parallel drag control and drag the left section of the branch to the right until it snaps creating a straight path to the VAV. notice that drag controls display. 130 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . IMPORTANT Layout Path provides 2 drag controls enabling you to modify the layout.87 In the drawing area. 90 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Layout. select the left section of the branch. After you select the branch. 89 Repeat this procedure and move the connection to the upper right branch. The parallel control (horizontal and vertical arrows) move the layout horizontally and vertically. The end control points (dots) moves the layout ends in any direction. and then snap and move down the right section of the main to create a straight main to the VAV.

You can also verify the added diffuser by referring to the system in the System Browser. Add a diffuser to a system containing ductwork 91 Select the main duct. This number verifies the added diffuser. and so on) are logically connected by a system and ductwork is created. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 131 . the Number of Elements increased to 5. 92 On the Edit Systems tab of the Design Bar. The new system component is now part of the same system. click Add to System. TIP You can also add a system component (air terminal. 95 Place the cursor over the new diffuser and press TAB once to highlight the logical connection. The system components are now physically connected.The ductwork is created. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). 93 Select the upper-right diffuser to add it to the system. Remember that all duct and fittings are created automatically according to the duct conversion settings that you configured earlier. you need to manually modify the ductwork to physically connect the diffuser. 94 On the Edit Systems tab of the Design Bar. mechanical equipment. A change has occurred in the air system design. 96 Use the mouse scroll wheel and zoom in on the end of the ductwork. and you will need to add an air terminal to this system and connect it to the existing ductwork. click Finish. Next. Notice that on the Options Bar. Then. and (Edit) on the Options Bar. and so on) to a system by right-clicking the system component connector and selecting Add to System from the context menu. VAV. IMPORTANT After system components (air terminals. you can select the duct or component to display system controls on the Options Bar. select a system component that is already part of a system.

101 On the Options Bar. and working from the end of the main. right-click and select Delete to remove the unwanted duct work. you need to check that all the parts are connected. Now that the duct work is in place. 99 Zoom out the view. select the flex duct and the transition on the diffuser. 132 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . Click . The new ductwork is created. click Finish Layout. ■ 102 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. and select solution 1. and select an air terminal in the system to display the system tools on the Options Bar. 100 Click Layout Path on the Options Bar.97 While pressing CTRL. and press Tab twice. 98 With the duct work selected. do the following: ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. Check duct connectivity 103 Place the cursor over the VAV box and after it highlights.

under Sizing Method. Under Constraints. The selection displays in red. you may need to press TAB 2 or 3 times to check connectivity. ■ Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 133 . and click TAB twice to highlight the duct and diffusers but not the VAV. 106 In the Duct Sizing dialog. 105 On the Options Bar. click Sizing. and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. Size the duct 104 Place the cursor over the main duct. and enter .The system components and ductwork highlight indicating that they are physically connected. TIP Depending on your ductwork layout. Verify that Only is selected. and click to select them. Click OK.08 in-wg/100ft. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Friction.

So. Do not change the duct conversion settings. modify the layout. Select Calculated Size Only for Branch Sizing. select a different layout solution using the Layout Path tool.This low pressure secondary air system ductwork is sized using the Friction method at . you are creating and sizing the physical duct and not altering the logical system. Other sizing methods and values can also be used as well.08 in-wg/100ft and select Only. complete the level 1 system layout according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ VAV Unit . You may experience cases where you need to modify the duct manually such as a drag flex duct segment to connect it. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct. You should always check duct connectivity after modifying ductwork. double-click 1 . 134 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . Review the no auto-route solution warnings as some may be caused by disconnected diffusers due to proximity issues and others due to the need for endcap fittings. If you receive errors. Reposition and rotate if necessary. see the note below. if a layout solution or duct sizing causes errors or it seems incorrect. Use TAB to check duct connectivity after creating ductwork and after performing sizing.08 inches of water column per 100 feet of ductwork. Remember to zoom the view for accurate placement. IMPORTANT Remember that the Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. Optional: Complete the level 1 secondary supply air systems (See the next exercise for a completed drawing. or reinsert duct fittings. ■ ■ ■ ■ IMPORTANT Remember that when creating layouts and sizing duct. Verify that all Other options are cleared. You can either relocate the VAV box.Mech floor plan to make it the active view. If you receive errors. under Mechanical. Next.) 107 In the Project Browser. 108 Using the systems creation methods that you learned. see the note below. modify the duct manually. Size the duct using the Friction sizing method at 0. or the duct or duct fittings are not connected properly.8 inch Inlet with a 9' 6" offset. an offset elevation is incorrectly specified. Select and modify a Network layout path solution. Add Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard fittings where needed. it is because either the duct usually has insufficient space.Parallel Fan Powered: Size 3 . you complete the low pressure secondary supply air systems for level 1.

Do not change the duct conversion settings.Mech mechanical floor plan view. Verify that Associate Level (Level 2) is selected for all View Range parameters. Select Calculated Size Only for Branch Sizing. Next. Select and modify a Network layout path solution. specify the air terminal airflow.08 in-wg/100ft and select Only. you create the low pressure secondary supply air systems for level 2. If multiple air terminals are connected to a system. Optional: Create the level 2 secondary supply air systems 109 Use the 2 . Add Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard fittings where needed. 110 On the Annotations tab of the Visibility Graphics window. turn off Air Terminal tags. Reposition and rotate if necessary.8 inch Inlet with a 9' 6" offset. If you receive errors. specify the total air terminal airflow for VAV airflow. Remember to zoom the view for accurate placement. Note that created ductwork may vary slightly from the illustration. 111 Using the systems creation methods that you learned for level 1. If you receive errors. Review the no auto-route solution warnings as some may be caused by disconnected diffusers due to proximity issues and others due to the need for endcap fittings. see the note above. You may experience cases where you need to modify the duct manually such as a drag flex duct segment to connect it. Use TAB to check duct connectivity after creating ductwork and after performing sizing. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 135 . Size the duct using the Friction method at 0. set the Primary Range Top Offset to 10' 0" and the Detail Level to Medium. see the note above. For VAV airflow.Parallel Fan Powered: Size 3 . create the level 2 system and duct layout according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ VAV Unit .The completed level 1 secondary supply air systems are shown below. Verify that all Other options are cleared.

In this exercise. Again note that the created ductwork may vary slightly from the illustration. you use 2 different types of views to validate the duct geometry of the secondary supply air systems that you created. 112 If you want to save your work. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You used the Create Supply Air Systems tool to logically connect the air terminals to the VAV boxes. 113 In the Save As dialog. click File menu ➤ Save. You also specified VAV airflow. You also modified a system by adding an air terminal to an existing system. 136 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . sized the ductwork. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Open the i Using Views for Duct Validation. navigate to the folder of your choice.The completed level 2 secondary supply air systems are shown below. 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click 1 . you used the Layout Path tool to create and modify duct layouts to physically connect the system components. enter Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems Training for File name. it is recommended to validate the duct geometry to confirm that the geometry corresponds to your design intent. you create 2 different views to validate the ductwork geometry. and validated the systems in the System Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. and click Save.Mech to make it the active view. Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry In this exercise. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. After creating each system. click the Training Files icon.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. checked duct connectivity. Although you already checked duct connectivity. In the next exercise.

5 Place the cursor just above the Office 101 air terminal and click to set the start point for the section. Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry | 137 . 9 Using the shape handles (triangles) on the far right. right-click Section 1. Adding a section view is a 2-click process. 8 In the drawing area. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. and the second click specifies the section tail. This zooms the view to fit the drawing area. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 6 In the Project Browser. and sketch a zoom region around Offices 101 103. TIP Although room tags were not copied when you created this view. The first click specifies the section head. expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections (Building Section). you can identify a room by placing the cursor over the room component. After you add the section. enter ZR. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the room name and number. click Section. 3 Place the cursor in the drawing area. and click Zoom to Fit.Create and use a section view to validate duct geometry 2 Right-click in the empty space of the drawing area. The selected section displays in red. select HVAC for Sub Discipline. under Graphics. move the cursor down and click just below the Office 103 air terminal to set the end point. click the section. you can flip the view direction or modify the extents of the view. and click Properties. The section relocates under HVAC. drag the clip planes of the view so that you capture only the systems that you created and set the depth just past the VAV boxes as shown. A new section view named Section 1 is created and located in the Project Browser under ???. and click OK.

12 On the View Control Bar. 138 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . The section head displays in blue. 10 On the Design Bar. and verify that the geometry and location of the duct that you created is as you expect it to be. and Shading with Edges for Model Graphics Style. The system geometry displays with shading and outlined edges. similar to the level heads in the elevation view. click Modify.You many need to zoom out to view the shape handles. 13 Use the mouse scroll wheel and zoom in on the bottom-right duct servicing offices 102 and 103. select Medium for Detail Level. All section heads are linked directly to their corresponding section view. 11 Double-click the section head to open the Section 1 view.

17 In the Project Browser. Notice that in the 3D view. Modify and use a 3D view to validate duct geometry 16 On the Design Bar. all of the mechanical elements display as shaded with edges but all architectural elements displays as halftone underlays that highlight when you move the cursor over them. Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry | 139 . select Shading with Edges for Model Graphics Style. You will create a number of sections to both inspect and modify the duct layouts that you create. and click OK.14 Continue to validate the duct geometry of the other secondary supply air systems in the Section view. They offer easy and immediate accessibility to all floors. and click View Properties. and double-click {3D} to make it the active view. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. select Section Box. 19 Right-click in the drawing area. 15 Sections are extremely useful in visualizing the detailed connections between ductwork and equipment in a vertical space. click Modify. A section box displays around the building model. 18 On the View Control Bar. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views. under Extents. This allows you to quickly and easily target your mechanical systems without the architecture obstructing the mechanical design.

140 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air .NOTE A section box allows you to limit the view so that you can target only the geometry that you want to view. TIP Release the drag handle at certain points to see a preview of the section at the current crop boundary position. 23 Click in the drawing area to deactivate the crop boundary. click File menu ➤ Save. 21 In the drawing area. 102. 22 Zoom in on the view and slowly drag the top center drag handle down to adjust the crop boundary until the plenum space for the level 1 ceiling is exposed. and 103 duct geometry is as you expected. You will use both section and 3D views during your systems designing. 3D views allow you to validate geometry of multiple duct runs in a three dimensional space by using the zoom and spin controls. It is especially helpful in 3D views in which the three dimensional space makes it difficult to view some geometry. 26 If you want to save your work. 24 Use the ViewCube in the upper right corner of the drawing area to rotate the image so that you can verify that the Office 101. click the section box and locate the top center drag handle. 25 Zoom in on each air system to verify that the geometry and location of the systems that you created are as you expect them to be.

rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. enter Using Views for Duct Validation Training for File name. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. do the following. Draw the primary duct 1 In the Project Browser. In this exercise you created a section view and used a 3D view to validate the secondary supply air system duct geometry. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Type Selector. you draw the high pressure primary supply air ductwork and connect the primary to the VAV boxes. Unlike the previous exercise in which you created the systems first and then selected from a series of duct layouts. and click Save. Open the i Drawing Primary Supply Air Duct. You will create the primary systems in a later exercise. you draw the primary supply air system ductwork. and sketch a zoom region around Mechanical/Electrical room. 2 Enter ZR. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct In this exercise. Enter 9' 6" for Offset. select Round Duct : Taps. you manually draw the primary duct and connect to the VAVs. ■ ■ ■ Verify that 12" is selected for diameter (D:).27 In the Save As dialog.Mech to make it the active view. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 141 . 6 Place the cursor in the Mechanical/Electrical room in the approximate location shown. This exercise allows you to become familiar with manually drawing and modifying ductwork which is very important for resolving duct layout errors caused by insufficient space. click Duct. click the Training Files icon. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. In the next exercise. and double-click 1 . navigate to the folder of your choice. 5 On the Options Bar. and click to specify the start point. Verify that Auto Connect is selected.

142 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air .7 Draw duct as shown in the following image. and click Draw Duct. After placing the duct. and sketch a zoom region around the VAV box outside of Office 101. Connect the VAV boxes to the primary duct 8 Enter ZR. you can select individual segments and use the arrow keys to adjust location. 9 Click on the VAV. right-click on the air connection.

you pressed Spacebar before you began drawing duct. press the Spacebar after you specify your start point and move the cursor to begin drawing duct. 10 Move the cursor to the right to begin drawing duct. TIP When drawing duct. use the connector snap to quickly and accurately locate a connector. 12 Move the cursor down and draw an approximate 8' 0" vertical second duct segment. You should always verify the duct type in the Type Selector. a tooltip appears confirming the connector. and click to specify the end point. When drawing duct.NOTE You must place the cursor over the connector to connect to the VAV primary. Note that the Spacebar does not automatically specify the duct type. This automatically specifies the duct diameter or width and height. and offset parameter to match that of the selected start point object. You can also change the duct diameter from the Options Bar. If a warning appears informing you that the line is too short. and click or press Enter to specify the end point. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 143 . If you pause briefly. 11 Draw the first duct segment 2' 0" to the right. and press Spacebar to automatically change the duct diameter and offset to match the 8" VAV primary connector diameter.

14 With the Draw tool open. 144 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . the duct run connecting the Office 101 VAV to the primary is complete. the centerline snap makes the process quick and easy. After you click to specify the end point. TIP When connecting duct to the centerline of another duct.13 Move the cursor to the right and over the primary duct. zoom in on the VAV box outside of Office 102. and click after the centerline snap displays to specify the end point for the third duct segment.

Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 145 . You can also specify the Detail Level to Coarse for viewing a single line display 15 Place the cursor over the Office 102 VAV box supply air connection. click to specify the start point. This allows you to continue to use the 2-line display. zoom the view to the right of the primary. you may experience performance issues depending on the size and complexity of the system geometry. and after the connector snap displays. On the View Control Bar. 16 Draw the duct to the right and connect it to the centerline of the primary. Check connectivity 19 Place the cursor over the primary duct and press Tab twice to check connectivity up to but not including the VAV boxes. change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe to improve performance. and connect the 2 VAVs in Open 1 to the primary duct as shown. 18 Using the draw duct methods that you learned.TIP When zooming or reorienting a view that uses Medium or Fine for Detail Level. 17 Connect the other three VAVs to the primary duct as shown.

Finally. Check connectivity. 20 Validate the primary duct geometry using the Section 1 and 3D views. 146 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . The main has a 12" diameter and the connections to the VAV boxes have a diameter of 8". This is usually caused by insufficient space preventing duct creation or fitting insertion. remember to always check connectivity and validate the duct geometry.) 21 In the Project Browser. but you have not logically connected the VAVs with a system. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. You will create a system for the primary and add the VAVs to it in a later exercise. and double-click 1-Mech to make it the active view. ■ ■ IMPORTANT Remember that when drawing duct.You can press TAB 3 times to check connectivity including the VAVs and secondary system ductwork. Optional: Complete the level 1 primary duct (See next exercise for a completed drawing. and use the Section 1 and 3D views for duct geometry validation. you will do that in a later exercise. IMPORTANT Notice that the VAV boxes are still listed in the Unassigned folder under Default Supply Air because you physically connected the VAVs to the primary duct. you may encounter errors when connecting to the primary duct or a VAV. Do not size the primary. Modify the duct length or relocate the VAV box to make sufficient space. specify a 9' 6" offset. and Angle is cleared. complete the level 1 primary duct according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ Draw the primary duct using Round Duct : Taps. NOTE Do not size the primary at this time. On the Options Bar. and verify that Auto Connect is selected. You will size the primary in a later exercise. 22 Using the duct drawing methods that you learned. Use approximate duct segment lengths from the layout below. and use the Draw Duct tool to reconnect.

You will size the primary in a later exercise. specify a 9' 6" offset. ■ ■ Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 147 . and Angle is cleared. Use approximate duct segment lengths from the layout below. The main has a 12" diameter and the connections to the VAV boxes have a diameter of 8". Check connectivity. and double-click 2 . Do not size the primary. On the Options Bar. Optional: Draw the level 2 primary duct 23 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. 24 Using the duct drawing methods that you learned.The completed level 1 air system layout is shown below. and verify that Auto Connect is selected. complete the level 2 primary duct according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ Draw the primary duct using Round Duct : Taps.Mech to make it the active view. and use the Section 1 and 3D views for duct geometry validation.

However. Before sizing the primary. you checked duct connectivity and validated duct geometry using different views. Finally. you resolve routing conflicts with the primary duct.The completed level 2 air system layout is shown below. Open the i Duct Sizing . Considering that both ends of the primary are open.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. enter Drawing Primary Supply Air Duct Training for File name. 148 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . you size the primary to meet airflow requirements using the same sizing tool that you previously used to size the low pressure secondary supply air ductwork. 25 If you want to save your work. you use the Velocity sizing method rather than the Friction method. click File menu ➤ Save. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click the Training Files icon. In the next exercise. While drawing duct. you place an endcap where no further connections are planned. 26 In the Save As dialog. but you have yet to size the primary. In this exercise. you created the high pressure primary duct that supplies air to the VAV boxes. In this exercise. Sizing the Primary Duct:Velocity Method In a previous exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you must first determine the direction of the airflow in the primary duct. navigate to the folder of your choice. and click Save.Velocity. you learned how to use connectors to create ductwork. The airflow direction inside the primary must be determined to accurately size the primary duct run. This determines the airflow direction. You will connect the primary duct to AC units in a later exercise. you used the Duct tool to manually draw the high pressure primary supply air duct and physically connect the VAV boxes to the primary duct.

and after the end point snap displays. 4 In the Type Selector.Place an endcap on the level 1 primary to determine airflow 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Move the cursor over the end of the left primary duct run. click Duct Fitting. This determines the airflow direction and the duct will size accurately. 3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. Notice that the centerline snap displays to aid in fitting placement. 7 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. The upper end of the primary duct run will connect to a rooftop AC unit. 6 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool.Mech to make it the active view. NOTE It is highly recommended to zoom the view to accurately place the endcap. select Round Duct Endcap : Standard. 2 Zoom in on the lower end of the left primary located near the wall between Offices 117 and 116. NOTE If the Mechanical tab is not available on the Design Bar. IMPORTANT When sizing duct that has multiple open ends. and double-click 1 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. right-click the Design Bar. you must place endcaps to close all open ends except the one that connects to the air source. click to place the endcap. and click Mechanical. Sizing the Primary Duct:Velocity Method | 149 .

and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. ■ 150 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct. and enter 2500 FPM. 9 On the Options Bar. and click to select it. Under Constraints. Verify that Only is selected. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Velocity. Click OK.Size the level 1 primary duct 8 Place the cursor on the left primary duct run and press Tab twice to highlight the entire run including the VAV connections but not the VAV boxes. 10 In the Duct Sizing dialog. IMPORTANT Remember that the Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. under Sizing Method. The selected primary displays in red. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing. click Sizing.

modify the layout. Sizing the Primary Duct:Velocity Method | 151 . or reinsert duct fittings. 12 Zoom in on the lower end of the right primary duct run located outside Office 117. if a layout solution or duct sizing causes errors or it seems incorrect. and press TAB twice. Next. You should always check duct connectivity after modifying ductwork. The primary and the connections to the VAVs highlight indicating that they are physically connected.The sized left primary is shown below. or duct or duct fittings are not connected properly. modify the duct manually. select a different layout solution using the Layout Path tool. You can either relocate the VAV box. 11 Place the cursor over each left side of the primary duct run. IMPORTANT Remember that when creating layouts and sizing duct. you are creating and sizing the physical duct and not altering the logical system. it is because either the duct usually has insufficient space. So. you place an endcap on the right side of the primary in order size the duct.

and double-click 2 . 17 Size both the left and right sides of the primary duct run using the same sizing method and parameters that you used for the level 1 primary duct run. check the connectivity of the right side of the primary duct run. 152 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air .Mech to make it the active view. the upper ends of the primary duct run will connect to a rooftop AC unit. 18 Check connectivity for both sides of the primary duct. and size this primary using the same sizing method and parameters that you used for the left primary. The sized right primary is shown below. As in level 1.) 15 In the Project Browser. 14 Using the method you have learned. Optional: Size the level 2 primary duct run (See the next exercise for a completed dawing. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. place a round duct endcap at the lower end of the right primary duct run. 16 Using the process that you learned for the level 1 primary duct run.13 Using the process that you just learned. place a round duct endcap on the lower end of the left and right side of the primary duct run to determine airflow direction.

Then.Mech is created and becomes the active view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. click the Training Files icon. 19 If you want to save your work. This makes it much easier to determine whether the plan meets your requirements. This determined the airflow direction inside the primary. In this exercise. 2 In the Project Browser. you assign a color scheme to the ductwork in your project. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. enter 1 . A new floor plan view called Copy of 1 .rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. enter Duct Sizing . Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 20 In the Save As dialog. Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct In this exercise. duct color scheme can help you communicate your design immediately and effectively.Velocity Training for File name. Open the i Duct Color Scheme. you used the Duct Sizing tool to size the primary using the Velocity sizing method. In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click 1 . and click Save.The completed level 2 primary duct run is shown below. you placed an endcap at the end of each side of the primary duct run where no connection was planned. 3 In the Rename View dialog.Mech. and click Rename.Mech Duct Classes for Name. Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct | 153 . right-click Copy of 1 .Mech. navigate to the folder of your choice. you assign a color fill to the ductwork. Create a new view 1 In the Project Browser. First. Like room color scheme. In the next exercise. you sized the primary duct for the building. This procedure is similar to the one that you used for rooms in a previous exercise. and click OK. click File menu ➤ Save.

Apply the color scheme 4 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Duct Color Scheme Legend. NOTE If the Mechanical tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and click Mechanical. 5 In the Type Selector, verify that Color Scheme Legend : 1 is selected for color scheme legend type. 6 Move the cursor in the drawing area and notice that an outline of the color scheme legend indicates that no color scheme has been assigned to the view displays. 7 Position the color scheme legend outline at the top-right corner of the floor plan, and click to place the legend. The color scheme outline follows the cursor movement to help you accurately position the legend. 8 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog, verify that Duct Color Fill - Flow is selected for Color Scheme, and click OK.

Next, you change the color scheme. NOTE Elevations have been hidden for legend clarity. Edit the color scheme 9 In the Drawing area, select the duct color scheme legend that you placed, and on the Options Bar, click Edit Color Scheme. 10 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Select Velocity for Color, and click OK after a warning indicates that colors are not preserved. Select By range. In the At Least column, click in the second row, and enter 2000 FPM. In the Caption column, delete the existing text, and enter low velocity for the first row, and enter high velocity for the second row. In the Color column, click in the first row and select Green from the Basic colors in the Color box. In the Color column, click in the second row and select Red from the Basic colors in the Color box.

154 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

TIP Color names are displayed under Name in the Color box.

Click OK.

The duct color scheme legend now identifies the duct by velocity. Notice that duct fittings do not have color scheme applied to them.

Assign color scheme to the level 2 duct 11 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, right-click 2 - Mech, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. A new floor plan view called Copy of 2 - Mech is created and becomes the active view. 12 In the Project Browser, right-click Copy of 2 - Mech, and click Rename. 13 In the Rename View dialog, enter 2 - Mech Duct Classes for Name, and click OK. 14 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Duct Color Scheme Legend. 15 In the Type Selector, verify that Color Scheme Legend : 1 is selected for color scheme legend type. 16 Position the color scheme legend outline at the top-right corner of the floor plan, and click to place the legend. 17 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog, verify that Duct Color Fill - Flow is selected for Color Scheme, and click OK. The same velocity-based color scheme that you created for level 1 is automatically applied to the level 2 duct. Using the same color scheme allows you to quickly assign consistent color throughout your design. The completed level 2 duct color scheme legend is shown below.

Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct | 155

18 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 19 In the Save As dialog, enter Duct Color Fill Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you added duct color scheme legends to both levels of ductwork in your project. You edited the color scheme by associating colors to velocity parameters and changed the caption text. In the next exercise, you size one of the secondary supply air system duct runs using the Equal Friction sizing method.

Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method
In 2 previous exercises, you sized the secondary air system ductwork using the Friction sizing method and then you sized the primary duct run using the Velocity method. In this exercise, you size the duct for one of the secondary air systems that you previously sized. This allows you to more closely meet airflow requirements for that system. First, you split the duct main into multiple pieces, and then you size the duct run using the Equal Friction method. Finally, you tag the main duct of the secondary air system to annotate the duct segment sizes. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Duct Sizing - Equal Friction.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder.

Locate the secondary air system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 1 - Mech to make it the active view. 2 In the System Browser, expand the Mechanical systems folder. TIP If the System Browser is closed, press F9 (or Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close it. If the System Browser does not respond, click in the drawing area to make it active, then press F9. All mechanical systems that have been created for the project are organized by system type in the Mechanical folder. Remember that only systems (logical connections) and the assigned system components are in the System Browser, not ductwork (physical connections).

156 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

3 Right-click Supply Air, and click Expand All. Every supply air system that you created is listed. Notice that each system listing consists of a system name and number, such as Mechanical Supply Air 6, and a hierarchy of system components that you assigned to each system, such as a VAV box and diffusers. 4 Right-click Mechanical Supply Air 3, and click Show. The 1 - Mech view automatically zooms on the selected system, and the system including the assigned components and the ductwork displays in red. 5 In the Show Element(s) In View dialog, click Close to deactivate the Show tool. Notice that the main duct connecting the VAV box to the diffusers is one size.

You need to reduce the size of the main to ensure that the air pressure meets airflow requirements. To accomplish this reduction, you split the main into multiple duct segments and then size each segment. Split the main

6 On the Tools toolbar, click

(Split).

7 Move the cursor along the top edge of the main and to the right of the 2 middle diffusers. 8 Watch the listening dimensions, and split the main about 11' 0" from the end of the main.

TIP When splitting duct in 2-line display, move the cursor along the top or bottom edge of the duct to view the split line and the listening dimensions. 9 With the Split tool open, split the main to the right of the second branch as shown.

Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method | 157

10 Press Esc twice to deactivate the Split tool. Notice that a Rectangular Duct Union fitting is automatically inserted to connect the duct at each split. You can place the cursor over the union and both a tooltip and the Status Bar confirm the fitting. Size the system 11 Move the cursor over the main, and press Tab twice to highlight the ductwork and air terminals located downstream from the VAV box, and click to select them. Note that the VAV box is not selected.

12 On the Options Bar, click Sizing. 13 In the Duct Sizing dialog, under Sizing Method, do the following:
■ ■

Select Equal Friction, and enter 0.08 in-wg/100ft. Under Constraints, verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing, and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. Click OK.

IMPORTANT Equal Friction sizing is an iterative process. The completion time varies according to the speed of your computer. NOTE If a Warning dialog opens alerting you that there is no loss defined, ignore this warning. You can click anywhere in the drawing area to close it.

158 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

The low pressure secondary air system ductwork is sized using the Equal Friction method at .08 inches of water column per 100 feet of ductwork.

Notice that as the airflow decreases, transitions are automatically added to reduce duct size and maintain air pressure. Next, you tag the main to annotate the duct segment sizes. Tag the main 14 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Tag ➤ By Category. 15 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader. Click Tags.

16 In the Tags dialog, under Category, for Ducts, verify that Duct Size Tag is loaded, and click Cancel. 17 Move the cursor over the 3 segments of the main, and notice that the tag outline dynamically displays the size of each segment. 18 Position the tag outline in the center of each segment, and click to place each tag. TIP To reposition a tag, select the tag and drag it to a new location. You may want to zoom the view for accurate placement.

19 Click Modify on the Mechanical tab to deactivate the Tag tool. The low pressure secondary air system duct run is sized and tagged. 20 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 21 In the Save As dialog, enter Duct Sizing - Equal Friction Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you sized low pressure secondary air system ductwork to more closely meet airflow requirements. First, you used the Split tool to split the main into multiple segments, and then you sized the duct run using the Equal Friction sizing method. Finally, you tagged the main to annotate the duct segment

Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method | 159

sizes. In the next exercise, you use the System Inspector to check flow and pressure in the secondary air system that you just sized.

Inspecting Air Systems
In this exercise, you use the System Inspector to inspect the low pressure secondary air systems. The System Inspector is a unique tool enabling you to inspect each system for airflow, pressure, and pressure loss by placing the cursor over it. Using this tool, you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Inspecting Air Systems.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 2 - Mech to make it the active view. 2 Right-click in the view, click Zoom in Region from the context menu. 3 Draw a zoom region around the lower-right secondary air system in Open 2.

You will inspect this system. 4 Select the VAV box that you assigned to the secondary air system. IMPORTANT To select a system, select any duct segment, duct fitting, diffuser, or mechanical equipment that you have assigned to a system. System tools display on the Options Bar.

5 On the Options Bar, select

(Inspect).

The System Inspector tab opens providing system inspection tools on the Design Bar. RELATED If you select a system component that has been assigned to more than one system such as an AC unit or a VAV box and click , the Select System dialog opens enabling you to select a system to inspect. Each selected system highlights in red enabling you to preview it.

160 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

6 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar, click Inspect. NOTE You can also use System Inspector from in the System Browser. Right-click a system from the System Browser, and click Inspect from the context menu. After the System Inspector opens, click Inspect from the System Inspector tab on the Design Bar. 7 Place the cursor over the upper-left flex duct branch of the secondary air system to highlight it. An inspection flag dynamically reports the airflow, pressure, and pressure loss in the highlighted duct segment. Arrows display on the duct indicating the airflow direction for both the main and the branches in the air system. A tooltip also displays the system information.

IMPORTANT As you inspect a system, remember that all information is color coded according to pressure. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction, also known as the critical path. Notice that the secondary air system and the assigned system components highlight and can be selected, but you cannot select other secondary air systems or the primary duct run. These are not logically connected to this system. Next, you inspect 2 areas of the air system to compare information. Compare system information 8 With the cursor over the upper-left duct segment, click to temporarily place the inspection flag on the segment. 9 Place the cursor over the middle duct segment to compare the airflow and pressure information with that of the upper-left duct segment.

Inspecting Air Systems | 161

10 Click to place the current inspection flag and close the prior one. 11 Move the cursor over the upper-right air terminal to compare its information with that of the middle duct segment. You can continue to use this method to compare inspection information for system components or duct across the selected system. 12 Click a blank space in the view to close the current inspection flag. 13 Continue to inspect the remaining secondary air systems in the building. TIP You can also inspect systems in a 3D view. 14 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Inspector to deactivate the System Inspector. 15 Use the System Inspector to inspect other secondary air systems in the project. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork, the selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). For example, you cannot inspect the primary high pressure duct run because you have not created a system for it. The primary is physically but not logically connected. In a later exercise, you will create a system for the primary and then you can inspect the primary duct run. 16 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 17 In the Save As dialog, enter Inspecting Air Systems Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you used the System Inspector to inspect the airflow direction, airflow, and pressure information for various systems in the project. You learned that airflow and pressure information is specific to the selected system component, and that all system information is color-coded for either the duct main or the branch. You also compared system information across a system. In the next exercise, you place 2 AC units.

Placing Air Conditioning Units
In this exercise, you place 2 air conditioning roof top units (RTU) on the building. You also use create and use new views to precisely locate the AC units.

162 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Placing AC Units.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder.

Create a new roof plan view 1 Click the View menu ➤ New ➤ Floor Plan. 2 Select Roof and click OK. 3 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Roof. 4 Right-click Roof, and click Rename. 5 Enter Roof Mech for Name, and click OK. 6 Click Yes to rename corresponding views. Ignore the warning about the name changing. 7 Right-click in the drawing area of the new view, and click View Properties. 8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select Mechanical for Discipline, and HVAC for Sub-Discipline. 9 Under Extents, click Edit for View Range and select Level 2 for View Depth: Level. Click OK twice. 10 Change the Graphics Style to Wireframe. 11 Set the Detail Level to Medium. This action specifies halftone for all architectural elements in the Roof Mech view. Notice that the level 2 system components and ductwork display as an underlay. Also notice that the Roof Mech view is now located under the Mechanical HVAC floor plans in the Project Browser.

Add the AC Unit that services level 2 12 In the Roof Mechanical view, enter ZR, and sketch a zoom region around Men’s Room (located below the Mechanical/Electrical room). You need to place the AC unit that services level 2 on the roof above the Men’s Room. 13 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Mechanical Equipment. 14 In the Type Selector, select Rooftop AC Unit 15 - 25 Ton - Bottom Return Connection : 15 Ton.

Placing Air Conditioning Units | 163

15 Move the cursor over the Men’s Room, and press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the unit. The AC unit supply connection is now located at the top. 16 Place the unit in the approximate location shown below.

17 Click to place the AC unit, and then click Modify on the Design Bar.

Next, you create a section view to precisely relocate the AC unit. Create a new section view 18 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Section. 20 Place the cursor below the AC unit and over the Office 203 VAV box, and click to specify the section start point.

21 Move the cursor to the right, and after the cursor is past the AC unit, click to specify the section end point.

164 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

A new section view named Section 2 is created and located in the Project Browser under ???. 22 In the Project Browser, expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections (Building Section), right-click Section 2, and click Properties. 23 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select HVAC for Sub Discipline, and click OK. The section relocates under HVAC ➤ Sections (Building Section). 24 Select the section tail to display the drag handles. 25 Drag the top shape handle to adjust the depth view clip plane just past the AC unit. You may need to scroll the view up to access the top shape handle.

The section should partially capture the VAV on the left. 26 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Relocate the AC unit to the roof surface 27 Double-click the section head to open the Section 2 view. 28 On the View Control Bar, click Medium for Detail Level. This changes the duct display from single line to 2-line. You may need to adjust the top border to see all of the AC unit.

Placing Air Conditioning Units | 165

29 Zoom in on the AC unit and watch the level indicators, notice that the unit is located on the roof level and not on the roof surface.

NOTE As with air terminals and VAV boxes, AC units are level-based components. Notice that the roof level is not referencing the roof surface but the underside of the roof. To place the AC unit on the roof surface, you must relocate it.

30 Select the AC unit, and click

(Move) on the Edit toolbar.

31 Move the cursor over the bottom-left corner of the AC unit, and after the end point snap displays, click to specify the move start point.

32 Move the cursor up along the left edge of the AC unit, and after the intersection and centerline snaps display at the roof surface, (1' 0" directly above the start point), click to specify the move end point.

166 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

This specifies the AC unit offset level of 1' 0" which moves the AC unit to the roof surface.

TIP You can also specify the offset level in the Element Properties dialog. Place the level 1 AC unit 33 Using the methods that you learned, place an AC unit for the level 1 supply air system according to the following specifications and procedures (see the next exercise for approximate locations):

Work in the Roof Mech view, and place a Rooftop AC Unit 15 - 25 Ton - Bottom Return Connection : 15 Ton above the Mechanical/Electrical room. First rotate the unit so that the return connection is at the top. TIP You can copy the first AC unit you placed. Copying eliminates the elevation adjustment. Note that you must locate this AC unit above the Mechanical/Electrical room to allow the supply and return air duct riser to pass through the level 2 Mechanical/Electrical room and into the level 1 plenum space below.

The 2 AC units and the section headers are as shown.

34 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 35 In the Save As dialog, enter Placing AC Units Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you added 2 rooftop AC units to the design. You created 2 section views and used the Move and the Align tools to relocate the AC units to the roof surface. In the next exercise, you connect the AC units to the high pressure primary supply air ductwork.

Placing Air Conditioning Units | 167

Completing the Supply Air Systems
In this exercise, you complete the supply air systems that you began in previous exercises. First, you draw the duct to physically connect AC units to the high pressure primary supply air ductwork. Then, you create the systems to logically connect the VAV boxes to the AC units. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Completing Supply Air Systems.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder.

Modify the 3D view 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views, and double-click {3D} to make the view active. 2 Select the section box, and drag the center drag handle up to move the crop boundary past the roof.

The entire building including the AC units display.

If you like, you can drag the bottom set of drag handles up above the level 1 system to hide that system. Remember that, if you do this, you will need to reset this boundary to validate the level 1 supply air system later. 3 Use the ViewCube in the upper right corner of the drawing area to rotate the image so that it displays as shown below.

168 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

Next, you tile the Roof Mech and the 3D views so that you can work on and validate your system design simultaneously. Tile the views 4 With the 3D view active, click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. This closes all windows that you previously opened during the current design session. Note that if this option is unavailable, the active view is the only open window. 5 In the Project Browser, under Mechanical, double-click Roof Mech to make it the active view. 6 Enter WT to tile both windows. TIP When tiling 2 views, the active view is tiled to the left. 7 Zoom the view in both windows as shown.

You are ready to create the duct riser for the level 2 supply air system. Draw the supply duct riser from the AC Unit to the level 2 plenum space 8 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Duct. 9 In the Type Selector, select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps. 10 In the Roof Mech view, place the cursor over the center of the level 2 AC unit (lower unit) supply duct connection, the connector snap displays.

Completing the Supply Air Systems | 169

11 Click to specify the duct riser start point. 12 On the Options Bar, do the following:

Enter 68" for W: (width), and 20" for H: (height). This specifies the proper dimensions for the duct. Verify that Auto Connect is selected. Enter -2 6 for Offset, and press Tab.

■ ■

The -2' 6" offset creates the supply duct riser from the Roof reference level down into the level 2 plenum space and places the riser at the same level as the level 2 supply air system, 9' 6". Notice that the duct riser is offset from the Roof reference level and not from the roof surface which is the location of the AC unit. IMPORTANT When setting offset parameters for system components, Revit MEP offsets the selected component from the reference level and not its location. If the 2 are different, connections are automatically created. Note that Auto Connect must be selected on the Options Bar. 13 Move the cursor up, and after listing dimensions display, enter 3' 6" and press Enter to specify the end point.

The duct riser is drawn down from the AC unit to 9' 6" from level 2, and then the duct continues horizontally for 3' 6".

Notice that a green supply duct riser symbol displays to indicate that a supply duct riser exists. 14 Click Modify on the Design Bar. 15 Validate the duct riser geometry in the 3D view.

170 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

Notice that the mitered elbow fitting is automatically inserted.

16 Close the Roof Mech view. You now switch to the 2 - Mech view to more accurately draw the duct in order to connect the primary supply duct to the duct riser. Connect the primary duct to the duct riser 17 In the Project Browser, double-click 2 - Mech to make it the active view. 18 Click Window menu ➤ Tile to tile the 2 views, and zoom in on the duct riser in the 2 - Mech view. TIP When zooming or reorienting a view that uses Medium or Fine for Detail Level, you may experience performance issues depending on the size and complexity of the system geometry. On the View Control Bar, change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe to improve performance. This allows you to continue to use the 2-line display. You can also specify the Detail Level to Coarse for viewing a single line display.

Notice that only the duct riser displays. This is because the AC unit is beyond the top view range of the 2 - Mech view. You can change the Top view parameter to see the AC unit, but for this exercise you only need to see the riser. You can also validate the duct riser geometry in the 3D view.

Completing the Supply Air Systems | 171

19 Zoom out the view to show the duct riser and the left primary duct segment.

The horizontal primary duct segment needs to be removed as it was an approximate location and it is no longer needed. 20 In the 2 Mech view, select the horizontal primary segment, and while pressing CTRL, select the adjoining elbow. The selected items display in red. 21 Press DELETE to delete the selected duct segment and elbow.

22 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Duct. 23 In the Type Selector, select Round Duct : Taps. 24 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■

For D: (diameter), select 9". Verify that Auto connect is selected. For Offset, verify that 9' 6" is specified.

25 Place the cursor over the left edge of the duct riser, and after the mid point snap displays, click to specify the start point.

172 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

Completing the Supply Air Systems | 173 . 27 Press ESC to deactivate the Draw tool. The left primary is connected to the AC unit.26 Move the cursor over the primary. 28 Validate the geometry in the 3D view. and after the centerline snap displays. click to specify the end point.

you connect the right primary duct to the AC unit. 32 Drag the connector down and to the right. and past the Mechanical/Electrical room wall. pan the view to the right to show the duct riser and the right primary segment. 29 Spin the 3D view around and zoom as shown to validate the right primary connection.Next. and place the cursor over the end connector. 30 In the 2 . You will also use this view to validate endcap placement. Notice that the Draw tool opens (pencil icon) as you drag the duct and closes after you release the mouse button to specify the end point. 174 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . 31 Select the right primary duct.Mech view.

35 With the draw tool still active. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 175 . draw a horizontal run and connect it to the midpoint snap of the riser .33 Select the right primary duct. 36 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Draw Duct tool. right-click and select Draw Duct. 34 Draw a short run of duct with a downward 30 degree angle and click to set the endpoint. 37 Validate the geometry in the 3D view.

However. You now need to add endcaps to the left primary and to the duct riser to close the ductwork. select Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard.You physically connected the primary duct to the AC unit. place the cursor over the duct riser and press Tab twice. You may want to zoom out to see the entire primary duct run. 41 In the Type Selector. Add endcaps 39 In the 2 . zoom in on the duct riser. click Duct Fitting. 40 On the Mechanical Tab of the Design Bar. you still need to check connectivity to make certain that all duct and duct fittings are connected. 176 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . The entire primary supply air duct run including the VAV box connections highlight indicating that they are connected.Mech view.Mech view. Check connectivity 38 In the 2 .

TIP It is a best practice to zoom in close for accurate endcap placement. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 177 . The endcap snap aligns with the duct edge to indicate proper placement. 44 In the Type Selector. select Round Duct Endcap : Standard. 42 Place your cursor over the top edge. move the view to the left to show the end of the primary where you deleted the duct segment and elbow. after the endcap snap aligns to the duct edge and the centerline snap displays..Notice that the endcap snap follows the cursor. click to add the endcap. 43 With the Duct Fitting tool open.

verify the duct riser endcap. 178 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . 49 Using the 2 views. use the same method to validate the endcap geometry.45 Place the cursor over the end of the primary duct segment and after the endcap snap aligns and the centerline snaps displays. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the endcap. Additionally endcap edges display enabling you identify the endcap. and then validate its geometry. 48 In the 3D view. 46 Press Esc twice to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool. click to add the endcap. Verify endcap placement 47 Place the cursor over the primary duct round endcap to verify endcap placement.

52 Place the cursor outside of the building at the upper left corner. All level 2 VAV boxes are selected. 53 On the Options Bar. click Check None. 51 With the 2 views tiled. click in the 2 . You can verify the selected VAV boxes in the 3D view. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a pick box around the entire level 2 floor plan. Notice that all of the selected elements highlight. Create the high pressure supply air system. and click OK.Mech view to make it active. you finish the level 2 supply air system by creating a system to logically connect the level 2 VAV boxes to the AC unit. click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements. Next. and enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. You physically connected the AC unit to the level 2 VAV boxes by drawing ductwork. This is because they are the only mechanical equipment on level 2. Remember that when drawing a pick box or using cross-picking (right to left dragging) all elements visible in the view range of Completing the Supply Air Systems | 179 .50 Press Tab to check connectivity. 54 In the Filter dialog. and then select Mechanical Equipment.

These calculations are used during duct sizing and can be viewed using the System Inspector. 180 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . 55 On the Options Bar. However. all system components must be logically connected by a system. 56 Click (Select Equipment for System) to assign the AC unit to the system. click (Create Supply Air System) to create a supply air system and assign the selected VAV boxes to it. and select the level 2 AC unit. only the level 2 VAV boxes are within the 2 . You just created the high pressure primary supply air system to logically connect the level 2 VAV boxes to the rooftop AC unit. 57 Click the 3D view title bar to make the window active. ductwork must exist for Revit MEP to perform system calculations such as airflow and pressure. 58 Press Esc or click in the drawing area to deactivate the Create Supply Air System tool.the current view are selected.Mech view range. IMPORTANT Although you can draw duct to physically connect system components. Remember that systems can be created before or after you draw ductwork. or even without ductwork. In this case.

68 Move the cursor over the primary supply air system duct run to inspect the air flow and pressure within the duct. 62 Expand Mechanical Supply Air 25 to view the VAV boxes. diffuser.Mech drawing area to make the view active. 63 Right-click Mechanical Supply Air 25. click Inspect. Supply Air. Next. expand Mechanical. Inspect the primary supply air system 64 In the System Browser. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 181 . duct fitting. click Inspect. You can then use system tools from the Options Bar. If you select a system component that has been assigned to multiple systems such as an AC unit or a VAV box. 66 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. you inspect the system. notice that only level 1 VAV boxes are listed in the Default Supply Air category. 69 Make the 3D view active and continue to inspect the primary supply air system. IMPORTANT Another way to select a system is to select any duct segment. 60 In the System Browser. This is the system that you just created.Validate the primary supply air system 59 Press F9 to open the System Browser. or mechanical equipment that has been assigned to a system. In the Unassigned folder. IMPORTANT The system components (air terminals and VAV box) that you assigned to a system are organized in a hierarchy from upstream (parent) to downstream (child). This is because you have assigned all level 2 VAV supply air connectors to the secondary and primary supply air systems. Ductwork must exist to access the System Inspector.Bottom Return Connection : 15 Ton to display the Mechanical Supply Air 25 system listing. and click Select. and notice that the rooftop AC unit is listed. Remember that you can click to place a temporary inspection flag in the view enabling you to compare inspection information. 65 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. and click Inspect. 67 Click a blank space in the 2 . The new level 2 primary supply air system highlights in red. right-click Mechanical Supply Air 25. After you assign the level 1 system components to a primary supply air system. all supply air system components will be assigned and the Default Supply Air category will be empty. 61 Expand Rooftop AC Unit 15 -25 Ton . The System Inspector tool opens. the Select System dialog opens enabling you to select the system to inspect.

This offset routes the duct through the level 2 Mechanical/Electrical room and into the level 1 plenum space terminating at the same level as the level 1 supply air system. and enter 3' 6". 182 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . and press Enter to specify the duct end point. you complete the level 1 primary supply air system. Click the supply connector.70 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. 9' 6". click Finish Inspector to deactivate the tool. Next. Specify the offset to -14' 6". and a 20" height. ■ ■ This is the opposite of what you did with the level 2 AC unit. 71 You have completed the level 2 high pressure primary supply air system. draw the supply duct riser using Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps and specify a 68" width. move the cursor down. complete the level 1 primary supply air system to the following specifications: ■ In the Roof Mechanical view. Optional: Complete the level 1 supply air system 72 Using the methods that you learned in this exercise. This is because the location of the supply and return connections are reversed due to rotating the AC units at placement. Verify the duct riser geometry in the 3D view.

■ ■ Connect the primary to the AC. release the mouse button.Mech view (if open). and drag the end connector over the left edge of the duct riser to open the Draw tool. Instead of drawing duct.Notice that the duct riser passes through level 2 as confirmed by the green supply riser symbol in the 2 -Mech view. The edge snap displays when the connector is over the edge. Watch for the centerline snap as shown. and drag them down to align with the centerline of the right primary duct. and tile it to the left of the 3D view.Mech view. ■ Drag the right primary duct connector to the right edge of the AC duct riser. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 183 . ■ Close the Roof Mech view and the 2 .Mech view. and after the edge highlights. open the 1 . In the 1 . select the left primary horizontal duct segment and elbow. select the left primary duct segment.

Use Tab to check duct connectivity. and assign the VAV boxes and the AC unit to it. Use Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard. ■ In the 1 . Validate the system using the System Browser. and remember to zoom the view.The level 1 primary duct run is connected to the AC unit. and validate the duct geometry in the 3D view. ■ ■ Create a system for the level 1 primary supply air system. and inspect the system with the System Inspector. add an endcap on the end of the duct riser.Mech view. ■ 184 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air .

Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (duct) connections of each system throughout the project. click File menu ➤ Save. 73 If you want to save your work. and validated these logical connections. Open the i Checking Air Systems. Checking Air Systems Revit MEP uses both the duct geometry and logical system to perform calculations such as airflow and pressure. Because both the logical (system) and physical (ductwork) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. Perform a systems check 1 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. enter Completing Supply Air Systems Training for File name. Revit MEP lists the system components Checking Air Systems | 185 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. These systems allow Revit MEP to perform calculations such as flow and pressure on the primary supply air systems. you drew the AC duct risers and then you physically connected each AC unit to its respective primary duct run. 74 In the Save As dialog.The completed level 1 primary supply air system is as shown. you need to validate them. As you view the warnings. you connected the level 1 and level 2 high pressure primary supply air duct runs to separate rooftop AC units. In this exercise. These warnings direct you to check the Unassigned folder in the System Browser. click the Training Files icon. you use the Check Duct Systems tool to immediately check these connections for all systems throughout your project. navigate to the folder of your choice. and click Save. You have completed the high and low pressure (primary and secondary) supply air systems for the building. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and quickly target those systems that need attention. and for duct sizing. In this exercise. you check the systems in your project. You then created 2 systems to logically connect the AC units to their VAV boxes. In the next exercise. Warnings report that the Default Exhaust Air and Default Return Air systems (for levels 1 and 2) and are not empty. click Check Duct Systems.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. Using tiled windows.

IMPORTANT The most common Check Duct Systems warning is the “default system is not empty” warning. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. the duct is now associated with that system. If you place air terminals and VAV boxes without assigning them to a system. you open the System Browser to view the unassigned system components in the Unassigned folder. This occurs because the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. all system components must be assigned to a system immediately after placement. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked.that are associated with each warning. 5 Right-click Default Return Air. as a tutorial exercise. For example. These Check Duct System warnings refer to different systems that you have yet to design. As you learned when placing air terminals and VAV boxes. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Duct Systems will no longer display “not empty” warnings. NOTE The Check Duct Systems warnings contain a system type and a description. Ductwork that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. Notice that no warnings refer to the supply air systems indicating that they are valid. 186 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . you can click in the drawing area to close the message window and continue designing other systems. After you have assigned all system components for the project to their systems. you confirm that the assigned system components are in their proper systems. and for duct sizing. Revit MEP places them in their assigned systems folder and removes them from the Unassigned folder. In the System Browser. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic duct) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system) in a system. Use the System Browser to confirm duct system assignments 2 Click Window menu ➤ System Browser to open the System Browser. 3 Expand the Unassigned folder and notice that both Default Return Air and Default Exhaust Air systems are listed. the VAV is listed in the assigned system and associated with the Default Return Air system in the Unassigned folder. After you assign the system components to a system. Remember that after you create ductwork to physically connect a system. thus assigning the components to a system. 4 Expand Default Return Air and notice the air terminals and mechanical equipment that were automatically assigned to the Default Return Air system. you assigned a VAV to a supply air system but the same VAV has a return air and another supply air connector that you have not assigned to system. The duct geometry is used for system airflow and pressure calculations. So. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. and you have not assigned the component to the other systems. However. Then. and click Select to view all of the unassigned system components.

such as Mechanical Supply Air 3. and click Save. 6 Using the same methods. Notice that each system contains a system type and an assigned number. Depending on your air systems design. In the next lesson. TIP If you have multiple views open. You also confirmed that the air terminals and mechanical equipment for the return and exhaust air systems were unassigned as they were located in their respective default systems in the System Browser and “not empty” warnings were generated by Check Duct Systems. 11 In the Save As dialog. To view the completed mechanical systems for this tutorial including the supply air system. and click Select to view it and its assigned system components. 7 Collapse the Unassigned folder and expand the Mechanical systems folder. You have validated both the unassigned and the assigned system components and their systems. You confirmed all of the unassigned default systems in the Unassigned systems folder.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder under Training Files.The red lines represent the default logical connection. navigate to the folder of your choice. In this exercise. click File menu ➤ Save. enter Checking Air Systems Training for File name. 10 If you want to save your work. otherwise click Close. You now confirm the systems that you created. 9 Right-click a system. 8 Right-click Supply Air. confirm the unassigned system components in the Default Exhaust Air system. you used the Check Duct Systems tool and the System Browser to validate the supply air systems that you created. open the i Completed Mechanical Systems. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. and click Expand All to view all systems that you created including their assigned diffusers (air terminals) and mechanical equipment. Checking Air Systems | 187 . You have completed the supply air systems for the building. you may need to assign these system components to their proper systems. you design a hydronic piping system for the building.

188 .

click the Training Files icon. In this lesson. Creating Piping Views In this exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. 189 .Mech. placing a circulator pump. Create the level 2 piping floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. First.Mechanical Systems: Piping 5 Designing Piping Systems As with designing air systems. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You continue designing by resolving pipe interference. Open the i Creating Piping Views. After completing the air systems lesson.Mech is created and becomes the active view. designing piping systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. you create new views in which to design the piping system. a boiler. you create hydronic piping systems. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the hydronic piping systems. you create the systems and pipe runs to logically and physically connect the system components. you begin designing the level 2 hydronic piping systems for the building. and inspecting the piping system. You will use many of the same methods and practices that you learned while designing the air systems. pipes. circulator pump.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The hydronic piping systems consist of wall mounted hydronic fin-tube radiators. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete the air systems part of this tutorial before creating hydronic piping systems. and the systems to logically connect the system components. right-click 2 . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Then. You begin your piping systems design by placing fin-tube radiators in rooms and adding a boiler. A new view called Copy of 2 .

Piping view displays all architectural elements in halftone and it displays the level 1 air systems.Piping for Name. For Bottom. Next. click view properties. The 2 . verify that Associated Level (Level 2) is selected. under Primary Range do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Top.Piping view selected in the Project Browser.Mech. do the following: ■ ■ (Properties) to modify the Verify that Mechanical is specified for Discipline. 190 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . Also notice that 2 . right-click Copy of 2 . scroll down to the Extents category.Piping is now located under Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. under Graphics. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. TIP When entering a value. you can enter 8 7 and press Tab for 8' 7". 7 In the View Range dialog. This allows you locate the boiler and connect to it from one view. Delete HVAC and enter Piping for Sub-Discipline. enter 2 . for Level. you change the view range. 3 In the Rename View dialog.2 In the Project Browser. Modify the view properties 4 With the 2 . This specifies the top view range above the radiators on level 2 and a bottom view range below the return connection of the boiler on level 1. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. and enter 1' 0" for Offset. just separate the value with a space. Enter -3 1 for Cut plane Offset. 8 Click OK twice. Under View Depth. For example. verify that Associated Level (Level 2) is selected. and click Edit for View Range. and enter -11 6 for Offset. and click Rename. or enter 12 3 1/2 for 12' 3 1/2". and enter -11' 6" for Offset. you do not need to type measurement symbols. verify that Associated Level (Level 2) is selected.

However. 14 Under Categories. you may want to select each component type separately.Piping view. Considering this. 10 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. click 13 Enter VAV Boxes for Name. A quick way to determine common filter criteria is to draw a pick box around all components in a view. Then you can view the common filter criteria from the Element Properties dialog. Depending on the filter criteria. You can use the system filters for tasks such as color-coding your systems. click in the drawing area to make the view active. You can create filters that are either general or specific in scope depending on the filter criteria. On the Filters tab. Note that if you are filtering multiple categories or multiple types in one category. IMPORTANT You can filter by many types of criteria. you can hide the level 1 duct and system components to make it easier to view the pipe run. such as family name. and enter VG. type name. select Mechanical Equipment. the system filters are not used. common (shared) instance parameters will display even if other instance parameters are different (the different instance parameters do not display). do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Family Name for Filter by. then no type parameter will display in the Type Properties dialog. You could use the system filters to filter some duct and duct fittings. Create and define filters 9 In the 2 . they will not filter all system elements needed. Click Apply. 11 Click Edit/New. Next. or even a description that you define. Select VAV Unit . 15 Under Filter Rules. under Filters.You use this view to create the pipe run that services level 2. Verify that none is selected for And. you create a filter to hide all 3 types of air terminals. system type.Parallel Fan Powered for the family name. and the vertical pipe run from the boiler will be routed in the Mechanical /Electrical room. In this lesson. however. Notice that filters are already created and listed under Filters. Notice that some predefined filters are listed under Name. IMPORTANT You can create and define filters in the Filters dialog. you need a define common filter criteria. Creating Piping Views | 191 . (New). you can add and activate filters. However. and verify that equals is selected. Note that if at least one type parameter is different amongst the selected components. the pipe run will be located near the outer walls. This filter will hide all parallel fan powered VAVs in the view after it is added and activated. and click on the Options Bar to view certain components. You can then use these filters to hide or show objects in other views. To do this. The new VAV Boxes filter is listed in the Filters list. You can use the level 1 ductwork as a reference to avoid interference with the level 2 pipe run. it will be best to create filters. These system filters show or hide certain system elements that share the same system type. you must select filter criteria that is common and shared by all selected components that you want to filter. and click OK. click the Filters tab. Next you create a series of filters to hide the level 1 duct and system components. So. 12 In the Filters dialog. So the pipe will not interfere with the duct.

you can view the Description type parameter and identify it as common to all air terminal types. Remember. enter Air Terminal for Description. if differences exist in the selected elements. do the following: ■ ■ For Family. you must spell both verbatim. otherwise the filter will not work. select Exhaust Diffuser Hosted: Workplane-based Exhaust Diffuser. under Filters. . 30 Click OK twice. 28 Under Identity Data. Next. 18 Under Categories. So. you create a description as the common filter criteria. 32 Click in the 2 . and click Apply. under Identity Data. click (Properties). Next. 22 In the Type Selector. 31 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Air Terminal tool. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. click in the Value column for Description. This is because the selected supply. you will not see the Description type parameter. It also creates common criteria that associates all of these exhaust air terminal types to the Air Terminal filter. This action adds a description for all Exhaust Diffuser air terminals. 192 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 21 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 29 Repeat the method that you learned to add a description to the Return air diffusers. NOTE If you drew a pick box and filtered to select all air terminals. This is the same rule for using formulae. select Description for Filter by.16 In the Filters dialog.Hosted. click 17 Enter Air Terminals for Name. you add a description for the supply air diffusers. and click OK. 19 Under Filter Rules. By selecting each air terminal type separately. and exhaust air terminals have at least one different type parameter. 20 Enter Air Terminal for the description. you can select it. This is different from the Comment instance parameter which only affects the selected component (or instance). Remember to click Apply. click Air Terminals. For Type. and exhaust air terminals but they all have a Description type parameter. you need to assign the new description to all 3 air terminal types that you use in the project. return. and select Air Terminal. select Supply Diffuser . 27 In the Type Properties dialog. you continue to create and define the filters. Next. and enter VG. 25 In the Type Properties dialog. Because you already entered the description. 26 Click Apply. then the type parameters will not display. return. and click OK twice. You do not have common filter criteria for the supply. click Edit/New. NOTE When entering filter criteria and assigning it to a family. NOTE The Description type parameter is applied to all components of that type. and verify that equals is selected. select Workplane-based Supply Diffuser.Piping view to make it active. 23 On the Options Bar. click Air Terminal.

All duct fittings in your project have a System Type instance parameter defined as Supply Air in the element properties. 38 In the Add Filters dialog. you need to define the filter again. Next. 34 On the Filters tab. clear all check boxes except for Mechanical . Filter by: Family Name. verify that equals is selected. and select Round Duct for the family name. you have 2 types of rectangular duct. You defined and created all of the filters that you will need to create the hydronic piping system. And: Type Name. verify that equals is selected. Category: Duct Fittings. you need a common filter criteria. You want to view only the rectangular duct with mitered elbows because this the duct riser which is in the Mechanical /Electrical rooms and you want to avoid it when routing the pipe from the boiler. click the Filters tab. Next. and select Rectangular Duct for the family name. select all of the filters that you created. Category: Ducts. verify that equals is selected. Filter by: System Type. you filter duct fittings by system type. 35 Using the methods that you just learned. If you did not click Apply. Notice that you have visibility controls similar to visibility categories on other Visibility Graphics dialog tabs.33 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. verify that equals is selected. and click OK. verify that equals is selected. Notice that the Filters tab in the Visibility Graphics dialog does not list the new filters even though you created them. Filter by: Family Name. 39 Under Visibility. you activate the filters. Flex Ducts . you specify a family and a type name. verify that equals is selected. verify that equals is selected. Creating Piping Views | 193 . The new filters are listed on the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. and select Flex Duct Round for the family name. you add and activate the filters. click Add. To filter multiple duct fitting types. So. Category: Ducts. You will use the duct riser as a reference to avoid interfering with it when routing the pipe run from the boiler. ■ ■ ■ ■ Remember that you must click Apply after defining each filter and before defining the next one in order to create the filter. and enter Supply Air for system type name.Supply and Rectangular Ducts Mitered Elbows/Taps. Category: Flex Ducts. Add and activate filters 37 In the Visibility Graphics dialog.Duct Fittings. And: Type Name. You used this duct to create the duct riser.Round. 36 Click OK. Rectangular Ducts Radius Elbows/Taps. create the following new filters according to the specifications. Round Ducts. and select Mitered Elbows / Taps for the type name. Category: Ducts. and select Radius Elbows / Taps for the type name. This is because you have not added them. So. 40 Click OK twice. Next. click Edit/New. and remember to click Apply in the Filters dialog after you define each filter to create it: ■ Supply Air . and select Rectangular Duct for the family name. Filter by: Family Name. Filter by: Family Name. Rectangular Ducts Mitered Elbows/Taps.

48 Click OK twice. and click Rename.Mech. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Mechanical is specified for Discipline. right-click 1 .Piping view displays the new view settings. verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected and that 10' 0" is specified for Top Offset. this view only displays ducts and pipes on its level. Unlike the 2 . and click View Properties. and click Edit for View Range. You can also set the Detail Level to Wireframe to increase viewing performance.All filtered components hide from view except for the duct riser in the Mechanical/Electrical room. Create the level 1 piping view 41 In the Project Browser. under Graphics.Piping view. The 1 . 47 In the View Range dialog. You now define the view properties. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. Next.Mech is created and becomes the active view. right-click Copy of 1 . 44 Right-click in the drawing area. A new view called Copy of 1 . TIP Filters allow you hide geometry making visibility clearer. 42 In the Project Browser. The 10 foot top offset prevents the level 2 pipes (except 194 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . and click OK.Mech. you create the level 1 piping view in order to place the boiler.Piping for Name. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. 43 Enter 1 . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. scroll down to the Extents category. Select Piping for Sub-Discipline. you change the view range. 46 In the Element Properties dialog. Next. It also improves viewing performance because geometry that would normally be regenerated is hidden. under Primary Range.

Creating Piping Views | 195 . 54 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. 50 In the Project Browser. under Extents. clear all check boxes except for Rectangular Ducts Mitered Elbows/Taps. and fin-tub radiators from displaying. You want to view it to avoid interfering with it when routing the pipe run from the boiler. Click Edit for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. 52 Right-click in the drawing area. 55 On the Filters tab. 51 Enter 3D Piping for Name. and click OK. clear Section Box to turn it off. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views. such as halftone architecture. 59 In the Element Properties dialog. 56 In the Add Filters dialog. and click View Properties. The new view is created using the view properties from the 3D Mech view. As you create the pipe runs. click the Filters tab. Select Piping for Sub-Discipline. 57 Under Visibility. right-click Copy of 3D Mech. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Mechanical is selected for Discipline. You need to use the filters that you created earlier so that you can view only the pipes and the level 1 duct riser. You used this duct to create the duct riser.for the boiler pipe connection). you will want to validate the geometry. you create the 3D piping view to be able to validate this geometry. and click Rename. right-click 3D. 58 Click OK. 53 In the Element Properties dialog. ducts. click Add. under Graphics. you will be unable to view the duct riser. The selected filters are listed on the Filters tab. and to create the level 1 piping system. Create the 3D Piping view 49 In the Project Browser. and click OK. You use this view to place the boiler that services level 2. select all of the filters that you created. If you turn off ducts visibility. Next. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.

right-click the Design Bar. 3 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. This is because the fin-tube radiator is a wall-hosted family and can only be placed on a wall. you place the fin-tube radiators on level 2 and the boiler on level 1 that services the level 2 radiators. 6 Zoom in on Office 201 located in the upper-left corner of the floor plan. you can identify a room by placing the cursor over the room component. click Mechanical Equipment. The duct risers and AC units display in the view. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the room name and number. and click Save. NOTE If the Piping tab is not available on the Design Bar. In the next exercise. This is fine because you are using the riser as a reference to avoid interference with the boiler piping. 5 Move the cursor over a wall and notice that an outline of the radiator and listening dimensions display only if the cursor is over the wall. and double-click 2 . you place the radiators and a boiler. 4 In the Type Selector. Notice that the duct fittings are filtered. 1 In the Project Browser. In this exercise.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. TIP Although room tags were not copied when you created this view. The AC units display because you did not create a filter to hide them. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Hydronic Fin-Tube Radiator : 1" NPT. 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. navigate to the folder of your choice. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. 196 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 62 In the Save As dialog. Open the i Placing Radiators and Boiler. Placing Radiators and a Boiler In this exercise. click the Training Files icon. enter Creating Piping Views Training for File name. you created and modified 2 floor plans and a 3D view. and click Piping. You also created filters to display certain system components. 61 If you want to save your work. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.60 Click OK. click File menu ➤ Save.Piping to make it the active view.

Placing Radiators and a Boiler | 197 . and center a fin-tube radiator under the upper-right window as shown. 9 Continue placing radiators centered under all windows on level 2 as shown. except for the windows on the radius wall. To place the radiator precisely under the window. select it and use the arrow keys to move it into position. 8 Click to place the radiator. and notice that the connectors display.7 Place the cursor over the top exterior wall.

for Flow. 12 On the Options Bar. 14 Enter 4 for Flow. If the same type of component exists on another level. Next. and click Select All Instances. Your design specification recommends a flow rate of 4 GPM for all fin-tube radiators in the building.Piping to make this the active view. 13 In the resulting dialog. the parameters that display are common to all of the selected objects. 198 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . Place the boiler 15 In the Project Browser. drag the section tail. you place the boiler. verify that 20 GPM is specified for all of the selected radiators. double-click 1 . TIP Remember to zoom the view to accurately place the radiators. right-click a radiator. The boiler that services the level 2 radiators will be located on level 1. Modify radiator flow rate 11 In the drawing area. then it would be better to use other selection methods such as drawing a pick box. IMPORTANT If you select multiple objects and then view their properties.You may need to move the Section 1 head and tail to place the Office 6 upper-left radiator. 10 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Mechanical Equipment tool. click (Element Properties). All level 2 radiators display in red. NOTE Note that Select All Instances selects all components of the same type in the entire model. If parameters are blank. and you do not want to include it. You selected all instances of the level 2 radiators because Flow is an instance parameter and must be applied to each instance that you want to modify. under Mechanical Loads. Next. The flow rate changes for all radiators on level 2. then these are different across the selected objects. you modify the radiator flow rate. and click OK. The existing radiator flow rate needs to be changed. If so. Do not delete the section as you will reuse it later in this lesson.

click Mechanical Equipment. 19 Press Esc twice to deactivate the Mechanical Equipment tool.16 Enter ZR. and select Boiler : Standard from the Type Selector. 18 Move the cursor to the right of the duct riser. and click to place the boiler approximately as shown. you verify the boiler flow rate. Next. watch the listening dimensions. and sketch a zoom region around Mechanical/Electrical room. 17 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. Placing Radiators and a Boiler | 199 . Notice that the connectors display after you place the boiler.

20 In the drawing area. then press F9. under Type Parameters. In the next exercise. During this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. right-click the boiler. If the System Browser does not respond. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. and click Element Properties. you then create pipes to physically connect the system components. It is not a pipe system but only a physical connection. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. click File menu ➤ Save. The boiler maximum flow rate complies with the design specification. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply and the Default Hydronic Return systems to view the level 2 radiators and the boiler that you placed in the building. You create piping systems by placing mechanical equipment and other system components. and the boiler that services those radiators on level 1. you also use the System Browser to confirm your systems. click System Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. and double-click 2 . 1 In the Project Browser. and click Save. Unlike logical connections (systems). verify that 230 GPM is set for Max Flow. Open the i Creating Piping Systems. TIP You can also press F9 (or Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. click the Training Files icon. 22 Click OK. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. Explore the System Browser 3 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. Creating the Piping Systems In this exercise. you create the systems to logically connect the system components.Piping to make it the active view. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. you create the supply and return piping systems. You also modified the radiator flow rate and verified the boiler flow rate so that they complied with design specifications. After creating the logical connection. 24 In the Save As dialog. 23 If you want to save your work. you placed wall mounted fin-tube radiators on level 2.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. navigate to the folder of your choice. and then create the logical connection between these system components. You can create pipes to connect system components but without a corresponding system. 4 Expand the Unassigned folder. 200 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . enter Placing Radiators and Boiler Training for File name. A system is the logical connection between system components such as fin-tube radiators and a boiler. In this exercise. analyses cannot be performed. click in the drawing area to make it active.

7 On the Options Bar. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. Notice that all of the mechanical equipment that you added are located under Default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. and click Select All Instances. So. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Supply and Default Hydronic Return system category located in the Unassigned folder. and so on) to a system either by creating a logical connection (or system) between the system components or by assigning a system component to an existing system. You assign a system component (mechanical equipment. (Select Equipment for System). 6 On the Options Bar. the hydronic supply system is immediately created and listed in the System Browser along with the fin-tube radiators that were assigned to it. The System Browser is a powerful tool that allows you to validate and confirm systems. after you placed the radiators and boiler.IMPORTANT In the System Browser. and select the boiler to assign Creating the Piping Systems | 201 . They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to their proper system. Thus. Notice that after you click . Create the supply hydronic piping system 5 Select a fin-tube radiator. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create your systems. As you assign radiators to systems. This occurred because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. click (Create Hydronic Supply System). All level 2 radiators display in red. click it to the supply system. the assigned radiators move from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. if all system components are assigned. each Default system category would not contain any system components and would be considered empty. right-click.

IMPORTANT The new system named Hydronic Supply 1 is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply in the Piping folder. and select the system. click the Edit Systems button and then choose Boiler: Standard from the System Equipment drop-down list on the Options bar. Notice that the Default Hydronic Supply category no longer displays. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. all other components are unavailable. Thus. You can also right-click the Hydronic Supply 1 listing in the System Browser. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. The supply system that logically connects the radiators to the boiler displays in red. you create the return piping system. The organization is from upstream. Next.TIP If you have trouble selecting the boiler. This indicates that you have assigned all hydronic supply system components in the model. and click Select to select the system. press Tab. 202 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . This display indicates that the new system is selected. the boiler (the parent) to downstream. place the cursor over a radiator or the boiler. the radiator (the child) with the connecting system between them. the Default Hydronic Supply system is empty and does not display. Notice that you can select only valid system components.

right-click. expand Piping. 13 Right-click each category. and cleared from the Options Bar.Create the return hydronic piping system 8 Select a radiator. Creating the Piping Systems | 203 . click the Edit Systems button and then choose Boiler: Standard from the System Equipment drop-down list on the Options bar. click (Create Hydronic Return System) to create the hydronic return system and assign the selected fin-tube radiators to it. Notice that (Create Hydronic Supply System) does not display because the selected components already have a hydronic supply system assigned to them. click it to the return system. and select the boiler to assign TIP If you have trouble selecting the boiler. Confirm and validate the systems 12 In the System Browser. (Select Equipment for System). These listings represent the systems that you just created. 10 On the Options Bar. 14 Expand Hydronic Supply 1 to view the radiators. select one of the radiators that you added to the system to display this tool and the other Options Bar system tools. You can now view the supply system hierarchy: Hydronic Supply 1 logically connects the boiler (parent) with the radiators (children). Select All Instances is an appropriate selection tool. So. Remember that the only radiators that exist in the project are on level 2. and notice that Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return systems categories are listed. 9 On the Options Bar. and click Expand to view the boilers and the Hydronic Supply 1 and Hydronic Return 1 system listings. 11 The return system displays in red. and click Select All Instances to select all level 2 radiators. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area.

Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In this exercise. 17 If you want to save your work. Now that you logically connected the piping system components. You learned how the System Browser organizes system components and systems.15 Right-click Hydronic Supply 1. you must create a system for Revit MEP to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. Create the level 2 supply pipe layout 2 Place the cursor outside of the building at the upper left corner. enter Creating Piping Systems Training for File name. 204 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . Creating Pipe Runs In this exercise. and click Save. In a later exercise. click the Training Files icon. The hydronic supply system highlights in red indicating the logical connection.Piping to make it the active view. and click Select. 18 In the Save As dialog. you create the level 2 pipe runs to physically connect the system components. you connect the boiler to the pipe runs. The pipe runs physically connect the level 2 radiators. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a pick box around the entire floor plan. and you used the System Browser to confirm and validate the newly created systems. in the next exercise. navigate to the folder of your choice. and double-click 2 . you design 2 pipe layouts and then create the supply and return pipe runs based on these layouts. 1 In the Project Browser. click File menu ➤ Save. 16 Repeat this method to validate the Hydronic Return System logical connection. IMPORTANT Although you can draw pipe to create the physical pipe connections.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. Remember that systems can be created before or after pipe. you created the supply and return piping systems to logically connect the radiators and boiler. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. Open the i Creating Pipe Runs. or even without pipe being drawn.

The Layout Path tool and the Select a System dialog open. This occurs because when you draw a pick box to select components. and click OK. you can place the cursor over a radiator. click Layout Path. press Tab to highlight the system and select it. the return system that logically connects the components display in red. you can click Layout Path on the Options Bar.Notice that all components that are in the 2 . Then. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements.Piping view range highlight. 5 On the Options Bar. Notice that the radiators. 4 In the Filter dialog. the boiler. and then select Mechanical Equipment.Piping view). click Check None. Creating Pipe Runs | 205 . The level 2 radiators and the level 1 boiler are selected (and display in red). 3 On the Options Bar. (You can see the level 1 boiler in the 2 . TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. You can click each system in the Select a System dialog to view it.

do the following: ■ Select Perimeter for Solution Type. You can select each system in the dialog to view it. Enter 1 0 for Inset. 8 On the Options Bar. This option slopes the entire pipe layout. The Layout Path tool activates providing various layout tools.IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). The system displays in red. The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. 7 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. You want the pipes to run along the perimeter of the radiators. You will need to select a system to create the layout. ■ Verify that 0" is specified for Slope. You can also view all possible layout path solutions by pressing the left and right arrow keys on your keyboard. NOTE The Perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. select Hydronic Supply 1 and click OK. then the Select a System dialog will open. It does not reference the architecture. verify that Solutions is selected. and select solution 4 of 4. ■ 206 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 6 In the Select a System dialog. ■ Click (Next Solution).

Using this inset. you now modify the layout path. 14 Click OK. select Branch. Later in this exercise. 9 On the Options Bar. Enter -1 3 for Offset. refer to Help. Enter -1' 3" for Offset. duct. NOTE Configuring the pipe conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. and other obstacles. structural beams. Next. click Settings. After configuring the pipe conversion settings.The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. You can also configure these settings by clicking Mechanical Settings on the Piping tab of the Design Bar (or Settings ➤ Mechanical Settings). Creating Pipe Runs | 207 . verify that Main is selected. 12 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. you modify the layout segments that are tangent to the radius wall. you create the supply pipe run 1 foot from the radiator pipe connections (not from the outside wall). 13 Under System Type: Hydronic Supply. NOTE Notice that the Perimeter layout solution inset modifies the layout path. 10 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. you specify the pipe conversion settings that you use to convert the layout path to a pipe run. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected for Pipe Type. Remember that you are working in the level 2 piping view. 11 Under System Type: Hydronic Supply do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected for Pipe Type. or architecture. IMPORTANT The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main. This negative offset elevation places the pipe main at 10' 9" in the level 1 plenum space. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. For more information.

click Modify. and select the lower layout path main that is tangent to the radius wall. 208 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 17 Using the drag control. You now modify the layout paths that are tangent to the radius wall. The layout path is located under the radiators.Modify the level 2 supply pipe layout 15 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. zoom the view. A drag control displays. 16 In the drawing area. drag the main to the right at approximately the same inset as the layout path.

The supply pipe run (main and branches) is created and all required pipe fittings Creating Pipe Runs | 209 . Ignore the no auto-route solution warning. TIP Use the Ctrl key to select both the main and the branch line. click Finish Layout. You will address the cause of this warning later in this exercise. 19 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar.18 Repeat the process to modify the upper layout path tangent to the radius wall.

210 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . or offset elevations are incorrect.are automatically inserted. or manually modify the pipe. Pipes are a physical not a logical connection. Either relocate the system components. The most common cause of these errors is that the pipe usually has insufficient space to be created. Notice that the pipes are not listed in the System Browser. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. For example. This is because the System Browser lists system components and systems. you can delete pipes and pipe fittings and the system remains unaffected. select a different layout solution. This pipe run physically connects the supply side (supply connectors) of the system components. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. and is not part of the system. Change the geometry display 20 Enter ZR and draw a zoom region around the Office 201.

IMPORTANT Creating Hydronic Piping Systems uses a hidden (haloed) line display. 22 Zoom the view and notice that the symbolic fittings and rise/drop symbol have been replaced by fitting geometry and a green pipe riser symbol. select Fine for Detail Level. The Hidden Line mechanical setting is not to be confused with the Hidden Lines Model Graphics Style located on the View Control Bar. click Mechanical Settings on the Piping tab of the Design Bar (or click Settings menu ➤ Mechanical Settings). In the Mechanical Settings dialog. This is caused by the hidden line setting. a gap displays indicating the hidden geometry. To turn off hidden lines. If a pipe is hidden by an object. select Hidden Line and specify the inside and outside gap to 0. Also notice that a rise/drop symbol displays indicating the pipe riser. You use the 2-line display to design the piping system. Some pipes are hidden causing a gap. Creating Pipe Runs | 211 .Notice that the pipes and symbolic fittings display in single line. 21 On the View Control Bar (located at the lower left of the drawing area). The pipe geometry displays in 2-line enabling you to better see it.

and click to select them. 24 Place the cursor over the pipe. Next. change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe and/or turn off component visibility in the Visibility Graphics dialog. or Fine for 2-line pipe display. So. The selected pipe and pipe fittings display in red. 212 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . Modify the pipe run 23 Zoom in on the pipe connecting the boiler to the supply pipe run. Instead of moving the pipe. A single pipe does not conform to the hydronic piping design. If you experience slower viewing performance while using the higher detail settings. The deletion also divides the pipe run into left and right sides. 25 Press Delete to delete the selection. On the View Control Bar. and press TAB twice to highlight the pipe and the adjacent pipe fittings.TIP You can easily change the pipe geometry representation by changing the Detail Level. you modify the pipe run so that it better fits in with the design. the pipe run needs to be changed to a 1 inch diameter. Additionally. it is easier to delete the pipe and fittings and draw a new one later. Medium for 2-line duct display. select Coarse for single line display. you will need 2 pipes connecting the boiler to the supply pipe run. The design requires 2 zones.

width. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) and sizes the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not sizing. Next. The diameter on the Options Bar displays as 1" indicating that all pipe for the selected pipe run have been modified to the specified diameter. 26 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. 28 On the Options Bar. you modify the supply pipe run diameter.Remember that although the physical connection from the boiler to the radiators has been deleted. and click to select it. 30 Verify the diameter changes by pressing TAB twice to highlight. the diameter Creating Pipe Runs | 213 . the logical connection (or system) is still intact. NOTE It is important to recognize that changing the diameter. the pipe run and click to select each side of the pipe run. select 1" for D: (diameter). and press TAB twice to highlight the pipe run (main and branches but not the radiators). If the pipes had different diameters. 29 Repeat this method to change the right side of the supply pipe run to the same diameter. and click Modify on the Design Bar. The diameter of the main and branches change to 1 inch. 27 Place the cursor over the left side of the supply pipe run (left of the split that occurred after deleting the boiler connecting pipe).

you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of pipe so that it highlights and then press Tab. IMPORTANT When pipes and fittings are connected. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected pipes. You can repair the connection by dragging the pipe segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. or you may need to convert a fitting and draw pipe. 214 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . then you know that a disconnect exists. fittings. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected pipe and pipe fittings up to the first piece of connected equipment. you check to make certain that the pipe run is physically connected to the radiators.would not display. This disconnect will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. Typically the disconnect results from not having sufficient room to make the connection. press Tab 3 times. and equipment. The first time you press Tab. If the entire network does not highlight. Check connectivity 31 Right-click in the view and click Zoom to Fit from the context menu. the branch to which the pipe is connected highlights. Next. 32 Place the cursor over the right side of the supply pipe run and after it highlights. All radiators and pipe highlight indicating that they are physically connected.

This allows you to better see disconnects. 33 Repeat this method to check the connectivity of the left supply pipe run. This places the pipes at a 10' 3" elevation in the level 1 plenum space. Create the level 2 return pipe run 34 Using the methods that you learned to create the supply pipe run. create the level 2 return pipe run according to the following specifications: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 2 . and enter -1' 9" for both the main and branch offsets. Verify that 0" is specified for Slope. you can click to select them. Next. For pipe conversion settings. Select Perimeter solution 4. Enter 2' 0" for Inset. create a layout for the Hydronic Return 1 system.Piping view.After the pipe run and radiators are highlighted. verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected. you create the return pipe run. Creating Pipe Runs | 215 .

Use the same method to correct any disconnects.■ In the Layout Path tool. enter Creating Pipe Runs Training for File name. navigate to the folder of your choice. Remember. and click Save. Change the diameter of each return pipe run side to 1". Validate the pipe geometry using the 3D Piping view. Delete the pipe and the 2 fittings that connect the boiler to the return pipe run. 35 If you want to save your work. modify the 2 layout path mains that are tangent to the radius wall to approximately the same inset as the other sides of the return layout path. Check connectivity and inspect the corner connections for disconnects. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ The level 2 return pipe run is as shown. 216 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . do not select the radiators when selecting the return pipe runs. click File menu ➤ Save. 36 In the Save As dialog. The deleted pipe divides the return pipe run into left and right sides.

Resolving Pipe Interference The supply and return pipe runs that you created seem to interfere with the 2 staircases in the building. You also modified the pipe runs so that they were a better fit with the systems design. You then converted these layouts to create the supply and return pipe runs that physically connect the radiators.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. Notice that the supply and return pipe runs seem to interfere with the 2 staircases. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Piping to make it the active view. corrected disconnects. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans.In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. converted fittings. click the Training Files icon. In this exercise. you create new views to confirm this interference and then modify the pipe run to resolve it. Open the i Resolving Pipe Interference. In the next exercise. and double-click 2 . and validated the pipe geometry in the 3D view. You checked connectivity. you used the Layout Path tool to design the supply and return pipe layouts. Resolving Pipe Interference | 217 . you resolve interference issues with the new pipe runs. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

and the second click specifies the section tail. Create a section view to confirm interference 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and draw a zoom region around the right stairwell. The first click specifies the section head. 5 Move the cursor to the right and click just past the exterior wall of the building to specify the section tail. 4 Place the cursor over the left wall of the room that is below the stairwell and click to specify the section head location. you can flip the view direction or modify the extents of the view. Adding a section view is a 2-click process. 218 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping .Resolve pipe interference with the lower staircase 2 Right-click in the drawing area. You need to create a section view to confirm pipe interference. click Section. click Zoom in Region. After you add the section.

click Modify. Resolving Pipe Interference | 219 .A new section view named Section 3 is created and located in the Project Browser under ???. 6 Use the drag handles to modify the clip planes so that you capture the pipe run and the stairwell. NOTE Make certain that the clip planes do not capture the pipe branch above. 7 On the Design Bar.

10 Double-click the section head to open the Section 3 view. The section relocates under Piping. 8 In the Project Browser. All section heads link directly to their corresponding section view. You can also open the section view from the Project Browser under Sections. 12 Draw a zoom region around the staircase. 220 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping .The section head and tail display. select Fine for Detail Level. and Wireframe for Model Graphics Style. under Graphics. similar to the level heads in the elevation view. The geometry displays with shading and outlined edges. and click Properties. right-click Section 3. and click OK. select Piping for Sub Discipline. expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections (Building Section). 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 On the View Control Bar.

TIP Sections are very useful in visualizing and validating your designs. and after the connectors display. 17 Drag the top pipe connector down and notice that the cursor changes to a pencil to indicate that the Draw tool is active. The tees connect the radiator return branches to the return pipe run. you modify the pipe runs around the staircase. You will usually create many sections to both inspect and modify pipe runs. 14 Zoom in on the stairwell. Next. 15 Click the return pipe segment that is interfering with the stairs. These connectors connect to the tee fittings.The section view confirms that the pipe runs do interfere with the right staircase. 16 Zoom in on the top pipe connector to view the tee fitting. Resolving Pipe Interference | 221 . and other aspects of your systems design. mechanical equipment placement. Modify the pipe runs around the staircase 13 Click Window menu ➤ Floor Plan: 2 . They offer immediate accessibility to all floors and areas. place the cursor over the top connector.Piping to make it the active view.

click (Split). NOTE When modifying pipe. and after the fitting end point snap displays. 20 Drag the top pipe segment connector down to the area outside the stairwell as shown. 222 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . This is another way to use the Draw tool to create pipe.18 Drag the pipe connector up to the tee fitting. If you split the pipe. You drag the pipe segment instead of splitting it because you will convert the vertical tee fitting to a horizontal tee fitting. always connect to pipe segments. and select the return pipe segment again. Usually a connector snap displays but other snaps may display such as an end point snap. 23 Watch the listening dimensions. a small pipe segment will be created that will need to be removed. Next. 22 Place the cursor over the supply pipe run above the stairwell. You may need to zoom the view to get the correct snap dimensions. and click to split the pipe approximately as shown. release the mouse button to reconnect it. Remember to always check connectivity after connecting. The cursor changes to a knife to indicate that the Split tool is open. or mechanical equipment after a snap displays. you split the supply pipe segment. fittings. 21 On the Edit toolbar. 19 Zoom out.

Zoom out the view. Notice that the fittings that were inserted at the splits have been deleted. 25 Select the pipe segment that is over the staircase. 26 Zoom in the return tee fitting above the stairs. 24 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Split tool. Next.Zoom the split and notice that a line displays across the pipe. Resolving Pipe Interference | 223 . and draw the pipe around the stairs. This indicates that a pipe fitting was automatically inserted at the split. you convert a tee fitting. and press Delete to delete it. You can place your cursor over the fitting and a tooltip and the Status Bar confirm the pipe fitting.

30 Notice that the return pipe is hidden under the supply pipe due to the hidden (haloed) line mechanical setting. orientation. 29 Select the elbow and click on the upper plus (+) sign to convert the elbow to a tee. and then select the two adjacent pipes to add an elbow. and then click Modify. click to specify the start point for the first pipe segment. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. 33 Zoom out the view. and move the cursor to the left. 31 In the Type Selector. right-click and select Delete. and after the end point connector snap displays. 28 Select Trim. not vertical. and press Spacebar to automatically specify the pipe diameter and offset to that of the pipe run. The new tee has a horizontal.27 Select the tee. 224 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 32 Place the cursor over the end of the return tee fitting that you just converted. click Pipe to open the Draw tool.

click to specify the end point and the start point of the third segment. Consider that pipe geometry may be larger and additional fittings may be inserted after performing sizing. 36 Draw the pipe to the return pipe run on the right. especially when connecting to mechanical equipment. always make certain that you provide sufficient space for segment and fitting geometry.34 Draw the pipe 12’ 0" to the left outside the stairwell. Resolving Pipe Interference | 225 . click to specify the segment end point. and after a snap displays aligning with end of the return pipe run. and after the connector snap displays. NOTE When drawing pipe. and click to specify the pipe segment end point and specify the start point for the second pipe segment. 35 Draw the pipe down.

38 Select the supply pipe segment above the stairs to display its connectors. and click Draw Pipe from the context menu.The return pipe run is connected as shown. 226 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 39 Right-click the lower connector. 37 Press Esc to deactivate the Draw tool.

NOTE If you right-click a connector and click Draw Pipe on the context menu. 41 Using the pipe drawing methods that you learned. draw the supply pipe run around the stairs as shown. 40 In the Type Selector. However. The amount of movement that these keys provide depends upon the zoom factor. you should always verify the pipe type in the Type Selector. the pipe diameter. use the arrow keys to move pipes to the exact location required. and automatically matches the pipe diameter and offset of the selected pipe. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. 43 Drag Section 1 to the left of the stairwell. Optional: Resolve pipe interference with the upper staircase 42 Click the Section 1 tail (located on the upper-left of the building). The section displays in red. and offset automatically match that of the selected connector. If necessary.This activates the Draw tool. and adjust the view clip planes as shown. or width and height. Resolving Pipe Interference | 227 .

49 On the Edit toolbar. and split the supply pipe at 12' 0" from its left connector. 45 On the View Control Bar.Piping to make it the active view. Otherwise. 47 Click Window menu ➤ Floor Plan: 2 . you reuse it to confirm pipe interference with the stairs instead of creating a new section. NOTE If you use a section view to check pipe interference. 50 Move the cursor to the left of the stairs and over the supply pipe. select Fine for Detail Level. 44 Press ESC. 46 Zoom in on the staircase and notice that the pipes do interfere with the stairs. you must adjust the section view clip planes to capture only the stairs and not the pipes beyond the stairs. and double-click the section head to open the section view. 228 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . watch the listening dimensions. 52 Using the methods that you learned. 51 Use the same procedure to split the return pipe run at 5' 0" from its left connector. click (Split). modify the supply and return pipe segments as shown. 48 Zoom in on the stairwell.Although this section was used for air systems. you may get a false positive result.

draw the supply and return pipe segments as shown. Resolving Pipe Interference | 229 . 53 Again. using the methods that you learned.You can either drag the pipe segments to the right past the stairs or split and delete them. Remember to watch for connector snaps.

navigate to the folder of your choice. and offset elevation to that of the selected pipe connector. diameter (or width and height). In the next exercise. click File menu ➤ Save. preferably a connector snap. You also tile 2 views to simultaneously create the pipe connections and validate the pipe geometry. 55 If you want to save your work. you connect the boiler to the level 2 supply and return pipe runs. and click (Create Similar) on the Edit toolbar. click the Training Files icon. and Move tools to modify the pipes that interfered with the stairs. always: (1) Provide sufficient space for segment and fitting geometry. (2) Connect to a snap. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views. Draw. and (4) Check connectivity after making a connection.rvtfile located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. Then. the start point. you connect the boiler to the pipe runs. Another method to create pipe is to select the pipe to create. In this exercise. the pipe type is also matched. and double-click 3D Piping to make it the active view. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. IMPORTANT You have learned 3 different methods to create pipe using the Draw tool. Using Create Similar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Using these 2 methods. 1 In the Project Browser. Connecting the Boiler In this exercise. Remember that after you create pipe. You can right-click a connector and click Draw Pipe from the context menu. and rerouted pipes to resolve the interference. Open the i Connecting Boiler. and offset are automatically specified. (3) Verify the pipe type in the Type Selector (not necessary with Create Similar). You can click Pipe from the Design Bar and press Spacebar to match the diameter (or width and height). 230 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . you used section views to confirm pipe interference with the stairs.54 The level 2 supply and return pipe runs are as shown. you used the Split. and click Save. 56 In the Save As dialog. enter Resolving Pipe Interference Training for File name. You can also drag a pipe connector to modify a segment.

Piping to make it the active view. You are ready to connect the boiler to the supply and return pipe runs.Piping view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D Piping view.Tile the views 2 With the 3D Piping view active. This closes all windows that you previously opened during the current design session. the active view is tiled to the left. TIP When tiling 2 views. the active view is the only open window. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. Note that if this option is unavailable. 5 Adjust the view in both windows to view the boiler and the pipe runs as shown. 7 Click each pipe segment and drag the connectors to adjust the pipe segments to provide ample space to connected the boiler connector pipes as shown. Connect the boiler to the supply pipe run 6 Zoom in on the split supply and return pipe runs located above the boiler. 4 Enter WT to tile both windows. You will design in the 2 . click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. 3 In the Project Browser. Connecting the Boiler | 231 . and double-click 2 . Remember that these pipe runs split as a result of deleting the pipe that connected the boiler to the pipe runs.

10 In the Type Selector. 11 Place the cursor over the supply connection on the boiler. Enter -5 0 for Offset. This offset places the horizontal pipe segment at 7 feet from level 1. 14 Move the cursor to the left. click to specify the first pipe segment start point.8 Zoom in on the boiler. 13 On the Options Bar. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that 3" is specified for D: (diameter) Verify that Auto Connect is selected. click Pipe. 12 Draw the pipe to the left. and press Spacebar to match the pipe diameter and the offset elevation to that of the boiler connector. and click to specify the pipe segment end point at approximately 1' 6" from the boiler connection. 9 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. and after the connector snap displays. watch the listening dimensions. 232 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping .

In a later exercise. Remember to always use a semi-colon (. enter -1 3 for Offset. TIP After entering a value in Options Bar. This creates a pipe segment at the same offset as the supply pipe run. 16 On the Options Bar.) to separate snap increments. you will place a circulator pump on this pipe segment. You can also add a dimension snap increment in the Snaps dialog (click Settings menu ➤ Snaps). TIP When drawing pipe. Connecting the Boiler | 233 . 15 Draw the pipe up to 3’ 0". TIP If the exact dimension snap increment does not display. 10' 9" from level 1. you can enter a dimension and press Enter instead of drawing to the preferred dimension. after listening dimensions display. and click to specify the end point. zoom the view and try again.A green pipe riser symbol displays to indicate a pipe riser. you may need to press TAB to make the drawing area active.

20 Click the left supply pipe run segment to display the connectors. click to specify the pipe segment end point. 21 Drag the right connector toward the boiler connector pipe. 18 Click Modify on the Design Bar. 19 Zoom in on the left supply pipe run segment and the boiler connector pipe. 234 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping .17 Draw the pipe segment straight up toward the supply pipe run. The boiler supply connector pipe is created. and after the centerline and intersection snaps display. and after the connector snap displays. release the mouse button to connect to it.

23 Validate the geometry in the 3D Piping view. 22 Place the cursor over the boiler connector pipe and press Tab. The connector pipe and the left supply pipe run segment highlight indicating that they are physically connected. Connecting the Boiler | 235 .The boiler is connected to the left supply pipe run.

click in the 3D Piping view to make it active. you connect the boiler to the right supply pipe run. 236 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 26 Use the selection tool to draw a box around the tee to select it.Next. 24 With the windows tiled. 27 Click on the lower of the two plus (+) signs to convert the elbow to a horizontal tee. 25 Zoom in on the elbow fitting above the boiler.

and click Draw Pipe from the context menu. select the tee to display the connectors. The pipe diameter and offset are specified to that of the selected connector. and after listening dimensions display. 30 Zoom in on the tee. enter 3 0 and press Enter.Piping view to make it active. and the start point is automatically specified. 33 Draw the pipe 2' 0" to the right and click to specify the segment end point. Connecting the Boiler | 237 . Verify that -5' 0" is specified for Offset. 32 On the Options Bar. right-click the right connector. 29 Click in the 2 . do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Auto Connect is selected. 31 In the Type Selector.28 In the 3D Piping view. 34 Draw the pipe up. Notice that the fitting is selected in the floor plan view and remains selected in the 3D view. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected.

38 Using the same method that you used to connect the left supply pipe run. and after the intersection and centerline snaps display. click to specify the end point. you will place a circulator pump on this segment.This creates a 1 foot pipe segment. connect the right supply pipe run. 35 On the Options Bar. draw the pipe segment straight up toward the supply pipe run. 37 Press ESC twice to deactivate the Draw tool. 238 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 36 With the Draw tool activated. enter -1 3 for Offset. In a later exercise.

Connecting the Boiler | 239 . 40 Validate the pipe geometry.The right supply pipe run is connected to the boiler. 39 Check connectivity.

47 Draw the pipe to the left. and right-click the return connector. Optional: Connect the boiler to the return pipe run 41 With the windows tiled. Notice that the return connection is at an offset elevation of -11' -2" from level 2. This places the return connection 10 inches above level 1. zoom in on the boiler. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected.Next. and the 2 . and click Draw Pipe. This places the next pipe segment at an elevation of 10' 3" from level 1. 46 On the Options Bar. you draw a 6 inch pipe segment at this elevation and then create a pipe riser.Piping the active view. enter -1 9 for Offset. 44 On the Options Bar. 240 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 42 Select the boiler. and after pipe segment aligns with end of the left return pipe run located above. 43 In the Type Selector. Next. 45 Move the cursor up. click the specify the end point. verify that 3" is specified for D: (diameter). and that Auto Connect is selected. and enter 0 4 and press Enter. you connect the boiler to the return pipe run.

click to connect to the left return pipe run. Connecting the Boiler | 241 .48 Draw the pipe up toward the return pipe run. and after the connector snap displays.

right-click the right connector. 51 Using the fitting conversion methods that you learned. and click the elbow fitting on the return pipe above the boiler to display the fitting conversion controls. 49 Press ESC to deactivate the Draw tool.The boiler is connected to the left side of the return pipe run. 50 Zoom in on the boiler. and click to specify the end point. 52 Select the tee fitting. convert the elbow to a tee with a horizontal orientation. and click Draw Pipe. 53 Draw the pipe 1' 0" to the right. 242 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping .

click to specify the end point. Connecting the Boiler | 243 .54 Draw the pipe toward the return pipe run. and after the intersection and centerline snaps display.

The boiler is connected to the right side of the return pipe run. 244 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . The return pipes highlight indicating that they are physically connected. and press TAB 3 times to check connectivity for both sides of the return pipe. Remember that hidden lines display when the pipe display is obstructed. Check connectivity and validate pipe geometry 57 Place the cursor over the return pipe before the tee fitting. drag the right return pipe segment and connect it to the boiler connector pipe.55 Using the method that you learned. 56 Click Modify on the Design Bar.

click (Align).Piping and the 3D Piping views tiled. IMPORTANT Using the Align tool is a 2-click process. 59 With the 2 . and then you select the point to align. 61 Place the cursor over the left supply pipe.58 Validate the return pipe geometry in the 3D Piping view. First. in the 2 . click to specify the alignment reference point. zoom in on the boiler and supply and return connector pipes. Next.Piping view. If the Tools toolbar is not available. you align the boiler return connector pipes with the supply connector pipes. Connecting the Boiler | 245 . and after highlights. click Window menu ➤ Toolbar ➤ Tools. Align the boiler supply and return connector pipes. select the reference point where you want to align. 60 On the Tools toolbar.

and after the centerline highlights. 62 Move the cursor over the left return pipe. click to specify the point to align. 246 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping .NOTE Make certain to click the supply pipe and not the return.

The left return pipe is aligned with the left supply pipe. Notice that the return pipe parametrically adjusts.

63 Using the alignment method you just learned, align the right return pipe with the right supply pipe.

64 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Align tool.

Connecting the Boiler | 247

The aligned return pipes are as shown. Notice that the return pipe runs also are parametrically adjusted. This situation results because they are connected to the return boiler connector pipes that you aligned.

65 Place the cursor below the tee fitting, and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity.

66 Validate the geometry in the 3D Piping view.

248 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

The boiler is physically connected to the radiators and the hydronic piping system is now a closed loop. 67 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 68 In the Save As dialog, enter Connecting the Boiler Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, connected the boiler to the supply and return pipe runs. You used the Split tool to create 2 separate supply and return pipe runs. You then drew pipes that had different offset elevations to connect the boiler to the supply and return pipe runs. You worked in 2 tiled views enabling you to design and validate geometry simultaneously. It also allowed you to better understand the Auto Connect behavior. Finally, you used the Align tool to align the return pipes to the supply pipes. In the next exercise, you size the supply and return piping runs.

Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Methods
You created the level 2 supply and return pipe runs to physically connect the boiler to the radiators. Next, you size the pipe runs using both Friction and Velocity sizing methods. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Pipe Sizing - Friction & Velocity.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 2 - Piping to make it the active view. 2 Place the cursor over the boiler, and after it highlights, press Tab 4 times to highlight both the supply and return pipe runs including the radiators and the boiler, and click to select them.

Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Methods | 249

The selected pipe runs and mechanical equipment display in red.

3 On the Options Bar, click Sizing. IMPORTANT Remember that the Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. 4 In the Pipe Sizing dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Sizing Method, select Friction, and enter 2.50 FT/100ft. Select And, and enter 8 FPS for Velocity. Under Constraints, select Match Connector Size for Branch Sizing, and that Restrict Size is cleared. Match Connector Size matches the pipe to the connector size of the mechanical equipment to which the branch is connected. Click OK.

The sized pipe runs are sized. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. The most common cause of these errors is that the pipe usually has insufficient space to be created. Either relocate the system components, select a different layout solution, or manually modify the pipe. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. 5 Zoom in and confirm the pipe sizing.

250 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

Notice that the branch sizing used the size information from the connector on the fin-tube radiator and not from the connector on the main pipe. This is because you selected Match Connector Size for branch sizing.

6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Piping to make it the active view. 7 Validate the sized pipe geometry.

8 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 9 In the Save As dialog, enter Pipe Sizing - Friction & Velocity Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you sized the supply and return pipe runs using both the Friction and Velocity sizing methods. You also specified branch sizing that was different than the main pipe sizing. In the next exercise, you place the circulator pumps for the supply pipe runs.

Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Methods | 251

Placing Circulator Pumps
In this exercise, you place 2 in-line circulator pumps on the hydronic supply pipe runs that you sized. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Placing Circulator Pumps.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Piping to make it the active view.

Tile the views 2 With the 3D Piping view active, click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. This closes all windows that you previously opened during the current design session. Note that if this option is unavailable, the active view is the only open window. 3 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 2 - Piping to make it the active view. 4 Enter WT to tile both windows. TIP When tiling 2 views, the active view is tiled to the left. 5 Adjust the view in both windows to view the boiler and connecting pipes as shown.

You place the pumps in the 2 - Piping view and validate the geometry and rotate the pumps in the 3D Piping view. Place in-line circulator pumps 6 In the 2 - Piping view, zoom in on the boiler and the 2 supply pipes to the left and right of the boiler. 7 On the Edit toolbar, click (Split).

8 Watch the listening dimensions, and make 2 splits on the left pipe 0' 3" from the upper and the lower elbow fittings as shown.

252 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

Notice that a pipe fitting is automatically inserted at each split. You can place your cursor over one and a tooltip and the Status Bar confirm the fitting.

9 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Split tool. 10 Click the pipe segment between the 2 splits. The selected pipe segment displays in red. 11 Press Delete to delete the pipe segment. Notice that the pipe fittings that were automatically inserted are also deleted.

12 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar, click Mechanical Equipment. 13 In the Type Selector, select In-line Circulator : Standard. 14 Place the cursor between the pipe openings and click to place the circulator pump. 15 Select the pump and click Rotate on the toolbar. 16 Flip the pump so that the motor is on the left. 17 Click Align on the toolbar and select the middle of the pipe above and the middle of the circulator connector. NOTE You must align the pump correctly in order to connect it to the pipes above and below.

Placing Circulator Pumps | 253

18 TIP If you need to reposition the circulator pump, drag the pump away from the pipe, and then move it over the pipe opening, and watch for the centerline snaps. You can also use the cursor keys or the Move tool for precise placement. 19 Press ESC twice. 20 In the 3D Piping view, notice that the pump is not located near the selection point.

Actually, the pump is on the selection point but at the default offset elevation. You need to specify the pump offset. 21 In the 2 - Piping view, click the pump. The selected pump displays in red. 22 On the Options Bar, click .

You can also right-click the pump, and select Element Properties. 23 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, enter -5 0 for Offset. This is the offset elevation of the horizontal pipe on which you are placing the pump. TIP To quickly view the pipe offset value, click the pipe segment. The offset appears on the Options Bar and in the drawing area. You can also open the Element Properties dialog to view the offset.

254 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

24 Click OK. The circulator pump is placed at the same offset as the horizontal pipe segment.

If the pump remains selected, click in the drawing area to clear the selection. Next, you connect the pump. TIP Sometimes a selected object remains selected (displays in red) after an action upon it has finished. To clear the selection, you can click in the drawing area, click Modify on the Design Bar, or press ESC. 25 In the 2 - Piping view, click the upper pipe segment to display the connectors. 26 Drag the pipe connector down toward the pump, and after the connector snap displays, release the mouse button to connect the pipe to the pump.

Notice that the necessary pipe fittings are automatically inserted. Also notice that the modified pipe segment remains selected after connecting to the pump. 27 Press ESC to clear the selection.

Placing Circulator Pumps | 255

28 Repeat this method to connect the lower pipe segment to the pump above.

After connecting the pump, you need to check connectivity. 29 Place the cursor over the pump, and press TAB. The pump and the pipe segments highlight indicating that they are physically connected.

30 Using the methods that you just learned, connect the circulator pump the services the right side of the supply pipe, and check connectivity. Make certain that you align the right pump to the left.

Next, you rotate the pumps so that the motor is located as the top.

256 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

31 With the 2 - Piping and the 3D Piping views tiled, click in the 3D Piping view to make it active. 32 Adjust the view so that both circulator pumps are in the view.

33 Click the left pump to display rotation controls.

34 Click the rotation control on the right.

Placing Circulator Pumps | 257

The pump rotates 90 degrees to the right.

35 Using the method that you just learned, rotate the right pump so that motor is at the top. The in-line circulator pumps are rotated.

Assign the pumps to the supply system 36 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar, click System Browser. You can also press F9. 37 In the System Browser, do the following:
■ ■

Expand the Unassigned folder. Expand the Piping folder, right-click Hydronic Supply and click Expand All to view all of the system components assigned to Hydronic Supply 1 system.

Notice that the 2 circulator pumps are in the Unassigned folder. As you learned in previous exercises, you must assign all system components (mechanical equipment, and so on) that you placed to a system. Immediately after placement, Revit MEP associates the unassigned components with a default system in order to perform calculations. These unassigned components are located

258 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

in the Unassigned folder in the System Browser. After you assign the components to a system, they move to their respective system folder. You need to assign the 2 circulator pumps to the hydronic supply system. 38 In the 3D Piping view, select the left supply pipe riser.

System tools display on the Options Bar. TIP You can select any system component or piping that has been assigned to a system to access system tools on the Options Bar.

39 On the Options Bar, click

(Edit System).

The Edit System tab appears on the Design Bar providing various system editing tools.

NOTE Do not click . You use this tool to add mechanical equipment that is located upstream in a system, such as VAV boxes, boilers and AC units. If you use this tool, the boiler will be considered unassigned and it will move to the Unassigned folder. 40 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar, click Add To System. System components that were not assigned for this system are grayed out. Notice that the cursor changes to indicate that Add To System is active. 41 Click the left and right circulator pumps to add them to the supply hydronic system.

Placing Circulator Pumps | 259

Notice that the pumps moved from the Unassigned folder in the System Browser to the Hydronic Supply 1 system listing in the Piping folder. This indicates that the pumps have been assigned to the supply hydronic system. They are now logically connected to the boiler and radiators. 42 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar, click Finish System. 43 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 44 In the Save As dialog, enter Placing Circulator Pumps Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you used tiled floor plan and 3D views to place 2 in-line circulator pumps for the hydronic supply piping system. You used the Split tool to open the pipe segments to accommodate the pumps and then you connected the pumps. You rotated the pumps in 2 different ways by pressing the Spacebar, and by clicking the rotation controls. Finally, you assigned the circulator pumps to the supply hydronic system and confirmed the assignments in the System Browser. In the next exercise, you inspect the hydronic piping systems for flow and pressure.

Inspecting Piping Systems
In this exercise, you use the System Inspector to inspect the level 2 hydronic piping system. The System Inspector is a unique tool enabling you to inspect each piping system for flow, pressure, and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. Using the System Inspector, you can immediately target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Inspecting Piping Systems.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 2 - Piping to make it the active view. 2 Right-click in the view, click Zoom in Region from the context menu. 3 Draw a zoom on the boiler in the Mechanical/Electrical room. You will inspect the hydronic supply system. 4 Select the boiler. System tools appear on the Options Bar. You select the boiler because you assigned it to the hydronic supply system. NOTE To select a system, select any pipe segment, fitting, mechanical equipment, and so on that you have assigned to a system. System tools display on the Options Bar.

5 On the Options Bar, click

(Inspect).

6 In the Select a System dialog, select Hydronic Supply 1, and click OK. The System Inspector tab opens providing inspection tools on the Design Bar. IMPORTANT If you select a system component that has been assigned to multiple systems such as a boiler, the Select System dialog opens enabling you to select the system to inspect. You can click a system in the dialog and the system highlights in red enabling you to preview it. 7 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar, click Inspect.

260 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

NOTE You can also use System Inspector from within the System Browser. Right-click a system from the System Browser, and click Inspect from the context menu. After the System Inspector activates, click Inspect from the System Inspector tab on the Design Bar. 8 Place the cursor over the boiler to inspect system information pertaining to the boiler. The boiler highlights and an inspection flag dynamically reports the section number, flow, and pressure information including pressure loss. A tooltip also displays this system information. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system.

IMPORTANT As you inspect a system, remember that all information is color coded according to pressure. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction, also known as the critical path. As you inspect, notice that the assigned system components highlight and can be inspected but you cannot inspect system components that have not been assigned to the selected system. Next, you inspect 2 areas of the selected piping system to compare system information. Compare system information 9 Place the cursor over the left pipe segment above the pump, and click to temporarily place the inspection flag on the segment. 10 Move the cursor over the right pipe segment above the pump to compare the flow and pressure information with that of the left pipe segment.

Inspecting Piping Systems | 261

11 Click to place the current inspection flag and close the prior one. 12 Move the cursor over one of the circulation pumps, click and compare its information with that of the right pipe segment. 13 Click in the view to close the current inspection flag. You can also inspect systems in a 3D view. 14 With the System Inspector activated and the Hydronic Supply 1 system selected, double-click the 3D Piping view, and inspect a fin-tube radiator.

Continue to use this method to inspect and compare inspection information for system components and pipe across the selected Hydronic Supply 1 system. Remember that you can switch between the floor plan and 3D views without closing the System Inspector.

262 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

15 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Inspector to deactivate the System Inspector. 16 Using the methods that you learned, use the System Inspector and inspect the return piping systems in the project. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe, the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). 17 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 18 In the Save As dialog, enter Inspecting Piping Systems Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you used the System Inspector to inspect the flow direction, flow, and pressure information for the hydronic supply system in the project. You noticed that flow and pressure information is specific to the selected system component, and that all system information is color-coded for either the main or the branch. You also compared system information across a system. In the next exercise, you check the piping systems.

Checking Piping Systems
Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure, and for pipe sizing. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design, you need to validate them. In this exercise, you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to immediately check these connections for all systems throughout your project, and quickly target those systems that need attention. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Checking Piping Systems.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder.

Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, double-click the 2 - Piping to make it the active view. 2 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar, click Check Pipe Systems. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. A warning appears, but does apply to the piping system. The piping system is logically and physically valid. However, check system warnings may occur. As a tutorial exercise, you check the air systems to view check systems warnings. NOTE If the Piping tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and click Piping. 3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Check Duct Systems. Warnings display. Notice that these warnings indicate that the default systems are “not empty.”

Checking Piping Systems | 263

4 NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system, the pipe is now associated with that system. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations, and for pipe sizing. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is the “default system is not empty” warning. As you learned when placing fin-tube radiators, all system components must be assigned to a system immediately after placement. If you place radiators without assigning them to a system, Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them, thus assigning the components to a system. After you assign the system components to a system, Revit MEP places them in their assigned systems folder and removes them from the Unassigned folder. After you have assigned all system components for the project to their systems, the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display “not empty” warnings. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. This occurs because the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors), and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. For example, you assigned a fin-tube radiator to a supply hydronic system but the same radiator has a return system connector that you have not assigned to a system. In the System Browser, the fin-tube radiator is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Return system in the Unassigned folder. Next, you open the System Browser to view the unassigned air system components and the associated default air systems. Then, you confirm the validity of the assigned piping system components and systems. Next, you confirm the system component assignments. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 5 Click Window menu ➤ System Browser to open the System Browser. TIP You can press F9 (or Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. If the System Browser does not respond, click in the drawing area to make it active, then press F9. Because you assigned all piping components, you will check the unassigned air system components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm default system assignments. 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, double-click 2 - Mech to make it the active view. 7 Expand the Unassigned folder and notice that both Default Return Air and Default Exhaust Air systems are listed. 8 Expand Default Return Air and notice the air terminals and mechanical equipment that were automatically assigned to the Default Return Air system. 9 Right-click Default Return Air, and click Show to view all of the unassigned system components.

264 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

The red lines represent the default logical connection. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views.

TIP If you have multiple views open, you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views, otherwise, click Close. 10 Using the same methods, confirm the unassigned system components in the Default Exhaust Air system. Now that you confirmed all of the unassigned component for the default air systems, you confirm the piping system assignments. 11 Click Window menu ➤ Floor Plan: 2 - Piping to make it the active view. 12 In the System Browser, collapse the Unassigned folder and expand the Piping folder. 13 Right-click Hydronic Supply, and click Expand All. The supply system that you created, Hydronic Supply 1 is listed along with the boiler, fin-tube radiators and the circulator pumps that you assigned to this system. Notice that the system contains a system type and an assigned number.

Checking Piping Systems | 265

a boiler. enter Checking Piping Systems Training for File name. For pipe offset. In the lesson. You validated rigid pipe connections and geometry using floor plan. and click Save. In this exercise. In this tutorial. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical duct or pipe 266 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . you created a supply air system and a hydronic piping system. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 hydronic piping system. specify 9' 9" for the supply and 9' 3" for the return pipe offset elevation. For additional practice.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder under Training Files. and section views. the creation and modification methods remained the same. You have completed the level 2 piping systems for the building. it is a valid system without problems. Finally. click File menu ➤ Save. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. 17 In the Save As dialog. The piping system that you designed did not return any check system warnings. and fin-tube radiators. you checked the logical and physical connections for the system using Check Pipe Systems. you created a hydronic piping system consisting of a supply and return pipe runs. Use the same piping system components that you used for level 2.Piping view and filter the visibility of objects as needed. 16 If you want to save your work. Depending on your air systems design. circulator pumps. 3D. confirm the system and the system assignments for the hydronic return system. This completes the Designing Piping Systems lesson. you may need to assign these system components to their proper systems. 15 Using the methods that you learned. To view the completed mechanical systems for the tutorial including the level 2 hydronic piping system. Each was a completely different mechanical system that consisted of different system components however. open the i Completed Mechanical Systems. navigate to the folder of your choice. Design the system in the 1 .14 Right-click Hydronic Supply 1. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. you used the Check Pipe Systems tool and the System Browser to validate the level 2 supply and return hydronic piping systems that you created. You inspected the logical systems using System Inspector and the System Browser. You also confirmed that the air terminals and mechanical equipment for the return and exhaust air systems were unassigned as they were located in their respective default systems in the System Browser and “not empty” warnings were generated by Check Duct Systems.

rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder under Training Files. Explore different system designs. and see the results dynamically in views and design documents. This is the future of systems designing—Revit MEP 2009. Checking Piping Systems | 267 . This is the power BIM (Building Information Modeling).connections and creating logical systems. The completed mechanical systems are included in the i Completed Mechanical Systems. parametrically modify those designs. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new mechanical systems.

268 .

you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. 269 . If the tutorial datasets are not present. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. Preparing the Electrical Plan In this exercise you define the basic parameters for your electrical system. The datasets that you use to complete these exercises are located in the Training Files directory.rvt. In this lesson you specify electrical settings. click Reload From. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. NOTE The architectural model used with this tutorial is in the Architectural folder. However. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. Planning Electrical Systems The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. You can search the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded. You should maintain the relative path to the architectural model. The building contains a variety of spaces where you will design lighting and power systems.autodesk. However.Electrical Systems 6 In this tutorial. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you can click File menu ➤ Manage Links to reload the linked model. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. In this tutorial.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. if the link is lost. The first lesson consists of exercises that prepare your project for the types of systems that you will design in the following lesson. you learn to create electrical systems using a linked architectural model of a building project. you can choose to save your work. On the Revit tab on the Manage Links dialog. and select i Office Building. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the dataset that Autodesk provides. and create schedules that you will need to design the electrical systems for your project. load the families containing the electrical components that will make up your electrical system. and select the component families that you will use in the plan. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. go to http://www. navigate to Training Files ➤ Imperial ➤ Architectural. After finishing each exercise.

Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. as you place components and create circuits in your electrical plan. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Creating Electrical Views. click Add (below the table). and demand factors that you will use in your project. and ceiling plans for each have been prepared by duplicating architectural views. wiring. Lighting Plans where you will design lighting circuits. power distribution systems. All of Revit MEP’s electrical (and mechanical) components are designed with connectors. Electrical Ceiling Plans where you will place lighting fixtures. in the left pane. and make it possible for Revit MEP to perform calculations to assist you with your design. click the Training Files icon. the connectors for the ceiling-hosted lighting fixtures that you will place in spaces are above the ceiling level. Specify Electrical Settings 1 Electrical settings let you specify the voltages.The electrical settings determine the voltages. Click Settings menu ➤ Electrical Settings. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog. you can customize components and expand the library of electrical families. Revit MEP provides families of common electrical components that you place in your power and lighting plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and in the right pane. Connectors allow Revit MEP to maintain information about the systems that you create. wiring. Later. has been set to 10' 6" for the building used with these exercises. and demand factors that are applied in the design. distribution systems. Revit MEP checks to assure that those components are compatible with voltages and distribution systems that you specify here. Lighting. It is important that the connectors associated with components that you place in a view are within the View Range or level offset.rvt. As you develop more advanced skills working with Revit MEP. in the Element Properties dialog for Spaces. For example. 3 Click Wiring Types. You load the families that comprise the specific components that will be used in your electrical system. This allows the illuminance of the lighting fixtures to be considered when calculating required lighting levels. For this reason. the Limit Offset. expand Wiring. power. 4 Specify the following parameters for this wire type as follows: Parameter Name Material Temperature Rating Insulation Max Size Value CU-THWN Copper 75 THWN 500 270 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . then applying the appropriate template to each plan: ■ ■ ■ Power plans where you will place electrical devices and equipment and design power circuits.

you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. click Voltage Definitions.00 V 480.00 V 220.00V 277.00V 260.00 V Preparing the Electrical Plan | 271 .Parameter Neutral Multiplier Neutral Required Neutral Size Conduit Type Value 1.00 V 220.00 V 490. the numeric value in the Value column is the actual voltage used for calculations involving this definition. By specifying a range. Verify that voltage definitions have been specified with the following parameters: Name 120 208 240 277 480 Value 120.00 V Minimum 110.00 V Maximum 130. 6 The Voltage Definitions table is where you specify a range of voltages that will be used with your Voltage Definitions. many components intended for use in a 120V circuit are rated anywhere from 110V to 130V. For example.00 V 250.0 selected Hot Conductor Steel 5 In the tree view.00 V 240.00 V 460.00V 280.00 V 200.00 V 208. Regardless of the Name value for a voltage definition.

For example. NOTE Revit MEP does not prevent specifying unfeasible voltage values. click Distribution Systems.Voltage definitions can be deleted only if they are not currently in use with any distribution system. even though this is physically impossible. 8 In the right pane. 7 In left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. you could specify a distribution system with a L-L Voltage value of 120 and an L-G Voltage value of 480. 272 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . verify that distribution systems have been specified with the following parameters: Name 120/208 Wye 120/240 Single 480/277 Wye Phase Three Single Three Configuration Wye None Wye Wires 4 3 4 L-L 208 240 480 L-G 120 120 277 Distribution systems can be deleted only if they are not currently assigned to any devices.

000VA. applying different Demand Factors to Lighting. The particular system for which Demand Factors are applied is selected from the Load Classification drop-down list.000VA 10. this type of system (High. Preparing the Electrical Plan | 273 . You can specify one or more Demand Factors.NOTE Although it is possible to specify a distribution system with a Configuration value of Delta and a Wire value of 4. For this exercise.000VA 3. at any given time. You can Split the default range to create several load ranges for a particular system and apply a different demand factor to each range. 10 Click OK. a 50% demand factor to loads between 3000VA and 10.000VA. HVAC.000VA 10. Demand Factor (%) specifies the anticipated a percentage of full rated load that will exist at any given time for the specified range. 9 Click Demand Factors. or Wild leg) is currently not supported in Revit MEP because there is no way to specify the high leg voltage.000VA Demand Factor 100% 50% 30% The settings in this example apply a 100% demand factor to loads less than 3000VA. you can specify the following parameters for a building lighting system: More Than Less Than 3. Less Than specifies the upper limit of a range of loads. For example. Red. or Other systems in your project based on their load. only a portion of the electrical equipment will be drawing at its full rated load. More Than and Less Than values define the range for the associated Demand Factor: ■ ■ ■ More Than specifies the lower limit of a range of loads. Demand factors let you adjust the rating of the main service for a building based on the expectation that. Power. leave the default settings as shown here. and a 30% demand factor for loads greater than 10.

Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family.rfa.rfa 18 Using the same method. 13 Select Lighting Switches. 14 Using the same method.rfa Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . distribution systems. you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. reopen Electrical Components ➤ Electrical Equipment ➤ Panelboard folder. and click Open. they were added to the Families in the Project Browser. As an alternative. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level). NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. expand Electrical Components ➤ Lighting Devices. conference rooms. In this exercise. and established the parameters for your wiring. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. restrooms. and demand factors. 19 Open the Electrical Components ➤ Lighting Fixtures folder and load the Troffer Corner Insert. then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. selected components for your electrical systems.rfa. expand Families. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. voltages. As you loaded each of the component families. Later. and load Duplex Receptacle. you can load from the components from that location. 274 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .rfa family. Defining Required Lighting Levels on page 274.480V MCB . Defining Required Lighting Levels In this exercise you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building. 12 In the Open dialog. you prepared views specifically for your power and lighting plans. A Lighting Devices ➤ Lighting Switches folder.208V MLO . 15 Click Open. 17 Using the same method. has also been added under Lighting Device. 20 You can save the open file if you wish. because the key is linked to your new project parameter. and so on). In this case the key style is the type of space and. in the Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels exercise. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. reopen Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. 16 In the Project Browser.rfa.480-208Y120 . An Electrical Fixtures ➤ Duplex Receptacle folder containing receptacles has been added to the families currently available for your design.Surface.Load component families 11 NOTE The components used throughout this tutorial have been copied from the Imperial Library to the i families sub-folder. Particular lighting levels are generally specified for different types of spaces (offices.Surface. its value becomes to the Required Lighting Level. and load the following families: ■ ■ Lighting and Appliance Panelboard .NEMA Type 2. containing several switch types. reopen Electrical Components ➤ Electrical Equipment ➤ Transformer folder. and load Dry Type Transformer .

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans. Defining Required Lighting Levels | 275 . click Add. For Type.Open the provided dataset. and when the cross-hairs display. Create a Required Lighting Level parameter 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. you must first create a parameter that will hold the value for the lighting requirement. Under Categories. For Group. The new Required Lighting Level parameter is added to the list in the Project Parameters dialog and is now an instance parameter for Spaces under Electrical . double-click 1 . click to select the space. For Discipline. click the Training Files icon. Select Instance. Under Parameter Data. To verify this. move the cursor over the office in the upper-left corner. you can look at the properties for one of the spaces. as described below. Before you can specify a lighting requirement for the spaces within your project. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog. enter Required Lighting Level for Name.Lighting to make it the active view. select Electrical. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Defining Lighting Levels. Verify the new parameter 5 In the Project Browser. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select Electrical-Lighting. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Project parameter is selected for Parameter Type. select Spaces.Lighting in the Space Element Properties dialog. 4 Click OK twice. select Illuminance. 6 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The new parameter you have just created applies to all spaces in the project.

276 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . and click Add to add this field to the Scheduled fields (in order) list. The key schedule displays in the drawing area. NOTE Schedules can be used as a design interface (Key schedule) as well as a documentation tool (Schedule building components).7 On the Options Bar. 10 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ Select Spaces for Category. click New 8 times to add 8 rows in the key schedule. there are many spaces in this project that have similar lighting requirements. enter Lighting Levels. ■ ■ ■ The Shedule Properties dialog displays. Enter lighting level requirements in the key schedule 14 On the Options Bar. Click OK. one for each type of space in the building. select Required Lighting Level from the Available fields list. click (Properties). enter Space Lighting Requirements. 11 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. You determine the type of schedule by clicking Schedule building components or Schedule keys in the New Schedule dialog when creating a new Schedule/Quantities view. You could use your new parameter to enter a Required Lighting Level value in the Element Properties dialog for each space. However. 12 Click OK. and it is more efficient to create a key schedule and use it to assign Required Lighting Level values based on space type. For Key Name. This name will appear as the title for the resulting schedule. Lighting Levels is added as a new instance parameter for the space component. Create a key schedule 9 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities.Lighting category. For Name. In the Element Properties dialog. 8 Click Cancel. NOTE You can double-click column dividers to auto-fit column width to its content. 13 Drag column borders horizontally to the desired column width. The value that you specify for each Key Name in the schedule will be used to determine the required lighting level for each space type. your new Required Lighting Level parameter is now listed under Instance Parameters in the Electrical . The new rows are added with 1 through 8 as the default Key Names. Click Schedule keys.

scroll down to the Identity Data category. You can change the sort keys for the schedule. under Instance Parameters. 16 Zoom in on the large open area (not the main entrance) in the center of the floor plan. and for Lighting Levels parameter. In the Project Browser. then right-click. and click Element Properties. and select Open Office. click . the Key Schedule should looks like this: TIP Your entries are automatically sorted alphabetically by Key Name. in the Element Properties dialog. click View Properties and. under Instance Parameters edit the Sort/Grouping parameter. 17 Move the cursor over the space until a cross-hair displays. right-click in the Space Lighting Requirements schedule.Enter a space type in the Key Name column and a corresponding lighting level in the Required Lighting Level column for the different types of spaces in the project. double-click the 1 . according to the values in the following table: Space Type Private Office Open Office Main Entrance Lounge Restroom Conference Elec/Mech Stair/Circulation Required Lighting Level (fc) 30 45 45 25 30 35 20 20 When completed. Defining Required Lighting Levels | 277 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans. Assign space keys to the spaces in the project 15 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Element Properties dialog.Lighting floor plan to make it the active view.

Lighting 1 .Lighting. continue applying Lighting Level keys to the remaining spaces in 1 . then right-click one of the selections.Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 . the value that you entered for this space type in the key schedule.Lighting 1 . 21 Using the same method. 20 Click OK. and notice that the value for Required Lighting Level is now 45 fc.Lighting category.Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 .Lighting and apply Lighting Level keys to the remaining spaces in the project according to the following table: TIP You can select multiple spaces of the same type and set the Lighting Level parameter from the same Element Properties dialog.Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 . While pressing Ctrl. and click Element Properties to open the Element Properties for the selected spaces.Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 .Lighting Number 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 Name Office 101 Office 102 Office 103 Open 104 Mens Room 105 Elec/Mech 106 Ladies Room 107 Office 108 Office 109 Office 110 Office 111 Office 112 Office 113 Stairwell 114 Office 115 Office 116 Office 117 Key Name Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Restroom Mech/Elec Restroom Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Stair/Circulation Private Office Private Office Private Office 278 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . then open 2 .19 Scroll up to the Electrical .Lighting 1 . Office). The value is grayed out and cannot be edited because you associated this parameter with the Key Name specified by the Space Lighting Requirements key schedule.Lighting 1 . select multiple spaces of the same type (for example. Level 1 .Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 .

Lighting 2 .Level 1 .Lighting 2 .Lighting Number 121 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 Name Main Entrance 121 Office 201 Office 202 Office 203 Open 204 Mens Room 205 Elec/Mech 206 Ladies Room 207 Lounge 208 Office 209 Office 210 Office 211 Office 212 Stairwell 213 Conference Room 214 Office 215 Office 216 Key Name Main Entrance Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Restroom Mech/Elec Restroom Lounge Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Stair/Circulation Conference Private Office Private Office 22 You can save the open file if you wish. You can use a key schedule to specify more than one parameter for a component.Lighting 2 . and select both Required Lighting Level and Temperature as parameters. In this exercise you created a new project parameter and used it in a key schedule to specify a parameter value (Required Lighting Level) for the spaces in your project.Lighting 2 . 24 Proceed to the next exercise.Lighting 2 . a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Now the key schedule will have one column for Required Lighting Level and another for Temperature where you can specify values Defining Required Lighting Levels | 279 . if required.Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 . 23 Click File menu ➤ Close.Lighting 2 . you could create a key schedule named Space Variables.Lighting 2 . Assigning Space Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels on page 280.Lighting 2 . NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 . For example.Lighting 2 .

for Title.according to space type. and click OK to dismiss the alert message. The color scheme for the Level 1 floor plan should now look something like the image below.rvt. 4 In the New Color Scheme dialog. select Required Lighting 10 Click OK. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. 280 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 12 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Required Lighting Levels. Assigning Space Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. click Color Scheme Legend. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists on the space components. Activate color fill 1 In the Project Browser. selecting a space type for your new Space Variables parameter in a space’s Element Properties dialog will specify values for both parameters according to the key schedule. click Edit/New. Open the provided dataset. 9 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ (Duplicate). Space color fills can be helpful as a design tool and as a design communications document. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Space Color Fills.Lighting floor plan to make it the active view. click the Training Files icon. specify the following Type Parameters: ■ ■ Under Graphics. For Color Scheme. Consequently. 15 Drag the color scheme legend preview to the lower-left corner of the plan. 6 For Color. 11 Right-click the color scheme legend. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and place it in the drawing. double-click the 1 . 13 In the Type Properties dialog. 8 On the Drafting tab on the Design Bar. and click 5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 14 Click OK twice. select Spaces for Category. For Space Type. select Underline. Under Title Text. In this exercise you will create a space color fill using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. for Name. and click OK. 7 Click OK. select Required Lighting Level. and click Element Properties. select Spaces. as described below. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans. select Show Title. enter Required Lighting.

Notice that the color scheme you created is still in effect. Color fills can be applied for any parameter that already exists for spaces. 17 Using the same method.Lighting floor plan the active view. or for any parameter that you want to create for a space (such as the Required Lighting Level parameter you created in the previous exercise).Lighting. as described below. activate the color scheme as you did for 1 . This is because the color scheme is a type within the project. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. You can have more than one color scheme in the project. Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels | 281 . Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels In this exercise you create a space lighting analysis schedule that you will use as a check document rather than as a construction document.16 Make the 2 . Color fill plans can be useful as design documents and as communication documents to show other team members design intent while the project is in the design phases. 19 Click File menu ➤ Close.5 fc range specified in the schedule. you will refer to the schedule to assure that the lighting level falls within the +/. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. Open the provided dataset. but only one per view. Your schedule will compare the actual lighting levels in each space against the required lighting levels that you specified in the Defining Required Lighting Levels exercise. 18 You can save the open file if you wish. Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels on page 281. As you place lighting fixtures in the spaces in your project.

Verify that Itemize every instance is selected. select Electrical. scroll down the Available fields list. enter Lighting Delta. For Name. click the Training Files icon. click Calculated Value. double-click the following fields to add them to the Scheduled fields (in order) list: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Required Lighting Level Average Estimated Illumination Ceiling Reflectance Wall Reflectance Floor Reflectance Lighting Calculation Workplane Create a new schedule parameter 4 In the middle of the Schedule Properties dialog. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Space Schedule Lighting Requirements. 2 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. The Lighting Delta parameter is added to the Scheduled fields list. Click OK. select Number.Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Required Lighting Level. For Discipline. enter Average Estimated Illumination . For Formula. NOTE Formulas are case sensitive 6 Click OK.rvt. Verify that Ascending is selected. 3 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. select Illuminance. Create space lighting analysis schedule 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 282 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . enter Space Lighting Analysis Verify that Schedule building components is selected. select Spaces. For Type. 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. 7 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by.

For Value. 14 On the Formatting tab. under Fields. under fields. click the red color chip. 10 In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Field. and click Field Format. 18 Click OK. 9 Click Conditional Format. Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels | 283 . specify rounding to 2 decimal places for the Wall Reflectance and Floor Reflectance fields. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 17 Using the same method. 16 Click OK. 19 You can save the open file if you wish. 13 Click OK twice. select Lighting Delta. select Lighting Delta. select 2 decimal places. 15 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. 12 In the Color dialog. verify that Fixed is selected.8 On the Formatting tab. select Not Between. under Basic colors. enter -5 fc and +5 fc in the text boxes. 11 Click the Background Color chip. For Rounding. For Test. select Ceiling Reflectance. For Units.

and click Unhide All Columns to restore the hidden columns. The schedule will be used to check the actual design against the design requirements that were specified in a previous exercise. Designing the Electrical System In this lesson you use the views and schedules that you created in Lesson 1 to place electrical devices. and these areas will not be lighted. As a result. electrical equipment.20 Click File menu ➤ Close. 2 Right click in the Required Lighting Level column. Adding Lighting Fixtures In this exercise you add lighting fixtures throughout your project.5 fc range that you specified in the Conditional Formatting dialog. Once the equipment is in place. Average Estimated Lighting. you created a schedule that you will refer to as you add lighting fixtures to the project. You can also see that the Lighting Delta has been calculated for each of the occupied spaces. 3 Repeat the previous step to hide the Ceiling Reflectance. and make connections to electrical equipment. NOTE Right-click a heading. the key schedule that you created in the previous lesson serves as a tool to verify that the design meets each space’s lighting requirement. Place the initial lighting fixture 1 In the Project Browser. and lighting fixtures throughout your building project. you will create power and lighting circuits. these spaces appear in the Space Lighting Analysis schedule. and Lighting Delta columns should remain visible in the schedule. 284 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click the Training Files icon. This type of schedule can be useful as a method for checking design components in the project. and Lighting Calculation Workplane columns. As you select and place lighting fixtures. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Adding Lighting Fixtures. Designing the Electrical System on page 284. However. Open the provided dataset. and in every case the Lighting Delta field is red. and click Hide Column(s) to hide that column. This is because the value is not within the +/. expand Schedules/Quantities. This is because you have not yet added lighting fixtures to any of the spaces. Only the Number. and double-click Space Lighting Analysis to open the schedule created in the previous lesson. as described below. In the left pane of the Open dialog. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 21 Proceed to the next lesson. The schedule that you have just created shows the Average Estimated Illumination level for all of the spaces as 0.rvt. In this exercise. Floor Reflectance. there is no required lighting level specified. Wall Reflectance. NOTE Space components are placed in chases and plenums to permit reliable heating and cooling load analysis. Name.

and the ceiling grid is not visible in a floor plan view. 9 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. 6 In the Project Browser. click Tile. NOTE A preview of the lighting fixture is not displayed until you move the cursor over a ceiling. and move the cursor into the ceiling plan view. It is not necessary to align the lighting fixture to the grid in this step. zoom in to the upper-left corner of the plan. under Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Ceiling Plans. 7 On the Windows menu. click Lighting Fixture. 8 In the 1 . double-click 1 . select Troffer Corner Insert : 2x4 3 Lamp. You cannot place this type of lighting fixture in a non-ceiling location. 5 Resize the view containing the schedule to show only the 4 remaining columns. Adding Lighting Fixtures | 285 . In the next step you will use the Move command to snap the fixture to a ceiling grid intersection. click to place the lighting fixture in the ceiling as shown.Ceiling Elec view.4 On the Windows menu. and arrange the windows as shown.Ceiling Elec to make it the active view. 11 With the cursor in the space in the upper-left corner of the plan. You need to add lighting fixtures in a ceiling plan because you want to align the lighting fixtures to the ceiling grid. click Close Hidden Windows. 10 In the Type Selector.

click to specify the start point. 14 Move the cursor over the lower-left corner of the lighting fixture. and when Endpoint displays. 15 Move the cursor over an intersection of the ceiling grid lines where you want to place the fixture. and click when Intersection displays. select it. click (Move). 13 Zoom in on the lighting fixture. 286 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . and on the Toolbar.12 Click Modify.

Copy and place additional lighting fixtures 16 Select the lighting fixture. This will let you place multiple copies of the lighting fixture after selecting a start point. as shown. and on the toolbar. and then select ceiling grid intersections as the destination move endpoints to place 5 copies of this fixture in the 3 offices in the upper left area of level 1. the Lighting Delta for Office 101 is closer to the required +/. (Copy). click 17 On the Options Bar. 18 Select the lower-left Endpoint of the lighting fixture as the start point.In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule.5 fc. Adding Lighting Fixtures | 287 . select Multiple.

The Average Estimated Illumination for Office 101. and in the Type Selector.5 fc range. you decide to replace one of the 3-lamp fixtures in each space with a 2-lamp fixture. press Shift while clicking the component to remove it as a selection. but is still not within the +/.Ceiling Elec. To adjust the illumination level downward. If you select a component inadvertently. and 103 is now nearer the required lighting level target of 30 fc. TIP You can select multiple components by pressing Ctrl while selecting components in a drawing. Point by point analysis is not currently supported. 102. Change lighting fixture type 20 In 1 . 288 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . select one of the lighting fixtures in each space. NOTE Average Estimated Illumination levels are calculated using the lumen method for lighting calculations.Check the illumination levels against the Space Lighting Analysis schedule 19 Check the Average Estimated Illumination and Lighting Delta in the Space Lighting Analysis schedule. select Troffer Corner Insert : 2x4 2Lamp. so the Lighting Delta column remains red for these spaces.

You can perform the following steps to complete this exercise. check the Average Estimated Illumination and Lighting Delta in the Space Lighting Analysis schedule.Ceiling Elec and 2 . The Average Estimated Illumination is now within the +/. continue placing 2-lamp and 3-lamp lighting fixtures in the remaining spaces in the 1 .5 fc range. Use the Space Lighting Analysis schedule to determine when the lighting levels are within the specified range. placing lighting fixtures in the remaining Level 1 and Level 2 spaces or you can close this dataset. Plenum and chase spaces will be blank. Adding Lighting Fixtures | 289 . Completed lighting layouts for Level 1 and Level 2 should appear similar to those shown below along with the Space Lighting Analysis schedule. 22 Using the same method. and verify that the lighting levels are now within the specified range. only the Mechanical/Electrical spaces (without ceilings) will have a red background in the Space Lighting Analysis schedule. and go on to the next exercise.21 Again. The lighting fixtures are all placed in the next dataset.Ceiling Elec views. Level 1 NOTE Lighting fixtures were not added to the Mechanical/Electrical spaces. When you are finished.

right-click one of the headings. and click Unhide All Columns.Level 2 23 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule. 290 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .

and how to verify the lighting layout using the schedule that you created as a design tool in Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels on page 281. and click Properties. 2 In the Element Properties dialog. and click to place the switch. Open the provided dataset.Lighting to make it the active view. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. double-click 1 . Placing Lighting Switches on page 291. Placing Lighting Switches | 291 . 11 Position the switch preview on the interior wall of the space as shown. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. under Instance Parameters. In this exercise. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Placing Switches. as described below.With the exception of the 2 Mechanical/Electrical spaces. right-click 1 . 9 On the Options Bar. Turn off the color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Using the same method. you learned how to place lighting fixtures in ceiling plans. Placing Lighting Switches In this exercise you add switches for the lighting fixtures in your project. turn off the color scheme on level 2. 8 In the Type Selector. click Device. 4 Click OK twice. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 25 Click File menu ➤ Close. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. 24 You can save the open file if you wish. click the Training Files icon. your Lighting Delta column for all of the spaces should be white. verify that (Place on Vertical Face) is selected. Place switches in spaces 6 In the Project Browser. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. select Lighting Switches : Single Pole. it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. click in the Value column for Color Scheme.rvt. Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host. click (none). under Schemes for the Spaces Category.Lighting. 10 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the building and move the cursor along the right wall of space 101. The procedure for placing switches is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. 7 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar.

and place a 3-way switch on the open office side of the upper restroom wall as shown. click Device. 14 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan.Lighting view as shown.12 Continue placing switches of this type in the remaining spaces in the 1 . 292 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . Level 1 13 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. select Lighting Switches : Three Way. and in the Type Selector.

15 Zoom in on the stairwell at the lower-right corner of the plan. select Lighting Switches : Four Way. and place one 3-way switch on the wall inside the stairwell near the door to the open office. 17 Place a 4-way switch near the exit door on the right side of the stairwell as shown. Placing Lighting Switches | 293 . and place another 3-way switch on the wall of the open office outside of the stairwell. 16 In the Type Selector. as shown.

place a 4-way switch near each end of the curved wall as shown. 21 On the Design Bar. double-click 2 .18 In the open office area. and in the Type Selector. 294 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .Lighting to make it the active view. select Lighting Switches : Three Way. 20 In the Project Browser. 22 Place a 3-way switch on the open office wall near the stairwell in the upper-left corner of the plan as shown. 19 Click Modify. click Device.

as shown. placing lighting switches in the remaining Level 1 and Level 2 spaces or you can close this dataset. The lighting switches are all placed in the next dataset. and place a 3-way switch on the wall inside the stairwell near the door to the open office. in the Type Selector. and go on to the next exercise.23 Zoom in on the stairwell at the lower-right corner of the plan. click Device. and place single pole switches in second-floor offices and restrooms as shown. On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. and place another 3-way switch on the wall of the open office outside of the stairwell. Placing Lighting Switches | 295 . select Lighting Switches : Single Pole. 24 You can perform the following steps to complete this exercise.

Open the provided dataset. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The process is similar to placing switches as you did in the previous exercise. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. as described below. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Placing Receptacles.Power to make it the active view. click the Training Files icon. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. 26 Click File menu ➤ Close. Placing Power Receptacles on page 296.Level 2 25 You can save the open file if you wish. 1 In the Project Browser. Hide lighting components and specify view ranges 2 Right-click in the drawing area. 296 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . and click View Properties. and double-click 1 . a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Placing Power Receptacles In this exercise you will be placing receptacles that will be hosted by architectural components in the project. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. 27 Proceed to the next exercise.

clear Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. scroll down and. under Primary Range. enter 10' 0". under Instance Properties. click Device. and specify the top of the view range as 10' 0". 15 In the left side of the plan. 5 Click OK. select Duplex Receptacle : Standard. 14 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. for Top. 10 Using the same method. and edit the View Range to select Associated Level (Level 2). 6 In the Element Properties dialog.Power. place receptacles along the walls in the offices as shown. and for Offset. 8 Click OK twice. scroll down to View Range. zoom in to the upper-left corner of the view. 12 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. verify that (Place on Vertical Face) is selected. and click Edit. 16 Continue placing receptacles throughout the offices on Level 1 and Level 2 approximately as shown. Placing Power Receptacles | 297 . click Edit. on the Model Categories tab. edit the Visibility/Graphics Overrides for the view to hide lighting fixtures and lighting devices. 7 In the View Range dialog. 13 In the Type Selector. including the wall-based receptacles in the open office areas.3 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Properties. select Associated Level (Level 1).Power plan view. right-click 2 . Place wall-hosted receptacles 11 In the 1 . 9 In the Project Browser. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. under Instance Parameters.

1-Power 298 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .

click for Plane. select Duplex Receptacle : Standard. double-click 1 . and verify that Level : Level 1 is selected NOTE You can select a work plane from the Plane drop-down list on the Options Bar.Power. Placing Power Receptacles | 299 . 18 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar.2-Power Place floor-hosted receptacles 17 In the Project Browser. 21 Zoom in on the upper-right corner of the Open Office. and place a receptacle on the floor as shown. 19 In the Type Selector. 20 On the Options Bar. (Place on Work Plane). click Device. The current level is selected by default.

its connector is located below the level of the work plane. click . click (Copy). it is important that the connector be within the space to allow Revit MEP to maintain information about the electrical system and perform calculations for spaces in your design. select Multiple on the Options Bar and using the previous procedure. as shown. 26 Select an Endpoint on the receptacle as the start point. 27 Draw a pick box around the 4 floor-based receptacles. 24 On the Toolbar. Then you will create copies of the flipped receptacle to place the remaining floor-based receptacles.22 Click Modify. This will let you place multiple copies of the receptacle after selecting a start point. 23 Select the receptacle and click plane (within the space). In the next steps. place 2 copies of the flipped receptacles along the right side of the Level 1 open office. you will flip the work plane of the receptacle to locate the connector above the work plane. (Flip WorkPlane) to locate the connector above the work 25 On the Options Bar. Just as it was for ceiling hosted lighting fixtures. select Multiple. 300 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . and then place 3 copies of the receptacle in the upper right area of the first floor. When placing a receptacle on a work plane. as shown.

as shown.28 Draw a pick box around the 2 floor-based receptacles. as shown. and click on the Options Bar. Placing Power Receptacles | 301 . place 2 copies of the flipped receptacles below. . and to the left of the men’s restroom. select Multiple 29 Using the previous procedure.

Power floor receptacles.Power as shown.Power view. TIP You can select all of the floor-hosted receptacles in the 1 . and click Edit ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Current View.Power. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 33 Proceed to the next exercise.30 Using the same procedure. 31 You can save the open file if you wish. 302 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. place receptacles on the floor of the open office in 2 . 32 Click File menu ➤ Close. Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports on page 303. open 2 . Select all 1 . click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. then copy and paste them in the 2 .Power view.

and select Spaces. and for Name. Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports | 303 . 4 Click OK. as described below. enter Power & Lighting Usage.In this exercise you placed wall-hosted receptacles on the walls and floor-hosted receptacles on the floor. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 Verify that Schedule building components is selected. you can refer to this report rather than having to measure spaces and count fixtures. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Creating Usage Reports. With the introduction of local energy codes. under Available Fields. When the HVAC designer asks what the wattage/SF amounts are for different spaces. A schedule is created similar to the one shown. 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. click the Training Files icon. It is good to be familiar with this concept of placing hosted components. Open the provided dataset. Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports In this exercise you will create a consumption usage report for power and lighting in this project.rvt. 5 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. because it is quite common in Revit MEP. select and add the following fields to the Scheduled fields (in order) list in the order shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Area Actual Lighting Load Actual Power Load Actual Lighting Load/Area Actual Power Load/Area 6 Click OK. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. the amount of electricity consumed by different systems within the building is becoming increasingly important to the design. scroll down the Category list.

and work toward the higher voltage. 8 Click File menu ➤ Close. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical equipment. Placing Electrical Equipment on page 304. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. 304 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . The information in this schedule was produced using the data that you entered into the model. Placing Electrical Equipment In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan.7 You can save the open file if you wish. In this exercise you created a schedule that can be used as input for the HVAC engineers or as input for energy analysis and code review. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). 9 Proceed to the next exercise. you need to create logical connections to define the topology.

as described below.Open the provided dataset. 2 Zoom in on the Mechanical/Electrical space between the 2 restrooms. 3 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. 9 Click OK. Add a transformer 10 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. 11 In the Type Selector. click the Training Files icon. Right-click the panel. click Modify and select the panel you just placed. click Electrical Equipment. Add a panel 1 In the Project Browser. for Distribution Sys. and click to place the panel as shown. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Electrical . click Element Properties. select Electrical Equipment. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. and double-click 1 . and place the transformer in the Mechanical/Electrical space to the right of the panel as shown. under Instance Parameters. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Placing Electrical Equipment. In the left pane of the Open dialog. scroll down to the Electrical .Loads category. 5 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Type Selector.Power. 6 On the Options Bar. select 480-120-208V Dry Type Transformers : 45kVA. and for Panel Name. select 480/277 Wye. Placing Electrical Equipment | 305 .Loads. Name the new panel 7 With the panel still selected.rvt. TIP The Distribution System Types parameter is also accessible in the Element Properties dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. select 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . select 480/277 Wye for Distribution System Types. This will be where the primary electrical service enters the building.Surface : 250A. enter MDP to indicate Main Distribution Panel. click . scroll down the Instance Parameters and.

for Distribution Sys. you must also specify a Secondary Distribution System parameter. select 480/277 Wye. click . and on the Options Bar. 18 In the Type Selector. For Panel Name. and place the panel to the right of the transformer. scroll down to the Electrical . Since this is a transformer. scroll down to the Electrical . for Distribution Sys.Loads category. and for Panel Name. and on the Options Bar. 23 Click OK. 21 On the Options Bar. enter T1. under Instance Parameters. select 120/208 Wye. select Electrical Equipment. and specify the following: ■ ■ For Secondary Distribution System. 20 Select the panel you just placed. 14 On the Options Bar. Add another panel 17 On the Design Bar.Loads category.12 Click Modify 13 Select the transformer. click . 306 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 22 In the Element Properties dialog. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 Click OK. 19 Click Modify. select 208V MLO Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . enter L-1.Surface : 100A. under Instance Parameters. select 120/208 Wye.

In this case you are going to select something other than a panel. because the circuit on the mains of this panel is connected to a transformer rather than to another panel.Add panels and a transformer to second floor 24 Using the same method. and select panel H-2 for Panel. select panel L-2. add the following components in the Mechanical/Electrical space in the 2-Power view: ■ ■ ■ 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . The Bounding Box expands to enclose the transformer and panel L-2 and you will see temporary circuit indicating that the panel has been connected to the transformer. A Bounding Box displays as a dashed box surrounding the components that make up the circuit. 28 On the Options Bar. 29 Select the transformer T2.Surface : 100A named L-2 NOTE Remember to select the appropriate Distribution System Types parameter values for each equipment component. The temporary circuit displays Placing Electrical Equipment | 307 . click (Create Power Circuit). Create logical circuits between equipment 25 In the 2-Power view. . 26 On the Options Bar. and click 30 On the Options Bar. 27 Click (Select Panel).Surface : 250A named H-2 480-120-208V Dry Type Transformers: 45kVA named T2 208V MLO Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . select T2 for Panel to establish the connection between the L-2 panel and T2 transformer. click as shown. . including the Secondary Distribution System for T2.

and maximize the 1-Power view to make it easier to work with. indicating that a connection has been made between H-2 and MDP. 38 On the Options Bar. 308 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . A circuit is created between H-2 and MDP. The temporary circuit is displayed as shown. 34 In the 2-Power view. . and on the Options Bar. and click 39 Click . and select the MDP panel. select the L-1 panel. 36 Click anywhere in 1-Power view to make it the active view. 33 Zoom in on each view and scroll as necessary to display the Level 1 and Level 2 Mechanical/Electrical spaces side-by-side. 37 Close the 2-Power view.31 Close all open views except 1-Power and 2-Power 32 Click Window menu ➤ Tile to display both views in the drawing area. click 35 On the Option Bar. click . . select the H-2 panel. and select the T1 transformer as the panel.

lighting. click . and data systems. Dataset: ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Circuits are used for power. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. click the Training Files icon. Creating Power Circuitry | 309 . 44 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating Power Circuitry In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). Creating Power Circuitry on page 309. as described below. In this exercise you placed the electrical distribution equipment required for the project.40 Select the T1 transformer. and click 41 On the Options Bar. . Open the provided dataset. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. and select the MDP panel. 42 You can save the open file if you wish. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. You also defined how the pieces of electrical equipment are connected by creating logical connections between the different pieces of equipment. 43 Click File menu ➤ Close.

Temporary circuits are display as dashed lines between the components to indicate the interconnection of the devices that you selected for this circuit. load (180 VA).Power to make it the active view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. For now. 1 In the Project Browser. 310 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .■ Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Creating Power Circuitry. and voltage (120 V). and observe that the information displayed indicates the number of poles (#1).rvt. select all the receptacles in the corner office. 5 Select one of the receptacles in the corner office. and double-click 1 . leave the circuit as a temporary logical circuit. 3 While pressing Ctrl. The difference here is that you will have several components in the circuit. 2 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan. 4 On the Options Bar. Creating an electrical circuit to connect the devices (receptacles) in this view is similar to creating the electrical circuits in the previous exercise. You will add permanent wiring in a later exercise. click . The generate wiring controls ( ) let you create permanent wiring for the circuit.

7 Move the cursor over one of the receptacles in the corner office so that it is highlighted. 8 On the Options Bar. and select panel L-1 as the panel NOTE You can click a panel in the drawing area or select the panel name from the drop-down list on the Options Bar. (Select a Panel for the Circuit). the Specify Circuit Information dialog is displayed. click for this circuit. 9 Highlight one of the receptacles in the office. and click to select the circuit again. You use the Specify Circuit Information to specify the distribution system parameters for the circuit. The drop-down list on the Option Bar lists only those panels that are compatible with the circuit’s distribution system and have an available circuit.A question mark is displayed for this receptacle because no Label has been specified in the Type Properties for this particular receptacle type. Revit MEP will only let you make a connection between compatible components. Creating Power Circuitry | 311 . press Tab. 6 Click Modify. You cannot connect components having a different number of poles or a different voltage specified for the distribution system types. NOTE When all of the devices for the circuit have their distribution system specified as instance parameters. and press Tab.

1-#6. The editable parameters. The Edit Circuit tab is activated on the Design Bar. change the value from 20A to 50A. 11 On the Options Bar. will be discussed in a later exercise. and then scroll back down to Wire Size. and ground wiring. 13 Scroll down to the Wire Size parameter. 1-#12. click (Circuit Properties). 12 On the Edit Circuit toolbar. 1-#10. Notice that the Wire Size values have changed to 1-#6. click (Edit Circuit). In the Element Properties dialog for this circuit. Wire Type and Rating. In the next 2 steps you will see how parameters interact as Revit MEP calculates values for the circuit. neutral. all but the components in the circuit are dimmed. They cannot be edited because they are calculated according to the components in the circuit. These values are calculated based on the Rating and Voltage Drop values. The Voltage value for the circuit is 120V because all the receptacles and the panel in the circuit are 120V components. 14 Scroll back up to the Rating parameter. making it easy to identify the components that are part of the circuit group. 312 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .10 Click to select the circuit and all of the devices on the circuit. respectively for this circuit. which are the wire sizes for the load. The currently specified values are 1-#12. When editing a circuit. 1-#12. notice that most of the Instance Parameter values are grayed out.

zoom in to the upper part of the large open office. Add additional slots to panel 20 Right-click panel L-1. for the remaining groups of 4 floor-hosted receptacles. 24 After circuits have been created and assigned for all of the individual offices. These will be connected in a later exercise. click . 19 Close the warning message. 18 Select the receptacle in the stair well. click . . 23 Select the receptacle in the stairwell again. as previously described. 22 Click OK. click Cancel. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. scroll down to the Electrical . and then select panel L-1.Loads category. click . click . and select the 4 floor-mounted receptacles as shown. If you select L-1 in the drawing. Revit MEP displays a warning message indicating that adding this circuit group exceeds the number of available slots on panel L-1. 26 Continue creating circuits. 17 Continue selecting receptacles. and change the value for Max #1 Pole Breakers from 12 to 18. Panel L-1 is not listed on the drop-down list. and select panel L-1.15 Click Cancel to close the Element Properties dialog and cancel your changes. 16 On the Edit Circuit toolbar. creating power circuits. NOTE Do not create a circuit for the 5 wall-hosted receptacles on the walls in the large open area at this time. and assigning them to panel L-1 on a space-by-space basis for all of the offices around the perimeter of the building. Creating Power Circuitry | 313 . under Instance Parameters. You should now be able to create the circuit for the stairwell. click The circuit is created. and click Element Properties. 25 On the Options Bar. and add it to panel L-1. and try to select panel L-1.

Power to make it the active view. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Adding wiring to a project is optional. 31 You can save the open file if you wish. 32 Click File menu ➤ Close. notice that circuit descriptions have been automatically created based on information from the devices themselves. Although this panel is currently capable of supporting 18 circuits. Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires on page 314. Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires In this exercise you become more familiar with the wiring settings.27 Using the same procedures. you have assigned only 17. As you saw in the previous exercise. Finally. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. In the Edit Circuits dialog. create circuits in the 2 . and on the Options Bar. 30 Click OK. NOTE Do not create a circuit for the 5 wall-hosted receptacles on the walls in the large open area of Level 2 at this time. 28 Double-click 1 . you can create circuits and maintain the information associated with them without adding wiring to the project. 314 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . In this exercise you learned how to create circuit groups (circuits) and assign the circuits to panels. you learned how to add slots to a panel to accommodate circuits. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. These will be connected in a later exercise. click (Edit Circuits on Panel). 29 Select the L-1 panel. You also learned how voltage definitions and distribution systems determine the kinds of electrical systems that you can define for your project. Increase the number of circuits on panel L-2 to 18. Notice also that all the circuits have been assigned to a location on the panel.Power view and assign them to panel L-2. 33 Proceed to the next exercise.

Click 3 In the right pane. click Edit in the Value column. select Electrical Lighting Plan. in the Value column. click (Filter). re-select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires | 315 . and click OK. and for Offset. and for Offset. click the Training Files icon. select Electrical Plan . enter 3' 0" Under View Depth. right-click 1 . 6 Scroll down to Sub-Discipline. select <all>. and click OK. select Level Above. 13 In the Filter dialog. and in the New View Template dialog. for Top. for View Range. double-click 1 .Open the provided dataset. under View Properties. and click Apply View Template. 12 On the Options Bar. Only the lighting fixtures and switches on Level 1 should now be selected. 2 In the View Templates dialog: ■ ■ For Show Type. select Associated Level. select Lighting. and click OK. for Level. under Names. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Associated Level. enter -1' 0" For Bottom.Lighting to make it the active view. 8 In the Apply View Template dialog. enter Electrical Lighting Plan. enter 3' 0" 5 Click OK.rvt. For Names. click Check None to clear all the check boxes. 10 Zoom out so that the entire plan is visible. as shown. and for Offset. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans.Lighting. Create an Electrical Lighting Plan template for Lighting Views 1 Click Settings menu ➤ View Templates. Create lighting circuits 9 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Project Browser. as described below. 11 Draw a pick box around the plan to select everything. 4 In View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

This should generate a Warning message indicating that the load for the circuit exceeds 80% of the defined rating (20A). 16 Select all the light fixtures and switches in the large open office (Open 1) as shown.14 On the Options Bar. click (Undo) to undo the circuit creation. 15 Close the message window and. click . 316 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .

and wire segments on the path between the 2 switches. lighting fixtures. you can specify splined wiring. ground) in the wire run. Later. and then select panel MDP as the panel for the . Adjust the number of conductors in a path between switches 19 Select the 4-way switch at the left end of the curved wall. Tick marks (the short lines that intersect a wire run) indicate the number and type of conductors (load. click Check None. Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires | 317 . 21 In the Filter dialog. and click OK.17 On the Options Bar. Arc wiring is sometimes used to indicate wiring that is concealed within walls. press Tab. You can add or remove vertices from wires by right-clicking the wire and clicking Insert Vertex or Delete Vertex. or floors. neutral. When creating wires. 18 On the Options Bar. click circuit. In this step. when you create wiring manually. click . click (Filter). Chamfered wiring can be used to indicate wiring that is exposed. you add a conductor in the wiring path between the 3-way and 4-way switches to allow switching the lights on or off from any of the switches in the open office area. This changes the temporary wiring graphics into permanent wiring graphics as shown. click . Only the wire segments are selected in the path between the switches. In the next steps. but with an additional vertex. you can choose to create either arc or chamfered wiring. as in this step. ceilings. and click the switch to select the switches. Splined wiring is similar to arc. move the cursor to highlight the 4-way switch at the right end of the curved wall. The meaning for each tick mark varies according to the style of the tick mark selected on the Wiring panel in the Electrical Settings dialog. select Wires. you created arc type wiring. 20 On the Options Bar.

NOTE The Hot Conductors parameter value will be blank if the path being selected contains wire segments with a combination of both 1 and 2 specified as the value for Hot Conductors. and one ground conductor). change the value for Max #1 Pole Breakers from 12 to 22. and click OK. enter 2 as the value. one neutral conductor. under Instance Parameters. click . enter 2. and click OK. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. add a hot conductor to the wire segments between the remaining switches in the open office and between the 2 switches in the Level 1 stairwell. The wiring layout should look similar to the following: 318 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . and click Element Properties. and click OK. scroll down to the Electrical .Loads category. 25 In the Mech/Elec space. and assign each circuits to panel MDP. 27 Create lighting circuits for the private offices. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the wire segments on the path between the switches (2 hot conductors. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 Using the same method. When this occurs. under Instance Parameters. restrooms and stairwell on Level 1. 28 Create permanent wiring for each circuit.22 On the Options Bar. right-click the MDP panel. for Hot Conductors.

32 Create lighting circuits and wiring for the private offices. under Instance Parameters. The wiring layout should look similar to the following: Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires | 319 . scroll down to the Electrical . and click OK.Lighting view. then creating lighting circuits in 2 . Otherwise. assign the circuit to panel H-2. 31 Create a lighting circuit for the open area on Level 2. Creating Switch Systems on page 320. and in the Element Properties dialog. NOTE Do not include the two lighting fixtures and 3-way switch in the stairwell in either circuit. lounge. These will be connected in a later exercise. close the dataset and go on to the next exercise. 30 Right-click panel H-2. and assign each circuit to panel H-2.Loads category.Lighting.29 For more practice. conference room.Lighting view. continue performing the steps in this exercise using the procedures and tools described previously to create another lighting circuit for the rest of the lighting fixtures and switches on the 1 . and restrooms in the 2 . change the value for Max #1 Pole Breakers from 12 to 18.

1 In the Project Browser. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. as described below. and panel information. Creating Switch Systems on page 320. After creating the switch systems on Level 1. In this exercise you will create switch systems on Level 1 and Level 2.33 You can save the open file if you wish. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 35 Proceed to the next exercise. assign lighting fixtures to switches. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. click the Training Files icon.Lighting to make it the active view.rvt. and specify switch IDs for switches. Creating Switch Systems You create switch systems to specify switches that control groups of lighting fixtures in a project. 34 Click File menu ➤ Close. In this exercise you learned how to create lighting circuitry and used the basic methods for adding and editing wires. Open the provided dataset. You also learned about the settings that control how Revit MEP performs wire sizing. You also saw that the Revit MEP warns you when you try to put too much load on a circuit. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Creating Switch Systems. 320 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . you will create a space schedule with an embedded schedule listing switch IDs. fixtures. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. but does not prevent you from doing so. and double-click 1 .

you decide to assign several fixtures to a different switch in the large open area. you can highlight one of the lighting fixtures. Creating Switch Systems | 321 . After creating the switch system. With Multiple selected on the Options Bar. you can use a pick box to select several fixtures. on the Options Bar. click The Switch System toolbar is activated. 4 Click (Select Switch for System). ■ ■ Switch ID: the identifier for the switch that is currently assigned to the system. (Remove From System). and click the 4-way switch at the left end of the curved wall to designate the switch controlling the fixtures. select The Options Bar provides the following information about the currently selected switch system. click (Filter) to select only the lighting fixtures. press Tab. TIP Because all of the lighting fixtures in the open office are part of the same lighting system. and click to select everything in the system. 3 On the Options Bar. Number of Fixtures: the number of components in the system (excluding switches).2 Select all the lighting fixtures in the large open office (Open 1). When you have selected as many fixtures as you want. click (Create Switch System). and on the Options Bar. click Finish to confirm your selections. 6 On the Switch System toolbar. Then. 5 With the switch system still selected. (Edit Switch System). click Multiple.

for Switch ID. 15 Click 16 Click . 11 On the Switch System toolbar. click Finish. (Select Switch). The Switch ID is updated on the Options Bar.7 Draw a pick box around the 6 lighting fixtures to the left of the restrooms.West. The Number of Fixtures field now displays 27 fixtures remaining in the system. enter North Stairwell . enter Main Entrance . 12 Select the 6 lighting fixtures to the left of the restrooms. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. (Switch Properties). 322 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . click Finish. and click OK. under Instance Properties. click . 8 On the Options Bar. for Switch ID. and click OK. 13 On the Options Bar. click outside the ladies’ restroom.1st Floor. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. under Instance Properties. 9 Click (Switch Properties). and select the switch on the wall 14 On the Switch System toolbar.

click Finish. Verify that Ascending is selected. select Number from the Fields list. Create a switch system schedule 22 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 19 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan. 26 On the Formatting tab. scroll down the Available fields list. and restrooms in the 1 . For Name. enter Space Number. and for Heading. select Number. double-click the following fields—in the order shown—to add them to the Scheduled fields (in order) list: ■ ■ Number Name 25 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. select Spaces. 23 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. and click the single-pole switch on the right wall of the office to designate the switch controlling the fixtures in the office.18 On the Switch System toolbar. select Lighting Fixtures Click Embedded Schedule Properties. select both lighting fixtures in the corner office. stairwell. click . and on the Options Bar. create switch systems for the remaining private offices. Verify that Itemize every instance is selected. Creating Switch Systems | 323 . 21 Using the same method. 24 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 20 Click . 27 On the Embedded Schedule tab: ■ ■ ■ Select Embedded Schedule Under Categories. Verify that Schedule building components is selected.Lighting view. Click OK. enter Switch Systems.

Lighting view. 32 Click File menu ➤ Close. conference room. The Switch Systems schedule is automatically updated as you specify switch IDs or make changes to the lighting. Create separate systems for the lounge. double-click the following fields—in the order shown—to add them to the Scheduled fields (in order) list: ■ ■ ■ ■ Switch Id Type Panel Circuit Number 29 Click OK twice. and private offices. 324 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . scroll down the Available fields list. The embedded lighting fixture content is arranged so that the information about a switch system displays below the space containing that system. close the dataset and go on to the next exercise. 30 For more practice. restrooms. Specify Open Area .28 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Create a system for all the lighting fixtures in the large open area and assign them to the switch near the east stairwell. continue creating switch systems in the 2 . Otherwise. 31 You can save the open file if you wish. and is added to the Project Browser under Schedules/Quantities. The Switch System schedule displays in the drawing area.2nd Floor for the switch ID. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs on page 325.

click the Training Files icon. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 On the Options Bar. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Creating Multi-Circuit Wiring. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 5 Using the same method. press Tab to highlight the entire circuit.rvt. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs | 325 . as described below. You will design the power wiring for the 3 offices in the upper-left portion of 1-Power view to serve as an example of the multi-circuit wiring run. 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the corner office. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs on page 325. 2 Zoom in on the office at the upper-left corner of the plan. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs In this exercise you will see how Revit MEP deals with wiring runs that contain more than a single circuit. and double-click 1 . generate permanent wiring for the circuits in the remaining spaces along the left side of the plan.Power to make it the active view. Open the provided dataset. move the cursor over one of the receptacles to highlight it. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. and click to select the circuit and all of the components connected to it. click to generate arc type wiring for the selected circuit.

326 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 9 On the Options Bar. click Wire. 10 Click the connector for the receptacle on the east wall of the top office to specify the start point for the wire. verify that (Arced Wire) is selected.6 Select the home runs that extend out into the open office from the 2 upper offices. 7 Adjust the view so that the 2 upper offices are visible. and delete both home runs. 8 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar.

Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs | 327 . as shown.11 Click in the open area near the door for the office to specify the second point for the wire. 12 Click the connector for the receptacle on the east wall of the middle office to specify the endpoint for the wire.

13 Adjust the view so that the 2 lower offices are visible.NOTE When neither of the 2 groups of components on the circuit has a free home run. The direction will be corrected. and using the same method. the number of tick marks is increased to show the increase in the 328 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . create wiring between receptacles in the 2 lower offices. Revit MEP temporarily assigns a direction to the home run. When completed. if necessary. Multi-circuit wiring runs appear with multiple arrows on the home run. your layout should look similar to the following: Home run arrows are used to indicate that a wiring run is returning to a panel. when the wiring is completed. As wiring runs are collected into a multi-circuit wiring run.

Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs | 329 . and notice the vertex controls at each end of the wire and another in the center. as the circuits in each office was added to the wiring run. In the previous steps. drag the new vertex along the wire run to a point midway between the other vertex and the connector. and click. 16 Drag the center vertex to the left so that it is closer to the receptacle in the lower office as shown. and drag the new vertex up and to the left to arrange the wire run so that it looks similar to the following image. a shared neutral. 14 Click Modify. and a shared safety ground). Adjust the home run routing 15 Select the home run extending from the lower office. 17 Right click the wire run.number of hot conductors. select Insert Vertex. 18 Drag the vertex at the end of the home run toward the lower restroom. the number of tick marks and home run arrows is increased such that the final home run has 3 home run arrows and 5 tick marks (3 hot conductors.

19 For additional practice. The wire behaves like a spline. Examples of completed plans are provided below for reference.Vertices let you route wires in your project views.Power and 2 . you can continue creating permanent wiring for the circuits in the 1 . Completed 1-Power 330 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . adjusting its shape according to the vertex location.Power views. or you can close this dataset and go on to the next exercise.

21 Click File menu ➤ Close. and double-click 1 . you created wiring runs from the circuits that you created in a previous exercise and combined these to form multi-circuit wiring runs. Open the provided dataset. Checking Your Design on page 331. You also learned how to adjust the layout of wiring runs and interpret tick marks and home run arrows. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Checking Your Design. as described below. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. click the Training Files icon.Power to make it the active view. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 1 In the Project Browser. In this exercise.rvt. Checking Your Design | 331 . 22 Proceed to the next exercise. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises.Completed 2-Power 20 You can save the open file if you wish.

release the mouse button.2 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the drawing so that the corner office is visible. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 8 In the System Browser. expand Power ➤ L-1 ➤ circuit 1. 7 In the System Browser. 6 Right-click a column heading in the System Browser. each with a load of 180VA. 332 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . and click View ➤ Electrical to limit the information displayed to the electrical discipline. The System Browser is displayed to right of the drawing area. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel L-1. 3 Click Window menu ➤ Systems Browser. and click Select. 4 Click and hold the Title Bar of the System Browser. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. 5 Right-click a column heading. and when the preview expands to the width of the window. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 1. drag it to the bottom of the drawing area. right-click one of the devices under circuit 1.

11 Click Window menu ➤ Tile to display both these views in the drawing area. collapse Power.Lighting views and close any windows. 10 Open the 1 . 6 receptacles in the open area of Level 1.The device you selected in the System Browser is also selected in 1 .Lighting and 2 . Resolve unassigned electrical components 9 In the System Browser. and 6 receptacles in the open area of Level 2.Power. The list includes the main distribution panel (MDP). a 3-way switch and 2 lighting fixtures in the Level 2 stairwell. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. and expand Unassigned. 12 Zoom in on the stairwells in both lighting plans as shown. Checking Your Design | 333 .

Lighting view. click create permanent wiring. click 15 On the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. select one of the lighting fixtures in the stairwell.Lighting view have not yet been connected. 13 In the 1 .The lighting fixtures and 3-way switch in the 2 . click Finish. and select both lighting fixtures and the 3-way switch in the Level 2 stairwell. click to select the circuit. 18 Highlight one of the lighting fixtures in the Level 2 stairwell. 17 On the Edit Circuits toolbar. to 334 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . and on the Options Bar. 14 On the Edit Circuits toolbar. You need to add the switch and lighting fixtures in the upper level to the same circuit as the switches and lighting fixtures in the lower level. Add Level 2 components to the existing Level 1 lighting circuit. In the System Browser. press Tab several times. 16 Click the title bar of the 2 . (Add to Circuit). click . clear Multiple.Lighting view. until the power circuit is previewed. the 2 lighting fixtures and 3-way switch have been moved from the Unassigned folder to Power ➤ MDP ➤ Circuit 2.

select panel L-1.Lighting view. select the unassigned receptacles in the open area.Add a Hot Conductor to the wiring for the stairwell lighting circuit. click Check None. press Tab. select the 3-way switch in the stairwell. for Hot Conductors. 26 On the Options Bar. 21 In the Filter dialog. and click OK. click 27 On the Options Bar. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. click the title bar of the 2 . highlight the 3-way switch in the Level 2 stairwell. the only remaining unassigned components should be the MDP and the receptacles in the 2 open areas. enter 2. select Wires. . Only the wire segments are selected in the path between the switches. 20 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 25 In the drawing area. Checking Your Design | 335 . under Instance Parameters. Assign remaining receptacles to circuits 24 In the Project Browser. arrange the view so that the System Browser and the 5 unassigned receptacles are visible.Lighting view. and in the Mechanical/Electrical space. click . click to create a power circuit for these receptacles. double-click 1-Power to make it the active view. In the System Browser. 19 In the 1 . and click to select all of the components in the path between the 2 switches. 22 Click .

336 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .28 Click to create permanent wiring.

32 Click to view details of the warning. click Check Circuits. 31 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. Checking Your Design | 337 . create a power circuit for the 6 unassigned receptacles in Open 2 in the 2-Power view. Check Circuits 30 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar.29 Using the same method. 33 Expand the warning categories until you can see that the piece of equipment that is not connected is the MDP panel. The MDP panel is now the only component listed in the Unassigned category.

37 Proceed to the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Finally. 338 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 36 Click File menu ➤ Close. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. 34 Close the Warning dialog. Open the provided dataset. and double-click 2 . You also learned how to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your project were connected. In the Project Browser.rvt. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. as described below. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Defining Circuit Loads. 35 You can save the open file if you wish.This warning refers to the feed from the outside power service and can be ignored. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Balance circuit loads 1 Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. you learned how to use the System Browser to examine electrical components in your project and resolve unassigned and unnamed circuits. Defining Circuit Loads on page 338. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.Power. In this exercise. Defining Circuit Loads In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. click the Training Files icon. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source.

click Rebalance Loads. Defining Circuit Loads | 339 . B. Examination of the loads on Phase A. and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 5040 VA on Phase B. The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A . click . 4 In the Edit Circuits dialog. 5 Click OK. while Phase A provides 4860 VA. select panel L-2. and Phase C . Phase B 4860 VA. and Phase C provides 3780 VA.4320 VA).2 In the Mechanical/Electrical space.4500 VA. 3 On the Options Bar.

the 3 circuits feed transformer T1. 11 In the Edit Circuits dialog. Transformer T1 was specified as a 45kVA transformer but. H-2 is a 100A panel. select 480-120-208V Phase Dry Type Transformer: 30kVA. NOTE If you have continued to save and use your own dataset throughout these tutorials. 340 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . The 3 circuits that feed panel H-2 present a load of 18844 VA.6 Select panel H-2. Therefore. The remaining circuits feed the lighting circuits on Level 1. which will require a 40A circuit breaker. and the T1 transformer. click 8 In the Project Browser. the rating for the breaker feeding panel H-2 should be increased to 100 A. 14 In the Type Selector. enter 40A for the Trip value. you can use a 30kVA transformer. Adjust circuit breaker sizes 10 Select panel MDP. Although the load from panel H-2 is approximately a 40 A load at 480V. Therefore. 7 Click Rebalance Loads to adjust the loads on panel H-2. click . you may see different values for the loads. 9 Repeat the previous procedures to balance the loads on the Level 1 panels.Power. select the T1 transformer. . in the Mechanical/Electrical space. This is because you may have selected a different mix of lighting fixtures to attain the required lighting levels. and on the Options Bar. so no further changes are required.Power view. The lighting circuits connected to MDP are already specified as 20A circuits. 13 In the 1 . After the loads are balanced. and present a load 6496 VA. 12 Click OK. and for T1. The MDP panel feeds the lighting circuits for Level 1. L-1 and MDP. double-click 1 . the H-2 panel. the actual load connected to it (12960 VA) is less than 15kVA. for panel H-2. and present a load of 12960 VA. enter 100A for the Trip value. and on the Options Bar.

1-#8. under Instance Parameters. double-click 2 . 1-#1. Similar to the situation you observed for transformer T1. 25 In the Edit Circuits dialog. the load presented by T2 is less than 14kVA and you decide to change the transformer from 45kVA to 30kVA. and notice that the current value for Mains is 100. Defining Circuit Loads | 341 . and on the Options Bar. in the Mechanical/Electrical space. and click Element Properties.Power to make it the active view. 21 Scroll down. 22 Click OK. 27 In the 2 . 26 Click OK. and click the value for the Wire Size parameter. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. enter 40A for the Trip value. Notice that it changes to 3-#1. click (Circuit Properties). 20 Under Electrical-Loads.00A.Power view. 1-#12.Now that you have specified transformer T1 as a 30kVA transformer and restored it to the circuit. 24 In the Mechanical/Electrical space.00A is the correct size panel for a 30kVA transformer. 17 Click OK. 100. 23 In the Project Browser. 28 In the Type Selector. click . select 480-120-208V Phase Dry Type Transformer: 30kVA. select panel H-2. 1-#12. you should verify that the wire sizes for panel L-1 is set correctly. on the Options Bar. scroll down to the Electrical-Loads category. for transformer T2. select the T2 transformer. scroll down and verify that the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. 18 With panel L-1 selected. 19 In the Element Properties dialog for the circuit. Verify/adjust wire sizes 15 Right-click panel L-1. which will require a 40A circuit breaker. enter 100A for Rating.

Now that you have set transformer T2 to be a 30kVA transformer and restored it to the circuit. 37 You can save the open file if you wish. scroll down to the Electrical-Loads. click .00A. 34 Close the Warning. 38 Click File menu ➤ Close. This completes the Electrical Tutorial. double-click 1 . you should verify that the size of panel L-2 is set correctly. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. Size the service entrance conductors 32 In the Project Browser. and verify that the current value for Mains is 100. 33 With the MDP panel selected. enter 225A for the Rating parameter. under Electrical Loads. under Instance Parameters. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 31 Click OK. click . 36 In the Element Properties dialog for the circuit. Notice that the value for the Wire Size parameter changes appropriately. 342 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 35 On the Options Bar.Power to make it the active view. 29 Right click panel L-2 and click Element Properties.

You can search the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Revit MEP 2009.rvt. you can choose to save your work. navigate to Training Files ➤ Architectural. In this tutorial. NOTE The architectural model used with this tutorial is in the Architectural folder. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you can click File menu ➤ Manage Links to reload the linked model. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the dataset that Autodesk provides. go to http://www. you learn system design best practices while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems designing more efficient. you will understand the process. On the Revit tab on the Manage Links dialog. including plumbing fixtures. The datasets that you use to complete these exercises are located in the Training Files directory. By following this workflow. However. if the link is lost. However. click Reload From.autodesk. In this tutorial. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. At the end of this tutorial. After finishing each exercise. and sanitary piping. You should maintain the relative path to the architectural model. and specific techniques for designing plumbing systems. 343 . and select i Office Building. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. you create the plumbing systems for the second floor men’s room in an office building. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. methodology.Plumbing Systems 7 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. As you create the plumbing system. hot and cold water piping. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design plumbing systems using Revit MEP 2009. If the tutorial datasets are not present.

Flush Valve . you plan each system by loading the fixtures and fittings that you will need to design the plumbing system. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog.Floor Mounted. In this lesson. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. planning is critical to a successful design. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 While pressing Ctrl select the following files: ■ ■ Water Closet .Planning Plumbing Systems Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. You load the families of components that comprise your plumbing systems.rfa Urinal . Preparing the Plumbing Plan Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Loading Plumbing Parts. 3 Expand Imperial ➤ Plumbing.Wall Hung. Load plumbing component families 1 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. you can customize components and expand the library of plumbing families. click the Training Files icon. click the Training Files icon.rvt. 344 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems .rfa 5 Click Open. As you develop more advanced skills working with Revit MEP.

Floor Mounted and Urinal . Load piping component families 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 8 In the left pane of the Open dialog.Glued.rfa Pipe Reducing Short Tee . select Pipe Cross . 14 Proceed to the next exercise. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Configuring Plumbing and Pipe Systems. select Pipe Bend . expand Families ➤ Plumbing Fixtures.DWV . 5 In the Rename dialog. Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems on page 345. Create new pipe types and specify default pipe fittings 1 In the Project Browser. Notice that 2 folders have been added to the families currently available for your design: Water Closet . expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. and click Duplicate. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 2 Right-click PVC.6 In the Project Browser. All of the loaded families. 13 Click File menu ➤ Close.PVC: Standard Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems | 345 . select Tee For Tee. select Pipe Short Tee .PVC: Standard For Tap. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Elbow. 3 Right-click PVC 2. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter PVC Sanitary. are added under Families in the Project Browser. select Pipe Transition . click the Training Files icon. 9 Expand Imperial ➤ Plumbing.rvt. click the Training Files icon. 10 While pressing Ctrl select the following files: ■ ■ Pipe Bend . for New.Glued.PVC: Standard For Preferred Junction Type. Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems In this exercise.PVC .rfa 11 Click Open. 12 You can save the open file if you wish. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 6 Under Mechanical.Flush Valve . 4 In the Type Properties dialog. click Rename.Wall Hung. The selected component families are loaded into the project. you create new PVC pipe types and specify the default fittings that will be used with them.Sanitary . and click Properties.Glued: Standard For Transition. select None For Cross. and click OK. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Sanitary .

PVC: Standard is selected For Union. 11 You can save the open file if you wish.rvt. and draw a left-to-right pick box around the second floor men’s room. verify that Tee is selected For Tee. You then modify the piping. 3 urinals. ZR (Zoom Region). a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. Finally. you add plumbing fixtures to physically connect them with piping. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. select Pipe Coupling . select None For Cross. and double-click 2 Plumbing to make it the active view. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Elbow. 3 sinks. verify that Pipe Bend . enter PVC Sanitary Vent. then click Duplicate. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you add 2 toilets. you create systems to logically connect the fixtures. In this lesson. Designing Plumbing Systems Designing plumbing systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward process. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Adding Plumbing Fixtures. verify that Pipe Coupling . click the Training Files icon.PVC: Standard For Tap. Place floor-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser. 12 Click File menu ➤ Close.PVC: Standard 7 Click Apply.Vent .■ For Union. Add Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise. select Pipe Tee . and click OK. for Name. verify that Pipe Cross . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 346 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . and a floor drain to the second floor men’s room. Add Plumbing Fixtures on page 346.PVC: Standard is selected 10 Click OK to close the Type Properties dialog. 2 Enter the keyboard shortcut.PVC .Glued: Standard is selected For Transition. verify that Pipe Transition . 8 In the Name dialog.PVC: Standard is selected For Preferred Junction Type. 9 Under Mechanical.

a On the Design Bar. and 3 sinks. Position the first toilet 7 Position the toilet 6" from the upper wall. and 1' 6" from the right wall. 6 Click Modify. 5 Move the cursor over the upper-right corner of the men’s room. click Plumbing Fixture. 3 wall-mounted urinals. and click to place the toilet in the approximate location shown.Floor Mounted : Private 1. 3 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 4 Select Water Closet .The men’s room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls. Add Plumbing Fixtures | 347 . click Dimension.Flush Valve .6 gpf in the Type Selector.

move the cursor over the center of the toilet.b On the Options Bar. enter 1' 6". verify that (Aligned) is selected. click the value for the blue dimension to the right. Clear Constrain Verify that Copy is selected Clear Multiple 348 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . place a dimension annotation between the upper wall and the back of the toilet. c Click the face of the right wall. and Individual References is selected for Pick. click 9 On the Options Bar. enter 0' 6". d Move the cursor down. Wall faces is selected for Prefer. The toilet is placed 1' 6" from the right wall. and press Enter. j Delete both dimension annotations. The toilet is placed 6" from the upper wall of the toilet stall. e Using the same method. and click to place the dimension annotation. Add a second toilet 8 Select the toilet. f Click Modify. and press Enter. h Click the value for the blue dimension below the toilet. and on the Edit toolbar. and click. g Select the toilet. do the following: ■ ■ ■ (Copy). i Click Modify.

and click to place the dimension annotation. select Wall centerlines Verify that Individual References is selected for Pick 17 Click the centerline of the left wall. Add Plumbing Fixtures | 349 . and on the Options Bar. and place 3 urinals approximately as shown. verify that (Place on Vertical Face) is selected. click to place the toilet as shown. 19 Using the same method. Place wall-mounted urinals 12 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. do the following. move the cursor over the center of the leftmost urinal. 14 Move the cursor over the upper-left corner of the men’s room. 18 Move the cursor down. ■ ■ ■ Verify that (Aligned) is selected For Prefer. and click. click Plumbing Fixture. place a dimension annotation for the rightmost toilet. click Dimension.10 Click the center line of the toilet to establish a start point. 13 Select Urinal .Wall Hung : 3/4 Flush Valve in the Type Selector. 11 Move the preview of the toilet 5' 0" to the left (into the left stall). and on the Options Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. and when the alignment snap displays and the preview is from the original toilet. 15 Click Modify.

select the counter top. and click Unconstrain in the warning dialog. click the centerline of each urinal in succession. and click the blue above the dimension values to space the urinals evenly along the wall. 25 While pressing Ctrl. 350 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . and in the Type Selector. select Sink . click the value for the blue dimension. (Equal Control) 24 Press Delete to remove the dimension from the drawing. Place sinks 26 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 28 In the drawing area. 22 Using the same method. 21 Select the rightmost urinal. 23 Select the dimension annotation above the urinals. click Plumbing Fixture. and enter 1' 8". 27 On the Options Bar click (Place on Face). and click to place the dimensions annotation.Single : 18"x18".Island . select the 2 remaining dimension annotations. and press Delete. then move the cursor up. The urinal is placed 1' 8" from the wall of the toilet stall. place the leftmost urinal 1' 8" from the left wall.20 Working from left to right.

approximately as shown. specify the distance between the drain center line and the lower wall as 1' 6". Add Plumbing Fixtures | 351 . 30 Place 3 sinks.29 Move the cursor over the counter top in the lower-right corner of the men’s room. and click to place the floor drain. click Plumbing Fixture. 37 On the Option Bar click (Place on Work Plane). 32 On the Design Bar. and in the Type selector. specify the distance between the center line of the outer sinks and the center line of the walls as 1' 10". 33 Using the same method you used to evenly space the urinals. select Level : Level 2. as shown. click Dimension. 34 Using the same method specify the distance between the center line of the wall below the sinks and the center line of each sink.3" Drain. and press the Space Bar twice to rotate the sink into the proper orientation. 35 Delete the dimension annotations. select Floor Drain . 31 Click Modify. 38 Move the cursor to a point where the walls for the toilet stalls meet. Place the floor drain 36 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. then equalize the space between sinks.Round : 5" Stainer . and for Plane.

rvt. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Starting the Sanitary Piping System. specify Associated Level (Level 2) and -5' 0" for Level Offset 5 Click OK twice. 6 On the View Control Bar. urinals.39 Click Modify. 40 You can save the open file if you wish. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Prepare for sanitary piping 1 In the Project Browser. specify Fine for Detail Level. and click Edit. and click View Properties. 352 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Begin Creating the Sanitary System on page 352. you need to adjust the view depth to make the piping visible in the view. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In this exercise. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. specify Associated Level (Level 2) and -5' 0" for Bottom Offset Under View Depth. Because most of the piping for the sanitary system will be placed below the floor level. verify the view range settings: ■ ■ Under Primary Range. 2 Right-click in the drawing area. 4 In the View Range dialog. under Extents. scroll down to View Range. click the Training Files icon. You then use Revit MEP‘s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. Begin Creating the Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that will guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. and floor drain. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. and double-click 2 Plumbing to make it the active view. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 42 Proceed to the next exercise. and Wireframe for Model Graphics Style. 41 Click File menu ➤ Close. you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets.

while coarse and medium display plumbing components as 1-line symbols. 8 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. specify -1' 0" 11 In the left panel. specify Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary For Offset. 10 In the table: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. and floor drain. 18 Zoom in on the men’s room. click View ➤ Piping. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 12 In the table: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. 9 In the right panel. Click Window ➤ System Browser. as shown. 17 Expand the Unassigned folder. specify Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary For Offset. click Branch. select Sanitary from the System Type list. and select Sanitary from the System Type list. Specify mechanical settings for piping 7 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. Create the sanitary plumbing system 14 When you are creating systems the System Browser can help you identify components that have not been added to a system. The urinals. and click Main. toilets and the floor drain are moved from the Unassigned folder to the newly created Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 1 folder in the System Browser. TIP You can also access the system browser using the F9 keyboard shortcut. 16 Right-click in the system browser table heading. click (Create Sanitary System). click Mechanical Settings. specify -1' 0" 13 Click OK. and draw a left-to-right pick box around the urinals. Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 353 .The fine setting displays 2-line piping and plumbing components. toilets. 19 On the Options Bar. and notice that all of the plumbing fixtures are currently unassigned. 15 Click the title bar for the browser.

click (Layout Path). click Place Base. click Sanitary 1. 26 On the Options Bar. 23 In the Select a System dialog. 24 On the Layout Paths tab on the Design Bar. 21 Click (Thin Lines) on the toolbar. and on the Options Bar. 28 Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. and a preview of the piping layout displays.20 Zoom out to include the chase near the top-right corner of the second floor men’s room in the view. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. enter 1/8" for Slope. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping the sanitary piping in the system. The Layout Paths tab is activated on the Design Bar. and click to place the base approximately as shown. 25 Move the cursor over the chase. 22 Select one of the components in the newly created sanitary system. specify -4' 0" and for D. 27 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. and click OK. select 4". for Offset. click Solutions. 354 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems .

You can click (Previous) and (Next Solution). Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 355 . The layout preview displays the main piping as blue lines and the branch piping as green lines. and on the Design Bar. Review the following steps prior to using them to customize the layout. Customize the layout 30 The alignment of segments is critical when customizing a layout. as needed. It’s easier if each segment can be moved to a snap.Up to 6 piping layout solutions are suggested on the Options Bar. Select the horizontal main segment above the rightmost urinals and toilets. and do the following: a Use the (Parallel Movement Control) control to drag the segment down into the middle of the chase above the urinals. click Modify. to view them. 29 Select solution 1.

b Move the cursor to the left to the junction between the main and the branch to the rightmost toilet. and click to align the branch to the main segment. and drag the segment down into the chase. 31 Click Finish Layout. d Move the cursor to the right to locate the snap above the center urinal. Snap the main in the middle of the chase. This makes it easier to locate a snap. NOTE You press Ctrl to select multiple segments when you want to move more than one segment to the same location. 356 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . select the horizontal branch segment above the leftmost urinal. c Using the same method.

b Select each pipe segment in the system. When a fitting is reversed. and orientation of fittings: a Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity. c Examine the sanitary tees to assure proper orientation.32 Examine the piping that was automatically created. branch and the fixture connecting it to the main segment. slope. The third tab should highlight the entire system. The slope control for every segment should indicate that the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. as shown. checking for the proper connectivity. The second tab highlights the fixture. and check the slope control. The first tab highlights the fixture and the branch. select the fitting and click (Flip) to reorient it. Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 357 .

and Hidden Line for Model Graphics Style. 37 On the View Control Bar. Enter the keyboard shortcut. 35 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. VG (Visibility/Graphics). click Show categories from all disciplines. 34 It is easier to work with Revit MEP components if model categories from other disciplines are hidden in the view. and double-click 3D Plumbing. expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views.33 In the Project Browser. and on the Model Categories tab clear the following categories: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Casework Ceilings Columns Curtain Panels Curtain Systems Curtain Wall Mullions Doors Floors Lines Railings Roofs Shaft Openings Stairs Walls Windows 36 Click OK. 358 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . specify Fine for Detail Level.

expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. 2 Zoom in on the piping to the right of the men’s room.rvt. and creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. 40 Proceed to the next exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. and click the plus sign below the fitting to upgrade the fitting to a tee. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise you continue with the work from the last exercise. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System on page 359 to continue creating the sanitary system. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. adding the sinks in the men’s room. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Connecting Sink Drain Lines. 3 Select the sanitary elbow to the right of the rightmost toilet. 39 Click File menu ➤ Close. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and double-click 2 Plumbing to make it the active view. click the Training Files icon. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 359 .38 You can save the open file if you wish.

6 Drag the preview of the pipe down parallel to the wall. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. 360 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. When you press the space bar. right-click the connector on the open leg. press the Space Bar once. Pressing Return completes the dimensioning.4 Select the tee. verify that 1/8" /12" is specified for the slope. enter 13. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. and on the Options Bar. and press Enter. 7 Click Modify. 5 Verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary is selected in the Type Selector. and click Draw Pipe.

enter 2". 11 Select the fitting. click Pipe Fitting. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 361 . click to place the fitting. and when the extension snap displays. and when the snap displays. click Pipe Fitting. and press Enter. 8 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. and select Pipe Reducing Wye-DWV-Glued : Standard in the Type Selector. 13 Move the cursor over the straight leg of the reducing wye. and select Pipe Plug-PVC : Standard in the Type Selector. click to place the fitting. you can verify that the slope has been applied in the correct direction: toward the sanitary outlet. 10 Click Modify. 12 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar.If you select the pipe. 9 Move the cursor over the open end of the pipe. click the blue size control for the wye leg.

and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity. and when the snap for the center point of the middle sink displays. and on the Options Bar.14 Click Modify. click to specify the end of the first segment of pipe. click to specify the end of the pipe. 362 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 15 Using the method learned earlier. and when the end of the pipe is even with wall centerline. highlight the wye. and click Draw Pipe. right-click the connector on the open leg. and that 1/8" /12" is specified for slope. 18 Drag the end of the pipe to the left and down to a point approximately even with the centerline of the wall below the sinks. 16 Select the wye fitting. 17 Verify that the Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary is selected in the Type Selector. press the Space Bar once so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. 19 Continue this section of pipe by dragging the preview along the centerline of the wall. verify that Auto Connect is selected.

21 In the Project Browser. and click Modify.Glued : Standard. 22 In the 3D view.20 On the Options Bar.DWV . and click to place the fitting. click Pipe Fitting. check the slope and connectivity for the added piping as described previously. clear unwanted components from the 3D view using the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog as described in the previous exercise. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 363 . 23 Zoom in on the vertical segment behind the middle sink. the vertical pipe extends above the level of the floor. expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views and double-click 3D Plumbing to view the piping just added. enter 0' 6" for Offset. click Apply. and in the Type Selector select Pipe Double Wye . and when the Extension snap displays and the end is outlined in blue. 24 On the Plumbing tab. Changing the Offset while drawing pipe creates a vertical segment. In this case. If necessary. press Space. 25 Move the cursor near the open end of the vertical pipe.

place a section below the sinks as shown. 32 Enter the keyboard shortcut. and on the Options Bar. 31 On the View Control Bar. In the next steps you add 2 short pipe segments to the double wye. click Section. 29 On the View tab Design Bar. for Detail Level. 364 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . VG (Visibility/Graphics) to hide architectural components that will interfere with selecting plumbing components. TIP When entering dimensions. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 28 Double-click 2 . If necessary. in this step you can enter 0 8 (zero space eight) to specify 8".Plumbing to make it the active view. and for Model Graphics Style. as 27 Select the double wye fitting. click shown above. For example. specify Fine. 30 Double-click the head of the section to open the section view. specify Hidden Line. to orient the fitting.The double wye is added to the vertical segment. without having to enter ' and " symbols. you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches. specify 0' 8" for Offset. and in the drawing area. 26 Click Modify.

The fitting moves to the left when pipe is connected to the left leg. draw the pipe up. then clear the check from Lines e Click OK 34 NOTE There is a known issue when connecting piping to the double-wye. for Offset. draw the pipe up to the left. and clear the check from any category c Clear Show categories from all disciplines. do the following: a Click Show categories from all disciplines b Click All. then to the right when pipe is connected to the right leg. and click All again d Select any category. 35 Click the connector snap on the left leg. 41 Click Modify. click None. specify 0' 6".33 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. in line with the angle for the leg. 36 Click Modify. After adding the piping to the right and left leg. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and enter 0 6 and press Enter. it is necessary to restore the offset for the fitting. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 365 . On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and enter 1 0 and press Enter. and on the Options Bar. 39 Click Modify. 37 Using the same method. 38 Click the connector snap on the center leg. 40 Select the double-wye fitting again. draw a 1' pipe from the right leg of the double-wye. click Pipe.

44 Right-click the connector for the sink drain. and click Draw Pipe. and click to specify the end of the pipe. 49 In the Project Browser. 47 Click Modify. expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. and double-click 2 . enter 1' 6".Plumbing. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the sink drain. do the following: ■ ■ For Offset. 43 Zoom to a level that lets you view all 3 sinks. expand Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. and select the leftmost sink. 48 Using the same method. 45 Drag the pipe preview a short distance from the drain. double-click 3D Plumbing. and in the Type Selector. 366 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . connect drain pipes to the other 2 sinks. 50 Zoom in to a level that allows you to view all 3 sinks and the double wye fitting. select Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary. and click Apply Verify 1/8" /12" is specified for slope 46 Drag the pipe preview down to a point between the sink and the wall.42 In the Project Browser. and on the Options Bar.

and click Finish to create piping for the middle sink. for D. and select a proposed solution. (Previous) and (Next) buttons to cycle through 55 Select solution 9 of 16. Transitions and fittings are automatically added to maintain connections. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 367 . You use the plus and minus buttons to add vertex controls to pipe segments. select the short pipe connected to the right leg of the double wye and the horizontal pipe from the drain of the rightmost sink. 60 Click Finish to create piping for the third sink. click Routing Solutions.Using Routing Solutions to finish the sanitary piping 51 Routing Solutions works best when the segments being routed are the same size. 56 While pressing Ctrl. 57 Select solution 7of 7. and on the Options Bar. select the double-wye and the 3 short segments of pipe connected to it. While pressing Ctrl. for D. select the pipe from the left sink and the pipe connected to the left leg and create the piping by selecting solution 9 of 16. 61 Select the double-wye. 54 On the Options Bar. specify 2". and on the Options Bar. You use the proposed solutions. select the short pipe connected to the center leg of the double wye and the horizontal pipe from the drain of the middle sink. 53 While pressing Ctrl. and click Finish to create piping for that solution. specify 1 1/2". 52 Click Modify. click Routing Solutions. Routing Solution tools are activated on the Options Bar that let you (Add Control Points) or (Remove Control Points). 58 Click Modify. and on the Options Bar. 59 Using the same method.

for Slope. Close the warning. click (Slope) to activate the slope tools on the Options Bar.Specify slope for the sink sanitary piping 62 Draw a right-to-left pick box to select the elbow and adjoining 2 pipes between the double wye and the sink drain for the rightmost sink as shown. enter 1/8" / 12". and click Finish. 63 Click Window ➤ Toolbar ➤ Routing Modify to place the Slope and Justify tool on the toolbar. 368 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 65 On the Options Bar. 64 On the toolbar. This is to be expected. A warning displays and the pipe from the leg of the double-wye is highlighted to indicate the segment where the slope could not be applied.

This will set the elevation for the pipe’s reference end without changing the slope. click Finish on the Options Bar.66 Using the same method. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 369 . 68 On the Options Bar. specify the slope for the piping to the left sink. 67 In the System Browser. The sinks are added to the Sanitary 1 system in the System Browser. the piping to the middle sink is already sloped. 70 In the drawing area. Then. and click Select. The amount of adjustment with each keystroke is proportional to the zoom level. click (Edit System). You can move fixtures by dragging. there is a smaller movement. expand Sanitary. while pressing Ctrl. click Element Properties. click to select the reference end of the pipe. When zoomed in close. Make minor adjustments to the sanitary system 71 Zoom in and select the double wye fitting for the sink drains. specify the exact Offset. and under Instance Parameters. you can make minor adjustments to the system. NOTE In applications where the elevation of a sloped pipe is critical. select all 3 sinks. and press the up arrow on your keyboard twice. right-click the pipe. click 69 On the Edit System toolbar. Since the routing solution applied to the middle sink used the existing pipe (without adding a segment). (Add to System). click Multiple. The fitting moves up and at the same time the piping attached to its legs automatically adjusts and maintains connectivity. or by using the arrow keys on your keyboard. 72 Press the down arrow on the keyboard twice to return the fitting to its original location. modifying offset values. then click Finish on the Edit System toolbar. With the piping created and the slope and connectivity properly defined. If necessary. right-click Sanitary 1. and on the Options Bar. you can specify the elevation of a pipe’s reference end in the Element Properties for the pipe.

select the 2 bends connecting the 45-degree legs of the double-wye to the horizontal pipe segments. the entire system should be highlighted. highlight the leftmost sink. Now that the routing is completed. and in the Type Selector.Glued : Standard. select Pipe Bend .DWV .When the piping was created for the sink drains. 74 Select the 2 elbows in the section of piping between the double wye fitting and the reducing sanitary wye. and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity. 73 While pressing Ctrl.DWV .) 370 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 75 Using the method learned earlier.Glued : Standard in the Type Selector.PVC : Standard components were used because the shorter size of this fitting works well with the automated Routing Solutions. (After the third tab.Glued : Standard. and select Pipe Bend . you can change these to the more commonly used Pipe Bend .DWV . Pipe Bend .

rvt. otherwise. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and double-click 3D Plumbing to make it the active view. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Refining Waste Stack Connection. skip the next 2 steps. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 1 In the Project Browser. 78 Click File menu ➤ Close. Refining the Sanitary Stack on page 371 to continue creating the sanitary system. and select the horizontal pipe. adjusting the sanitary stack.76 If you want to save your work. click the Training Files icon. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 371 . a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. while maintaining the same angle. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise you continue with the work on the sanitary system. 77 You can save the open file if you wish. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom in on the elbow at the upper end of the vertical pipe connected to the sanitary outlet. 3 Click the pipe’s connector snap at the elbow. 79 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. and carefully drag it away from the elbow. click File menu ➤ Save As.

and press Delete.Glued : Standard.4 Select the elbow. and on the Options Bar. specify 6" for D (diameter). and when the Extension snap displays. press the Space Bar once (so that the fitting assumes the elevation of the end of the pipe). and click to place the fitting. and select Pipe Reducing Wye . 372 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 7 Move the cursor over the center of the open end of the vertical pipe. click Pipe Fitting. 5 Select the vertical pipe segment. Add a reducing wye to the stack 6 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar.DWV .

Plumbing. The wye is added to the vertical segment. and zoom in on the sanitary outlet. enter 4 to change its size. to rotate the 45 degree leg until it is pointing toward 9 Select the wye. Create a Section view to complete the stack connections 10 Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. click Section. select the wye. and click Modify.8 Click Modify. 11 On the View tab on the Design Bar. and click the sanitary piping. If necessary. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 373 . and press Enter. click the value for the 45 degree leg. draw a section to the right of the sanitary outlet as shown. double-click 2 .

16 Right-click the connector on the 45 degree leg. for Detail Level. and draw the pipe in line with 45 degree leg and when the center line for the main segment displays. press Space so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. 13 On the View Control Bar. click to specify the end of the pipe. enter -2' 6" for Offset.12 Double-click the section view symbol in the drawing area to open the new section view. click Draw Pipe. 14 Zoom in. and select the reducing wye fitting. 374 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . and press Enter. 15 On the Options Bar. specify Fine. This places the wye at a level that will allow creating a routing solution that will not change the slope of the main segment.

19 On the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. 21 Right-click the open connector on the reducing wye. The exact position of the riser is not critical in this application.DWV . However. 17 Click Modify. click Draw Pipe. when the location is critical. it will be necessary to move the piping after making the connection. click Routing Solutions. 23 Click Modify. then enter 4 0 and press Enter to add a 4' 0" vertical vent pipe. 20 Select the bend created by the routing solution tool. 24 Check slope and connectivity as described previously.NOTE There is a known issue when connecting piping to the reducing tee.Glued : Standard. 22 Move the cursor up and press Space to assume the size and elevation of the fitting. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 375 . 18 While pressing Ctrl. and in the Type Selector. This adds a short segment of pipe (from the wye). and click Finish to create piping for that solution. select solution 3 of 3. select Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent. and in the Type Selector select Pipe Bend . The fitting moves toward the pipe being added after the pipe is drawn. select the short pipe segment and the main pipe.

) 376 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 2 Zoom in on the piping behind the urinals. then down to connect with the sanitary main. 26 Click File menu ➤ Close. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.rvt. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. use the Filter tool to select only piping and fittings. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Refining Urinal Waste Lines. In this exercise you change the routing for the waste piping from the urinals.25 You can save the open file if you wish. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. (If necessary. running it inside the wall. Refining the Urinal Lines The waste piping from the urinal extends down through floor directly beneath the urinals before connecting to the sanitary main piping. and double-click 2 Plumbing to make it the active view. click the Training Files icon. and draw a left-to-right pick box around the piping above the urinals as shown. 1 In the Project Browser. Refining the Urinal Lines on page 376 to continue creating the plumbing system. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.

5 Right-click the connector at the open end of the shortened pipe. 12 In the Select Connector dialog. 4 Select the pipe connected to the wye above the leftmost toilet. then placing a vertical segment and continuing the run at 0' 6". 8 On the Options Bar. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary is selected in the Type Selector For D. specify 2" Click (Auto Connect) ■ ■ For slope. click Connector 2 : Sanitary Round : 2" Out. and click to specify the end of the pipe. click the connector snap. 11 Select the leftmost urinal. and when the snap for the center line of the leftmost urinal displays. enter 0' 6" and press Tab. starting at the level of the original pipe. click the pipe above the urinal. The next 4 steps draw a series of pipe segments. and finally connecting to the sanitary drain on the left urinal. click 13 In the drawing area. 10 Click Modify. for Offset. and drag it to the right to a point midway between the toilet and urinal. and on the Options Bar. click Draw Pipe. (Connect Into).3 Press Delete. Refining the Urinal Lines | 377 . press the Space so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. specify 1/8" /12" 7 Drag the preview to the left approximately 8". and click OK. 6 On the Options Bar. 9 Continue drawing the pipe run to the left. click to specify the end of the pipe.

19 In the Project Browser. 18 On the Options Bar.14 Using the same method. Do not include the riser and fitting. 378 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . and on the Options Bar. clear Plumbing Fixtures and click OK. 15 Draw a pick box around the 3 urinals and the horizontal 2" piping just added as shown. click The slope is applied to the selected piping. 16 In the Filter dialog. 17 On the Routing Modify toolbar. double-click 3D. and click Finish. and check the slope and connectivity as described previously. click (Filter Selection). verify that 1/8" /12" for Slope. (Slope).Plumbing to make it the active view. connect the remaining urinals to the sanitary main. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views.

Plumbing to make it the active view. However. double-click 2 . In the next steps you will change the elbow behind the left urinal to a tee to create the cleanout. first you must temporarily resize the pipe to the urinal. and draw a left-to-right pick box around only the main piping (including the short 4" segment) as shown. 22 On the Options Bar. you cannot upgrade an elbow to a tee unless all of the connections are the same size. specify 3" for D (diameter).Resize pipes 20 In the Project Browser. 21 Zoom in on the piping above the urinals. So. Refining the Urinal Lines | 379 .

and zoom in on the area between the toilet and the leftmost urinal. Redefine fittings 28 Select the 3 sanitary tees behind the urinals. This eliminates the need for transitions between the pipes and the tees. 25 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. 31 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ North. click to place the plug on the tee. and in the Type Selector. and on the Options Bar.Sanitary . specify 2" for D. 26 Move the cursor over the open connector on the sanitary tee above the leftmost urinal. and when the extension snap displays. specify 3" for D (diameter). for D. and click the + control on the left to add a leg for the cleanout. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. 24 Select the elbow. 29 Select the 2" pipes connecting the urinal drains to the main. select 3".Glued : Standard is selected. 27 Select the pipe to the urinal again. and drag it to a point midway between the 2 sanitary tees.Add a cleanout 23 Select the pipe between the 3" elbow and the left urinal. and on the Options Bar. 380 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . then select 2". and in the Type Selector. verify that Pipe Reducing Short Tee . click Pipe Fitting. double-click 3D. 32 Select the vertical pipe segment between the toilets and the urinals. select Pipe PVC Plug : Standard. 30 In the Project Browser.Plumbing to make it the active view.

33 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. and zoom in on the area between the toilet and the leftmost urinal.This will provide the space required to change the short elbows to the DWV Bends that allow better sanitary waste flow. 35 Check slope and connectivity as described previously. Refining the Urinal Lines | 381 . 34 Select the elbows at each end of the vertical pipe.DVW .Glued : Standard. and select Pipe Bend .

Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and zoom in on the area between the toilets and the urinals. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Adding Vents to the System on page 382 to continue creating the plumbing system.36 You can save the open file if you wish. 2 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Creating Sanitary Vent Piping. 382 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 37 Click File menu ➤ Close. expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views and double-click 3D Plumbing to view the piping just added. 1 In the Project Browser. click the Training Files icon.rvt. clear unwanted components from the 3D view using the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog as described previously. adding the vent piping at several points in the waste piping. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 38 Proceed to the next exercise. If necessary. and click the + control above it to change the fitting to a tee. Adding Vents to the System In this exercise you finish the work on the sanitary system. 3 Select the elbow at the upper end of the vertical pipe segment.

Apply a filter to the vent piping 9 Enter the keyboard shortcut. 8 Click Modify.4 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. specify 2" for D (diameter). 10 On the Filters tab in the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. specify 0" for Rise/12". select Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent. NOTE You must press Tab or move the cursor into the drawing area for the new offset value to be recognized. Adding Vents to the System | 383 . 5 Click the connector at the upper end of the tee to specify the start of the pipe. and in the Type Selector. and specify 14' for Offset. 6 On the Options Bar. click Pipe. 7 Click Apply. VG (Visibility/Graphics). do the following: a Click Edit/New.

select (green). and click OK. Vent piping throughout the plan appear as dashed green lines. rename the filter Sanitary Vent. and click OK. and click Override. select Sanitary Vent. e In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. d Under the Filter Rules. Create additional vents 11 Double-click Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans ➤ 2 .b In the Filters dialog.Plumbing to make it the active view. and click OK. click Rename. c Right-click Sanitary 1. click the Lines column. and in the Color dialog. click the Color button. and place a section above the urinals and toilets as shown. and click (Duplicate). 12 On the View tab on the Design Bar. for Pattern. g For Sanitary Vent. click Add. i In the Line Graphics dialog. select IMPORT-DASHED (2) j Click OK twice. f In the Add Filters dialog. 384 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . h In the Line Graphics dialog. specify Filter by as System Type ➤ contains ➤ Sanitary Vent. and click OK. select Sanitary from the Filters list. click Section. and zoom in to view the urinals and toilets.

then drag the preview to the right and when the center snap for the previously created vent displays. 17 On the Options Bar. and enter the keyboard shortcut VG. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. Adding Vents to the System | 385 . and on the Options Bar. click Pipe. 16 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. verify the (Auto Connect) is selected. 20 At a point above the toilets. clear unwanted architectural components from the view as described previously. specify 2" for D (diameter). and enter 1/8" /12" for slope. 15 On the View Control Bar.13 Double-click the section symbol to open the section view. specify Wireframe. and for Model Graphics Style. 19 Begin drawing the vertical pipe. click to specify the end of the first pipe section. click to make the connection to the vent as shown. for Detail Level. 18 Click a point midway between the tees connecting the first toilet and floor drain to specify the start of the pipe. and verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent is selected in the Type Selector. specify Fine.

press Tab to display the connector. f Click Modify. for Offset. and click the + control to update the tee to a cross. and click OK. specify 2". 22 Right-click the new horizontal pipe. and click to make the connection. enter 9' 6" to specify the elevation for the reference end of the pipe. d When the snap for the center line for the cross displays. 386 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . under Instance Parameters. e If necessary. 25 Place another vent between the two rightmost urinals: a Click the midpoint of the pipe between the urinals. c For D. b Begin the vertical pipe. 24 Select the tee that was inserted when you connected the vents. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. The vent is automatically created and connected with the earlier vent pipe.21 Click Modify. draw the pipe to the left to the open leg of the cross. and click Element Properties.

Plumbing to make it the active view. use the Flip control to make the adjustment. Adding Vents to the System | 387 .26 Double-click 3D . 27 If either of the tees that were added need to be reoriented according to the slope of the piping.

click Draw Pipe. and begin drawing a vertical vent pipe. and on the Options Bar. specify 2" for D (diameter). 30 While pressing Ctrl. 32 On the Options Bar. specify 2" for D (diameter). and zoom in on the area of the double wye behind the sinks.Add a vent to the sinks 28 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast. 29 Select the elbow above the double wye for the drain section to the middle sink. and specify 9' 6" for Offset. and click the + control above the elbow to change it to a tee. 388 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . move the cursor into the drawing area. select the tee and the short pipe segment that connects it to the double wye. 33 Click Modify. verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent is selected in the Type Selector. then click Apply. 31 Right-click the tee.

and click the snap at the horizontal vent pipe to specify the endpoint for the pipe. and on the Routing Modify toolbar. right-click the connector at the open end. 38 Select the horizontal vent pipe. click Draw Pipe. 35 Select the vent. toward the horizontal vent segment between the toilets and urinals. 37 Drag the pipe preview. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the vent pipe. and click Finish. while maintaining a 90 degree angle. A tee is automatically inserted at the joint. (Slope). 36 On the Options Bar specify 0" /12" for slope. click 39 Enter 1/8" /12" for slope. Adding Vents to the System | 389 .34 Zoom out to view the vents from the toilets and urinals and the new vent from the sinks.

41 You can save the open file if you wish. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types.rvt. 43 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Create new pipe types and specify default pipe fittings 1 In the Project Browser. enter Cold Water. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create the Cold Water System In this exercise you create the cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system. Create the Cold Water System on page 390 to continue creating the plumbing system. for New. and click Duplicate. 2 Right-click Standard 1. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 390 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems .40 Highlight any component in the system and press Tab 3 times to check the connectivity of the system as described previously. 4 In the Rename dialog. right-click Standard. click Rename. click the Training Files icon. and click OK. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Creating Cold Water Piping. 42 Click File menu ➤ Close. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. click Properties.

20 While pressing Shift. 13 In the left panel. click Main. and double-click 2 . click Mechanical Settings. 12 In the table. 14 Click OK. Create the cold water system 15 In the Project Browser. and on the Options Bar click (Filter Selection). click Branch. click Check None. for Name. 8 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. The default fittings for the hot water pipe are the same as those specified for the cold water pipe. select Domestic Cold Water from the System Type list. Create the Cold Water System | 391 . click Main. 16 Press F9 to open the System Browser. and click OK. select Domestic Cold Water from the System Type list. 21 On the Options Bar. click Branch. and specify Pipe Types : Hot Water for Pipe Type and 9' 0" for Offset. click the title bar for the browser and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. click View ➤ Piping.Plumbing to make it the active view. in the right pane. specify None For Cross. specify Pipe Cross: Standard For Transition. specify Pipe Straight Coupling: Standard 6 Click Apply. click the floor drain. and specify Pipe Types : Cold Water for Pipe Type and 9' 3" for Offset. specify Pipe Types : Cold Water for Pipe Type and 9' 3" for Offset. specify Pipe Elbow : Standard For Preferred Junction Type. Specify Mechanical Settings for the cold and hot water systems 7 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 10 In the left pane. in the right pane. specify Tee For Tee. and in the Name dialog. 18 Draw a left-to-right pick box around all of the plumbing fixtures in the men’s room. then click Duplicate. in the Type Parameters under Mechanical. click (Create Domestic Cold Water System). and avoids potential obstructions and conflicts between systems. and as long as there is a fixture without a common connector type. select Domestic Hot Water from the System Type list. select Domestic Hot Water from the System Type list. The floor drain has neither a hot or cold water connector. enter Hot Water. specify Pipe Tee: Standard For Tap. 9 In the table. and in the right pane. 11 In the left pane. You now have the cold water piping at 9' 3" and the hot water piping at 9' 0". 17 Right-click a table heading in the system browser. which places the piping above the ceiling. 19 In the Filter dialog. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. specify Pipe Transition : Standard For Union.5 In the Type Properties dialog. specify Pipe Types : Hot Water for Pipe Type and 9' 0" for Offset. verify that the following default fittings are specified: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Elbow. and click OK twice. the Options Bar will not have active tools for creating a system. and in the right pane. then select Plumbing Fixtures.

clear Casework. Piping is added to connect the sink to the cold water system. 24 On the Option Bar. click (Connect Into).The Domestic Cold Water folder is added in the system browser and all of the fixtures have been added to the Domestic Cold Water 1 system. 26 On the Options Bar. click Show categories from all disciplines. Create piping for the cold water system 22 Zoom in on the area below the sinks. 29 Click Modify. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. 35 On the Plumbing tab. select Pipe Types : Cold Water. click a point between the sink and the wall to specify the endpoint for the pipe. 392 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 27 Drag the preview to the right until the snap for the cold water connector for the rightmost sink displays. 32 Select the middle sink in the view. and in the Type Selector. 25 Move the cursor over the cold water connector on the leftmost sink. and click to specify the end the segment. 34 Zoom in on the area between the middle and rightmost sink. click to specify the starting point for the pipe. and on the Options Bar. and click to end the run as shown. 33 In the Select Connector dialog. click OK. click Pipe. 23 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. specify 0" /12" for Slope. specify 2' 6" for Offset. 31 In the Visibility/Graphic dialog. 30 Enter the keyboard shortcut VG. select the domestic cold water connector. and click the cold water pipe behind the sinks. 28 Move the preview up to the cold water connector on the sink. click Pipe. and click OK.

click the snap on the cold water pipe. select the cold water pipe. click Pipe. Create the Cold Water System | 393 . click to specify the end of the pipe. and click to specify an endpoint for the pipe. 40 Zoom in on the area between the toilets. 43 Drag the preview to the left. 37 Click to specify the starting point for the pipe as shown. and click to end that segment. 38 On the Options Bar. (If necessary. drag the preview up and into the mechanical room above the men’s room.36 Move the cursor over the cold water pipe at a point between the sinks. press Tab. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. and verify that the cold water pipe is not obstructed by the vertical vent.) 41 On the Plumbing tab. press Tab to avoid connecting to the sanitary piping. specify 1' 2" for Offset. 44 On the Options Bar. specify 9' 3" for Offset. and click Apply. and at a point near the vent that rises between the toilets and urinals. and use the keyboard left arrow to move the pipe to the left. 42 Move the cursor over a point on the cold water pipe in the chase. just above the wall. drag the preview into the center of the wall behind the sinks. 39 Click Modify.

52 Drag the preview to the left while maintaining the same angle. right-click the open connector. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. click to specify the endpoint as shown. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fixture. 48 On the Options Bar click (Connect Into). 51 Select the tee. and click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. click Draw Pipe. 49 Select the elbow behind the toilet. 50 On the Plumbing tab. 394 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems .45 Click Modify. double-click 3D. and when the center line for the left toilet displays. and click the + control to change it to a tee. Piping is automatically created between the vertical pipe and the toilet cold water connector.Plumbing. 46 In the Project Browser. 47 Zoom in on the area behind the toilets. click Pipe. select the rightmost toilet. and then click the vertical cold water pipe.

55 Select the rightmost urinal. . 54 Select the leftmost toilet. 56 Use the same method. and click the vertical cold water Piping is automatically created between the vertical pipe and the toilet cold water connector. and on the Options Bar click water pipe that you added to the tee. . Create the Cold Water System | 395 . connect the remaining urinals to the horizontal cold water pipe. and on the Options Bar click pipe.53 Click Modify. and click the horizontal cold Piping is automatically created between the vertical pipe and the toilet cold water connector.

58 Select the main cold water piping from the mechanical room.Plumbing view as shown. and the horizontal segment to the sinks. The final steps in this exercise adjust the size of several sections of the piping. as shown. 396 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . the tee. Adjust cold water pipe sizes 57 Use the View Cube in the upper-right corner of the view to spin the 3D .All of the cold water piping is in place.

60 Select the cold water branch piping from the main.59 On the Options Bar. specify 1 1/2" for D (diameter). but leaving the branch to the urinals as is). 63 Select the main and branch pipe segments as shown (including the tee behind the middle sink). 61 On the Options Bar. 62 Spin the 3D Plumbing view as needed to see the piping behind the sinks. feeding the toilets and urinals (including the tees. Create the Cold Water System | 397 . specify 2" for D (diameter). as shown.

Plumbing. and add piping to connect the sinks in the men’s room to the system. 67 Click File menu ➤ Close. Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser. 68 Proceed to the next exercise. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.64 On the Options Bar. click the Training Files icon. Create the Hot Water System on page 398. Create the Hot Water System In this exercise you add a water heater.rvt. create the hot water system. 398 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and zoom in on the sinks. 66 You can save the open file if you wish. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Creating Hot Water Piping. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. double-click 2 . expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. specify 3/4" for D (diameter). Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 65 Highlight a segment of cold water pipe in the system and press Tab to check the connectivity of the system as described previously.

click the Training Files icon. 5 In the Filter dialog. click Finish. select Plumbing Fixtures. 12 On the Mechanical tab on the Design Bar. and in the Type Selector. expand Domestic Hot Water. and click Select. Add a water heater to the hot and cold water systems 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. select Water Heater : 40Gallon. click Mechanical Equipment. 16 On the Edit System toolbar. click (Filter Selection). click the water heater. right-click Domestic Cold Water 1. click (Create Domestic Hot Water System). press the Space Bar 3 times to orient the water heater with the electrical connections to the left. click the title bar for the browser. click Check None. and click OK. 11 Zoom in on the mechanical room above the men’s room. 15 On the Options Bar.rfa. and click View ➤ Piping. click System toolbar. The Domestic Hot Water folder is added in the system browser and all of the fixtures have been added to the Domestic Hot Water 1 system. and on the Edit 17 In the System Browser. 8 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 On the Options Bar. right-click Domestic Hot Water 1. to the left of the main cold water pipe. click (Edit System). The Edit System toolbar is activated. 9 Expand Imperial ➤ Plumbing. expand Domestic Cold Water. 3 Right-click a table heading in the System Browser. and click Select. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. and click to place the water heater as shown. 13 Move the water heater preview into the mechanical room. and on the Options Bar. Create the Hot Water System | 399 .2 Press F9 to open the System Browser. 4 Draw a left-to-right pick box around the 3 sinks in the men’s room. (Add to System). 14 In the System Browser. 10 Double-click Water Heater.

click Draw Pipe. add the water heater to the cold water system. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. right-click the connector. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. 24 Move the cursor over the water heater. and click the main cold water pipe. and add 2 segments extending the main cold water piping into the chase. 400 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . click (Edit System). 19 Using the same method. 26 Specify an end point for the pipe between the water heater and the cold water pipe to the right. select Pipe Types : Hot Water. 20 Select the water heater in the view. specify 8' 6" for Offset. click Pipe. click (Connect Into). and then drag the pipe preview down to a point to the right and just above the middle sink. click OK. select the domestic cold water connector. 22 Select the open end of the main cold water pipe. click when the hot water connector displays. 25 On the Options Bar. 23 On the Plumbing tab. and in the Type Selector. and on the Options Bar.18 On the Options Bar. A segment of pipe is added connecting the water heater to the cold water system.

28 On the Plumbing tab. drag the preview to the right until the snap below the hot water connector for the rightmost sink displays. click Pipe. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. 33 Click Modify. click to specify the starting point for the pipe. 29 Move the cursor over the hot water connector on the leftmost sink. and click to specify the end of the segment. specify 2' 8" for Offset. 32 Move the preview up to the hot water connector on the sink and click to end the run as shown.27 Click Modify. and in the Type Selector. 30 On the Options Bar. Create the Hot Water System | 401 . select Pipe Types : Hot Water. 31 Click a point between the cold water piping and the wall to specify the endpoint for the pipe.

the Select Connector dialog was not displayed because the only possible connection was to the hot water system. 37 Drag the preview down into the center of the wall below the sinks. 40 In the Project Browser.34 Select the middle sink in the view. 402 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . (Connect Into). click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. 36 Right-click the open connector. and zoom in on the area behind the sinks. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. and on the Options Bar. 41 On the Plumbing tab. click Draw Pipe. and click to end that segment.Plumbing. click the connector at the open end of the vertical hot water pipe. 38 On the Options Bar. click Pipe. and In this case. click Apply. 39 Click Modify. specify 2' 8" for Offset. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. 35 Select the hot water piping from the water heater. double-click 3D. click click the hot water pipe below the sinks.

Create the Hot Water System | 403 . 47 Click File menu ➤ Close. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. This concludes the tutorial for plumbing systems. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. drag the preview to the piping connecting the hot water connectors for the sinks. double-click 2 . 44 In the Project Browser. 46 You can save the open file if you wish.Plumbing. 43 Click Modify. press Tab 3 times to check connectivity as described previously. 45 Highlight a fixture in the view. and click.42 While maintaining a 90 degree angle.

404 .

NOTE The architectural model used with this tutorial is in the Architectural folder. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Revit MEP 2009. if the link is lost. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. Then.rvt. insert fittings. During the fire protection design process. and finally. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided dataset. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems. In this lesson. you can choose to save your work. On the Revit tab on the Manage Links dialog. methodology. you will create both wet and dry fire protection systems for the second floor of an office building. Designing Fire Protection Systems The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. you create views and pipe types. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Revit MEP 2009. manually modify the pipes and fittings. navigate to Training Files ➤ Imperial ➤ Architectural. 405 . go to http://www. At the end of this tutorial. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. However. you create a wet and dry fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. After finishing each exercise. You should maintain the relative path to the architectural model. you can click File menu ➤ Manage Links to reload the linked model. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. you create a system to logically connect the sprinklers. In this tutorial. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you will understand the process.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. create schedules. If the tutorial datasets are not present. However. The datasets that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. click Reload From. and size and tag the pipes. By following the recommended workflow.autodesk. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. You begin each fire protection system design by placing sprinklers in the rooms. and select i Office Building. As you create the systems. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. You can search this directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded.Fire Protection Systems 8 In this tutorial. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model.

rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. do the following: ■ For Pipe Type. click the Training Files icon. 11 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. click Mechanical Settings. Next. 2 Right-click Standard. select Fire Protection Wet. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. Notice that the new dry pipe type inherits the same type properties from the wet pipe type. 3 Right-click the copy. and click OK. 5 In the Rename dialog. You can also click Settings menu ➤ Mechanical Settings. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. enter Fire Protection Wet. 13 Under System Type. click Rename. Configure pipe conversion settings 10 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. you need to configure the pipe conversion settings. 8 Click OK twice to create the new wet and dry pipe types. and click Properties. click Duplicate. NOTE If the Fire Protection tab is not available on the Design Bar. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. for Material. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. and click Fire Protection. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. select Carbon Steel. including the new material property. right-click the Design Bar. 12 For System Type. 7 With the Type Properties dialog open. You create new pipe types. and enter Fire Protection Dry for the new pipe type name. and click OK. you create another pipe type based on the new pipe type that you created. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet and Pipe Types : Fire Protection Dry are listed. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Main. Next. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. 9 In the Type Selector. Create new pipe types 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Mechanical. you begin work on the project that contains both the wet and dry fire protection systems.Starting the Fire Protection Project In this exercise. 406 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . Next. for New. you modify the pipe type properties. Open the i Starting the Fire Protection Project. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. and click Duplicate.

This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. duct. ■ ■ Define columns 21 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Click OK. 15 For System Type. To remove a field. select Branch. 22 While pressing Ctrl. However. and click Add. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. select Fire Protection Wet.■ For Offset. For Offset. and click Remove. do the following: ■ Under Category. click Schedule/Quantities. for Offset verify 9' 0". This adds the Area field to the list of scheduled fields to include in the schedule. verify that 9' 0" is selected. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. verify that 9' 0" is specified. structural beams. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. 14 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. Create a Space Schedule 19 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. select Spaces. or architectural components. Scheduled fields display as columns in the schedule. 18 Click OK. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. do the following: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 17 Using the same method. So. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. the pipe main will be offset from level 2. IMPORTANT The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. select the following fields from the Available fields list: ■ ■ ■ Level Name Number 23 Click Add to add the fields to the Scheduled fields list. 16 Under System Type. and specify Pipe Types : Fire Protection Dry for the Main and Branch piping. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. select Area. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. 20 In the New Schedule dialog. under Available fields. You can also configure these settings by clicking Settings on the Options Bar when the Layout Path tool is open. Starting the Fire Protection Project | 407 . for System Type Fire Protection Dry. select it.

26 In the Calculated Value dialog. you create a calculated value parameter to indicate the minimum number of sprinklers required for each space. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. do the following: ■ ■ Under Fields. 408 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . Verify that Ascending is selected. select Number. select Minimum Sprinklers. and use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to arrange the Scheduled fields list as follows: ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Level Area Next. Verify that Grand totals is cleared and Itemize every instance is selected. Verify that equals is selected. NOTE Formulas are case sensitive. verify that Number is selected. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. For Type. select Level. select Level 2. 27 Click OK. Create a calculated value parameter 25 Click Calculated Value. enter Area/130. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design and code requirements. The fire protection code requires one sprinkler for every 130 square feet. 30 On the Formatting tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. For Field formatting. For Then by.24 Select a field. For Formula. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). 29 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. enter Minimum Sprinklers. Under Level. verify that (none) is selected. Organize the data 28 On the Filter tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. For Discipline. verify that (none) is selected. click Field Format. For And. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Filter by. This information is based on the project specification and the fire protection codes. Verify that Formula is selected. verify that Common is selected.

you place the wet system sprinklers. you will want to round all decimals up to the next whole number. As a result. select 2 decimal places. Notice that only the data for the level 2 spaces displays. For Rounding. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. You then created 2 new pipe types for the wet and dry fire protection systems and modified their type properties. Next. A new view called Space Schedule opens and is located under Schedules/Quantities in the Project Browser. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. 32 You can save the open file if you wish. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). sorted according to space number. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. Starting the Fire Protection Project | 409 . you place the wet system sprinklers in the level 2 spaces. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. you created a Space Schedule for fire protection systems. select Fixed. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. Finally.31 In the Format dialog. Placing Sprinklers on page 410. Click OK twice. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. In this exercise. You can refer to the minimum number of sprinklers per space data as you place sprinklers in order to satisfy the design and code requirements. The conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems were also configured. Although you rounded the data to 2 decimal places. 33 Click File menu ➤ Close. you created new views and modified view properties. For Units. In the next exercise.

After placing the initial sprinkler. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Ceiling Plans. 2 Enter ZR. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion or a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. Open the i Placing Sprinklers. and double-click 2 .Placing Sprinklers In this exercise. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. 4 In the Type Selector. 5 On the Options Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. 410 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. click Sprinkler. As you place the sprinklers. When there is a small misalignment. Place a sprinkler 1 In the Project Browser.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. and sketch a zoom region around Office 201 (located in the upper-left corner of the building).Ceiling Fire Prot to make it the active view. click the Training Files icon. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click (Place on Face) to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. you place the fire protection wet system sprinklers in the ceilings of the spaces on level 2. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. select Sprinkler-Pendent-Hosted : 1/2" Pendent. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. When this happens. You will use the schedule that you created in the previous exercise to identify the required number of sprinklers per room.

Placing Sprinklers | 411 . verify that Constrain and Multiple are cleared. and that Copy is selected. 7 Click Modify on the Design Bar. You can also enter CO to activate the Copy tool. select the sprinkler that you placed. and after the intersection snap displays. Also the cursor changes indicating that the Copy tool is open. The selected sprinkler displays in red. First specify the start point on the element that you want to copy and then specify the end point (or destination).6 With the view zoomed. Continue placing sprinklers 8 In the drawing area. 10 On the Options Bar. You copy this sprinkler to place the other sprinklers. click to specify the copy start point. TIP Using the Copy tool is a 2-click process. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tile as shown. and click to place the sprinkler. 11 Select the upper-left corner of the ceiling grid. click (Copy). Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. 9 On the Edit toolbar.

click to specify the copy end point. you can enter SI to override all other snaps and display only intersection snaps. The copy selection border follows the cursor. 412 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . Note that snap overrides deactivate after you make a selection.12 Move the cursor diagonally to the lower-right as shown. You can also deactivate snaps in the Snaps dialog (click Settings menu ➤ Snaps). and after the intersection snap displays. and listening dimensions display to aid in placement. TIP If you have difficulty displaying an intersection snap because of other snaps interfering.

verify Constrain is cleared. Placing Sprinklers | 413 . click (Copy). 14 Select the lower-right sprinkler in Office 201. 17 In Office 201. place the cursor over the upper-left ceiling grid intersection immediately above the sprinkler that you selected. and select Multiple. 15 On the Edit toolbar. 16 On the Options Bar. Next. Copy is selected. Copy and array sprinklers 13 Zoom out to view the region around Office 201 and Office 202 (Office 202 is located immediately below Office 201). you copy and array sprinklers in Office 202.A copy of the sprinkler is immediately placed after you specify the end point. and after the intersection snap displays. This allows you to place multiple copies of an object without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. click to specify the copy start point.

click to specify the copy end point for the first sprinkler.18 Move the cursor down and to the right into Office 202. 414 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . and after the intersection snap displays.

19 Move the cursor directly down. Placing Sprinklers | 415 . and after the intersection snap displays. click to specify the copy end point for the second sprinkler.

The sprinklers are placed. 416 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems .

Rather than copy and place the rest of the sprinklers. Clear Group And Associate. 22 On the Edit toolbar. Placing Sprinklers | 417 . select Last.20 On the Design Bar. Verify that Constrain is cleared. For Move To. click (Array). select the 2 sprinklers that you placed in Office 202. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that (Linear) is selected for a linear array. Next. click Modify. because all of the sprinklers in Office 202 are equally spaced. TIP You can also enter AR to activate the Array tool. you array the other Office 202 sprinklers. you can use the Array tool to finish the job. 23 On the Options Bar. it is an ideal situation to use an array. 21 While pressing CTRL. Verify that 2 is specified for Number (of arrays). Furthermore. A border displays around the 2 sprinklers.

25 Move the cursor to the left along the same horizontal ceiling grid. An outline follows the cursor to aid in placement. You first specify an array start point. click to specify the array start point. and after the intersection snap displays. to specify array end point. click to specify the array end point as shown. then you move the cursor to the second or last location (if you have more than 2 arrays). 24 Move the cursor over the upper-left ceiling grid intersection directly above the upper Office 202 sprinkler. creating an array is a 2-step process. and after the intersection snap displays. 418 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems .NOTE Similar to the Move or Copy tool.

The Office 202 sprinklers are placed. Placing Sprinklers | 419 .

clear Multiple. A border displays around the selected sprinklers indicating the copy selection. 29 On the Options Bar. click (Copy).Next. and after the mid point snap displays. select both sprinklers in the corner office (Office 201). 30 Place the cursor in the center of the selection border. 28 On the Edit toolbar. 420 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . 26 Zoom out to view all 3 offices along the left wall. 27 While pressing Ctrl. you place sprinklers in Office 203. click to specify the copy start point.

and after the mid point snap displays.31 Move the cursor directly down along the same vertical ceiling grid and into the center of Office 203. Placing Sprinklers | 421 . click to specify the copy end point.

enter SM to override all other snaps and display only mid point snaps. 422 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems .NOTE If you have difficulty locating the mid point snap.

35 On the Edit toolbar. Placing Sprinklers | 423 . Open 204. click (Copy). Create multiple sprinkler arrays 33 Zoom in to view Office 203 and part of the adjacent common area. you place sprinklers in the large common space. Open 204.You have now placed the sprinklers for 3 offices. You copy this sprinkler to Open 204 and use it to create a sprinkler array. Next. 36 On the Options Bar. 34 Select the lower-right Office 203 sprinkler. verify that Multiple is cleared. 32 Click Modify. 37 Specify the copy start point at the upper-left ceiling grid intersection directly above the sprinkler.

enter 6 for the number of arrays. 40 Select the sprinkler that you copied.38 Move the cursor to the right into Open 204 as shown. Verify that Constrain is cleared. Next. Verify that Group And Associate is cleared. you array this sprinkler to place multiple sprinklers in the lower section of Open 204. For Move To. 424 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . For Number. The Office 203 sprinkler is copied to Open 204. You could copy sprinklers. and after the intersection snap displays. 42 On the Options Bar. 43 Specify the ceiling grid intersection to the upper-right of the sprinkler as the array start point. 39 Click Modify. select 2nd. 41 On the Edit toolbar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that (Linear) is selected for a linear array. but creating an array is quicker. click to place the sprinkler. click (Array).

and after the intersection snap displays. The array is created. Zoom out to display the array. click to specify the array end point as shown.44 Move the cursor along the same horizontal ceiling grid to the right. Placing Sprinklers | 425 .

enter 4 for number of arrays. undo the step and try again. For Move To.IMPORTANT When specifying array start and end points make certain that the array is placed accurately. click to specify end point for the second array. select all the sprinklers except for the far left sprinkler in the Open 204 space. 46 On the Edit toolbar. Verify that Group And Associate is cleared. 47 On the Options Bar. 49 Move the cursor directly down along the same vertical ceiling grid. If you make a mistake placing the array. Any misplacement has a multiplier effect as the array propagates. 45 While pressing CTRL. 426 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . Next. For Number. click (Array). do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that (Linear) is selected for a linear array. 48 Specify the array start point at the ceiling grid intersection directly to the upper-left of the left sprinkler as shown. and after the intersection snap displays. Verify that Constrain is cleared. you create multiple arrays based on this array. verify that 2nd is selected.

Notice that 3 sprinklers are located outside of the building. 51 Expand the 3 Warnings. click Expand. click the check box associated with each warning. and click Delete Checked to delete the 3 sprinklers.The arrays are created. You need to remove these sprinklers to resolve the errors. Sprinkler placement for the lower section of Open 204 is complete Placing Sprinklers | 427 . and an error message displays informing you that 3 sprinklers do not lie on the host face (ceiling tiles). 50 In the Revit MEP 2009 dialog.

Place non-hosted sprinklers 55 In the Project Browser. move the cursor to the approximate center of the space. IMPORTANT A family contains one or more family types (different sizes. 428 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . and then to edit the family in the Family Editor. you place a sprinkler in the Mechanical/Electrical space. To modify a family type. 57 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. 56 Enter ZR.Next. 53 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and double-click 2 . and so on) in the RFA (Revit Family) file. and click Modify. first. click Sprinkler.rfa file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection folder. select an instance of the family type in the drawing area. you will use a non-hosted sprinkler. Load a new sprinkler family 52 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. Families are loaded and saved in the current project (dataset). click Edit Family on the Options Bar. select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright. 59 In the Mechanical/Electrical space. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. you need to load them in the project. 58 In the Type Selector. These family types can be selected in the Type Selector or under Families in the Project Browser. click the Training Files icon. 54 Open the Sprinkler -Upright. and sketch a zoom region around the Mechanical/Electrical space (located between the Men’s and the Ladies’ rooms). The sprinkler family loads into the project. click to place the sprinkler.Fire Prot to make it the active view. However. Because this space does not have a ceiling.

63 In the Project Browser. as shown. double-click 2 . NOTE Click the center of the sprinkler. Unconstrain the sprinkler when deleting the dimension. and notice that the sprinkler displays in the Mechanical/Electrical space. Placing Sprinklers | 429 . 61 In the Element Properties dialog.Ceiling Fire Prot. Do not click the vertical line that displays as the reference. and when a dot displays click to specify the center. then click the wall face of the lower wall. and move the dimension to the left.The sprinkler is added to the space at an offset of 0' 0". select Wall Faces 65 Click the upper wall face. Next you adjust the offset. and on the Options Bar. click Dimension. for Offset. 60 Right-click the sprinkler. and because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the 2 . do the following: ■ ■ Verify that (Aligned) is selected For Prefer. 66 Click to center the sprinkler between the upper and lower wall. 62 Click OK. and click Element Properties.Ceiling Fire Prot view. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. under Instance Parameters. 64 On the Design Bar. and press Delete. enter 10' 6". click the center of the sprinkler. 67 Select the dimension.

430 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . ■ ■ NOTE When placing sprinklers. then click Modify. snap to the ceiling grid intersections rather than entering placement dimensions. Round decimals up to the next whole number. NOTE Do not place sprinklers in the stairwell or Server Room 215. Use sprinkler type: Sprinkler-Pendent-Plane_Hosted : 1/2" Pendent for all rooms. Grid snapping ensures accurate placement. You will create a Fire Protection Dry System in Server Room 215 in a later exercise. Click to place the sprinklers on ceiling tile faces.68 Using the same method. Complete the level 2 sprinkler placement 69 Using the placement methods that you have learned. center the sprinkler between the right and left walls. complete the level 2 sprinkler placement according to the following criteria and floor plan: ■ Refer to the room schedule to verify the required number of sprinklers for each room.

73 You can save the open file if you wish. and on the toolbar. click to prevent further movement of the sprinklers that would cause misalignment. (Pin) 72 In the Filter dialog. double-click 2 . a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.70 In the Project Browser. and click (Filter). 71 Draw a pick box around the entire model. Placing Sprinklers | 431 . click Check None.Fire Prot. then select Sprinklers.

A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods and loaded a new sprinkler family into the project. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. In this exercise. Unlike logical connections (systems). 432 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. you connect the sprinklers both logically by creating a system.74 Click File menu ➤ Close. 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. 1 In the Project Browser. In the next exercise. Open the i Connecting Sprinklers. After creating the logical connection. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. click the Training Files icon. Connecting the Sprinklers on page 432. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. Then you simplify the layout using tools from the Layout Paths tab on the Design Bar to modify pipe branches after converting the initial layout to piping. 75 Proceed to the next exercise. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Connecting the Sprinklers In this exercise. and physically with piping.Fire Prot to make it the active view. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. and double-click 2 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. However.

click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements. and display pinned and in red. 4 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. Notice that system tools display on the Options Bar. If the System Browser does not respond. TIP You can also press F9 (or click Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. Connect sprinklers with a system 5 Draw a pick box (from left to right) around the lower half of the building as shown. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow.Explore the System Browser 3 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create your systems. select Sprinklers. click System Browser. All sprinklers in the lower half of the building are selected. 7 In the Filter box. and click OK. 6 On the Options Bar. click Check None. You select only half of the sprinklers on level 2 because it makes connecting the sprinklers more manageable. click (Create Fire Protection Wet System) to create a fire protection wet system. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. and provides more layout path solutions to choose from when creating pipes. then press F9. Make certain to include the lower sprinklers in Office 203 and Office 211. As you assign sprinklers to systems. click in the drawing area to make it active. Connecting the Sprinklers | 433 . 8 On the Options Bar.

The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. Next. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. 11 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. press Tab. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. 434 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. and click Select. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. all of the sprinklers in the system have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. select an initial piping layout. In the System Browser. named Fire Protection Wet 1. The Layout Paths tools are activated on the Design Bar and Options Bar. place the cursor over a sprinkler. and a piping layout preview displays. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red indicating the logical connection. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. and select the system or select the Fire Protection Wet 1 again in the System Browser. 12 With the Fire Protection Wet 1 system selected. and click Expand to view the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. right-click Fire Protection Wet. click (Layout Path) on the Options Bar. expand Piping. 10 Double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the sprinklers. under Fire Protection Wet in the Piping folder.

23 On the Design Bar. 20 Zoom in on the stairway at the right side of the model. click Place Base. 19 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. You can also view possible layout path solutions by pressing the left and right keyboard arrow keys. and for Offset. click Solutions. 14 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. For Offset. Click (Previous Solution). and select solution 4. 18 Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. select Branch. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection Wet is selected. 16 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. and on the Options Bar. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. ■ Connecting the Sprinklers | 435 . click Settings. click Solutions. 17 Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. 21 Move the cursor over the lower-left corner of the stairwell. and on the Options Bar. and click to place the base component as shown. IMPORTANT The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. enter -12' 0". 22 On the Options Bar. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2. verify that Main is selected. (Layout Path) button is available on the Options Bar whenever a system component 13 On the Design Bar.NOTE The is selected. When the layout is finished. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. these settings will convert the base component to a 6" riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0"). verify that 6"150 mm is specified for D. do the following: ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. 15 Under System Type: Fire Protection Wet. verify that 9' 0" is specified. The layout path solution displays.

On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. 436 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. A (parallel movement control) displays. click Modify. Modify the layout 24 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. you modify the selected layout. (elbow control) ■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. In general. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction.Next. 26 Select the vertical layout path segment. 25 Zoom in on the vertical main.

27 Drag the parallel movement control to the left to a point to the right of the doorway for Office 216. and midway between the sprinklers above the office as shown. 28 Select the horizontal branch pipe to the lower sprinkler in Office 211. Connecting the Sprinklers | 437 .

31 Drag the it. and drag the down to merge it with the horizontal piping below. 438 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . select the horizontal branch again. (elbow junction control) The piping for Office 203 is reconnected to the branch in the open area. (tee junction control) down to the intersection with the main piping just below 32 Scroll to the left. as shown. 30 Select the horizontal branch pipe.29 Drag the parallel movement control down until the pipe merges with the horizontal piping to the left. feeding the sprinkler in Office 203.

Drag the lower branch piping up to merge it with the branch piping. However. 35 On the toolbar. 36 Select the horizontal branch feeding the lower sprinkler in Office 211. 37 Drag the (tee junction control) up to the intersection of main and the branch above. it is an opportunity to merge the piping into a shared branch. there are situations where you must make modifications outside of the Layout Paths. Thin lines make it easier to see the various drag controls when using junction and elbow controls. In general. click (Thin Lines). as shown. Connecting the Sprinklers | 439 . 34 Select the piping feeding the lower sprinkler in the left office. Next you combine the piping for the sprinklers in Office 216 by dragging each end of the pipe separately. whenever there is a branch feeding a single sprinkler.33 Zoom in on the 3 offices at the bottom of the model. You can make many of these modifications using the Layout Paths tools. So far. you have been using parallel movements to combine piping.

All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically inserted. and drag the the branch piping.38 Select the horizontal branch again. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. (elbow junction control) up to combine 39 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. 440 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the lower half of level 2. or that offset elevations are incorrect. Either relocate the system components. IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. or manually modify the pipe. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. click Finish Layout. select a different layout solution.

and verify that (Auto Connect) is selected on the Options Bar. on the Options Bar. draw a pick box to select the piping feeding the lower sprinkler in Office 211. and click the horizontal pipe feeding the sprinkler 47 Drag the open end of the main piping up to connect with the horizontal piping as shown. including the cross and transitions from the main piping. right-click the connector at the open end. 43 Press Delete. clear Sprinklers. 44 Select the horizontal pipe. click draw pipe. click to specify the end point. as shown. 42 In the Filter dialog. 41 On the Options Bar. Connecting the Sprinklers | 441 . as shown. (Connect Into). click (Filter). then continue drawing the pipe up to connect the sprinkler. 45 Draw the pipe to the right and when the snap below the sprinkler in Office 211 displays. and click OK. 46 Select the sprinkler that was disconnected in the open area when the piping was deleted.Continue combining piping 40 Zoom in on Office 211. and the sprinkler in the open area. click in Office 211.

and drag the connector to the right to connect with the vertical pipe as shown. Reconnect the sprinklers in Office 214 and 216 52 Select the vertical pipe in Office 216. as shown. select all the piping to the 2 lower sprinklers in Office 214. including the pipe and the tee as shown. 51 Press Delete. 49 Draw a pick box around the horizontal piping and fittings between the sprinklers in Office 216 and the main in Server Room 215. and drag the top connector up to connect with the horizontal piping in the open area. 53 Select the horizontal pipe in Office 216. 50 While pressing Ctrl. 442 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . and press Delete.48 Zoom in on the 3 offices at the bottom of the model.

and press Space to assume the size and elevation of the horizontal pipe. click to specify the end point for the pipe. then drag the preview to the connector snap on the right-most sprinkler. Click Modify. 55 On the Design Bar. and do the following: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Click the horizontal pipe between the left wall of Office 214 and the upper-left sprinkler. ■ Connecting the Sprinklers | 443 . ■ Continue dragging the preview down until aligned with the 2 lower sprinklers. verify that (Auto Connect) is selected. click Pipe. and click to make the connection to the sprinkler. Drag the preview down.54 Zoom in on the office in the lower-right corner.

444 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . and on the toolbar click 57 Click each of the open-ended pipes. On the Options Bar. click (Connect Into). (Trim/Extend). ■ Reconnect the piping for Office 214 to the main 56 Zoom in on the open piping above Server Room 215.■ Select the sprinkler to the left. and click the horizontal pipe as shown.

Open the i Completing the Wet System. 1 In the Project Browser. The entire system should be highlighted. Next. you create the dry fire protection system. In this exercise. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. you created piping to physically connect the sprinklers. click the Training Files icon. and select the tee fitting connecting the main to the upper horizontal branch piping. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. After creating the system.Fire Prot view. indicating connectivity throughout the system. 62 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. checked connectivity. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the next exercise. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. 60 You can save the open file if you wish. you created a system to logically connect the sprinklers. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 445 . and then you create piping to physically connect them. and double-click the 2 . you add the sprinklers in the upper half of the model to the existing wet system. 61 Click File menu ➤ Close. and converted pipe fittings.An elbow is inserted to complete the connection. 2 Zoom in. 58 Click Modify. You confirmed the system and the assigned sprinklers in the System Browser. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. expand Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and press Tab twice. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System on page 445. Check pipe connectivity 59 Highlight a pipe in the main for the system.

System tools display on the Options Bar. mechanical equipment. system equipment. or sprinkler in the current wet system. and pipe or duct is created. The cross provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the upper half of the model. You use this tool to add mechanical equipment that is located upstream in a system. such as VAV boxes. and AC units. 5 Click (Edit System) to edit the selected system. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. 4 In the 2 . and number of elements in the system. select a pipe segment. fitting. 446 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . air terminals. you can select the pipe or duct.Fire Prot view. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection).3 Click the plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a cross. radiators. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. NOTE Do not click (Select Equipment for System). or a system component to display system tools on the Options Bar. and so on) are logically connected by a system. boilers. The Edit System toolbar displays providing system editing tools.

verify that None is specified. You cannot select them. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 447 . Notice that the cursor has changed to indicate that Add To System is active. verify that 30 is specified. Do not worry about including sprinklers that are already connected. For System Equipment. 8 Place the cursor outside Office 201 in the upper-left corner of the building. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ (Add To System). verify that Fire Protection Wet 1 is specified. 9 Draw a pick box from upper-left to lower-right around all of the sprinklers that need to be connected. For System Name. Notice that system components that are not connected to the Fire Protection Wet 1 system display as an underlay (they are grayed out). click 7 On the Options Bar.6 On the Edit System toolbar. Select Multiple. This information reports that there are 30 sprinklers currently connected to the wet system. For Number of Elements. You are going to select multiple elements to include into the wet system.

The selected sprinklers display in red. for Solution Type. 14 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Layout Paths tab on the Design Bar. This is separate from the Finish for the System Editor. and click Modify. and on the Options Bar. 12 Select a sprinkler in the upper half of the model. solution 1 3. select Network. verify that Solutions is selected. (Layout 448 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . click Finish to finish your selection of the sprinklers being added to the system. Number of Elements now displays as 65 (sprinklers) in the system. click Finish to finish editing the system. click Paths). On the Options Bar. The sprinklers in the upper half of the building are assigned to the Fire Protection Wet 1 and no longer display as an underlay. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. 10 NOTE When you use multiple selections. you must click Finish on the Options bar to complete the selections. 11 On the Edit System toolbar. On the Options Bar.

17 Select the vertical branch again. 15 Zoom in on the upper left corner of the model. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 449 . and drag the tee junction control to the intersection to the left as shown. 16 Select the vertical pipe to the lower sprinkler in the corner office (201).The layout automatically provides a path from the upper layout to the cross created earlier. and drag the elbow junction control to the left to combine the branch piping as shown.

as shown.18 Scroll to the right and select the branch to the lower-right sprinkler in Office 208. click Finish Layout. The tee junction control will stop at the junction of the tee from the main piping. drag each end of the branch to the left to combine it with the piping to the sprinkler just to above. Click the tee junction control again and continue the adjustment. 20 On the Design Bar. 450 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . 19 Using the same method. The piping for the upper half of the model displays.

23 Click File menu ➤ Close. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 451 . you create the dry fire protection system. you create a dry fire protection system for Server Room 215. In an actual dry system. and checked connectivity. you created piping to physically connect the sprinklers. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System on page 451. 22 You can save the open file if you wish. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 24 Proceed to the next exercise. The dry system prevents any water discharge onto sensitive computer equipment. In this exercise. a valve would isolate the dry system from the wet system. you added the remaining wet system sprinklers and logically connected them to the existing system. In the next exercise. and the pipes for this system would not contain water until a valve opens enabling water flow through the pipes to the sprinklers in order to extinguish the fire. indicating connectivity throughout the system. After creating the system. and then you create a system and piping to logically and physically connect the sprinklers. you create the dry system by placing sprinklers. and press Tab 3 times. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. it is enough show how the system is created without adding a valve. For this exercise. As with the wet system. The entire system should be highlighted.Check pipe connectivity 21 Highlight the pipe from the riser in the stairwell. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System In this exercise.

3 Select the lower sprinkler in Office 216. press Tab until the sprinkler displays on the status bar at the lower left corner of the window. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Ceiling Fire Prot to make the view active. 1 In the Project Browser.Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 452 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . Be careful to select only the sprinkler. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. Place sprinklers 2 Zoom in to view the 3 spaces at the bottom of the model. Open the i Creating the Dry System. click the Training Files icon.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. and double-click 2 . If necessary.

The sprinklers are placed in the ceiling. as shown. click (Copy).4 On the Edit toolbar. TIP You can also enter CO to activate the Copy tool. Select Multiple to place multiple sprinkler copies in the ceiling. then move the cursor diagonally to the upper-right. click to specify the copy end point for the first sprinkler. along the same horizontal ceiling grid. and click to specify the copy end point for the second sprinkler. and after the ceiling grid intersection snap displays. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 453 . 6 Move the cursor to the upper-left corner directly above the sprinkler. 7 Move the cursor to the right into Server Room 215. Notice that a border around the selected sprinklers displays indicating the copy selection. 5 On the Options Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Constrain is cleared. click to specify the copy start point. 8 Click Modify. Verify that Copy is selected.

select both Server Room 215 sprinklers. For Slope. The system is created and listed in the System Browser.Pendent . This creates a slight slope for the dry system pipe run.Hosted : 1/2" Dry Pendent. For Offset. 17 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. 19 On the Options Bar. Verify that Auto Connect is selected. 454 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . 13 In the System Browser. Create the dry system piping 15 In the Project Browser. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For D: (diameter). 10 In the Type Selector. click (Create Fire Protection Dry System) to create the dry system and assign the sprinklers to it. 11 On the Options Bar. click Pipe. 18 In the Type Selector. 16 Zoom in on Server Room 215.Next. verify that 1/2" is selected. Create the dry system 9 While pressing CTRL.Fire Prot to make it the active view. you change the sprinkler type.Dry . verify that 9' 0" is specified. 14 Right-click the Fire Protection Dry 1 system category. The System Browser opens. The dry system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red. expand Piping ➤ Fire Protection Dry. select Sprinkler . and click Select The selected system displays in red. Confirm and validate the system 12 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Dry. click System Browser. double-click 2 . enter 1/8" / 12".

as shown.20 Click the horizontal pipe directly above the upper-right sprinkler. when the snap for the lower-left sprinkler displays. 22 Continue to draw the pipe to the left and. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 455 . Do not connect to the upper right sprinkler. and click. to specify a starting point for the piping 21 Draw the pipe preview straight down to a point even with the lower-left sprinkler. click to connect the pipe.

and click View Properties. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. select Show categories from all disciplines. click None. and clear a check mark from any category. All categories are cleared.23 Press ESC to exit the Draw tool. on the Model Categories tab. as shown. expand Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans ➤ 3D Views. 456 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . and zoom in on the dry fire protection system. click Edit. 29 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. All categories are selected except the Lines category. You can confirm this in the 3D view or by checking connectivity. and double-click 3D. 27 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. Next. and clear the Lines category. Click OK twice. click All. 24 In the Project Browser. The pipe passed over but did not connect to the upper-right sprinkler. under Instance Parameters. you connect the upper sprinkler to the pipe. Only the sprinklers and piping are visible in the view. click All. 28 Clear Show categories from all disciplines. select any category. 25 Right-click an empty area in the drawing area.

The sprinkler connects into the pipe. and all pipe fittings are automatically added. To follow good design practice. click . Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 457 . the pipe is sloped toward the main for drainage purposes. 31 On the Options Bar. 32 Zoom the view. and select the pipe segment above the sprinkler. and select each pipe segment to verify the slope.30 Select the unconnected sprinkler. You can click the slope control to change the reference end for the slope. The slope value displays next to the slope control.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. 5 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. checked pipe connectivity. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Fire Prot to make the view active. You have completed the dry fire protection system. 4 Enter WT to tile both windows.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and validated the pipe geometry in the 3D view. and press TAB 3 times. the active view is tiled to the left. highlight a pipe segment in the dry system. 36 Proceed to the next exercise. In this exercise. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Open the i Modifying Pipe Diameters. you created the dry system and a pipe run to logically and physically connect the sprinklers. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ 3D views. you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. The dry system pipe run and the wet system pipe run highlight. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. you created the fire protection dry system that services Server Room 215. 2 If necessary. you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. This closes all windows previously opened during the current design session. indicating that they are connected. you confirmed the systems in the System Browser. First. TIP When you tile 2 views. and double-click 3D to make the view active. you placed dry system sprinklers. Then. Modifying Pipe Diameters In this exercise. 3 In the Project Browser. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers. and double-click 2. 458 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . click the Training Files icon. 35 Click File menu ➤ Close. Additionally. 34 You can save the open file if you wish. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser.Check connectivity and validate pipe geometry 33 Zoom out to display the entire model. Modifying Pipe Diameters on page 458.

width. and click OK.Fire Prot view. and because the design specifications require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers.You will work mainly in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view. select Pipe Fittings and Pipes. 8 In the Filter dialog. click . height. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 459 . or height. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter. or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. 7 On the Options Bar. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run 6 The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers. width. draw a pick box around the entire level 2 fire protection piping. it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for all pipe runs. Changing the diameter. This selects the entire level 2 pipe run. or width. click Check None. In the 2. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter. and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. starting at the upper-left corner of the building.

zoom in on the supply pipe in the stairwell. 12 Place the cursor over a main pipe segment. verifying that it is connected. select the supply pipe in the stairwell. the elbow and the horizontal pipe to the main piping to remove them from the selection. and press TAB twice. The entire fire protection pipe run highlights. 10 On the Options Bar. 11 Select any pipe segment and verify the 1 inch diameter on the Options Bar. select 1".9 Click in the 3D view to make it active. and while pressing SHIFT. for D: (diameter). All pipes and pipe fittings change to a 1 inch diameter except for the supply piping. 460 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems .

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 461 . and on the toolbar. select the model. click (Pin) to prevent the linked model from moving.Modify the diameter of the main 13 In the 2 -Fire Prot view. If branch segments are selected. you can SHIFT-select to remove them from the selection. NOTE Do not include branch pipe segments. draw a narrow pick box around the main pipe. TIP If you have difficulty selecting piping segments without moving the linked architectural model.

the pipe fittings. draw a pick box around the horizontal main. 462 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems .14 With the main selected. and the supply pipe. while pressing CTRL.

use the pipes and pipe fittings. 2 3 4. select Fine. especially around the pipe fittings. Sprinklers Serviced 1. and for Model Graphics Style. 15 On the Options Bar. and on the View Control Bar. 18 On the Options Bar. select the tee connecting the supply piping to the main.The main piping is selected and displays in red. for Detail Level. 19 Validate the pipe run geometry. (Filter) to select only 16 Double-click the 3D view. The following table shows the pipe diameter that will be used for each branch in the fire protection systems. The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. 5 6-10 Pipe Diameter 1" 1 1/4" 1 1/2" 2" Modifying Pipe Diameters | 463 . select 4". NOTE If you select sprinklers with the pipes and pipe fittings. Modify the diameter of branch pipes 20 The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. for D. 17 In the 3D view. for D: 6". select Shading with Edges.

for Detail. select Shading with Edges.Fire Prot view to make it active. and the 2 dry sprinklers in Office 215). for D:. 26 Select the next pipe segment and tee to the right. Be sure to include the tee at the right end of the pipe run in your selection. select Fine and for Model Graphics Style. 23 On the View Control Bar. and draw a zoom region around the lower 3 offices in the building. select 2". The pipe diameter is modified. 464 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . 25 On the Options Bar. 22 Enter ZR. 24 Select the pipe segments and fittings that connect Office 214 and 215 directly to the main as shown. You need to change the diameters of these segments to conform to the requirements.21 Click in the 2 . Notice that some branch pipe segments service more than 2 sprinklers. The specifications requires a diameter of 2" for this pipe segment. This piping services 6 sprinklers (4 in the corner office.

for D:. 27 On the Options Bar. select 1 1/2". you continue to modify the pipe branch. for D: select 1 1/2". 29 Select the pipe and tee that connects the first sprinkler on the branch. 28 Double-click 3D to make it the active view. It’s easier to select the fitting above the first sprinkler in this branch from a 3D view.This segment services 4 sprinklers. and on the Options Bar. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 465 . Next. zoom in on the piping to Office 216.

36 Place the cursor over the first pipe segment that connecting the branch to the main. click to place the tag. Notice that an outline of the tag displays and follows the cursor for accurate placement. press Tab until the pipe is highlighted place a tag on the supply pipe in the stairwell. Clear Leader. Click Tags. and after the segment highlights. 33 On the Options Bar. for D: select 1 1/4". verify that Pipe Size Tag is loaded. Next. you place a tag and include a leader line. zoom in on the branch that you modified in the preceding step. 38 Place the cursor over the vertical supply pipe in the stairwell. Tag the pipes 31 In the 2 Fire Prot view. 37 On the Options Bar. for Pipes. select Leader. NOTE Tags are view specific. 466 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . click Tag ➤ By Category. They display only in the view in which they were placed. 32 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar.30 Select the segment and fitting to the remaining sprinklers on this branch. and on the Options Bar. 35 Click OK. under Category. 34 In the Tag dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Horizontal is selected.

you finish modifying the pipe run diameters. and finish tagging the pipes. Sprinklers Serviced 1. 2 3 4. 40 Drag the horizontal control to the upper-left to relocate the tag. Complete pipe diameter modification and tag placement 41 For more practice use the methods that you learned in this exercise to finish modifying pipe run diameters according to the following criteria. 5 6-10 Pipe Diameter 1" 1 1/4" 1 1/2" 2" Modifying Pipe Diameters | 467 .39 Click the tag to display end controls (blue dots) and horizontal controls (arrows). and finish placing the pipe tags. Next.

The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet and dry systems. 43 Click File menu ➤ Close.42 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. 468 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . For additional practice. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. In this exercise. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. The completed fire protection system is included in the i Completed Fire Protection System. In this tutorial. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. you created a wet and a dry fire protection system. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. and sizing as opposed to manually modifying a pipe diameter.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection folder under Training Files. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. You can save the open file if you wish. You learned the difference between pipe sizing and manually changing the diameter of a pipe. You added tags the pipes.

Selecting the correct discipline is critical to the content working correctly. Revit MEP operation and the behavior of your components depends to a great extent on how you create specific components. you use the Family Editor to modify and create tags and annotation symbols. you should have a working knowledge of Revit MEP and experience with the actual components that you will be modeling. After learning to modify an existing family. telephone. ■ Duct connectors are associated with ductwork. Revit MEP Content The primary difference between content for Revit MEP and content for Revit Architecture or Revit Structure is the concept of connectors. it cannot be changed without first deleting the connector and adding it again with the correct discipline. In the third lesson. and other elements that are part of the air handling systems. pipe fittings. not only for the geometry. medical gases and other non-fluid materials are often transmitted using piping systems. The discipline assigned to a connector determines its behavior and the types of systems with which it can interact. Before using this tutorial. but also to understand how the settings in the Family Editor affect the family. Connectors are primarily logical entities that allow calculating loads within the building. alarm systems and others.Creating Revit MEP Content 9 This tutorial expands your knowledge of the Family Editor by introducing several unique features in Revit MEP. including power. ■ ■ NOTE The term fluid does not necessarily limit the use of piping systems to liquids. Although the exercises in this tutorial describe settings that are specific to a particular 469 . you create a new lighting fixture and 2 pipe fittings. and other components that are meant for transmitting fluids. Pipe connectors are used for piping. All Revit MEP content requires connectors for to be intelligent Revit MEP components. you begin by modifying existing families to create new types. In this tutorial. Electrical connectors are used for any type of electrical connections. duct fittings. Components created without connectors cannot participate in a system topology. Three disciplines can be assigned to connectors that are added to a family. Family Editor Creating a family requires careful thought. as after this selection is made. Steam.

and save the family as Exhaust Ventilator . Define shared parameters. or plumbing component. If you can find a component that is similar to the family that you want.rfa. Modifying Families In this lesson. You can modify an existing component. Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor Exhaust Ventilator . select Electrical. click the Format column. Save a copy of the family 1 Click File ➤ Save As. electrical. navigate to a folder of your choice. 5 In the Format dialog. 4 In the Project Units dialog. and then load it into the project. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Finally. it is easier to modify a component. 470 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content .Downblast . The process you use to create the family will determine how a part flexes as geometric parameters are modified. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Set project units 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units.Downblast. open it in the Family Editor. Place connectors. modify it as needed. There are several ways to create a family with the Family Editor. If a family you are creating is very similar to an existing family. instead of creating a new one. 6 Click OK to close the Project Units window. it is important to recognize how components interact to affect the overall design. and for Current. 7 Save the family. At times. and click OK.mechanical. for Discipline. you modify existing components to create new types and build custom component families. there are times when it is best to create a new family instead of attempting to create a single family with types to address every application. the heat released by a light fixture affects the cooling requirements for a space. select 1 decimal place. 2 In the Save As dialog. click the Training Files icon.rfa. you may want to create multiple types within the existing family instead of creating a new family. although it may be easier to modify an existing family. for Rounding. Create formulas for parameters. Modifying a Fan Family In this exercise you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Modify an existing family. For example. You can create a component from scratch. Map parameters Create multiple types within a family.

under Parameters. Shared_Parameters) for the shared parameter file. enter MEP. To reuse this tutorial. click Add. Click Yes. click Add. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. under Parameters. select Motor FLA. and click Save. click New. 17 In the Parameter Properties dialog. create additional shared parameters with the following properties: Name Voltage Motor FLA Power Phase Number of Poles Discipline Electrical Electrical Electrical Common Electrical Type Electrical Potential Current Power Integer Number of Poles 20 Click OK. click the Shared parameter option. 15 For Name. and click OK. 19 Using the same method. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 13 Browse to a folder. and click Create. enter Text 18 Click OK. you must remove the shared parameter text file created in the previous step.Create Shared Parameters 8 On the Design Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Name. Add shared parameters to the Family Type 21 In the Shared Parameters dialog. and click OK. click New. NOTE The parameter values stored in the shared parameter file will remain after completing this tutorial. enter a File name (for example. 23 In the Family Types dialog. enter Motor HP For Discipline. select the Type option. The new parameter is added to the Family Types dialog under the Electrical Engineering category. click Family Types 9 In the Family Types dialog. enter Common For Type. 16 Under Parameters. 14 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 11 If you have not already created a shared parameter file. under Parameters. and click OK. and click Select. you will be prompted to choose a file from another project or to create a new file. under Groups. for Group parameter under. select the Electrical Engineering. 24 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Modifying a Fan Family | 471 . 12 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. select the Shared parameter option. and click Select.

for Parameter Group.3 Ph Voltage 208 208 460 Phase 1 3 3 Number of Poles Motor FLA 2 3 3 8.208 V .1 Ph 2 HP .8 7. 472 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 31 Click OK. for Group parameter under. select Electrical Engineering. Create New Family Types 29 Under Family Types. create additional Family Types with the following parameter values: Name 1 HP . and click OK.3 Ph 3 HP . select the Type option.8 Motor HP 1 2 3 34 Click OK.208 V . and click OK.25 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 3. under Parameter Data. 35 Save the family. enter 1/6 HP . as defined below: Parameter Phase Number of Poles Motor HP Power Group Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Mechanical Electrical Engineering Instance/Type Type Type Type Type Create a parameter formula to calculate power 28 In the Formula column for Power. enter the following formula: Voltage * Motor FLA * sqrt(if(Phase = 3.5 4. select MEP. add the following shared parameters to the family type.460 V . select Voltage. 27 Using the same method. click New. 32 Specify the following values for the shared parameters in the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Voltage = 115 Phase = 1 Number of Poles = 1 Motor FLA = 4. under Parameters.1 Ph. 26 In the Parameter Properties. 1)) NOTE Formulas are case sensitive… make sure you use the same case as the names of the parameters you created.4 Motor HP = 1/6 The value for Power is calculated from the parameter values specified. 33 Using the same method.115 V . 30 For Name.

including power. NOTE If necessary. Connectors can be placed on a Face or on a Work Plane. Click and drag the View Cube at the upper right corner of the view to spin the ventilator as shown. Connections between components in a power system must have connectors with the same. TIP You can also hold the right mouse button. telephone. alarm systems and others. select Power . and dragging the cursor to spin a model. click Electrical Connector. See Connectors on page 561.Add an electrical connector 36 Electrical connectors are used for a variety of electrical systems. number of poles and the same voltage specified. system type. 40 Click Modify Modifying a Fan Family | 473 . 39 Highlight the narrow face at the base of the fan housing and click to place the connector on the center of the face. press Tab to cycle through the active faces until the narrow face at the base of the fan is highlighted. See Connector Placement on page 567. The electrical connector that you add here will ultimately be used in a power system.Balanced. 37 On the Design Bar. 38 On the Options Bar. while pressing Shift. and verify that is selected.

49 Click OK. 61 Select the fan. in the = column. and in the Type Selector. select Voltage.rvt displays in the drawing area. select HVAC. click Load into Projects. and on the Options Bar.rvt.460 V . and double-click 2 . (The exact location is not important.) Modifying Fan Powered VAV Box with Electric Heat Family This exercise demonstrates using various settings on the electrical connector to define a fan powered box with variable power requirements for electric heat and motor size. for Load Classification. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. specify an associated family parameter for the following parameters: Parameter Number of Poles Apparent Load Associated (shared) Parameter Number of Poles Power 48 Under Electrical Loads. Flex the part 51 Click File menu ➤ Open. 50 Save the family. 55 On the Design Bar. for Voltage. 63 Click OK. click 46 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. click . 42 In the Family Types dialog. and observe the values in the Type Parameters 62 For Type. click Family Types. The values should correspond to the values entered when you created the new family types.rvt file. 52 In the left pane of the Open dialog. (It is not necessary to save the i Sample Project. and again observe the Type Parameter values. select Exhaust Ventilator Downblast : 1/6 HP-115 V-1 Ph. 57 In the Project Browser. 58 On the Mechanical Design Bar. select 1 HP-208V-1 Ph. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. 64 Save the family. click list. 54 Click Window menu ➤ Exhaust Ventilator . and click OK. 56 The i Sample Project. . 44 On the Options Bar. It also demonstrates the use of shared parameters and parameter mapping. 53 Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Sample Project. click the Training Files icon. click Mechanical Equipment. 59 Move the cursor into the drawing area and click to add the Exhaust Ventilator Downblast : 1/6 HP-115 V-1 Ph.3 Ph. 474 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content .Map Parameter Values to Connector 41 On the Design Bar.) 60 Click Modify.Mech. 47 Using the same method. and click OK. for Name. 43 Select the Electrical connector created in the previous section.Downblast. select 3 HP .rfa to make the family the active view.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. 11 Under Parameters. go back and complete the previous Modifying a Fan Family exercise. for Parameter group. For Discipline. click the Training Files icon. click Edit Family. 3 On the Options Bar. select MEP. It this is not the case. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Parameter group. enter Apparent Power Phase 1. 12 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. select the Shared parameter option. under Parameters. and double-click 1 . 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 8 In the Shared Parameters dialog. click Add. 5 Click Family Types. 4 Click Yes when prompted to open the family for editing. Open the family and create parameters 1 In the Project Browser. select Electrical. For Type. click New. and click Select.Power. NOTE If you have not already completed the previous exercise. 2 Select the VAV box.rvt. Modifying Fan Powered VAV Box with Electric Heat Family | 475 . The MEP group was created in the Modifying a Fan Family exercise and the parameters created in that exercise are listed under Parameters. See Modifying a Fan Family on page 470. 10 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 6 In the Family Types dialog. 9 Click Edit. you will need to complete that exercise to create shared parameters that are used in this exercise. select MEP. Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Sample Project.Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select Power.

under Parameter Data. 476 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . select Electrical Engineering. and click Select. For Phase. specify formulas for the following parameters: ■ ■ For Voltage. as defined below: Name Apparent Power Phase 3 Electric Heat Power Motor FLA Motor HP Motor On Phase Number of Poles Phase Voltage Group parameter under Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Instance/Type Instance Instance Type Type Instance Type Type Type 22 In the Family Types dialog. under Parameters.13 Using the same method. for Group parameter under. select Apparent Power Phase 1. 19 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 16 In the Parameter Properties dialog. create the following additional shared parameters as defined below: Name Apparent Power Phase 2 Apparent Power Phase 3 Electric Heat Power Motor On Phase Discipline Electrical Electrical Electrical Common Type Power Power Power Integer 14 Click OK. select the Shared parameter option. enter 3. under Parameter Data. 23 In the Formula column. click Add. 15 In the Shared Parameters dialog. verify that Size 2 . enter 480. select the Instance option. and click OK. and click OK 20 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and click OK. add the following shared parameters to the family type. select Apparent Power Phase 2. and click OK.6 inch Inlet is selected for Name. for Group parameter under. select the Instance option. select Electrical Engineering. 21 Using the same method. Apparent Power Phase 1 is added as an instance parameter under the Electrical Engineering group in the Family Types dialog. 18 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 17 In the Family Types dialog. Instance parameters have (default) appended to the parameter name.

For Apparent Power Phase 3. Motor FLA * 277 V.rfa. enter Electric Heat Power / 3 + if(Motor On Phase = 1. Motor FLA * 277 V. create additional types.3.2. Use the same case for the names in formulas as the names entered when you created the parameters. For Motor HP.9 3. enter 1. specify the following parameters for the Size 3 .8 inch Inlet.■ For Apparent Power Phase 1. 0 VA). For Motor FLA. enter 3. 28 Using the same method.6 inch Inlet VAV: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Number of Poles.4 29 Click OK to close the Family Types dialog. 30 Save the family as Parallel Fan Powered VAV. 0 VA). enter 2. For Motor On Phase. For Motor FLA. 25 Under Family Types. enter Electric Heat Power / 3 + if(Motor On Phase = 3. Modifying Fan Powered VAV Box with Electric Heat Family | 477 . enter Size 3 . For Motor On Phase. 26 In the Name dialog. in the Value column. 27 In the Family Types dialog. ■ ■ NOTE Formulas are case sensitive.2 5.8 inch Inlet type: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Number of Poles. 24 Under Electrical Engineering. For Motor HP. and specify the parameters for each size listed below: Name Number of Poles 3 3 3 Motor On Motor HP Phase (Default) 1 1 1 1/3 1/2 3/4 Motor FLA Size 4 – 10 inch Inlet Size 5 – 12 inch Inlet Size 6 – 14 inch Inlet 2. 0 VA). Motor FLA * 277 V. enter 3. enter 1/4. For Apparent Power Phase 2. enter 1. enter 1/6. Place connector and map parameters 31 Click and drag the view cube to spin the model around so you can see the controls box as shown. enter Electric Heat Power / 3 + if(Motor On Phase = 2. enter 1. specify the following parameter values for the Size 2 . and click OK. click new.

and click OK. column. select ■ ■ For Apparent Load Phase 1. For Apparent Load Phase 2.32 On the Design Bar. specify values for the following parameters: ■ For Number of Poles. click in the column. and click OK. and verify that is selected. select Apparent Power Phase 1. and in the Associate Family Parameter dialog. 33 On the Options Bar. ■ 478 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . and in the Associate Family Parameter dialog. and click OK. and on the Options Bar.Unbalanced. and in the Associate Family Parameter dialog. click in the column. click Electrical Connector. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. select Power . 35 Click Modify. For Voltage. and click OK. click . select Number of Poles. select Apparent Power Phase 2. 36 Select the connector. and in the Associate Family Parameter dialog. click in the Voltage. 34 Highlight the large face on the controls box. click in the column. and click to add the connector on the face.

Modifying Fan Powered VAV Box with Electric Heat Family | 479 . click in the column. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. enter 1. B.Unbalanced is selected. select Size 6 – 14 inch Inlet. verify that Power . 42 In the Project Browser. 48 In the Element Properties dialog. enter HVAC. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ For Motor On Phase. and in the Associate Family Parameter dialog. 39 Save the family. and on the Options Bar. click Load into Projects. 46 Select the VAV box. For Load Classification. and double-click 1 . for Type.■ For Apparent Load Phase 3. 50 Select panel HA. 41 If prompted. and on the Options Bar. 52 Select the VAV box. and on the Options Bar. select panel HA. 45 Click Modify. Flex the family 40 On the Design Bar. select Override parameter values of existing types. select Apparent Power Phase 3. click 44 Click (Create Power Circuit). For System Type. 1000. and click . respectively. for Panel. 49 Click OK. 53 In the Element Properties dialog. 51 Click OK. and 1000. For Electric Heat Power. and specify the following parameters: ■ For Motor On Phase. enter 3000. and click OK. and click Yes. . and click .Power. and C are 2512. 47 Verify that Parallel Fan Powered VAV : Size 2 . The loads on phases A. 43 Select the VAV box. click (Edit Circuit on Panel). The Sample Project is activated in the drawing area. enter 2. ■ ■ 38 Click OK to close the Element Properties dialog.6 inch Inlet is selected in the Type Selector.

select Override parameter values of existing types. and 3667. The Sample Project is activated in the drawing area. and double-click 1 .■ For Electric Heat Power. 59 Use the view cube in the upper right corner of the view to spin the model around so you can see the air supply connector. 54 Click OK. 60 Select the supply air connector. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. click Load into Projects.Mech. the air flow value for SupplyAirflow is the aggregate air flow for the downstream components. click .rfa. click . click the VAV box. and in the drawing area. 4027. 62 Click OK. and on the Options Bar. 64 If prompted. 56 Select panel HA. 55 Click Modify. When the Flow Configuration for the connector is set to Calculated. 63 On the Design Bar. The loads on phases A. 61 In the Element Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar click Supply Air System). (Create (Select Equipment for System). 66 Select the 4 supply air terminals in the left room. verify that Calculated is selected for Flow Configuration. 67 On the Options Bar. under Mechanical. respectively. as shown. enter 11000. select 480 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . and click Yes. and on the Options Bar. B. Create a supply air system 65 In the Project Browser. Specify Flow Configuration for the VAV 58 Click Window menu ➤ Parallel Fan Powered VAV. and C have updated to 4819. 57 Click OK.

For Offset enter 9' 0". For Flex Duct Type. to select layout 6 of 6. verify that Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows/Taps is selected. For Offset enter 9' 0". 70 Click OK 71 Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. verify the following Main and Branch settings: Main ■ ■ For Duct Type. and on the Modifying Fan Powered VAV Box with Electric Heat Family | 481 . Ductwork is created for the selected solution.Round is selected. enter 6' 0". click Finish Layout. verify that Flex Duct Round : Flex . For Maximum Flex Duct Length. and click Settings. verify that Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows/Taps is selected. click Design Bar.68 Click (Layout Paths). 69 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog. Branch ■ ■ ■ ■ For Duct Type.

For example. 78 Again. the new sum of the air flow for the downstream air terminals. but one with 0. 77 Double-click a tag associated with one of the air terminals supplied by the VAV. and notice that the SupplyAirFlow parameter value is 600 CFM. a boiler may have its supply preset to 20 gpm (system supply = 20 gpm) and the connectors at 2 downstream zone valves set to System.6 specified for Flow. The Flow Factor parameter is specified as a value between 0 and 1.72 Click Window menu ➤ System Browser. This allows specifying a different portion of the system flow to each downstream subsystem.6 X 20 gpm). The Preset and System settings for Flow Configuration are used together to allow specifying a percentage of the system flow to be allocated to each downstream component. 75 In the Element Properties dialog. the air flow value for SupplyAirflow is the sum of the air flow for the downstream air terminals—in this case 600 CFM (4 X 150 CFM). 74 Right-click Mechanical Supply Air 1. enter 300. with the total for all downstream components equal to 1. When Flow Configuration is set to System the Flow Factor parameter is active. 76 Click OK. and select Properties. and the other would receive a flow of 12 gpm (0. and select Properties. 79 In the Element Properties dialog. scroll down to Mechanical Airflow. 80 Click OK. 482 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . right-click Mechanical Supply Air 1. scroll down to Mechanical Airflow and notice that the SupplyAirFlow parameter value is updated to 750 CFM. and press Enter to modify the air flow for the air terminal. expand Mechanical (1 systems) ➤ Supply Air ➤ Parallel Fan Powered VAV: Size 2 .4 X 20 gpm). In this case the first downstream zone would receive a flow of 8 gpm (0. Because the Flow Configuration for the connector is set to Calculated. 73 In the System Browser.6 inch Inlet VAV.4 specified for Flow and the other with 0. Using the combination of Preset and System settings on connectors lets you distribute flow according to the demands of a particular space.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ 3D Views. insert. The final section demonstrates how to load. you must create 2 additional instance parameters for the component family. In the first section. Modify an existing panel family 1 In the Project Browser. Modifying Electrical Equipment | 483 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 5 Click OK. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 In the Save As dialog. enter 240. To create unequal percentages for several downstream subsystems. 3 On the Options Bar.rfa.Surface. you modify a 208V/3Ph panel to create a 240V/3Ph family. click the Training Files icon.rfa. Open Imperial ➤ Family EditorLighting and Appliance Panelboard . and then you use the new families in a project. you modify existing electrical equipment families to create new families. and then map the Flow Factor to the value specified for each instance of the component used in the project. and in the following section you modify a 480V/3Ph primary transformer to create a 480V/1Ph to 240V/1Ph secondary transformer. 81 Close the Family and Sample Project files. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. enter 2.Surface.NOTE Because Flow Factor and Flow Configuration are properties of the connector. select the connector.240V MCB . Modifying Electrical Equipment In this exercise. and double-click {3D} to make it the active view. navigate to a folder of your choice and save the family as Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 2 In the drawing area.Loads. all instances of the family in a project will have the same factor. For Voltage. click . specify values for the following parameters: ■ ■ For Number of Poles. and connect components of the newly created families in a simple project.208V MCB . under Electrical .

enter 0' 10 1/2" For Width.480-208-120V . click Family Types. 17 Under Electrical. navigate to a folder of your choice and save the family as Single Phase Transformer . click the Training Files icon.rfa. 484 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . for Name. Modify an existing transformer family 9 Click File menu ➤ Open. 21 Under Electrical. verify the following: ■ ■ Primary Voltage is 480. delete all of the remaining types. Primary Number of Poles is 2. Load the new panel and transformer families into a project 27 Click File menu ➤ Open. you create a new family type. click Electrical Equipment. verify that 15 kVA is selected. select 112. enter 2. Otherwise. NOTE If the Electrical tab is not available on the Design Bar. 28 In the left pane of the Open dialog.480V Primary. click New. 22 Under Dimensions.rvt. enter 0' 6 1/2" For Height. 16 In the Family Types dialog.8 Click File menu ➤ Close. enter 0' 8 5/8" NOTE You must enter 0 for the foot value. 13 For Name.NEMA Type 2. for Primary Number of Poles. the inch value will be applied to the foot value. you use the modified families in a project. In the following sections. 18 Click Apply. 12 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. except for 15 kVA. 29 Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Simple Room. and click Electrical. 19 Under Family Types.5 kVA. 10 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the Training Files icon. and click OK. for Name. 30 On the Electrical tab of the Design Bar. 23 Click OK. you modify an existing family type. Next.00 V. 26 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Delete. 11 Open Imperial ➤ Family EditorDry Type Transformers . 25 In the Save As dialog. enter 3 kVA. 15 Using the same method. right-click the Design Bar. 24 Click File ➤ Save As. Next. 14 Under Family Types. Notice that the new family type is selected for Name.rfa. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Length. 20 In the Name dialog.

click Load.240V MCB . 35 In the Type Selector. 34 On the Electrical tab of the Design Bar. NOTE The panel is a wall-hosted family—it can only be placed on a wall.Power to make it the active view. Modifying Electrical Equipment | 485 .Surface : 100A. You can also click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. TIP You can verify that the electrical families were loaded by expanding Families ➤ Electrical Equipment in the Project Browser.240V MCB . TIP You can press Spacebar to rotate a family if placement seems difficult. 32 In the Open dialog. 36 Move the cursor over the wall. select Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . then while pressing CTRL. and click Open. do the following: ■ Place a Lighting and Appliance Panelboard 480V MLO : 125A panel on the wall to the right of the first panel.480V Primary. click Electrical Equipment. and double-click 1 .31 On the Options Bar. click to place the panel on the wall as shown.Surface. and after panel snaps to the inside face of the wall. Test the new electrical equipment in a project 33 In the Project Browser. navigate to the folder where you saved the new families. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. select Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . The new families are loaded into the project.rfa. 37 Using the same method.rfa and Single Phase Transformer .

38 Click Modify. 46 In the right pane. Click OK. 47 Click OK. verify that Single is selected. For Phase. 49 On the Options Bar. 40 On the Options Bar. select 480/277 Wye. under Electrical . For Panel Name. Create a new distribution system 43 On the Electrical tab of the Design Bar. click . enter T-LC. under Electrical . 41 With the panel selected. select 3. For L-L Voltage. For Distribution System Types. 42 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 480 Wye. 44 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. select 277. for Panel Name. For Wires.Loads. 50 In the Element Properties dialog. A new row is added in the right pane. enter DP. You can also click Settings menu ➤ Electrical Settings. 486 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name.480V Primary : 15kVA transformer on the wall between the panels. L-G Voltage. Create a system 39 Select the Lighting and Appliance Panelboard 480V MLO : 125A panel. select the Single Phase Transformer.Loads. select 480. do the following: For Secondary Distribution System. select 120/240 Single. for Distribution Sys. and click OK. select 480 Wye. you create a system to logically connect the panels to the transformer. click Electrical Settings. 48 In the drawing area. select Distribution Systems. click ■ ■ ■ ■ . 45 Click Add.■ Place a Single Phase Transformer . Next.

For Panel.51 In the drawing area.240V MCB . click a new circuit. Click . select T-LC. 58 Select the Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 52 With the transformer selected. under Electrical . select 120/240 Single.Surface : 100A panel. for Panel. 61 Close the Simple Room without saving. and on the Options Bar. click to create a new circuit. 53 On the Options Bar. The DP panel is logically connected to the transformer 54 Click Modify. enter LC. This creates a logical circuit between the LC panel to the transformer. select DP.Surface : 100A (LC) panel. This indicates that the transformer is associated with that distribution system. click 60 On the Options Bar. and click OK.240V MCB . select the transformer. on the Options Bar. Modifying Electrical Equipment | 487 . ■ 57 In the Element Properties dialog. 56 On the Options Bar. do the following: ■ For Distribution Sys. for Panel Name. do the following: ■ ■ (Create Power Circuit) to create Click (Select a Panel for the Circuit). 55 Select the Lighting and Appliance Panelboard .Loads. Notice that 480 Wye is selected for Distribution Sys on the Options Bar. 59 On the Options Bar. .

click Pipe Connector. 5 On the Options Bar.Toilet . and the extrusion that represents the wall is visible in the view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Select the wall.Wall Mount Flush Valve. click the Training Files icon. 3 Use the view cube in the upper right corner of the view to spin the model around so it is oriented as shown. (Model Graphics Style) ➤ Hidden Line. Open Imperial ➤ Family EditorCommercial . for System Type. click 2 On the View Control Bar. 1 The toilet is a wall-hosted component.Modifying a Water Closet This exercise demonstrates adding piping connectors to a water closet family and setting typical connector properties for domestic cold water and sanitary systems. click (Temporary Hide/Isolate) ➤ Hide Element.rfa. you will be working at the back of the toilet. and on the View Control Bar. so you must hide the wall in the view. select Sanitary. However. 4 On the Design Bar. and verify that is selected. 488 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content .

click pointing away from the bowl. highlight the round face. 7 Click Modify. and click to add the connector. 10 Click . so that the connector direction is The arrow indicates the connector direction. not the flow direction. 9 If the arrow is pointing in toward the toilet bowl. The connector direction determines the direction from which it will accept connections from other components.6 Zoom in. and move the cursor over the larger of the 2 round extrusions at the back of the toilet as shown. Modifying a Water Closet | 489 . 8 Select the connector.

specify values for the following parameters: For Radius. specify values for the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Radius. For Flow Configuration. 12 Click OK. enter 4. select In. select Fixture Units. 14 Select the connector. click ■ ■ ■ to specify connector direction. 13 Using the same method. in the location shown. . add a Domestic Cold Water system Piping Connector. enter 0' 1 1/2".11 In the Element Properties dialog. Select Allow Slope Adjustments For Fixture Units. enter 0 3/4". select Out. For Flow Direction. and click Modify. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. For Flow Direction. Clear Allow Slope Adjustments 490 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . click 15 On the Options Bar.

select a diffuser tag. enter 2. 18 Click File ➤ Save As. and double-click 1 . For Fixture Units. Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Sample Project. 2 In the drawing area.Ceiling Mech. you modify a diffuser tag family to provide a type mark instead of the default instance mark. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Ceiling Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the Training Files icon. 17 Click OK. 1 In the Project Browser.5.rvt. Modifying a Diffuser Annotation Tag Family In this exercise.■ ■ For Flow Configuration. Modifying a Diffuser Annotation Tag Family | 491 .Commercial Wall Mount Flush Valve. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and in the Save As dialog. navigate to a folder of your choice and save the family as Toilet . select Fixture Units.rfa.

and click from label). click Edit Family. and click Yes when asked to open the diffuser tag for editing. Each label is associated with a parameter. click Edit Label. (Remove parameter (Add parameter to label).3 On the Options Bar. 5 In the Edit Label dialog. select Type Mark. The Family Editor opens. 492 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . and on the Options Bar. The sample text changes to 1t. The diffuser tag is composed of two labels separated by a horizontal line. and click 7 Click OK. 6 Under Category Parameters. under Label Parameters. select Mark. 4 Select the top label (1i).

click Yes.rvt. S-1. The project becomes active and the diffuser tag updates to display the supply air terminal type. 9 When prompted to overwrite the existing Diffuser Tag. Modifying a Light Fixture Annotation Tag Family | 493 . Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Sample Project. click Load into Projects. If more than one project is open. without saving. select i Sample Project. in the Load into Projects dialog. 11 Click File menu ➤ Close again to close the tag family. Modifying a Light Fixture Annotation Tag Family In this exercise. you modify a light fixture tag family to include panel and circuit information. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close as you do not need to save the project.8 On the Design Bar. and the return air diffuser type. click the Training Files icon. and click OK. R-1. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans. select the 1i label.Lighting. click Multiple. click (Copy). 2 In the drawing area. and press Enter to specify the copy end point.1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Options Bar. The light fixture tag is composed of a label that is associated with a parameter. 8 Move the cursor straight down. select a light fixture tag. 6 On the Options Bar. The Family Editor opens. 494 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . and double-click 1 . and after listening dimensions display. 5 On the Edit toolbar. click Edit Family. 4 In the drawing area. and click Yes when asked to open the light fixture tag for editing. 7 Click the midpoint of the label to specify the copy start point. enter 0 1/8".

9 Repeat the previous steps to create a second copy of the label.The label is copied. Modifying a Light Fixture Annotation Tag Family | 495 .

496 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . You need to modify this box. select Type Mark. enter PNL in the Sample Value column. Next. The sample value is the text that identifies this label in the Family Editor. and drag it down so that the box contains all 3 labels. 11 Select the bottom line of the box. and click parameter from label). and click (Add parameter to label). for the Panel parameter. Notice that the bounding box contains only the first label. you modify 2 labels.10 Click Modify. under Label Parameters. 16 Click OK. select Panel. The middle label text changes to PNL and the label is associated with the Panel parameter. (Remove 15 Under Label Parameters. 14 Under Category Parameters. 12 Select the middle label. click Edit Label. and on the Options Bar. 13 In the Edit Label dialog.

Load the light fixture tag family into a project 18 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. modify the bottom label with the following Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Label Parameters. click Load into Projects.17 Using the same method. If more than one project is open. and click For the Circuit Number parameter. select i Sample Project. in the Load into Projects dialog. and click (Remove parameter from label) (Add parameter to label). Modifying a Light Fixture Annotation Tag Family | 497 . and the light fixture tags update to display the panel and circuit information. ■ ■ Under Category Parameters. and click Yes. select Override parameter values of existing types. 19 If prompted. enter CKT in the Sample Value column The 3 light fixture labels are as shown.rvt. select Circuit Number. and click OK. The Sample Project is activated in the drawing are. select Type Mark.

or profile). 4 Add dimensions to specify parametric component geometry. If you expect to render your lighting designs. 7 Specify 2D and 3D geometry display characteristics with sub-category and entity visibility settings. you cannot change a linear lighting fixture into a spot lighting fixture.20 Click File menu ➤ Close as you do not need to save the project. Templates also define the type of family (annotation. The hosting of a component is defined by the template used when the family is originally created. and then load it into a new project and see how it performs. 3 Lay out reference planes to aid in drawing component geometry. without saving. You cannot change these characteristics after you have created the family. such as linear versus spot lighting characteristics. 5 Add label dimensions to create type or instance parameters. The process of creating a component family includes the following steps: 1 Select the appropriate family template. 9 Save the newly-defined family. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close again to close the tag family. There are various light fixture family templates available in Revit MEP. the template also defines characteristics of how the family works. 8 Define family type variations by specifying different parameters. Creating a Light Fixture Family In this exercise you create an 8” ceiling hosted recessed downlight. 6 Flex the new model to verify correct component behavior. For example. 2 Define sub-categories for the family to aid in controlling visibility of the object. titleblock. it is important that you start your lighting family with one of these templates. In some cases. Creating Families In this lesson you learn how features of the Family Editor allow you to build custom component families. as they have reference 498 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . model.

ies files are retrieved if Revit MEP is installed in the default path. these planes are Light Source Axis (L/R). The . Each family has additional parameters depending on whether it is a linear fixture. and wall hosted objects. such as Generic Model face based.rft) and linear (Linear Lighting Fixture*. This file contains engineering data that can be used to calculate the coefficient of utilization of the fixture. 6 Specify the following settings under Family Parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select the Always Vertical option Select Light Source For Part Type.planes that define the location of the light source. Using the generic face hosted and non-hosted lighting fixtures has the limitation that the hosting geometry cannot be cut. When working in a linked file environment.) NOTE If Revit MEP was not installed in the default path. and move with. Spot Tilt Angle. you can also specify a . and copy the Ltl9815.ies file. and Light Source Elevation. Locate IES data file 1 Using Windows Explorer. 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. ceiling hosted. When you use a spot light template. and paste it into the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\IES folder. navigate to the Imperial Templates folder. 7 Click OK. Additionally.rft. you may use a non-lighting family template. For spot light templates (Spot Lighting Fixture*. these planes are Light Source Axis (F/B). navigate to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\Training\Imperial\Tutorials\Family Editor.ies files from the Web for their fixtures.rft. Create a new lighting family 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. and click Open.rft) lighting templates. select Lighting Fixtures. and Light Source Elevation.rft). See Part Types on page 571 and Category on page 570 for a complete list of Revit MEP categories and parameters.ini file (within the <install_path>\RME2009\Program folder). Light Source Axis (L/R). and double-click Front. there are lighting templates for non-hosted. Creating a Light Fixture Family | 499 . Tilt Plane.ies file. (This is the location from which the . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Elevations (Elevation 1). the family will have the additional parameters: Spot Beam Angle. The Linear template contains a model line representing the light source along the F/B axis. For generic (Lighting Fixture*. a spot fixture. or a generic fixture. This can be shortened or lengthened as necessary to model the linear lighting fixture. Spot Spread Angle.ies file is not used for rendering. select Linear Lighting Fixture ceiling based. select the Normal option Clear the Shared option NOTE Family Category and Parameters settings determine the component type and provide a set of parameters that affect its behavior within Revit MEP. you must determine the correct path to the IES file as defined by the IESFileLocation parameter in the Revit. Using this face hosted family provides the ability for the fixture to be hosted by. objects in the linked file. 3 In the New dialog. Lighting manufacturers often allow you to download . 5 Under Family Category. 8 In the Project Browser. When creating a lighting family.

4" above the Light Source reference plane. 14 On the Options Bar. click Lines. Define the fixture geometry 12 On the Design Bar. enter 8 inch Open Downlight 42w TRT. Start at the Center (Left/Right) vertical reference plane. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Revolve. . and Chain. and for Offset. for File name. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click . and draw a 4" horizontal line to the left of the center. and click OK.TIP You may want set the scale to 6" = 1' . and finish with a 1" horizontal line segment to the left. 15 Zoom in on the Light Source Elevation. and drag it up to a point 4" above the Basic Ceiling and Ceiling Plane as shown. 500 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 9 Select the Light Source Elevation Plane. specify 0' 0".0" and zoom in very close to create the Solid Form ➤ Solid Revolve. 13 On the Sketch tab on the Design Bar. then draw a vertical line segment down to the ceiling (8"). 11 In the Save As dialog.rfa. and sketch the shape of the fixture as shown.

enter 1/16". click . click just to the left of the vertical line and just above the lower horizontal line to define the thickness for the fixture as shown.Next you will duplicate the original outline. 16 Click Lines. offset by 1/16" to define the thickness of the light fixture housing. 19 Using the same method. Creating a Light Fixture Family | 501 . press Tab to highlight the short line. 17 On the Options Bar. then click just above the line. and for Offset. 18 Click just above the upper horizontal line to add a line 1/16" above the existing line as shown. move the cursor over the line. NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the short horizontal line at the base.

and for Offset. click Lines. click and .20 On the Design Bar. 21 On the Options Bar. 22 Draw lines to close the outline at the top right and lower left as shown. enter 0' 0". clear Chain. 502 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content .

Creating a Light Fixture Family | 503 . click (Trim). and clean up the inside corner as shown. 24 On the toolbar. The length of the line and its exact location are not important. and sketch the axis line for the revolve as indicated below by the dark line.23 Click Modify. 26 Click Finish Sketch. 25 On the Design Bar. but make sure it is coincident with the vertical plane. click Axis.

click (Photometric Web). Define family and connector properties 28 In the drawing area. and on the Options Bar.Lighting ■ For Calculate Coefficient of Utilization. 30 On the Design Bar. click Family Types. click Light Source Definition. and click OK. select true (green check. 31 In the Family Types dialog. click (Point). specify values for the following parameters: Under Electrical . for Light distribution. not grey) 504 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . select the (yellow) Light Source. for Emit from Shape. 29 In the Light Source Definition dialog.27 Save the family.

click Luminous Flux. click the Value column. and in the Light Loss Factor dialog. and in the Initial Color dialog. enter 3000 K and click OK.ies in the ■ For Light Loss Factor. click file browser . enter CF42TRT Under Photometrics ■ ■ For Tilt Angle. and select Ltl9815. For Initial Color. click Electrical Connector.Under Electrical Loads ■ For Apparent Load. ■ ■ A fixture’s Coefficient of Utilization may be calculated based on the geometry of the space. select <Custom>. For Initial Intensity.85 for Value. enter 3200. enter 44. for Color Preset. and double-click View 1. and is affected by the following fixture properties: ■ ■ ■ Coefficient of Utilization (Instance) Initial Intensity (Type) Light Loss Factor (Type) 32 Click OK. 33 In the Project Browser. expand View (All) ➤ 3D Views. 34 Use the view cube in the upper right corner of the view to spin the model to view the top of the fixture. click the Value column. for Color Temperature. click Simple for Method. and verify that (Place on Face) is selected. enter 90 For Photometric Web File. click the Value column. Creating a Light Fixture Family | 505 . 35 On the Design Bar.Balanced. click the Value column. enter 0.21 VA Under Electrical ■ For Lamp. select Power . and on the Options Bar. and click OK. Lighting objects in a space contribute to the room’s Average Estimated Illumination. or a static value may be entered. and click OK. This illumination is based on the lumen method using the total lumen output of the lighting fixtures in the room. and in the Initial Intensity dialog.

506 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . select Apparent Load from the list. . For Voltage. and click OK. click in the column. click and select Hide Element. verify that Power . and click ■ ■ ■ .) In the Project Browser. (Light at the intersection of planes is able to pass through the ceiling. Although the hole is not necessary for construction documents. 44 On the Design Bar. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ 3D Views. enter Lighting ■ ■ 39 Click OK. click ring as shown. 37 Click Modify. 42 Spin the model to view the bottom of the ceiling. 38 In the Element Properties dialog. specify values for the following parameters: For Power Factor.95 For System Type. and on the View Control Bar. and double-click View 1. it permits light to function as expected in renderings. and click to place the connector on the top of the fixture. select the connector. click Opening.Balanced is specified For Apparent Load. 45 On the Options Bar. 43 Select the yellow Light Source.36 Highlight the face at the top of the fixture. 40 Save the family Cut a hole in the ceiling 41 Next you cut a hole in the ceiling. enter 277 For Load Classification. and select the 2 arcs that make up the outside edge of the trim (Temporary Hide/Isolate). and in the Associated Family Parameter dialog. enter 0.

click Hide/Isolate. 53 Click Window menu ➤ 8 inch Open Downlight 42w TRT. and double-click 1 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Ceiling Plans. and select Reset Temporary The basics of how lighting families work How to create a lighting family from a template Where to place IES files for use by lighting families Flange Family In this exercise. click the Training Files icon. click 47 On the View Control Bar. you will create a flange connector to model pipe flanges for model coordination. The space tag indicates 22 fc and 135 W. and use a Lookup Table to define several sizes for the flange.csv file. 52 In the Project Browser. This lets you specify multiple part sizes that are based on a table without creating a separate family type for each size. In this exercise. The flange will be based on a 150 pound pressure class slip on flange. and in the Type Selector. 50 In the left pane of the Open dialog.rfa to make the family the active view.Ceiling Elec.46 Click Finish Sketch. Lookup tables are used to define parameter values in an external . 51 Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Simple Room. The new lighting fixture is loaded into the project. Revit MEP provides a Flange Family | 507 .rvt. you learned: ■ ■ ■ (Temporary Hide/Isolate). Flex the light fixture 49 Click File menu ➤ Open. 48 Save the family. click Load into Projects. 55 Select the 4 downlights in the room. The lighting level increases to 33 fc. select 8 inch Open Downlight 42w TRT. and the wattage increases to 168. 54 On the Design Bar.On the View Control Bar.

and paste it into the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\LookupTables folder. navigate to the Imperial Templates folder. select Generic Model. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. navigate to a folder of your choice and save the family as Generic 150 psi Slip Flange. When installed in the default path. click Add. 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. 2 In the New dialog. 10 Under Parameters. Create parameters 9 Click Family Types.ini file (within the <install_path>\RME2009\Program folder).csv) file. select the Transition option. and in the Save As dialog. Revit MEP looks in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\LookupTables to retrieve size information. Clear the Shared option.ini file. select Dimensions Select Type 508 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 5 Specify the following settings under Family Parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear the Work Plane-Based option. See Part Types on page 571 and Category on page 570 for a complete list of Revit MEP categories and parameters.rft. navigate to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\Training\Imperial\Tutorials\Family Editor. For Part Type. See Lookup Tables on page 568 and CSV File Structure on page 569.) NOTE If Revit MEP was not installed in the default path. and copy the Generic 150 psi Slip Flange.text_file_lookup function that can be used to read the necessary values from a comma-separated values (. NOTE Family Category and Parameters settings determine the component type and provide a set of parameters that affect its behavior within Revit MEP. select Pipe Size For Group parameter under. The Generic 150 psi Slip Flange. and click OK. 4 Under Family Category. 7 Click File ➤ Save. select Pipe Fittings. select Piping For Type. 8 Using Windows Explorer. Select the Always Vertical option. you must determine the correct path to the Lookup Table file as defined by the LookupTableLocation parameter in the Revit. verify that Family parameter is selected for Parameter Type and specify the following parameter data: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name.csv file defines multiple sizes for this flange.csv file. (This is the location from which the LookupTable files are retrieved if Revit MEP is installed in the default path. 11 In the Parameter Properties dialog. The location of Lookup Table files is defined by the LookupTableLocation parameter in the Revit.rfa. 6 Click OK. enter NR For Discipline.

Define work planes 18 In the Project Browser. select Dimensions. enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. 19 Click the scale on the View Control Bar. select the Family parameter option For Discipline. enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. enter 2" For Lookup Table Name = Generic 150 psi Slip Flange. ND) For LenA1. 17 Save the family. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Floor Plans. ND) For D2. LenA3. R1. select Pipe Size. ND) For LenA2. ND.12 Click OK. 0’. enter D2 / 2 For LenA3. click . enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. and double-click Ref. "D2". 20 On the Design Bar. 22 Click to the right of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane to add a reference plane 2" to the right of the center line. enter LenA2 – LenA1 For D1. click Ref Plane.csv Click Apply. "LenA2".0". 0’. enter 0' 2". LenA1. enter NR * 2 For R1. "D1". Level. LenA2. 15 Specify formulae for the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ND. specify values for the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ For NR. 13 Using the same method. 23 Click again to the left of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane to add a reference plane 2" to the left of the center line as shown. and for Offset. Select the Instance option 14 In the Family Types dialog. For Type. 21 On the Options Bar. select Piping. Flange Family | 509 . 0’. D2. R2 and specify the following parameters for each one: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. 0’. "LenA1". ND) 16 Click OK. and select 3” = 1'. create Instance parameters named D1. enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. enter D1 / 2 For R2. For Group parameter under.

30 Create another dimension between the Center (Left/Right) plane and the Pipe (left) plane. under Identity Data. click . 27 Using the same method. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Connector for the Name of the right plane. click Dimension. click (Aligned). 510 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content .24 Click Modify 25 Select the left plane and. and on the Options Bar. 31 Click Modify. 28 On the Design Bar. for Name. 29 Create a dimension between the Center (Left/Right) plane and the Connector (right) plane. enter Pipe.

click Visibility. click Model Lines. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. . clear Fine. between the intersections with the right and left vertical planes as shown. clear Chain. click the Value column for Label. 35 Select the horizontal reference plane and the 3 vertical reference planes. The length is not important. under Other. but be careful to sketch them on the reference planes. under Other. click LenA1 from the list. Define geometry 40 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. select the dimension between the left (Pipe) plane and Center (Left/Right) plane. 47 Select the 3 model lines. 38 Click OK. click the Value column. and select Not a Reference. and label it LenA2. 43 On the Design Bar. and select 33 In the Element Properties. 36 Click . 45 Draw a horizontal line on the horizontal plane. 34 Using the same method. 41 On the Model Categories tab. for Is Reference. Flange Family | 511 . click Object Styles. click . and set the Projection Line weight of each category to 5. 39 Save the family. and click OK. 46 Click Modify. 42 Click OK twice. and on the Options Bar.32 Select the dimension between the Center (Left/Right) plane and right plane (Connector) and click . and on the Options Bar. 48 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. This option disables grips at the intersection of reference planes and specifies that the reference plane cannot be dimensioned to when you place a family into a project. and 44 Draw a vertical line on both the left (Pipe) and the right (Connector) vertical reference planes.

from endpoint to endpoint.NOTE Piping objects generally show as linework in Coarse and Medium view. 55 Click . 57 On the Design Bar. under Other. and on the Options Bar. 54 Select the horizontal reference plane. for Reference. we shut off the linework in Fine view. and click to place the dimension. click Dimension. 56 Using the same method. click . 512 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . create dimensions for the overall length of each vertical line. and in Fine view the solid model elements are shown. click the Value column. 52 On the Design Bar. press Tab to highlight the endpoint. 53 Move the cursor over an endpoint on the left vertical line. 49 With all 3 lines still selected. and on the Options Bar. click . 50 In the Element Properties dialog. 51 Click OK. click Dimension. create dimensions for the right vertical line. and select Not a Reference. move the cursor to the left. then select the other endpoint. 58 Using the same method. click . and click to specify the endpoint for the dimension. Thus.

and in the drawing area.59 Click Modify. under Other. click and . 70 Click Modify. 66 In the Work Plane dialog. and enter 0' 5". 71 Select the circle. and click OK. 61 In the Element Properties dialog. 67 Click Lines. expand Elevations (Elevation 1). click Set Work Plane. for Label. and on the Options Bar. under Other. click 72 Select the dimension line. 60 Select the dimension for the overall length of the left line. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 73 In the Element Properties dialog. 68 On the Options Bar. click the Value column. 69 Place the circle on the intersection of the horizontal and vertical reference planes. specify Reference Plane : Pipe. click Radius. click the Value column. for Label. click . select the dimension for the right line and label it D1. Create the first extrusion 63 In the Project Browser. 62 Using the same method. and double-click Left. Flange Family | 513 . and select R2. . 65 On the Sketch tab on the Design Bar. and click . 64 On the Design Bar. and select D2.

and click OK. and in the drawing area. 83 In the Work Plane dialog. 80 Click Finish Sketch. and click 91 Click OK. click Edit. in the 86 Place the circle on the intersection of the horizontal and vertical reference planes. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. for Extrusion End. 90 In the Element Properties. clear Coarse and Medium. click the Value column.74 Click OK. 514 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . and enter 0' 10". click Radius. 79 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. click 89 Select the dimension line. 75 Click Extrusion Properties. 77 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. and click OK. 78 Under Graphics. 88 Select the circle. 82 On the Sketch Editor tab on the Design Bar. for Visibility/Graphics. for Label. and select R1. 87 Click Modify. Create the second extrusion 81 On the Design Bar. click Set Work Plane. under Other. 85 On the Options Bar. and click OK twice. 84 Click Lines. 76 In the Element Properties dialog. specify Reference Plane : Center (Left/Right). . click column. click and . select LenA2. under Constraints. .

104 On the Options Bar. and double-click View 1. click column. and for System Type. 93 In the Element Properties dialog. and select Wireframe to view both in the 102 Spin the flange to view the face of both extrusions as shown.92 Click Extrusion Properties. expand 3D Views. (Model Graphics Style). and select 6” = 1'. 94 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. select LenA1. 98 Save the family. 95 Under Graphics. 97 Click Finish Sketch. Flange Family | 515 . for Visibility. and click OK. 105 Highlight the large diameter face of the flange. click Pipe Connector. under Constraints. clear Coarse and Medium. Add connectors 99 In the Project Browser. 100 Click the scale on the View Control Bar. select Fitting. 101 On the View Control Bar. where the 2 extrusions meet.0". for Extrusion End. click extrusions. verify that is selected. 96 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. and click OK twice. 103 On the Design Bar. click Edit.

110 In the Element Properties dialog. The arrow indicating the connector direction should be pointing toward the smaller diameter face. to change the direction of flow. 107 Click Modify. click and. 108 Select the connector. click . under Dimensions. and click OK. for Radius. 109 With the connector selected. enter 5".106 Click to add the connector. if necessary. 516 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content .

111 Spin the flange to view the back of the larger extrusion. and using the same method. add a connector to the larger extrusion. Flange Family | 517 . 112 Click Pipe Connector.

and set the object visibility. and by defining fitting size parameters. 518 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . you create an elbow pipe fitting family. under Dimensions. click 119 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. in the column. 114 Select the connector. 118 In the Element Properties dialog. 117 Select both connectors. After completing the pipe fitting family. First. and click OK twice. The arrow indicating the connector direction should be pointing toward the smaller diameter face. for Radius. you create the physical fitting geometry by using reference planes and lines.113 Click Modify. 115 Select the first connector. select NR. test the fitting geometry. to change the direction of flow. if necessary. you can use the same method to create a duct fitting family for air systems. and click the second connector. You then create single line geometry for the elbow. click Link Connector on the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. 120 Save the family Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family In this exercise. 116 Click Modify. click and. click .

Level floor plan window. 9 In the Project Browser. 7 Click File ➤ Save. verify that Imperial Templates is selected. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 11 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. navigate to a folder of your choice. select Pipe Fittings: 5 Under Family Parameters. For Part Type. under Family Category. Verify that Always vertical is selected. 13 On the View Control Bar. and double-click Ref. Close Hidden Windows closes all of the hidden windows for a project. 4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. They are not displayed when the family is used in a building model. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Floor Plans. Select Generic Model. 10 Maximize the Ref. click .NOTE Fittings are among the most complex families to create. A new family file is created and new views open. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Look in. 2 In the New dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Work Plane-Based is cleared. on the Edit toolbar. creating system families typically takes more time to complete. It is recommended that you methodically follow the steps and periodically check your work against the exercise. select Elbow. If necessary. You can also press CTRL+S. click the current scale value. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 519 . Configure the elbow pipe fitting family 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. It may take a longer to complete this exercise as compared to other exercises in this tutorial. Level to make it the active view. and select 6" = 1'-0". Verify that Shared is cleared. one window for each open project remains open. and verify that both reference planes have been pinned. However.rft. Even if you have created parametric families before. 12 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. Define reference planes Reference planes are used to define relationships between the geometric components within the Family Editor. 8 In the Save As dialog. and save the family as Threaded Generic Elbow. 14 Select the 2 reference planes. Click Open. 6 Click OK. if you have other projects open during a session.

click . 520 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 22 Select the horizontal Center (Front/Back) reference plane. 19 Select the left plane. 21 Using the same method. TIP You can identify an object in the drawing area by placing the cursor over the object. 16 On the Options Bar.Pinning prevents accidentally moving the reference planes. click Ref Plane. 23 Add new reference plane 2" above the Center (Front/Back) reference plane as shown. A tooltip and the Status Bar (which is located below the Design Bar) displays the object’s name. 15 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. under Identity Data. for Name. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 0' 1". and on the Options Bar. enter Coupling. click . 18 Click Modify. and for Offset. 17 Click to the left the vertical Center (Left/Right) reference plane to place a new reference line to the left of the vertical Center (Left/Right) reference plane. and in the Element Properties dialog. add another vertical plane 2" to the left of the left (Fitting) plane. enter Fitting. for Name.

For Offset. (Line) is selected. Verify that Radius is cleared. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. for Name.24 Click Modify. and click OK. 27 Click File menu ➤ Save to save the family. click Reference Lines. 28 On the Design Bar. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 521 . verify that 0' 0" is specified. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Verify that (Draw) is selected. You create reference lines in order to create sweeps for the fitting geometry. enter Radius. 29 On the Options Bar. and click Element Properties. 25 Right-click the new reference plane. Create reference lines and dimension them Reference lines are used to define the basic geometry of the family. They are not displayed when the family is used in a project.

you draw an arced reference line. draw a horizontal line of the approximate length and location as shown. 522 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 31 On the Edit toolbar. 35 Align and lock the reference line to the Center (Front/Back) reference plane as shown. 38 Align and lock the right reference line to the Center (Front/Back) reference plane as shown. and click the right end of the reference line to align the right end of the reference line to the Fitting reference plane. Next.30 In the drawing area. 33 Click to lock the end of the reference line to the Fitting plane. 37 Align and lock the left end of the right reference line to the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. 32 Select the middle vertical reference plane (Fitting). 34 Using the same method. draw another reference line to the right of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane as shown. align and lock the left end of the reference line to the left vertical reference plane (Coupling). click (Align). 36 Using the same method.

Verify that Radius is cleared. and zoom out to view 2 dimension controls ( ). click the intersection of the Fitting and the Radius reference planes to specify the center of the arc. and after the endpoint snap displays. verify that 0' 0" is specified. 45 Select the arc reference line. 42 Move the cursor directly down. enter 45. click Reference Lines. (Arc from center and endpoints). 41 In the drawing area. and press Enter to specify a 45 degree radius for the arc. select this sketching option from the list. and. 43 Move the cursor to the right to begin drawing the arc. 40 On the Options Bar. ■ You may need to click ■ ■ For Offset. do the following: ■ Verify that Select (Draw) is selected. click the right end of the left reference line to specify the first endpoint of the arc. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 523 . 44 Click Modify.39 On the Design Bar.

(Line) is selected. 49 On the Options Bar.NOTE Temporary dimensions have two dimension controls that allow you to convert the temporary dimension to a permanent dimension. The dimension control located near the reference plane represents the projected length of that line relative to the reference plane. For Offset. click Reference Lines. dimensions are temporary—they only display when selected. By default. you draw a diagonal reference line. The dimension control that is located perpendicular to the line being dimensioned represents the overall length of that line. Next. 524 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . and click to specify the reference line end point at an approximate line length as shown. 50 Click the right end of the arced reference line to specify the diagonal reference line start point. 51 Draw a diagonal reference line to extend the arc at a 45 degree angle toward the Radius reference plane. Verify that Radius is cleared. verify that 0' 0" is specified. 47 Drag the permanent dimension annotation away from the arc reference line. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Verify that (Draw) is selected. and adjust the length of the witness lines as shown. 48 On the Design Bar. 46 Click the dimension control that controls the overall dimension (located to the lower-right of the arc).

53 Select the diagonal reference line. click (Angular). the Tangent Extension tooltip may display to indicate that the diagonal reference line is tangent to the arced reference line. and add an angular dimension between the diagonal reference line and the right horizontal reference line (which is located below the diagonal reference line). Between the Coupling and the Fitting vertical reference planes. verify that ■ ■ ■ (Aligned) is selected.While drawing the diagonal reference line. 52 Click Modify. 59 Add the following aligned dimensions: Between the Radius and the Center (Front/Back) horizontal reference planes. convert the temporary dimension for the overall length of the diagonal reference line to a permanent dimension. zoom the view to display the 2 dimension controls. verify that Linear Dimension Style : Default linear style is selected. 61 Position the dimension annotations and witness lines as shown. and clean up the witness lines as necessary. 55 Drag the dimension line down and to the right to move it out of the way. 56 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. 57 In the Type Selector. 54 Using the same method. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 525 . on the Options Bar. Between the Fitting and the Center vertical reference planes. 60 With the Dimension tool active. 58 On the Options Bar.

66 Under Parameter Data. 68 Using the same method. For Type of Parameter. select Piping. enter LenA1. is listed under Dimensions in the Family Types dialog. select Dimensions. Select Instance to create an Instance Parameter. For Group parameter under. create the following family parameters: Name Discipline Type of Parameter Group parameter under Pipe Size Pipe Size Pipe Size Pipe Size Pipe Size Angle Dimensions Dimensions Dimensions Dimensions Dimensions Dimensions Instance/Type Instance Instance Instance Instance Instance Instance LenA2 BdyRad CplRad NomDia NomRad Ang Piping Piping Piping Piping Piping Common 526 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . under Parameters. 67 Click OK. The new family parameter. 65 In the Parameter Properties dialog. For Discipline. verify that Family parameter is selected.62 Click File menu ➤ Save to save the family. click Add. under Parameter Type. LenA1. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. 64 In the Family Types dialog. click Family Types. select Pipe Size. Create family parameters and assign them to dimensions 63 On the Design Bar.

enter LenA1 * tan(Ang / 2). Fittings must have their connectors (which you place later in this exercise) on lines that intersect the Center (Left/Right) and Center (Front/Back) reference planes.Next. enter 2". Lookup tables are not used to determine pipe sizes as a result of using the Pipe Sizing tool—these pipe sizes are determined by various project-specific factors. For NomRad. Use a lookup table file to define multiple sizes A lookup table file is a CSV (comma separated value) text file that contains pipe size information. select each dimension and associate it to a family parameter as shown. Do not select multiple dimensions and associate them to a parameter as this will cause errors. specify that following values and formulae: ■ ■ ■ ■ For CplRad. NomDia.25". 75 Using Windows Explorer. and copy the Threaded Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 527 . 69 In the Family Types dialog. Notice that the parameter name displays as part of the dimension annotation. NOTE When specifying formulae. select the LenA1 family parameter. select the (left) dimension that is dimensioning the Center (Front/Back) and Radius reference planes. the calculated length defines the geometry. Revit MEP uses this pipe size information to define pipe fitting size after you specify a pipe diameter. 74 Press CTRL+S. 70 Click OK. 71 In the drawing area. in the Value column. you specify values and formulae for the family parameters that you added. The dimension is associated and controlled by the LenA1 family parameter. in the Formula column. 73 Using the same method. navigate to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\Training\Imperial\Tutorials\Family Editor. in the Value column. enter NomRad * 2. for Label. NOTE Associate each dimension separately. in the Formula column. For LenA2. enter 1. 72 On the Options Bar.

76 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. you specify formulae that use the lookup table file to determine pipe size. Save the text file with the file name including the . This sweep uses the profile and the reference lines to create the elbow fitting geometry. in the Value column. enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. However. copy the lookup table data from the problematic lookup table file and paste it into a new text file. verify that the Ref. If you encounter this type of issue. 81 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 78 In the Formula column. Next. For CplRad. 77 In the Family Types dialog. RELATED During fitting creation. you must determine the correct path to the Lookup Table file as defined by the LookupTableLocation parameter in the Revit. for Lookup Table Name. Level floor plan is the active view. and click Open. you must save the lookup table file in a plain text format. NomDia). "BdyRad". 80 Press CTRL+S to save the family. and paste it into the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\LookupTables folder. This is the default path. you begin creating the fitting geometry. The formulae are applied and the dimensions are adjusted. 82 In the New dialog. NomDia). you can add them according to manufacturers’ specifications. click Family Types. if specific pipe sizes that you need are not present in the lookup table file by default. Create a fitting profile You create a fitting profile in order to provide a geometrical shape for the sweep extrusion. 79 Click OK.csv file extension and copy it to the LookupTables folder. enter Threaded Generic Elbow. 0. select Profile. enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. enter the following formulae: ■ ■ ■ For LenA1. 0. NomDia). "CplRad". NOTE If Revit MEP was not installed in the default path. 528 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 0.csv lookup table file.rft. Next. 83 In the Project Browser. If the file is saved in a proprietary format.csv and click Apply. "LenA1". For BdyRad.ini file (within the <install_path>\RME2009\Program folder).Generic Elbow. Revit MEP may not be able to read it and any family type parameter formulae that refer to that lookup table will most likely return a value of 0 and errors will occur. enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name.

92 Click the Center (Front/Back) reference plane. 96 Click the dimension value. 86 On the Options Bar. and click the dimension control ( The temporary dimension converts to a permanent dimension. and select 6" = 1'. click (Align). and press ENTER.0". You may need to click ■ ■ and select this sketching option from the list. 91 On the Edit toolbar. and click OK. ). verify that 0' 0" is specified. and then click the circle center mark to align the circle horizontally. 98 Zoom in to view the sketch. select Center Mark Visible.84 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. For Offset. click . zoom out. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 529 . ■ (Circle). 87 In the drawing area. click the current scale. 88 Click Modify. 94 Using the same method. align and lock the circle vertically. click Lines. 90 In the Element Properties dialog. Verify that Radius is cleared. 95 Select the circle. 93 Click to lock the circle to the horizontally. 97 On the View Control Bar. under Graphics. do the following: ■ Verify that Select (Draw) is selected. and on the Options Bar. The center mark displays allowing you to align the circle to the reference planes. verify that Profiles is selected. draw a circle with any radius in the approximate location as shown. 85 In the Type Selector. 89 Select the circle. enter 1".

do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. click Add. 530 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 107 On the Options Bar. click New. The new family type is listed in the Name list. The dimension is now associated to and controlled by the Rad family parameter. select the dimension. The new family parameter is listed under Dimensions. 100 In the Family Types dialog. under Parameters. 102 In the Family Types dialog. For Type of Parameter. Click OK. under Parameter Data. and click OK. you create a new family type. 105 In the Family Types dialog. select Dimensions. 101 In the Parameter Properties dialog. enter Rad. Notice that the parameter name displays as part of the dimension annotation. Fitting. under Family Types. 103 Name the new family type. Next. click Family Types. for Label. For Discipline. click OK. 106 In the drawing area. Verify that the Type option is selected to create a Type parameter. select Piping. select Rad. For Group parameter under. select Pipe Size.99 On the Design Bar. 104 Using the same method. create a family type named Coupling.

In contrast. cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the drawing. 114 For Type.rfa. click . and click Properties. click Load into Projects to load the Threaded Pipe Profile into the Threaded – Generic Elbow family. 112 In the Associate Family Parameter. an object must be fully contained when using a pick box (drag left to right). 117 Click File menu ➤ Save to save the family. Associate family parameters to a profile parameter You associate family parameters to the Rad profile parameter for each family type in order to control the radius of the elbow fitting geometry. Create sweeps using reference lines The elbow fitting geometry consists of 2 couplings connected by the fitting body. This allows for parametric changes in the fitting geometry to occur. select CplRad. and click OK twice. TIP Remember that when you use cross-picking (drag right to left) to select an object. 110 In the Project Browser. select Fitting. click . Each sweep is based on the profile that you created and loaded into the project. right click Coupling.Generic Elbow project becomes active. 109 On the Design Bar. you create the fitting geometry. 116 In the Associate Family Parameter. 111 In the Type Properties dialog. you load the fitting profile into the project. 115 Under Dimensions. Next. under Existing family parameters of compatible type. click Apply. The object does not need to be fully contained within the border. and click OK. for Rad. select BdyRad. the cross-picking border only needs to intersect an object in order to select it. 118 In the drawing area. under Existing family parameters of compatible type. expand Families ➤ Profiles ➤ Threaded Pipe Profile. 113 In the Type Properties dialog. and save the family as Threaded Pipe Profile. Next. under Dimensions. for Rad. Notice that the Threaded . You create sweeps using the reference lines as sweep paths to create the fitting geometry. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 531 .108 Click File ➤ Save.

532 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 122 On the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ Select Threaded Pipe Profile: Coupling from the profile list. Y. 124 In the drawing area.119 On the Options Bar. click Pick Path. 125 On the Pick Path tab of the Design Bar. Verify that the X. click Finish Sweep. Only the reference lines and reference planes display. clear Reference Lines and Reference Planes. 121 On the View Control Bar. 120 In the Filter dialog. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. and Angle options are specified at 0. 128 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 127 On the Options Bar. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. click Finish Path. 123 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. select the left horizontal reference line. 126 In the drawing area. click the red dot on the horizontal reference line. click (Filter Selection).

130 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. click Pick Path. and Angle options are specified at 0. 134 On the Options Bar. 135 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ Select Threaded Pipe Profile: Fitting from the profile list. you create the geometry for the fitting body. 131 In the drawing area. Verify that the X. click Finish Sweep.The geometry for the left coupling is created. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 533 . 133 In the drawing area. 132 On the Pick Path tab of the Design Bar. click the red dot on the arced reference line. Y. click Finish Path. select the arced reference line. 129 On the Family tab of the Design Bar.

534 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . clear all annotation categories. 138 With the 3D view active. The fitting geometry displays. and select Threaded Pipe Profile: Coupling from the profile list to the right reference line to create the geometry for the right coupling. 139 On the Annotation Categories tab of the Visibility Graphics Overrides dialog. Next. enter VG. add a solid sweep. and click OK. The elbow fitting geometry is created. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ 3D Views ➤ View1 to make the 3D view active.The geometry for the fitting body is created. 137 In the Project Browser. 136 Using the same method. Next. you create the right coupling geometry for the elbow fitting. you verify the fitting geometry.

Coarse and Medium detail levels display pipe and pipe fittings as single line. Level to make it the active view. and click OK. 145 In the Filter dialog. (Filter Selection). click Check None. drag the cursor to spin the model. you draw model lines to create the single line fitting geometry. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. 142 Press CTRL+S to save the family. you need to hide some of the geometry in the family to make it easier to create model lines for the single-line display. Create detail level geometry Detail level geometry is the geometry that displays when you select a detail level. click The 3 sweeps are selected. 146 On the View Control Bar. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 535 . First. select Other. In this section. The Fine detail level displays pipe and pipe fittings as double line. cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the drawing. 141 In the Project Browser. and verify the fitting geometry. double-click Floor Plans ➤ Ref. 144 On the Options Bar. 143 In the drawing area.140 While pressing SHIFT and the middle mouse button. This fitting geometry displays when the Coarse and Medium detail level settings are used. In Revit MEP.

select the left horizontal reference line.Only the reference planes and reference lines display. click Model Lines. ■ ■ ■ For Offset. 147 On the Design Bar. verify that 0' 0" is specified. 536 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 148 In the Type Selector. 149 On the Options Bar. 150 In the drawing area. verify that Pipe Fittings is selected. Verify that Lock is cleared. Select (Pick Lines). verify that Level : Ref Level is selected. do the following: ■ For Plane.

155 Zoom out. click to lock the model line to the reference line. and lock the model line to the arced reference line. Each time you press Tab.A model line is created over the reference line. A tooltip and the Status Bar display the name of the object. 157 Select the permanent dimension. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 537 . for Label. This associates the angle dimension of the arced model line to the Ang family parameter. 151 With the model line selected. and click the dimension control ( ) that is located at the lower-right. and on the Options Bar. 153 Click Modify. you highlight through the vertical hierarchy of objects (from top to bottom). select the arced reference line to create an arced model line. select Ang. 152 With the Model Lines tool active and using the same method. 156 Click Modify. This converts the overall angle temporary dimension to a permanent dimension. 154 Select the arced model line to display its temporary dimension. TIP You can identify objects that are located under other objects by placing the cursor over an object and press Tab.

If necessary. press Tab to locate the model line. and finally move the cursor and click to place the dimension. Next. 164 On the Options Bar. 163 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click the diagonal model line. If you lock it. convert the diagonal model line overall length temporary dimension to a permanent dimension. NOTE Do not lock the diagonal model line. create a diagonal model line by picking the diagonal reference line (located at the right end of the arced model line). click Dimension. 161 Select the diagonal model line. 162 Using the same method. you dimension the diagonal model line. then click the Center (Front/Back) reference plane.158 Relocate the dimension annotation. 166 In the drawing area. 159 Using the same method. 169 Relocate the dimension annotations. Revit MEP warns you that locking the alignment would over constrain the sketch. click (Angular). verify that Angular Dimension Style : Linear angular style is selected. 167 Click Modify. 538 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 165 In the Type Selector. and associate it to the LenA1 family parameter. and modify the witness lines as shown. and modify the witness lines as shown. associate the new angular dimension to the Ang family parameter. NOTE Make certain that you select the model line and not the reference line. 168 Using the same method. 160 Click Modify.

for Ang. under Dimensions. 171 Press CTRL+S. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 539 . click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate.170 On the View Control Bar. 173 In the Family Types dialog. you flex the part to validate the design. Next. The part flexes to become a 90 degree elbow fitting. and click Apply. enter 90. Flex the part 172 On the Design Bar. click Family Types.

clear Lines (Pipe Fitting) and Reference Planes. Lines (Pipe Fittings) are the model lines. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element.NOTE If the part does not flex and errors occur. Next. 176 On the Options Bar. 174 Restore the Ang parameter to 45. you create tick marks. and click OK. Add tick marks and dimension them You create tick marks to indicate the end of the fitting when viewing the fitting in either the Coarse or Medium (single line) detail level. 540 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . and click OK. Check all constraints and verify that model lines were created and properly constrained. this is usually caused by a constraint issue. 178 On the View Control Bar. 177 In the Filter dialog. Everything except for model lines and reference planes are selected. click (Filter Selection). 175 In the drawing area. cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in view.

click Model Lines. 180 In the Type Selector. TIP You draw this model line on top of the Coupling reference plane. Verify that Radius is cleared. do the following: ■ For Plane. 181 On the Options Bar. 183 At the right end of the fitting. draw another model line that is perpendicular and tangent to the end of the diagonal model line as shown. verify that Pipe Fittings is selected. Verify that (Draw) and (Line) are selected. Line length is approximate. ■ ■ ■ For Offset. verify that 0' 0" is specified. 182 At the left end of the fitting. verify that Level : Ref Level is selected.Only model lines and reference planes display. draw a model line that is perpendicular and tangent to the end of the horizontal model line as shown. 179 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 541 .

length is approximate. you dimension each side of the 2 tick marks. 542 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content .Again. 184 On the Design Bar. verify that Linear Dimension Style : Linear is selected. click Dimension. NOTE You must click the reference plane first to dimension this model line. and then clicking an endpoint of the model line (tick mark). 187 On the left end of the fitting. dimension the bottom half of the left model line. 185 In the Type Selector. verify that (Aligned) is selected. The top half of the model line (tick mark) is dimensioned. 189 Using the same method. 186 On the Options Bar. 188 Using the same method. click the Center (Front/Back) reference plane and click the top end point of the model line (tick mark). The 2 tick marks are drawn. dimension both halves of the right model line (tick mark) by clicking the diagonal model line first. Next. then move the cursor to the left and click to place the dimension.

194 On the Options Bar. 195 Click the diagonal model line and then click the right model line tick mark. select CplRad This associates that dimension to the CplRad family parameter. 192 Using the same method. 197 Select the angular dimension. You may need to zoom out to locate the lock. Next. associate the other 3 model line dimensions to the CplRad parameter. 198 Relocate the dimension annotations. 191 Select the lower dimension for the left model line. and on the Options Bar. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 543 .You place 2 dimensions for the right model line. 196 Click Modify. You cannot select multiple dimensions and associate them to a parameter. click (Angular). for Label. NOTE You must associate each dimension separately. you create an angular dimension between the diagonal model line and the right model line tick mark. click Dimension. and lock it to 90 degrees. 190 Click Modify. 193 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. The dimension are as shown. and modify the witness lines as shown. move the cursor down and click to place the dimension.

click Family Types. and for NomRad enter 1 1/2". click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ .199 On the View Control Bar. The elbow fitting flexes into a 90 degree elbow that has a 3 inch diameter. 202 In the Family Types dialog. Flex the part 201 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 544 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . and click Apply. for Ang.Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. enter 90. 200 Press CTRL+S to save the family.

204 In the drawing area. clear Fine. Next. you set object visibility. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 545 . This specifies that the single-line fitting geometry will display when only the Coarse and Medium detail level settings are selected. 206 In the Filter dialog. Next. Specify object visibility You specify object visibility to determine the type of elbow fitting geometry that displays for each detail level setting. You created the detail level geometry for the elbow fitting and flexed this geometry to validate it. You may want to refer to the Threaded Generic Elbow. the NomRad value that you specified required a pipe diameter that is not included in the lookup table file. click Visibility. and click OK. cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the drawing. on the Options Bar. verify that Coarse and Medium are selected.csv lookup table file for the valid pipe diameters or add new pipe diameters based on the manufacturers’ specifications. Only model lines are selected. you specify the 2-line geometry for the Fine detail level setting. select Lines (Pipe Fittings). you specify this single line geometry to a detail level setting. NOTE If errors occur while flexing the fitting. click Check None. 208 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. and click OK. click (Filter Selection).203 Continue to flex the fitting by changing the Ang and NomRad parameter values. 205 On the Options Bar. 207 With the model lines selected. Next.

and after the edge highlights. 222 On the Options Bar. click None. The 2-line fitting geometry will display only when the Fine detail level setting is selected. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ 3D Views ➤ View1 to make the 3D view active. 216 In the drawing area. cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the drawing. and click OK. select Fitting from the system type list. 213 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. The fitting displays. 211 In the Filter dialog. click Pipe Connector. and click OK. Only the 3 sweeps are selected. click (Filter Selection). click None.209 In the drawing area. click (Filter Selection). 217 On the Options Bar. 219 On the View Control Bar. click to place the primary connector. and verify that Face) is selected. cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the view. Add connectors 215 In the Project Browser. (Place on 223 Place the cursor on the edge of the right face of the fitting. select Other. 218 In the Filter dialog. and click OK. click Visibility. 212 With the sweeps selected. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. select Dimensions. clear Coarse and Medium. 210 On the Options Bar. 221 On the Design Bar. Next. 546 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 220 Spin the model to view the faces at the ends of the fitting. on the Options Bar. 214 Press CTRL+S. you add connectors to the elbow fitting family. You begin by placing the primary connector. verify that Fine is selected.

You place the primary connector on the right face because this face is on the X-axis. You can verify this by viewing the face in a floor plan view. NOTE When you place fitting connectors.The primary connector is placed. and that if all connectors are not properly rotated and linked. Unexpected behavior can result if the primary connector is not properly placed relative to the other connectors. Notice that crosshairs display indicating that this is the primary connector. place a connector on the left face of the fitting. the primary connector must be placed on the face that is on the X-axis. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 547 . 224 Using the same method.

■ The connector radii change. and click the other connector. in the Associate Family Parameter dialog. and click OK. click OK. in the Associate Family Parameter dialog. you rotate the connectors. The connector angle constraint and radius dimension are now associated to parameters. click Link Connector. For Angle. 548 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . In the Element Properties dialog. select NomRad. This allows the fitting radius to change after you specify a pipe diameter or perform pipe sizing. verify that Fitting is selected. Next. Notice that values are assigned to both associated parameters. The 2 selected connectors display in red. 229 On the Options Bar. you link both connectors. Next. it is the recommended that you rotate them so that they are oriented vertically. 227 On the Options Bar. and that these parameters cannot be edited in the Element Properties dialog. 226 Select the primary connector (indicated by crosshairs). you specify connector properties. The 2 connectors are linked.225 Click Modify. It also allows the fitting angle to change as a result of modifications to the pipe layout. ■ ■ For Radius. click . select Ang. Next. enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. do the following: For System Type. click . Notice that the connectors are oriented horizontally. under Instance Parameters. 228 In the drawing area. 230 In the Element Properties dialog. select the 2 connectors. Although the connectors are round. and click OK. Rotate connectors 231 In the 3D view. select ■ .

click to specify the rotation start point.IMPORTANT Connector rotation is a critical part of connector placement. You may find it easier to rotate connectors in a 3D view. The connector orientation determines the correct orientation of the objects that are automatically inserted on the part. 232 Spin the fitting to view the entire primary connector. it is extremely important for rectangular connectors such as those on rectangular duct fittings. creating an unexpected result. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 549 . the rectangular duct fitting will be inserted improperly. and click to specify the rotation end point. The height is not on these axes. the rectangular connector must be oriented so that the width is assigned to the face that is on the X and Y axes. 235 Move the cursor clockwise 90 degrees. and after the intersection snap displays. If rectangular connectors are not rotated properly. and on the Options Bar. 234 Move the cursor over the model line and to the left of the connector arrow. Remember that for rectangular connectors. where the part geometry is clearly visible. 233 Select the connector. Although this is not as important for round connectors. click (Rotate).

550 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . you verify the connector arrow direction. Next. rotate the secondary connector so that it has a vertical orientation. The primary connector is rotated and now has a vertical orientation. This also flips the connector arrow. You will learn more about connector arrows in the next section. 236 Using the same method. 237 Press CTRL+S to save the family.NOTE Do not use the flip arrows to flip the connector with respect to its reference plane.

and click OK. Under Create New. The elbow family is loaded into the new project and the new project becomes active. verify that the 1 .rte template file. In most instances. The 1 .3D View to switch back to the threaded coupling family. based on the systems default template. and locate this template file.rte template. 241 In the New Project dialog. you load the threaded elbow family into the new project. verify that each connector arrow indicates an outward direction from its connector as shown. verify that the path points to the Systems-Default.rfa . 243 On the Design Bar. click Load into Projects. then click Browse. a new project is created based on the current project template. IMPORTANT Connector arrows indicate the direction of a duct or pipe (extrusion) when it is being created to complete a connection. a connector arrow points outward away from the object to which the connector is associated. verify that Project is selected. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Template file. You can modify the connector arrow direction by selecting the connector and clicking the flip arrows. It does not indicate flow direction.Mech view is located under Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. This template may not be the Systems-Default template. Next. 244 In the Project Browser. Because Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 551 . TIP You can also set the project template file path for all new projects on the File Locations tab of the Options dialog (click Settings menu ➤ Options). NOTE If you click on the Standard toolbar.Mech mechanical floor plan is the active view. Test the elbow fitting in a project 240 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. The Systems-Default template creates views for all system types allowing you to model different systems in one project. If the template file path does not point to the Systems-Default.Verify connector arrow direction 238 In the 3D view. Otherwise. select the project that you just created from the Load into Projects dialog. 242 Click Window menu ➤ Threaded Generic Elbow. If more than one project is open. Click OK. 239 Press CTRL+S. This is the default view when a project. the duct or pipe when created will pass through the object geometry instead of away from it. opens.

it is associated with the mechanical discipline, both ducts and pipe can be created in the 1 - Mech view. 245 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar, click Pipe. NOTE If the Piping tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and click Piping. Next, you assign the new threaded generic elbow fitting to a pipe type. 246 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected. 247 On the Options Bar, click .

248 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 249 In the Type Properties dialog, under Mechanical, for Elbow, select Threaded – Generic Elbow: Threaded – Generic Elbow, and click OK twice. 250 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■

For D: (diameter) select 3”. Verify that Auto Connect is selected. Verify that the Offset elevation is specified at 9' 0"

251 In the drawing area, draw some piping, using various angles and offset elevations. NOTE Remember that if errors occur during fitting insertion, it is usually because the specified pipe diameter was not in the Threaded Generic Elbow lookup table file. 252 On the View Control Bar, for Detail Level, click Coarse, Medium, and Fine to see how the new elbow fitting geometry displays in both the floor pan and the 3D views.

You have verified that the threaded elbow fitting was correctly inserted, that the pipe was created in the correct direction away from the elbow, and that the detail level geometry displayed properly. Next, you check connectivity. Check connectivity 253 Place the cursor over the piping, and press Tab to check connectivity. The piping highlights indicating that it is connected. 254 Click Modify. Hide shape handles 255 In the Project Browser, double-click the 1 - Mech view to make it the active view. 256 In the drawing area, select an elbow from your test piping layout.

552 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

257 Enter ZR, and draw a zoom region around the elbow. Notice that triangular and dot shape handles display on the elbow along with the 2 connectors.

258 Drag the upper triangular shape handle upward as shown.

Notice that this shape handle modified the fitting geometry.

Other shape handles can modify aspects of the fitting such as location. These modifications can violate the design intent of the elbow fitting.

Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 553

IMPORTANT Shape handles are not used for Revit MEP system families but they display by default when you create a new family. If shape handles are not hidden and they are inadvertently dragged during your modeling session, the geometry or placement of the family will be adversely affected. This can create unexpected results, especially for duct fittings. This is because, unlike pipe fittings, duct fittings use formulae that reside in the family rather than in an external lookup table file to determine size. It is highly recommended that you hide all shape handles for Revit MEP families before using them in a project. To hide the shape handles in a system family, you need to open the family in the Family Editor and specify the Is Reference instance parameter as Not a Reference for all reference lines and all reference planes that are used for that family. 259 Press CTRL+Z to undo the modification. 260 Click Window menu ➤ Threaded - Generic Elbow.rfa - Floor Plan: Ref. Level to switch to the elbow family floor plan view. 261 In the drawing area, cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the drawing, including reference planes.

262 On the Options Bar, click

(Filter Selection).

263 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Reference Planes, and click OK. Only the reference planes are selected. 264 On the Options Bar, click .

265 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Is Reference, select Not a Reference, and click OK. 266 Using the same method, specify Not a Reference for all reference lines. 267 Press CTRL+S to save the family. 268 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. If more than one project is open, in the Load into Projects dialog, select the test project in which you tested the elbow fitting, and click OK. 269 After a message informs you to overwrite the existing version of the threaded generic elbow, click Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. The test project becomes active. 270 In the 1 - Mech floor plan view, zoom in and select an elbow from your piping layout. Notice that all shape handles are hidden.

554 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

The threaded elbow is ready to be used in a project. RELATED Although the physical geometry of this fitting is accurate, it is inconsistent with a real-world threaded elbow in that the connectors on this elbow fitting are on the outer face of the threaded portion of the fitting. This prevents the pipe from engaging the fitting. You can use the Hidden Line model graphics style to verify this. If the part were modeled so that the pipe engaged the fitting, proper performance of Revit MEP would be impacted due to the way hidden lines are calculated and drawn.

Creating an Annotation Symbol Family
It is likely that you will need to create annotation symbols that are not part of a building model. For example, a common symbol in MEP drawings is a New to Existing Connection callout. In this exercise, you create such an annotation. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. 2 In the New dialog, select Generic Annotation.rft, and click Open. 3 Maximize the window, and in the drawing area, zoom in to view the note (located near the intersection of the reference planes). This note contains key points to remember when creating an annotation family. 4 Select the note and delete it. 5 Enter ZR, and draw a zoom region around the intersection of the 2 reference planes. Draw lines 6 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 7 In the Type Selector, verify that Generic Annotations is selected. 8 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Verify that Clear Chain.

(Draw), and

(Line) are selected.

For Offset, verify that 0' 0" is specified. Verify that Radius is cleared.

9 Click the intersection of the 2 reference planes to specify the line start point, move the mouse to the right, and after listening dimensions appear, enter 0 1/8, and press Enter. This creates a 1/8" line to the right of the intersection. The line is over the reference line. 10 Using the same method, draw 3 more 1/8" lines located above, below, and to the left of the intersection as shown.

Creating an Annotation Symbol Family | 555

TIP You can also mirror the opposite lines instead of drawing them. 11 In the drawing area, while pressing CTRL, select the 2 reference planes. 12 On the View Control Bar (located at the lower-left under the drawing area), click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. This hides the reference planes allowing you to better view the lines.

Next, you create the filled regions. Create filled regions

13 On the toolbar, click

(Fine Lines).

14 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Filled Region. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design, verify that Lines is selected. 16 In the Type Selector, verify that Generic Annotations is selected. 17 On the Options Bar, do the following:

Verify that Select

(Draw) is selected.

(Arc from center and endpoints). and, select this sketching option from the list.

You may need to click

Click Radius, and enter 3/32".

18 Zoom the view, place the cursor over the intersection of the 4 lines, and after the end point snap displays, click to specify the center of the arc.

556 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

19 Move the cursor directly up and over the end of the upper vertical line, and after the end point snap displays, click to specify the start point of the arc.

20 Move the cursor over the right horizontal line, and after the intersection snap displays, click to specify the end point of the arc.

Creating an Annotation Symbol Family | 557

An arced line is drawn.

21 With the Lines tool active, on the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Verify that Click

(Draw) and Chain are selected.

(Line).

For Offset, verify that 0' 0" is specified. Verify that Radius is cleared.

22 In the drawing area, click the upper end point of the arced line, then click the intersection of the 4 lines, and finally click the lower end point of the arced line.

558 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

A chain of 2 lines is drawn. 23 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. This filled region is created.

24 Using the same method, draw a filled region on the opposite lower-left quadrant.

Next, you draw a circle around the 2 filled regions. 25 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Lines. 26 On the Options Bar, do the following:

Verify that Click

(Draw) is selected.

(Circle).

Creating an Annotation Symbol Family | 559

■ ■

For Offset, verify that 0' 0" is specified. Click Radius, and verify that 0' 3/32" is specified.

27 In the drawing area, place the cursor over the intersection of the 4 lines, and after the end point snap displays, click to specify the center of the circle. 28 Click Modify.

29 Click File ➤ Save, and save the family as New to Existing.rfa Test the annotation symbol in a project 30 Click File menu ➤ Open. 31 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. 32 Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Sample Project.rvt. 33 Click Window menu ➤ New to Existing.rfa - Drawing Sheet to switch to the new annotation symbol family. 34 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 35 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 1 - Mech to make it the active view. 36 On the Drafting tab on the Design Bar, click Symbol. 37 In the Type Selector, verify that New to Existing is selected. 38 On the Options Bar, click .

39 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 40 In the Type Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Leader Arrowhead, select Arrow Filled 15 Degree, and click OK twice. 41 On the Options Bar, for Number of Leaders, enter 1. 42 In the drawing area, zoom in, and click to place the annotation symbol in the project. 43 Press ESC twice. Next, you modify the symbol leader. 44 Select the leader to display shape handles.

560 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

45 Drag the middle shape handle up to modify the middle of the leader.

46 Drag the end shape handle to modify the annotation symbol as shown.

47 Select the symbol, and drag the cross-arrows to relocate the symbol. 48 Click File menu ➤ Close. You do not need to save the project.

Revit MEP Family Editor Concepts
A defining feature of Revit MEP content is the concept of connectors. Connectors allow Revit MEP content to participate in specific systems and facilitate calculations for a variety of parameters.

Connectors
The primary difference between content for Revit MEP and content for Revit Architecture or Revit Structure is the concept of connectors. All Revit MEP content requires connectors for to be intelligent Revit MEP components. Components created without connectors cannot participate in a system topology. Three disciplines can be assigned to connectors that are added to a family.

Duct connectors are associated with ductwork, duct fittings, and other elements that are part of the air handling systems. Electrical connectors are used for any type of electrical connections, including power, telephone, alarm systems and others.

Revit MEP Family Editor Concepts | 561

Pipe connectors are used for piping, pipe fittings, and other components that are meant for transmitting fluids.

The discipline assigned to a connector determines its behavior and the types of systems with which it can interact. Connectors are primarily logical entities that allow calculating loads within the building. NOTE The term fluid does not necessarily limit the use of piping systems to liquids. Steam, medical gases and other non-fluid materials are often transmitted using piping systems. Selecting the correct discipline is critical to the content working correctly, as after this selection is made, it cannot be changed without first deleting the connector and adding it again with the correct discipline.

Connector Properties
The discipline assigned to a connector determines the connector’s properties. The following tables show the different connector parameters, by property group, for each discipline and a brief description of their functionality.
Electrical Constraints Edge loop centered Graphics Size on screen Electrical - Loads True Load Phase 3 Calculated based on (Apparent Load Phase 3) x (Power Factor). Calculated based on (Apparent Load Phase 2) x (Power Factor). Calculated based on (Apparent Load Phase 1) x (Power Factor). Percentage of power attributed to this connector. Active only when Power is specified as System Type. Calculated based on (Voltage) x (Current - Phase 3). Active only when Balanced Load is False and System Type is Power, and Number of Poles >2. Calculated based on (Voltage) x (Current - Phase 2). Active only when Balanced Load is False and System Type is Power, and Number of Poles >1. Size of the connector display inside the Family Editor. Connector placement method (read only).

True Load Phase 2

True Load Phase 1

Power Factor

Apparent Load Phase 3

Apparent Load Phase 2

562 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

Apparent Load Phase 1

Calculated based on (Voltage) x (Current - Phase 1). Active only when Balanced Load is False and System Type is Power. Calculated based on (Voltage) x (Current). Active only when Balanced Load is True and System Type is Power. The voltage specified on the connector. Active only when the System Type is Power. Possible values are: Data, Power - Balanced, Power - Unbalanced, Telephone, Security, Fire Alarm, Nurse Call, Controls, Communication. Possible values are: HVAC, Lighting, Power, Other. Possible values are: Lagging, Leading. Possible values are: 1, 2, or 3.

Apparent Load

Voltage

System Type

Load Classification Power Factor State Number of Poles Identity Data Index Primary Connector

A unique identifier for a connector in a family (read only). Possible values are: True or False (read only). A single connector of each discipline is allowed to be primary in each family. The family’s electrical data that displays in a schedule is derived from the primary connector. A description of the connector

Connector Description

Mechanical (HVAC) Constraints Edge loop centered Angle Connector placement method (read only) Used for adjustable angle families (such as elbows and adjustable tees) to push the angle value into the family from connected components

Graphics Size on screen Mechanical Flow Factor Percentage of the system flow attributed to this connector. Active only when the Flow Configuration is System. Size of the connector display inside the Family Editor.

Connectors | 563

Loss Coefficient Flow Configuration Flow Direction System Type

Active only when the Loss Method is Coefficient. Possible values are: Calculated, Preset, System. Possible values are: In, Out, Bidirectional. Possible values are: Supply, Return, Exhaust, Other, Undefined. Possible values are: Not Defined, Coefficient, Specific Loss.

Loss Method Mechanical - Airflow Pressure Drop Flow Dimensions Shape Height

Active only when the Loss Method is Specific Loss. The amount of air flowing at this connector.

Possible values are: Rectangular or Round. The height of the connector when the Shape is defined to be rectangular. The width of the connector when the Shape is defined to be rectangular. The radius of the connector when the Shape is defined to be round.

Width

Radius

Identity Data Index Primary Connector A unique identifier for a connector in a family (read only). Possible values are: True or False (read only). A single connector of each discipline is allowed to be primary in each family. The family’s HVAC data that displays in a schedule is derived from the primary connector. The index of the linked connector, -1 if none. (read only) A description of the connector

Link Connector Index Connector Description

Mechanical (Piping) Constraints Edge loop centered Connector placement method (read only).

564 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

Angle

Used for adjustable angle families (such as elbows and adjustable tees) to push the angle value into the family from connected components

Graphics Size on screen Mechanical Fixture Units Active only when the System Type is Sanitary, Domestic Hot Water, or Domestic Cold Water and the Flow Configuration is Fixture Units. K Coefficient (K Factor) is only editable if Loss Method is specified as “K Coefficient”. Percentage of the system flow attributed to this connector. Active only when the Flow Configuration is System. Volumetric flow rate of fluid through connector. Active only when the Loss Method is Specific Loss Possible values are: Calculated, Preset, System. Possible values are: In, Out, Bidirectional. Bidirectional is active only when the Flow Configuration is Calculated. Possible values are: Not Defined, K Coefficient from Table, K Coefficient, Specific Loss. Possible values are: Checked or unchecked. Possible values are: Undefined, Hydronic Supply, Hydronic Return, Sanitary, Domestic Cold Water, Domestic Hot Water, Fire Protection, Other. Possible values are: Bell Mouth Inlet or Reducer, Inward Projecting Pipe, Outlet, Square Edged Inlet. Active only when the Loss Method is K Coefficient from Table. Size of the connector display inside the Family Editor.

K Coefficient

Flow Factor

Flow Pressure Drop Flow Configuration Flow Direction

Loss Method

Allow Slope Adjustments System Type

K Coefficient Table

Dimensions Radius Identity Data Index A unique identifier for a connector in a family (read only). The nominal size of the connector.

Connectors | 565

Primary Connector

Possible values are: True or False (read only). A single connector of each discipline is allowed to be primary in each family. The family’s piping data that displays in a schedule is derived from the primary connector. The index of the linked connector, -1 if none. (read only). A description of the connector.

Link Connector Index Connector Description

System Types
When a Revit MEP component that is not a member in a system is selected in a building model, the Options Bar displays create system buttons. The specific buttons depend on the component and the type(s) of connectors in the family. If there are multiple connectors of the same type and you want to connect to a specific connector, you can right-click on the connector control to create the appropriate type.

Electrical
When a component with an electrical connector is selected, the Options Bar displays one or more of the following buttons, which allow you to create a specific electrical system (from left to right: Power, Data, Telephone, Fire Alarm, Nurse Call, Communication.

Duct
When a component with an Duct connector is selected, the Options Bar displays one or more of the following buttons, which allow you to create a specific HVAC system (from left to right: Air Supply, Air Return, Exhaust).

Pipe Connector
Pipe connectors are used with hydronic systems, plumbing systems, fire protection systems. When a component with a hydronic pipe connector is selected, the Options Bar displays one or more of the following buttons, which allow you to create a specific hydronic piping system (from left to right: Supply, Return, Other.

When a component with a plumbing (pipe) connector is selected, the Options Bar displays one or more of the following buttons, which allow you to create a specific electrical system (from left to right: Sanitary, Domestic Hot Water, Domestic Cold Water, Other).

When a component with a fire protection (pipe) connector is selected, the Options Bar displays one or more of the following buttons, which allow you to create a specific electrical system (from left to right: Wet Sprinkler, Dry Sprinkler, Other).

566 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

Load Classifications
Revit MEP maintains information about loads associated with the rooms in a project. As devices and equipment are placed in rooms, Revit MEP keeps track of the loads based on load type: HVAC, Lighting, Power, Other. The loads associated with the room can be view in the Element Properties for each room, and displayed in schedules.

Connector Placement
Connector placement options allow you to specify two basic connector placement methods:

Place on Face This option (Edge loop centered=true) will maintain its point at the center of the edge loop. In most cases this is the preferable method for placing a connector. Typically the Place on Face option is easier to use, and is suitable for most cases. Place on Work Plane This option allows placement of the connector on a selected plane. For many cases it would be possible to imitate the place on face option by specifying a plane and using dimensions to constrain the connector to the desired location. However, this method generally requires additional parameters and constraints to be used effectively.

Connectors | 567

NOTE Fittings (pipe and duct fittings) expect the instance origin of the family to be the intersection of the connectors. In most cases for fittings, there is a point on the fitting where all of the connectors (if extended into the fitting) will collide. Fittings expect this collision to be placed at the original intersection of the Center (Front / Back), Center (Left / Right), and Reference Level work planes. For this reason, it is good practice to pin these reference planes before beginning to build the family. Do this by selecting the reference plane(s) and clicking the Pin icon on the Edit toolbar.

Hosts
Objects that are placed in a model are often hosted by other components. Hosting components include ceilings, floors, roofs, and walls, as well as lines, and faces. Even components that are not hosted by one of these components are still hosted by the level on which they reside. When creating a family from a template, it is important that you consider what type of hosting behavior you want for the family. For example, you may intuitively think that a new light fixture should be ceiling hosted. However, there may be cases where you want to use that family in a wall mount configuration, or even freely suspended. You cannot change the hosting of a family after it is created; the hosting setting is hard-set based on the template from which the family originated. Plane hosting provides the ability for the family to be hosted by walls, floors, or ceilings, and provides a high level of flexibility. Plane hosted elements will even move with their hosting elements through linked models. Non-hosted families are actually hosted by the level they are inserted on and provide the ability for the element to be placed anywhere. Their height is defined relative to their level, but there is no association established with elements, linked models or otherwise. When using linked files, only face-hosted families will be able to be hosted by the linked file’s geometry.

Templates
As described above, the hosting of an element is defined based on the template that is used when the family is originally created. Templates also determine the type of family as an annotation family, model family, titleblock family, or a profile family. In some cases, the template also defines particular characteristics of how the family works, such as linear versus spot lighting characteristics. NOTE You cannot change these characteristics once you have created the family. For example, you cannot change a linear lighting fixture into a spot lighting fixture, or redefine an annotation symbol to be a model element. You must start the family with the appropriate template.

Lookup Tables
Lookup tables are used to define parameter values in an external .csv file. This lets you specify multiple part sizes that are based on a table without creating a separate family type for each size. Revit MEP provides a text_file_lookup function that can be used to read the necessary values from a comma-separated values (.csv) file. The location of Lookup Table files is defined by the LookupTableLocation parameter in the Revit.ini file. The syntax for the text_file_lookup function uses the following format:
result=text_file_lookup(LookupTableName, LookupColumn, DefaultIfNotFound, LookupValue) Where: Is:

568 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

result LookupTableName LookupColumn

the returned value. the name of the CSV file to lookup. the name of the column from which the result value is to be returned. the value that will be returned if LookupValue is not found. the value to find in the first column of the table.

DefaultIfNotFound LookupValue

CSV File Structure
The first row of values in the CSV file is for header information, to describe the contents of subsequent columns. The headers are of the format ParameterName##ParameterType##ParameterUnits Acceptable parameter types are: NUMBER, LENGTH, AREA, VOLUME, ANGLE, and OTHER For example, a column may have the following header: TotalArea##AREA##INCHES to represent the total area in square inches. The first column in the file contains a description. The Lookup Function processes the information in the file starting with column 2.

Parameter Mapping
Many properties for objects, such as the depth of an extrusion and the voltage of a connector, can be mapped (associated) to a family parameter or to a shared parameter to provide flexibility to the family. The associated parameter can be defined as an instance parameter or a type parameter. Parameters are mapped by clicking (small button) in the column in the Element Properties dialog for the object. When an object’s parameter is mapped to another parameter, its Value column cannot be edited. The example below shows that the Power Factor and Number of Poles parameters are currently not mapped to a parameter. Their values can be edited directly in the Value column. The Apparent Load Phase 1 and Voltage parameters are mapped to other parameters, and their values assume the values specified for the parameters to which they have been mapped.

Parameter Mapping | 569

Category
Revit MEP components fall into general categories (pipe fittings, lighting fixtures, and so on). The Family Category specified when a family is created determines which Family Parameters are activated. The settings for these family parameters affect the behavior for the part and identifies the type of component. In Family Editor, the Family Category and Parameters settings are found in the Settings menu. Depending on the Family Category and the type of template that the family was derived from (host-based, generic model, detail component, generic tag, and so on), different Family Parameters apply. The following table lists each Family Category, and indicates the applicable Family Parameters. Family Category Family Parameter Work Plane Always Ver- Light Based tical ** Source Part Type Maintain Annotation Orientation Shared

Air Terminals Communications Devices Data Devices Duct Accessories Duct Fittings Electrical Equipment Electrical Fixtures Fire Alarm Devices Generic Models Lighting Devices Lighting Fixtures Mechanical Equipment Nurse Call Devices Pipe Accessories Pipe Fittings Plumbing Fixtures Security Devices

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X

X

X X X X X X

X X

X X

570 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

This allows calculating fitting losses based on a loss table. each lighting fixture family has one light source. and the light distribution (spherical. To determine the part type family. Plumbing Fixture Part Types Damper. Entry. spot. Exit. The part type serves 2 functions: ■ To only allow replacing a particular part with a similar part in a building project. Elbow.Family Category Family Parameter Work Plane Always Ver. Hood. for fittings it would not be valid to replace a cross with a transition. Transition. hemispherical. In a project. You can also define photometric characteristics. For example. circle). Valve Light Source | 571 . To create a lighting fixture that uses multiple light sources (such as a chandelier or a set of track lights). Part Types The Part Type parameter provides additional subclassification of a family category. and determines the behavior for the parts in the family. Maintain Annotation Orientation: Use this option when the family has a nested annotation family. Duct Fittings. you can adjust the position and brightness of each light source to achieve the desired lighting effects. Pipe Accessories. Initial Intensity. Pipe Fittings. ■ If a family category provides a Part Type parameter. as is the case with receptacles and switches. there are times when this is not appropriate. the Part Type values available depends on the family category. you can specify the shape of the light element (point. To accurately look up the correct fitting in the database. the part type must be defined. line. Part Type: See Part Types on page 571.Light Based tical ** Source Part Type Maintain Annotation Orientation X X X Shared Sprinklers Telephone Devices X X X X X X Family Parameters ■ ■ ■ Light Source: See Light Source on page 571. In general. Fan and System Interaction. Equipment. So there is a level of filtering built into the Type Selector for Revit MEP. Obstruction. Light Source A light source is the part of a lighting fixture that emits light (such as a light bulb). or photometric web). Junction. create a nested family. and Initial Color Control. rectangle. However. Generally the Type Selector allows you to replace a family of one category with any other family of the same category. Duct Accessories. When light source is selected in the Family Category and Parameters dialog. Undefined. Duct Mounted Equipment. The ASHRAE Duct Fitting database is integrated with Revit MEP. such as Light Loss Factor. The following table shows which part types apply to which family categories: Family Categories Air Terminals. Mechanical Equipment.

Lighting Devices. Lighting Fixtures. Duct Mounted Equipment: Smoke detectors.Family Categories Communication Devices. Switchboard. Data Devices. and light fixtures. Fire Alarm Devices. ■ ■ ■ ■ 572 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . Switch Junction Box ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Damper: Used to control flow volume. fire alarm components. the automatically generated wiring branches through the junction box. Nurse Call. Security. cross. Nurse Call Devices. the automatically generated wiring branches to the switch. Controls. Panelboard. Transformer. Data Panel. inline fans Hood: Kitchen. steam generators Elbow: A bend or elbow type fitting Entry: Point at which fluid enters the system: louvers. As indicated in the image. Panelboard: Used to connect devices/equipment with connectors with a System Type value of Power and to generate branch circuit type schedules. wye) Obstruction: Anything that causes a pressure drop. and Communication. Electrical Equipment. Electrical Fixtures. such as an inline filter Transition: Shape or size change Undefined: No specific functionality Valve: Valves and similar accessories Data Panel: Panels used to connect devices with connectors of System Type Data. Telephone. lab or other exhaust hoods Junction: Intersection of 3 or more segments (tee. As indicated in the image. Security Devices. Junction Box: Wire management devices through which wiring is generally drawn through the device. Normal: Devices such as receptacles. Fire Alarm. Telephone Devices Part Types Normal. grates Exit: Point at which fluid leaves the system Equipment: Generic equipment Fan and System Interaction AHUs. Switch: Control device such as a switch where wiring is typically not drawn through the devices. grills.

■ Switchboard: Used to connect devices/equipment with connectors with a System Type value of Power and to generate branch circuit type schedules. Transformer: Used to interconnect Panelboards and/or Switchboards of differing voltages. ■ Part Types | 573 .

574 .

a Kansas city based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial datasets in this section. NOTE For training purposes. 575 . the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces. The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse. Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District. the existing building shell will be maintained and restored.Documenting Your Projects In this section of the tutorials. you learn to create construction documentation in Revit MEP 2009. slight modifications to the building design have been made. and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units. As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. exterior fire stairs. We wish to thank BNIM Architects. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. balconies. and a roof garden. lofty ceilings.

576 .

577 . you learn how to create views from a building model. you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ Create new project views. you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project. and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views.Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 10 In this tutorial. including plan. and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views Creating Views In this lesson. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan. elevation. section. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. how to create section and elevation views. You learn how to create new views from existing views.

rvt. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views.Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 578 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Training Files.

2 In the Project Browser. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename. 9 In the Project Browser. and click OK. select Level 2. and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. 4 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename.Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan. under Floor Plans. 8 In the Rename View dialog. under Floor Plans. 3 In the Rename View dialog. expand Floor Plans. 7 In the Project Browser. Duplicating Plan Views | 579 . and click OK. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan.

right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. enter Vicinity Plan. under Floor Plans. double-click Vicinity Plan. 13 In the Project Browser. 580 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click OK. 11 Under Floor Plans. right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename. 12 In the Rename View dialog.

Duplicating Plan Views | 581 . Next.14 On the View Control Bar. click the current scale. and click 1''= 80'-0''. hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. 15 Select the body of the south elevation marker.

rvt. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 18 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in _progress. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden. 582 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise. you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model.16 Right-click.

under Floor Plans. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 583 . Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. double-click Level 1. click Elevation. 3 In the Type Selector. 4 On the Options Bar.rvt. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker. for Scale. select Elevation: Building Elevation. select 1/8''=1'-0''.South East elevation view Section view Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry.

Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Design Bar. and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed. click Modify. click Modify. 584 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 7 Select and drag the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building.

and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. select Section: Building Section. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Section. for Scale. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Level 1. under Elevations (Building Elevation). ■ Move the cursor down. and click OK. under Elevations. 11 In the Project Browser.Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser. 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3. select 1/8''=1'-0''. right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename. under Views (all). Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. enter South East. 10 In the Rename View dialog. 14 In the Type Selector. 15 On the Options Bar. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 585 . double-click South East.

Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building. 18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents. 586 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and move them to just outside of the left side of the building.

and click to place it. Click the midpoint of the section line. click Split Segment. 20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 587 .19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint. drag it to the right (keeping it below the split) until it cuts through the stair.

and double-click Section 1. 23 On the View Control Bar. 24 Select gridline F. select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. using the blue circular drag grip. expand Sections (Building Section). View the new section 22 In the Project Browser. and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right. click Modify. 588 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .21 On the Design Bar.

Creating Callout Views In this exercise. click Modify. Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan Creating Callout Views | 589 . you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view.25 On the Design Bar. To create each view. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of each new callout view.

Enlarged Stair Plan Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. select 1/4"=1'-0''. select Floor Plan. click Callout. 4 On the Options Bar. double-click Level 1. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser.Resulting callout view . under Floor Plans. 590 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . for Scale.rvt. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. 3 In the Type Selector. 5 Draw the callout around the large stairs in the center of the plan: ■ Click to specify a point to the upper-right of the stair.

■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair. Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head. and move it to the left side of the callout boundary. and select the callout boundary. and click to specify a point to complete the callout. click Modify. Creating Callout Views | 591 . 6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar.

right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename. 592 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line. 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 7 On the Design Bar. 9 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. enter Enlarged Stair Plan. Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head.■ Select the middle grip. The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays. click Modify.

select Detail View: Detail. 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select 1 1/2''=1'-0''. Creating Callout Views | 593 . 14 On the Options Bar. click Callout. for Scale.Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. and click to specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang. double-click Section 1. 13 In the Type Selector. and click to specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building. ■ Move the cursor diagonally down. under Sections (Building Sections).

594 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Detail Views (Details). expand Detail Views (Details). and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename.16 Modify the callout leader as shown. double-click Roof Overhang Detail. 17 In the Project Browser. Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Rename View dialog. enter Roof Overhang Detail. and click OK.

the elevation markers. and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises. you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards. Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise. Existing stair callout head and boundary Modifying View Tag Appearance | 595 .20 Click File menu ➤ Save. You change the appearance of the section mark head.

and can be applied to the section line.Filled.Modified stair callout head and boundary Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. and click OK. select the current project. under Floor Plans. and click Open. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. Section Tail . 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. click Duplicate. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter Section Head – Custom. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project. 596 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Training Files. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser. click Load into Project. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. select the section line. . 12 For Section Tag.Custom. and click OK. 4 On the Design Bar. for Section Head. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. 8 In the Name dialog. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. select Custom-Section Head. clear any others. select Section Head . and click OK.rfa. 10 On the floor plan. open Imperial\Families\Annotations. and click OK twice.rvt. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. Section Tail – Filled. and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open. click Edit/New. double-click Level 1.

scroll to Section Marks. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. For Line Weight. notice the circular elevation markers that display. click Training Files. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line. 17 Under Category. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. enter 3/4'' Circle. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 597 . 15 Under Category. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog. select 3. click Duplicate. 19 Click OK. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. 16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. Click OK. . select Custom-Callout Head. On the floor plan. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. 27 Click OK twice. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. 22 In the Name dialog. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and select 2. and on the Options Bar. For Dimensions ➤ Width. and click OK. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags. click Edit/New. enter 3/4''. select Circle. open Imperial\Families\Annotations. for Elevation Tag. select 3/4'' Circle. and click Open. and select 3.rfa. scroll to Section Line. click the Annotation Objects tab.Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays. On the floor plan.

40 Press ESC. select the callout. and click OK.30 On the Design Bar. scroll down to Callout Boundary. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. select Custom – Callout Head w/ 1/4'' Corner Radius. enter 1/4''. enter Custom – Callout Head w/ 1/4'' Corner Radius. 34 In the Name dialog. 39 Click OK twice. . For Corner Radius. 42 In the Objects Styles dialog. click Edit/New. 31 In the Load into Projects dialog. 36 In the drawing. click Load into Project. Click OK. click the Annotation Objects tab. click 37 In the Element Properties dialog. select the current project. 43 Under Category. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. and click OK. for Callout Tag. 598 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . clear all others. and on the Options Bar. click Duplicate. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head. and select 7. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. To accomplish this. 49 Click OK. Creating a View Template In this exercise. and visual overrides. 47 Select Callout Leader Line. View templates provide an easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG. 50 Click File menu ➤ Save. expand Callout Boundary. and select 4. filters. view regions. and apply it to multiple elevation views. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson. Presentation view Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan. select Dash.rvt. you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building.45 For Line Pattern. you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views | 599 . You learn to create view templates. click Training Files. 46 Under Category. you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. masking regions.

under Elevations. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. The crop region displays as red. 600 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 5 On the View Toolbar. clear Entourage. 7 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 4 On the View Control Bar. 9 Click the Annotation Categories tab. Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 6 On the View Control bar. and features blue triangular grips and break marks.Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click East. 3 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown. click (Hide Crop Region). click Zoom to Fit. under Visibility. 8 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 2 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view.

right-click East. 14 In the New View Template dialog. click OK. levels. and click OK. elevation markers. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On. Callouts. 13 In the Project Browser. enter Black and White Presentation Elevation. and section lines are now hidden in the view. Creating a View Template | 601 . under Elevations.10 Under Visibility. 12 On the View Control bar. and click Create View Template From View. 16 In the Project Browser. double-click North. under Elevations. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections 11 Click OK. grids. 15 In the View Templates dialog.

and click Apply View Template. you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan. select Black and White Presentation Elevation. right-click North.rvt. under Floor Plans. Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser. as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in _progress. and the exterior area on the south side of the building. click Apply.17 In the Project Browser. The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. and click OK. double-click Penthouse. 602 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .rvt. edit the crop region as before. 21 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. 19 Using the same method. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 18 In the Select View Template dialog. View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise. You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan.

and click Properties. View Range and Plan Regions | 603 . for View Range. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. select Level Below (Level 4). NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view. right-click. 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. select Penthouse. Click OK twice. Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. for Level. select Level Below (Level 4).2 In the Project Browser. click Edit. for Bottom. double-click Roof Plan. under Extents. Under View Depth. under Floor Plans.

7 In the Element Properties dialog. click Plan Region. Under View Depth. click Lines. select Roof Plan. Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Click OK twice. for Level. select Level 4. select Level 4. under Extents. for Bottom. 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. and click Properties.6 In the Project Browser. for View Range. 10 On the Design Bar. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. 604 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Edit. right-click.

16 On the Design Bar. for Bottom. Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. click Edit. and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. 17 On the Design Bar. Click OK twice. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 On the Design Bar. In the left corner of the building. the fire Using Filters to Control Visibility | 605 . click Region Properties. select Unlimited. Move you cursor diagonally. select the left endpoint of the outer wall. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle).11 On the Options Bar. for View Range. click Modify. you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly. Under View Depth. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters. in this case. 15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. select Unlimited. for Level. click Finish Sketch. under Extents.

under Basic colors. After you apply the filter. and click OK. 6 In the Filter Name dialog. expand Floor Plans. 1 In the Project Browser. for Pattern. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. enter Rated Walls.rvt. 17 Using the same method. and double-click Level 1. select Solid Fill. click <No Override>. You click the current color value to open the Color dialog. 9 Click OK. click the Filters tab. under Projection/Surface. click (New). 5 In the Filters dialog. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ ■ ■ For Filter by. 10 On the Filter tab. click Override under Patterns. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under Views (all). and click OK. 14 In the Color dialog. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill. Select contains. under Categories. for Rated Walls. 11 Select Rated Walls. 606 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click Edit/New. for Color. click Add. select the red color. 7 In the Filters dialog. Enter Hr.rating of the walls. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. 16 Click OK. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in _progress. select Walls. and apply a color. select Fire Rating. under Filters. 12 On the Filter tab. 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog.

click Remove.18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. click OK. Masking Portions of a View | 607 . 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. Masking Portions of a View In this exercise. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide. you obscure geometry in portions of a view. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. To accomplish this.

2 Select Copy of Level 1. right-click. click Show Crop Region. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. under Floor Plans. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in _progress. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. and click Rename. 5 On the View menu. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. as shown. 608 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 4 On the View Control Bar.Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left.

click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. click (Rectangle). click Masking Region. Masking Portions of a View | 609 .7 On the View menu. 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown. 12 On the Options Bar. 8 Select the crop region. NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. 9 On the View Control Bar. and adjust the view again until it displays as shown. 11 In the Type Selector. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. select Invisible lines. Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

click Finish Sketch. Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 1 In the Project Browser. right-click Unit 18 Plan .Level 1. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects. 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan. you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan.14 On the Design Bar. NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in _progress.rvt. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. 610 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Floor Plans. You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan.

Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. under Visibility. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. click the current scale. for Pattern. and click OK. right-click. click black. and click 1/4''=1'0''. and click Rename. 3 In the Rename View dialog. select Solid fill. click <No Override> to apply a color. and click Override. for Color. 7 Under Cut. Working with Visual Overrides | 611 . 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. click in the Patterns field. select Walls. under Pattern Overrides. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 4 On the View Control Bar. 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog. right-click. 11 Click OK twice. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. and click OK.2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1.

clear Grids. click Modify. 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 18 Right-click. 16 Under Visibility. Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown. 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab. and click OK. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog.Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view 12 On the Design Bar. clear Floors. 612 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click Hide in View ➤ Category. under Visibility.

for Pattern. 23 In the Color dialog. for Color. and click OK.19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. click Override. 20 Right-click. select Dash 1/16''. click <No Override> to apply a color. click a purple color. By using the previous method to make the selection. 25 Click OK twice. the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default. 21 Under Projection/Surface. under Lines. Working with Visual Overrides | 613 . 22 In the Line Graphics dialog. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category.

30 On the Design Bar. select a bright green color. 29 In the Color dialog. click By Category Override. select the sofa. click Modify. and click OK twice. The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color. click Projection Lines. click . 614 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 28 For Color. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar.Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. right-click.

you learn how to create sheets within a Revit MEP project. how to add views to the sheets. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. click . and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. right-click.32 Select one of the lamps. Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 615 . 33 On the View Control Bar. you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. and click Unhide in view ➤ Category.

rvt. 616 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click OK. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. right-click. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. click Training Files. and click View. click Sheet. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : E1 30x42 Horizontal. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets.

Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block. Click OK.NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 . 5 When the title block highlights. on the Options Bar. For Sheet Number. click Modify. 7 On the Design Bar. For Sheet Name. Creating Drawing Sheets | 617 . expand Sheets (all). 3 In the Project Browser. enter Site Plan. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. click 6 In the Element Properties dialog.Unnamed. and select the title block. under Identity Data: ■ ■ ■ (Properties). click Modify. enter A101.

For Project Name. under Other. 14 Click OK. 2009. 618 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 13 In the Element Properties dialog. for Project Address. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. The new project information displays in the titleblock. enter J. enter Freighthouse Flats. NOTE Text size is determined within the sheet family.Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. 11 In the Edit Text dialog. MA 12345 12 Click OK. click Edit. enter 15 May. enter 2009-1. Smith. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. enter For Approval. For Client Name. For Project Number. For Project Status.

enter Floor Plan.rvt. Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise. and click Save.Elevations A107 . Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As. right-click. create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 . right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. and click OK.Stairs In the following exercise. 17 In the Project Browser.rvt. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : E1 30x42 Horizontal. you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise.Layout Plan A104 .Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser. you add views to these sheets.Elevations A105 . select the new sheet name. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.Elevations A106 . 18 In the Sheet Title dialog. 21 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.Sections A108 . for Name. and click Rename. Adding Views to Sheets | 619 . and click OK.

click Modify. and click to place it. and drag it to the sheet. The red border around the view no longer displays.Elevations. 620 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click to place the view. under Sheets (all). 4 On the Design Bar. drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet. double-click A104 . double-click A102 .Floor Plan. 6 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet.Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. select Level 1. 2 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet. Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Building Elevation).

8 On the Design Bar. drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet. and click to place it. Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser. 11 Under Detail Views (Detail). align it with the East elevation. and click to place it.7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet. Adding Views to Sheets | 621 . 10 Under Sections (Building Sections). and click to place it. 12 On the Design Bar.Sections. under Sheets (all). drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet. double-click A107 . click Modify. click Modify.

move the cursor over it. 18 Under Floor Plans.Stairs. NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar. and on the Options Bar.Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view. and click to place it. 16 Select title bar. . 19 On the Design Bar. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet. double-click A108 . Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser. for View Scale. Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view. click Modify. and press TAB until it highlights. 622 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . select 1-1/2'' = 1'0''. zoom in to the grip. under Sheets (all).

Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 623 .View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. and then make changes and deactivate the view. under Floor Plans. 21 Zoom to the stair callout. In order to do this. you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise. you must first activate the view on the sheet. Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. 22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers.

624 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height. 3 At the right end of the Roof level line. enter 54'. and press ENTER.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. under Sheets (all).Sections. right-click. zoom in to the name and elevation of the level. double-click A107 . Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Select the building section view. 5 On the Design Bar. and click Activate View.rvt. click Modify.

double-click North. 7 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Building Elevation). Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated. and click Deactivate View. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 625 .6 Right-click.

click Camera. 7 Place the camera as shown. 3 In the Project Browser. as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet. The camera view displays. you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet. enter Title Sheet. For Sheet Name. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. right-click. enter T. Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. you create a title sheet for your drawing set. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise. You modify the view to hide the view title. and click OK. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar.8 Click File menu ➤ Save. double-click Level 1.rvt. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. 626 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : E1 30x42 Horizontal. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. Click OK. under Floor Plans. select the new sheet name. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. After you create the sheet.

Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 627 . enter 60'. 11 On the View Control Bar.8 On the Options Bar. Under Camera. click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . For Target Elevation. enter 420'. Click OK. click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. 12 On the View Control Bar. enter 5'. For Far Clip Offset. for Eye Elevation. 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building. Under Extents. select Far Clip Active.

and click to place it in the center of the sheet. under Sheets (all). click Size. 15 With the view selected. enter 25''.13 In the Project Browser. for Height. on the Options Bar. double-click T . drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet.Title Sheet. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. Click Apply. 628 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 14 Under 3D Views. select Scale (locked proportions). Under Model Crop Size. and then click OK.

click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. and close the exercise file. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. for Show title. 24 Click OK twice. click Modify. and on the Options Bar. select No. and click OK. enter Viewport/no title mark. 22 In the Name dialog. The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. 25 On the Design Bar. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 629 . 19 Select the view on the sheet. click Edit/New.17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. click Modify. . under Graphics. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar.

630 .

click Training Files. You also learn to create different types of schedules. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit MEP. Because of the open style floor plan. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 631 . The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command. you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans. You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects. such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise. such as room and window schedules. Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects. expand Floor Plans. such as doors and windows. you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. Tagging Objects In this lesson. in your Revit MEP 2009 projects. you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged. and double-click Unit 18 Plan .Level 1.Tagging and Scheduling 11 In this tutorial.rvt.

create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right. right-click in the Design Bar. move the cursor to the right. 3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active. as shown: 632 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing). Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms. and click Room and Area.2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. as shown: 5 Using the same method. 4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left. click Room Separation.

Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 633 . 7 On the Design Bar. Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags.6 Using the same method. 9 In the Tags dialog. click Load. click Modify. create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area.

The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. 13 On the Options Bar. type 8'. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click Room. click OK.10 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. and click to place the room and tag. type U18-1. indicating that it can be edited. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Room Tag. The room tag number displays in blue. verify that Tag on placement is selected.rfa. click it. click Training Files. 11 In the Tags dialog. 15 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. 634 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . 14 For Offset. click Modify. 17 Zoom in on the tag number. and the rectangle contains the room tag. and press ENTER. and select the room tag. 16 On the Design Bar.

and press ENTER. type Entry. 19 On the Design Bar. type Kitchen. NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged. and edit the tags as shown (Toilet. Sequential letters are also supported. Dining. click Modify. ■ 21 On the Design Bar. 20 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. click Modify. and press ENTER.18 Click the room text label. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. 22 Click the room text label. Click to place the new room and tag. and Living): Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 635 . 23 Using the same method. click Room. place rooms and tags.

and click OK. expand Lines. but they need to be tagged. on the Model Categories tab. 27 On the Design Bar. 29 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and moving clockwise.Hide the room separations 24 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.Level 2. 25 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 636 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . Tag rooms on upper level 26 In the Project Browser. clear Room Separation. The rooms are already placed. click Room Tag. 28 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair). click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms. under Floor Plans. double-click Unit 18 Plan .

You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows. in the Project Browser. 31 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.Level 1. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.30 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. expand Floor Plans.rvt. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rvt. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary. you learn how to place door and window tags. 3 On the Options Bar. 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Tagging Doors and Windows | 637 . click Tag ➤ By Category. clear Leader.

for Mark. type U18-1.■ Closet door in living room 5 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and press ENTER. and click OK. 638 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . NOTE The tag symbol and text size are determined by the tag family. under Identify Data. (Element 8 In the Element Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door. click Properties). type U18-2. 7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left.

and drag it down to center it in the doorway. rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags. 11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door.9 Using one of the methods you just learned. Tagging Doors and Windows | 639 . 10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right.

17 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown: Place window tags 18 In the Project Browser. 20 In the Tags dialog. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 15 Under Category. and click OK. click Training Files. click OK.Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 1. 640 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . double-click Unit 18 Plan . verify that All objects in current view is selected. 22 In the Tags dialog. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Window Tag. and click OK. select Door Tags. click Tag All Not Tagged. 23 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 21 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.Level 2. 16 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. click Tag All Not Tagged. 24 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog.rfa. select Window Tags. 13 On the Design Bar. 19 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. expand Floor Plans. click Load.

you learn how to tag furniture objects. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. tag all untagged windows. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser. Tagging Other Objects In this exercise. 27 Zoom to the drawing extents. click Training Files. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. select the edge to which the leader connects. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags. 28 Using the same method. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . 26 Under Floor Plans. 3 On the Options Bar. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Furniture Tag. 5 At the confirmation prompt. 29 Save the file.25 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags. 4 Select a dining room chair. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Tagging Other Objects | 641 .rvt. select Leader. click Yes to load a tag. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. double-click Level 2. click Tag ➤ By Category.rfa.Level 1. and modify the tag placement and display. expand Floor Plans.

642 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . 12 Click the elbow control. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1). 14 Click Modify. Notice that the chair and table tags overlap. and on the Options Bar. and drag it above the chair tag. and drag it up to form an angled leader. modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. 9 Click Modify. 13 Optionally. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table.8 Select the furniture in the living room. 11 Select the tag for the table. clear Leader.

click Modify. 18 On the Design Bar.16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table. under Floor Plans. Tagging Other Objects | 643 . and on the Design Bar.Level 2. click Tag All Not Tagged. and click OK. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged. double-click Unit 18 Plan . Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture. select Furniture Tag : Standard. Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser.

20 On the Options Bar. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. you learn to add schedules. click Check None. 22 In the Type Selector. 644 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . 23 Save the file. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule. Creating a Window Schedule In this exercise. select Furniture Tag: Boxed. click (Filter Selection). select Furniture Tags. and click Modify. 21 In the Filter dialog. you create a window schedule for the building model shown below. and click OK. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams In this lesson.

Creating a Window Schedule | 645 . a schedule that lists every window in the building. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. that is.You begin by creating a window instance schedule. You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model. Finally. Next. in which windows are listed by window type. you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule.

7 Using the same method. right-click in the Design Bar. 646 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. select Comments and click Add. and click OK. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. expand Floor Plans. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Schedule/Quantities. click Training Files. and click View. 4 For Name.rvt. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. type Building Window Schedule. select Windows. and double-click Level 1. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser. 9 Click OK. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams. under Category. add the following fields to the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Height Level Type Mark Width 8 Under Scheduled fields. 6 Under Available fields. click the Fields tab.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog.

However. click Close. click Show. The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model. 12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays. Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark. in large building models with many views. Creating a Window Schedule | 647 . expand Schedules/Quantities. and click View Properties. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area. you are prompted to open one that does. click OK to search through relevant views of the building model. 13 In the Project Browser. If no open view shows the selected element. NOTE By clicking Show. and on the Options Bar.A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model. you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. right-click the schedule. this can be a time-consuming process.

23 Click OK twice. under Other. sorted by type mark. click Edit. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 20 Right-click on the schedule. for Sorting/Grouping. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog. for Sorting/Grouping. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. for Sort by. and click View Properties. 648 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . 19 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type. change the Type Mark in the first row from 10 to A. The window schedule is displayed. The window type schedule is displayed. clear Itemize every instance.15 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit. and press ENTER. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. Change type mark from the schedule 18 In the window schedule. under Other. select Type Mark 17 Click OK twice.

double-click Level 2.rvt. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule In this lesson. jamb.rvt.24 Change the Type Mark for the other window types. unlike shared parameters. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. 27 Click File menu ➤ Save As. under Floor Plans. so that the types are sequentially named from A to H. and save the exercise file as i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. as shown: 25 In the Project Browser. and double-click Building Window Schedule. In this case. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and. and sill conditions for a window can be found. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 649 . expand Schedules/Quantities. 26 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. you cannot use them to tag objects.

3 In the Project Parameters dialog. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser. select the following fields. right-click Building Window Schedule. under Other. click Add to create the new parameter. type Head Detail. Select Type. and click Properties. under Available fields. for Fields. Under Parameter Data. 12 Click OK twice. select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. 5 Click OK. select Construction. 650 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. for Name. 7 In the Project Parameter dialog. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail 11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Categories. click Edit. For Group parameter under. so that they are listed before Comments. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 6 Using the same method.

type Unit 18 . click Group. type 3/A107. and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. You then hide the column used for the filter. move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. for Jamb Detail. Under Name. and Sill Detail. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 651 .rvt. Jamb Detail. TIP To select all 3 headers. and for Sill Detail. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. click in the Head Detail header. select Head Detail. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. click Schedule/Quantities. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule.Door Schedule. under Type Mark A.Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule. 16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. for Head Detail. select Doors. type 2/A107. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 14 On the Options Bar. and without releasing the left mouse button. type 1/A107. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser.Level 1. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter In this exercise. For example. type Window Details. 17 Save the file.

6 Under Available fields. verify that New Construction is selected. Type U18 in the third field. 11 Under Field formatting. and click OK.Unit 18. 9 Click the Formatting tab. 4 Click OK. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark 7 Click the Filter tab. and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. expand Sheets (all). 652 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . Select contains in the second field. and specify the following options: ■ ■ For Sort by. 8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Hidden field.■ For Phase. 10 Under Fields. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with. select the following fields. select Mark. click the Fields tab. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule. and specify the following values for Filter by: ■ ■ ■ Select Mark in the first field. but is not included as a column in the schedule. select Family and Type. Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. and double-click A102 . Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row).

The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions. 14 Click to place the schedule in the upper left corner of the sheet.Door Schedule. and drag it to the sheet. Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. 15 On the Design Bar.13 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule. click Unit 18 . click Modify. 19 On the Design Bar. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 653 . 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width.

to the right of Header text. 7 Under Text. 5 Using the same method. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet. double-click Level 1. click Schedule/Quantities. Creating a Room Schedule In this exercise.20 Save the file. and click View. right-click in the Design Bar. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. under Floor Plans. 654 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields.rvt. add the following fields to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Name Level Area 6 Click the Appearance tab. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. and click OK. select Bold. select Rooms. and click Add. under Available fields. under Category. 8 Click OK. select Number.

type Corridor. For 104. and press ENTER. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. 101-106. Creating a Room Schedule | 655 . 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. The room Number is U17-46. type Stair. For 105. 11 Using the same method. For 102. For 106. For 103. add 5 more rooms. for Name. type Storage. for room 101. select Corridor. click New. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. 10 Edit the number to be 101. and press ENTER. next to Rows. and press ENTER.Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. select Storage. type Building Entry. and press ENTER. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan.

Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. For Weight. double-click Level 1. and modify room names. click the Lines field. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 7 Click to add 2 room separation lines in the corridor at the right side of the drawing.13 Save the file. under Projection/Surface. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Room Separation. click the bright green swatch.rvt. click Override. First. and click OK. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. In the Lines field. expand Lines. 4 Click OK twice. under Visibility. In the Line Graphics dialog. you add room separation lines. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. draw the horizontal line. under Floor Plans. Under Custom colors. 656 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . click the Color field. Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building. select 9. For Room Separation. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. place rooms from a program list. 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog.

Place rooms from a program list 10 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Room. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 657 .8 Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line. 9 On the Design Bar.

type 8'. select 102 Storage. 11 On the Options Bar. 12 Click to place the room in the newly defined entry area (lower right). for Room. 13 On the Options Bar. select 101 Building Entry. 658 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . for Room.Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing. 14 For Offset.

19 In the Project Browser. as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101. 16 Using the same method. Place 104 in the space to the left of 103.15 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. under Floor Plans. Place 106 in the space with the stairs (to the left of room 105). place the following rooms. click Modify. as shown: Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 659 . 17 On the Design Bar. These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule. double-click Room Schedule. and zoom in to the Corridor. 20 While pressing CTRL. select the 3 small walls (in or adjacent to the storage areas). Change the room bounding behavior of walls 18 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen. under Schedules/Quantities.

660 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . The Room Style Schedule displays without data. Floor Finish. click 23 On the Design Bar. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. 30 On the Options Bar. and click OK. type As Selected. 31 For Key Name. while pressing CTRL. clear Room Bounding. and for all 3 finishes. select Base Finish. 28 In the Schedule Properties dialog. for Rows.21 On the Options Bar. under Constraints. click New. and click Add. click Modify. 24 Open the Room Schedule. (Element Properties). under Available fields. and Wall Finish. 27 Select Schedule keys. Create key schedule 25 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Rooms. 26 In the New Schedule dialog. type Units. 29 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. under Category. click Schedule/Quantities. and click OK.

under Other. 37 Open the Room Schedule. All rooms are selected in the floor plan. 33 In the Project Browser. The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. add 2 more key names: Service and Public. and click Add. and click Properties. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 661 . click (Filter Selection). under Identity Data. select Room Style. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. under Schedules/Quantities. 42 On the Options Bar. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Element Properties). 44 On the Options Bar. 43 In the Filter dialog. double-click Level 1. for Available fields. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 39 In the Project Browser. right-click Room Schedule. for Room Style. select Rooms. select Units. and click OK. 35 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click OK. for Room Style. 38 Under U17-8. under Floor Plans. click Check None. click Edit. for Fields.32 Using the same method. 40 Zoom to the drawing extents. 36 Click OK twice. select Units. 41 Draw a selection box around floor plan.

8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). click 5 For Title.46 Open the Room Schedule. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. 104. select Public. right-click Level 1. click the Color Scheme field. 103. click OK. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. and apply it to the Level 1 view. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. type Room Type. select Service. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. 4 In the New color scheme dialog. and click OK. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. and 106. 9 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. under Views (all). 6 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and double-click Level 1. for Color. and click Properties. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. click OK. under Floor Plans. For rooms 102 and 105. 48 Save the file. 47 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. type Room Type. (Duplicate). 662 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . 7 Because you are creating a new color scheme. at the warning prompt. expand Floor Plans. under Graphics.rvt. for Name. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. select Room Style.

and clear Room Separation. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. 20 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. click Modify. under Schemes. click Edit Color Scheme. in the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none).11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 On the Design Bar. under Visibility. Add a color scheme legend 15 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. expand Lines. 19 On the Options Bar. 21 In the second row of the table (Public). select Room Type. a legend displays at the tip of the cursor. click Color Scheme Legend. Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 18 In the drawing area. click the value in the Color column. 14 Click OK twice. 16 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. select the color legend. clear Visible. When you move the cursor over the drawing area. 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. click Edit. and click OK. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 663 .

under Graphics. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. 29 Click OK twice. type 1''. for Size. click Modify. 664 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . on the Options Bar. respectively.22 In the Color dialog. 23 Using the same method. select blue. click Edit/New. 24 Click OK. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected. (Element Properties). 27 In the Type Properties dialog. 30 On the Design Bar. under Custom color. 28 Under Title Text. and select Show Title. and click OK. type 1/4''. for Swatch Width. change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray.

the legend displays at the tip of the cursor. Turn on the visibility of rooms in the building section view 32 In the Project Browser. right-click Building Section. select Room Type. under Sections. 34 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. position the legend horizontally across the bottom of the section view. Place the color scheme legend on the section 36 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 39 Using the grip at the bottom of the legend. volume computations must be enabled from Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. and select Properties. and click OK. Calculation of room volumes can affect project performance. As you move the cursor over the drawing area. NOTE In order for color fills to be displayed in section. click Color Scheme Legend. for Color Scheme.Create a section color diagram 31 In the Project Browser. under Graphics. under Visibility. 38 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click Building Section. 37 Click to place the legend on the drawing. click Edit. 35 Click OK twice. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 665 . select Rooms. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. under Sections.

and click OK. 46 Click . select Public. and click OK. select Rooms. 41 On the Options Bar. 666 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . and the room to the right of the stair on level 1 (Corridor 104). click . for Room Style. under Identity Data. select Units. (Filter Selection). select all the rooms in the stairwell. click Assign all rooms the Units room style 43 On the Options Bar. under Identity Data. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. for Room Style. click Check None. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. 45 While pressing CTRL. and click OK. 42 In the Filter dialog.40 Draw a selection box around the entire drawing.

click New. Add suites as a new room style in the Room Style Schedule 50 In the Project Browser. excluding the stairwell spaces. under Key Name for the new row. Assign the Suites room style to all rooms on levels 3 and 4 53 Open the Building Section. select Service.Assign the penthouse room the service room style 48 Select the penthouse. 51 On the Options Bar. 52 In the Room Style Schedule. 54 While pressing CTRL. and click OK. TIP You may need to use TAB to select the room in the upper right with the entertainment center. 49 In the Element Properties dialog. type Suites. select all the rooms on levels 3 and 4. for Rows. under Identity Data. under Schedules/Quantities. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 667 . and click . for Room Style. double-click Room Style Schedule.

for Room Style. The color fill will extend to the roof. select Areas and Volumes. select Suites. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. select the room on the left side of the top floor. verify that At wall finish is selected. 58 In the Area and Volume Computations dialog. A new Suites key is added to the color scheme legend. Change room heights 60 In the drawing area. and click OK. 62 Repeat this process for all rooms that are bounded by the sloping roof: the remaining suites and the public stairs on the top floor.55 Click . 61 Drag the top Control grip above the bounding roof. under Identity Data. and click OK. Use volume calculations to control color fills 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. but not beyond it. under Volume Computations. The color fill extends to the roof. 668 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . 59 Under Room Area Computation.

Assign the correct heights to the rooms on the first level 63 On the first level. and click 65 For Limit Offset. select Level 2. 70 For Limit Offset. 71 Click OK. select the stairwell room. 67 On the first level. type 0’ 0” . the dining room. 64 In the Element Properties dialog. for Upper Limit. click Modify. type -10”. select the public room next to the stairs (Corridor 104). 68 Click . under Constraints. and the living room. . 66 Click OK. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 669 . select Loft. under Constraints. for Upper Limit. 72 On the Design Bar. 69 In the Element Properties dialog.

You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates. Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise. You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials. 670 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser. you have already determined the roof configuration for the building. under 3D Views. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. double-click {3D}.73 Save the file.

click Modify. under Category. For Then by. 10 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. and click OK. select Basic Roof : Wood Joist . and click Add.Insulation on Plywood Deck . select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse. click Family and Type. Clear Itemize every instance. Creating a Material Takeoff | 671 . 3 While pressing CTRL. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. Select Grand totals. select Roofs.2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. 4 In the Type Selector. add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields. 5 On the Design Bar.EPDM. 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff. 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog. select Family and Type. under Available fields. select Material: Description. 9 Using the same method.

11 On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ Under Fields. select Calculate totals. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser. 22 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. 20 For Formula. select Currency.75 672 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . under Available fields. type the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Material: Cost 1. select Material: Cost. for Name. 24 In the Roof Material Takeoff. for Material: Cost.50 1. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog. type Estimated Cost. Under Field formatting. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. The /(1'^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so that the cost estimate value can be calculated. type Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1'^2). 17 Click Calculated Value. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. select Material: Area. select Calculate totals. 19 For Type. The Roof Material Takeoff Schedule displays. 23 For Field formatting. and click Add. click the Formatting tab. 12 Click OK. and click Properties. 21 Click OK. and click OK twice.25 4. for Fields. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. and under Fields. 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. click Estimated Cost. under Other. click Edit. 15 In the Element Properties dialog.

Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. for Rounding. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. verify that 2 decimal places is selected. either within family components or within the project template. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. You draw a travel path line. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 673 . regardless of category. 27 In the Format dialog. In this lesson. adding the shared parameters to a family. ensuring consistency across families and projects. can be used for any number-based parameter. creating a generic tag to tag the family. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. click the Format value. and schedule the total distance of each path. select $. These shared parameters can be added to any family.50 The Estimated cost is calculated. and are defined and stored in an external file. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters. for Currency. Digit grouping. 29 Select Use digit grouping. 31 Save the file. not just for currency. 30 Click OK twice.Material: Description Wood Joist Material: Cost . Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. 26 In the Project Units dialog. tag the line. The cost fields are formatted correctly. and reporting the shared parameters. 28 For Unit symbol. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit MEP multi-category schedules. which inserts commas after every three digits. Add currency formatting to the schedule 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. you create a shared parameter file. you create an exiting plan for the building.

6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. 7 Under Parameters. and save the exercise file as i_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. select Length. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog.rvt. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 4 In the left pane of the Create Shared Parameter File dialog. click Create. 674 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . 11 Click OK twice. for Name. 9 Under Parameters. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects. for Name. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and click OK. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click Training Files. type OfficeStandardsParameters. click New.txt. type Exiting. for Type of Parameter. and click OK. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters.rvt. type Path ID. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. click New. 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1. and click Save. for File name.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Floor Plans. type Travel Distance. under Groups. for Name. click New.

following the equals symbol (=). under Parameters. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 675 . and click OK. under Dimensions. 3 On the Design Bar. otherwise the family loads into the current project. If you have multiple projects open. 14 On the Design Bar. You then create a generic tag to tag the family. under Parameters. under Parameter Data. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. select Constraints. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file. 8 Select Instance. 9 In the Family Types dialog. 11 Click OK.rvt. add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 12 In the Family Types dialog. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Travel Line.rvt. and click Select. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. 15 If necessary. and select Instance. in the Load into Projects dialog. type Length. for Group parameter under. click Add. 13 Click Apply. 2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog.Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. and click OK. under Parameter Type. 10 Using the same method. 4 In the Family Types dialog. click Load into Projects.rfa. Click Training Files. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected. select Shared parameter. for Travel Distance Formula. click Family Types. group it under Dimensions. click Add. select i_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. and click OK. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress.

select Travel Distance. click parameter(s) to label). 676 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . click (Add Parameter). and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. select Travel Distance. 17 In the left pane of the New Annotation Symbol dialog. 21 In the Edit Label dialog. (Add 26 On the Design Bar. under Parameters. and open Imperial\Templates\Generic Tag. click Training Files. click Select. click Label. 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes. under Category Parameters. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. click Label.rft. 25 In the Edit Label dialog. and click OK. 24 Click OK twice. 19 On the Design Bar. 27 Click above the intersection of the reference planes. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes.Create a tag using shared parameters 16 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol.

and move it down. 34 On the Load into Projects dialog. and click OK. 32 In the Save As dialog. for File Name. verify that i_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress. type Travel Distance Tag. click Load into Projects. 33 On the Design Bar.rvt is selected.28 On the Design Bar. and press DELETE. 29 In the drawing window. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance.rfa. click Modify. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 677 . and click Save. 35 Save the file. 31 Click File ➤ Save As. 30 Select the Note in the upper left area of the drawing window. select Path ID.

Level 1. under Floor Plans. 6 Move the cursor to the right. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans. 2 Zoom in to the corridor. select Chain. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. double-click Exiting Plan . 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 678 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise. After the lines are tagged. above the exterior door as shown.rvt. You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID.Tagging. you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID. and click in the center of the corridor. Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser.Placing. 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 4 On the Options Bar. click Component.

17 On the Options Bar.Tagging.7 Move the cursor down. click Modify. 12 On the Design Bar. under Constraints. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown. clear Leader. click Component.Level 2. move the cursor near the right corner. for Path ID. under Floor Plans. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 679 . 11 Select each of the travel path lines. Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser. verify that Chain is selected. 18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan. double click Exiting Plan . and click (Element Properties). click Modify. and click OK. 10 On the Options Bar. type 1-1. and click outside of the building. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 On the Design Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select the 2 dashed travel lines. Placing. through the door. 13 While pressing CTRL.

and click.19 Move the cursor up through the door. 22 Click at the starting point of the previous path. and click in the stair. 21 On the Design Bar. move the cursor to the left. click Modify. 23 Move the cursor down. and click above the door to the stair. 680 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . click Component. 20 On the Design Bar.

and click OK. and click OK. 33 For Name. 27 On the Design Bar. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. type Level 1 Exit Distance. type 2-1. for Path ID. 32 In the New Schedule dialog. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path. 30 Using the same method.Tagging. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 681 . verify that <Multi-Category> is selected. 26 Select each of the travel path lines. specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2. under Category. Placing. and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog. Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. . click Modify. click Modify. click Tag ➤ By Category. 28 While pressing CTRL. under Constraints.24 On the Design Bar.

41 Under Fields. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit MEP components. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. and click Add. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. for Filter. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. in the second field. 42 Click OK. type 1-. in the first field. 46 In the Project Browser. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. in the third field. under Other. under Schedules/Quantities. for Filter by. and click Rename. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. 50 Save the file. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. and click Properties. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 45 In the Rename View dialog. under Available fields. 43 In the Project Browser. select Path ID. 49 Click OK twice. type Level 2 Exit Distance. and in the third field. while pressing CTRL. select Calculate totals. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 44 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. type 2-. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. select Travel Distance. select Path ID. and under Field formatting. 36 For Filter by. 38 For Sort by. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. 40 Click the Formatting tab.rvt. 35 Click the Filter tab. click Edit. 682 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. and click OK. select Path ID and Travel Distance. select contains.

2 In the New Schedule dialog. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. select the following fields. 10 In the schedule. select Walls.Fixed Partitions.Partitions . right-click Generic . expand C . and click . 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click Schedule/Quantities. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule. and click Properties. 4 Under Available fields. Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser.Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click View.Interior Construction ➤ C1010 . 7 In the Type Properties dialog. under Identity Data. and click OK. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 683 . and select C1010145 . expand the Assembly Description column to see the description. under Categories.Partitions ➤ C1010100 . 9 Click OK twice. click the Value field. click the Fields tab. 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog. for Assembly Code.6''. right-click the Design Bar. expand Families ➤ Walls ➤ Basic Wall.Interiors ➤ C10 .Drywall w/ Metal Stud.

you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. 3 Click New. select the Microsoft Access Driver (*. click Training Files. 5 Type RevitDSN for the name of the file data source. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database.mdb). and click Next. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. 11 Click OK 3 times. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. 10 When the confirmation dialog displays. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format.rvt. the database display may be different than that shown. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. NOTE Depending on your version of Microsoft Access. click OK. type Revit_Project. under Database. select a location for the database file.11 Close the exercise file. 12 Open the database in Microsoft Access. and click Next. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. 8 In the New Database dialog. 684 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . 1 On the File menu. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Click Finish. 9 Under Directories. click the File Data Source tab. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. for Database Name. click Create. and click OK to create the database.mdb.

so that each table of elements includes an Id column. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. Additionally. and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. 13 Close the exercise file. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. in addition to the Id column. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit MEP exports. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 685 .Revit MEP creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. For example. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element.

686 .

and how to annotate and dimension your Revit MEP 2009 projects. Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson. You accomplish this in Revit MEP by defining levels as either project or shared levels. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. you learn how to change the base elevation of a project. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0'. Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project 687 . You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project.Annotating and Dimensioning 12 In this tutorial.

After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project. you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0' to 325'.Shared levels report elevation relative to the base height Relocating a Project In this exercise. 688 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1.

expand Elevations (Building Elevation). In the Name dialog.Shared Elevation. click Edit/New. click (Element Properties). 8 Select the Level 1 line. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0'. If you did that now. and double-click South. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated. only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time. The levels in the project are not shared. Relocating a Project | 689 . you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Shared. 5 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Duplicate. and click OK. to better demonstrate how shared levels work. However. 4 In the Element Properties dialog.rvt. the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. for Elevation Base. and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. 2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. click Training Files. 6 Click OK twice. Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser. so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project. expand Views (all). type 1/4'' Head . Under Constraints.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 On the Options Bar.

The elevation of the other levels remains the same. click Modify.By selecting the Level 1 line. 13 On the Design Bar.Shared Elevation. 690 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. 10 On the View menu. type 325'. and press ENTER. The base elevation now reads 325'. By typing 325' in this step. 12 In the Type Selector. select Level : 1/4'' Head . you specify the new location of the project. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. The south elevation is displayed. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line. you specify the point (0') from which you want to relocate the project.

The changes in elevation have propagated to this view. as well as other views of the building model. 15 Define the remaining levels as shared: ■ While pressing CTRL. the Penthouse level. double-click North. select Levels 2-4. Relocating a Project | 691 . 14 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. and the Roof Plan level.The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration.

Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created.Shared Elevation. and angular dimensions. click File menu ➤ Save As. 17 Proceed to the next lesson. Dimensioning In this lesson.■ ■ In the Type Selector. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. Dimensioning on page 692. and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model. All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation. In Revit MEP. multi-segmented. 16 If you want to save your changes. On the Design Bar. select Level : 1/4'' Head . although you must turn on their visibility to view them. click Modify. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. permanent dimensions are created automatically. 692 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . In this case. radial. except when you sketch profiles to complete families. you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit MEP to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. You place linear.

expand Views (all). click Dimension. snap to wall centerlines. select it. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating Dimensions | 693 . and when a blue dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain wall. and are created by selecting individual reference points. expand Floor Plans. 3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 1.Linear and multi-segmented dimensions Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. By default. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. dimensions are aligned.

4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view. select it. 5 Move the cursor above the view. and when a blue dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall. and click to place the dimension. 694 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning .

9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step. click Modify. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays. Creating Dimensions | 695 . 7 On the Design Bar. click Dimension.6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. The lock displays as locked. and select it. and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way.

11 Using the same method. and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. and click to place the multi-segmented dimension. select the right endpoint of the planter. select Wall Faces. but below the first dimension that you placed. 15 After you select the reference points on the final planter. 12 On the Options Bar. for Prefer. 696 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . 14 Move the cursor to the right. 13 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. 16 Move the cursor up. above the plan view of the building. select the right side of the curtain wall. and select its left exterior face.

click Edit/New. enter Linear . click Modify. Creating Dimensions | 697 . click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another.Baseline. click Duplicate.Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 17 With the multi-segmented dimension selected.Ordinate. 25 In the Name dialog. View and apply the new dimension styles 28 Zoom in to the dimension string. and click OK. for Dimension String Type.3/32" Arial . 27 Click OK twice. The dimensions start from 0' 0" and increase moving away from the origin. Create a baseline dimension style 19 Select the dimension string. enter Linear . click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. Create an ordinate dimension style 24 In the Type Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. for Dimension String Type. under Graphics. 18 On the Basics tab. 22 In the Name dialog. click Duplicate. select Baseline.3/32" Arial . 21 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. . select Ordinate. 23 In the Type Properties dialog.

below. 31 Click the dimension value to which you want to add text. The dimensions are stacked and measure from the same baseline.29 Select the dimension string.Baseline. 34 Click OK. 33 Under Text Fields. 698 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning .3/32" Arial to return to the original dimension style.3/32" Arial . enter Planter. select Linear . for Below. Add text below a permanent dimension You can add supplemental text above. select Linear . under Dimension Value. to the left. for example Text dialog displays. verify that Use Actual Value is selected. The Dimension 32 In the Dimension Text dialog. . 30 In the Type Selector. and in the Type Selector. or to the right of a permanent dimension value.

Place a radial dimension with a Typ. and select it. Creating Dimensions | 699 . suffix 36 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4. 39 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights. click Modify. For Prefer. 41 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 40 Move the cursor outside the wall. select Wall faces. click Modify. 38 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Radial). click Dimension. and specify a point to place the dimension. 37 On the Design Bar.35 On the Design Bar.

type Typ.. 45 In the Dimension Text dialog. and click OK. click Modify. for Suffix. 46 On the Basics tab. click the dimension text. 43 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right. 700 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . 44 With the dimension still selected.42 Select the radial dimension.

48 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Dimension. 50 Select the horizontal line. 49 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Angular). This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building. verify that Wall faces is selected. For Prefer.Place an angular dimension 47 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5. Creating Dimensions | 701 . 51 Select the left exterior face of the planter.

When you dimension the wall. and click to place the dimension. and double-click Level 3. 702 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . 54 Proceed to the next exercise. You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions In this exercise. you select only the wall. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions on page 702. 53 On the Basics tab. you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point. expand Views (all). This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings. Automatic wall dimension Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.52 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc. click Modify.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.

Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog: ■ ■ Under Select references. select Wall centerlines. and click to place the automatic dimension string. 6 Move the cursor down below the plan view. and select Widths. and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string. select Openings. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 703 . Click Options. Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall. For Pick. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings. select Entire Walls. click Dimension. Click OK. 3 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Prefer.

rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser. and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. click Modify.7 On the Basics tab. you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. expand Floor Plans. When you place dimensions. in some cases. expand Views (all). you specify their origin on the Options Bar. Controlling Witness Lines In this exercise. you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall. you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. 704 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . For example. and double-click Level 1. where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension. However. for a multi-segmented dimension. Controlling Witness Lines on page 704.

Controlling Witness Lines | 705 . For Pick. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Prefer. select Individual References. click Dimension. and select it. verify Wall centerlines is selected. 5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter.3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights.

move the cursor down. 9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted.7 Using the same method. select the right edge of the planter. 10 Using the same method. 706 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . select the bottom right endpoint. and select it. and click to place the dimension. 8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension.

select it. and when the wall centerline highlights. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan. and specify a point to place the dimension. Controlling Witness Lines | 707 . select Wall centerlines. Dimension the partition walls to centerlines 12 On the Basics tab. for Prefer. click Dimension.11 Move the cursor down. 13 On the Options Bar.

Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed. 19 Release SHIFT. click Modify. and click to place the dimension. select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap. and drag the dimension down the wall. 18 While pressing SHIFT. select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls. select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark. and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. 708 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . 16 On the Design Bar.15 Moving the cursor to the right.

click Modify. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions on page 709. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. 22 On the Basics tab. After you create the new family type. and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards. drag it to the right. and using the same methods. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 709 . 21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions In this exercise. text font. you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. and press TAB until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall. create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall.20 Click the blue middle grip. you change the dimension tick mark.

select Arrow 30 Degree. for Tick Mark. click Edit/New. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan. 2 Click (Element Properties). Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ Under Graphics. click Duplicate. and select the lower dimension. zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4.Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 5 In the Name dialog. 710 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . type Office Standard. 3 In the Element Properties dialog.

■ Click OK twice. select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. and select the bottom dimension. type 1/8”. 8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. For Text Font.■ ■ Under Text. click Modify. 9 In the Type Selector. 7 On the Basics tab. click Modify. 10 On the Basics tab. NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 711 . If CityBlueprint does not display in the list. for Text Size. select CityBlueprint. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type. select another font.

11 Using the same method. and modify it to use the office standard parameters. 12 Proceed to the next lesson. and how to add leaders to the text notes. 712 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . Creating Text Annotation In this lesson. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes. you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building. Creating Text Annotation on page 712. select the angular dimension on the planter. create a new angular dimension type. You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan.

4 Move the cursor above grid line 4. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. but below the upper dimension string. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 713 . for Leader. and click and drag to create a text box. zoom to the planter near grid line 5. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan. click (None).Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan In this exercise.rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan. click Text.

12 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 Select the text box. under Graphics. 10 In the Name dialog box. click Duplicate. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 714 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . click Edit/New. click Modify.5 In the text box. You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. and click . and click OK. 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box. 11 Under Text. If so. type 1/4''. type EXISTING BUILDING. type 1/4'' Arial Notes. and click OK. for Text Size. Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar. select Arc Leaders. and click OK.

Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 715 . click Modify. ■ Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader. click Text. A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. Click (Add Left Arc Leader). 17 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Add Right Arc Leader). 15 On the Design Bar. 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 16 Select the Planting Bed text box.Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar. and type Planting Bed.

In the Rename dialog. click Edit/New. 716 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . type Standard Notes. Click OK twice. for Leader Arrowhead. select CityBlueprint. click Modify. 20 On the Design Bar.19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader. click Modify. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 On the Design Bar. and click OK. select Arrow Filled 15 Degree. 21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders. for Text Font. Under Graphics. Under Text. 23 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . for New. Click Rename.

30 When blue dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text. 29 Move the cursor up and to the right. select Text: Standard Notes. 31 Click in the text box. 28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3.Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar. and type 18'' Conc. over the Planting Bed text. and click Modify. click to place the text box. Wall. click (Arc). 27 On the Options Bar. 26 In the Type Selector. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 717 . click Text. for Leader.

32 If you want to save your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 718 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . click File menu ➤ Save As.

For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. plywood. These components display at the required scale. 719 . add detail components. you trace over the building model geometry. using detail components to represent materials like lumber. and metal studs. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. In order to detail from the building model. like a standard door header condition. Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. In the callout view. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. you detail the roof overhang of a project building. you learn how to create details in Revit MEP 2009.Detailing 13 In this tutorial. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view.

The roof overhang detail displays. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. and use the model as an underlay for the detail. Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model. as well as detail lines. double-click the detail callout head. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Yes to load a Detail Items family. click Detail Component. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. region objects. click Training Files. you add notes and dimensions to the detail view. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. which means that all detail components.Detailing the View In this exercise. you detail the view of the roof edge. navigate to Imperial\Families\i_Corrugated Metal. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. They are also view specific. select As underlay. You load detail components. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. and insulation objects. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. 720 | Chapter 13 Detailing . and click Open. click Training Files.rfa. and click OK.rvt. 7 In the drawing area. Exact location is not important. After you add components. 5 In the alert dialog.

13 In the Name dialog. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. 18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang. and click OK. enter Corrugated Metal Siding. click Edit/New. 17 In the drawing area. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail. Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. enter 1' 4". Detailing the View | 721 . click (Element Properties). NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents. click Duplicate. select Corrugated Metal. click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point. 16 Click OK twice.8 Delete the component. for Pattern ➤ Detail. 10 On the Options Bar. click Repeating Detail. 15 For Spacing.

25 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration. verify that Plywood-Section : 3/4" is selected. click Training Files. 24 In the Type Selector. click Detail Component. ■ ■ Click Modify. Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point. Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\Plywood-Section. click (Move). click Load. 722 | Chapter 13 Detailing . click Modify. and on the Edit toolbar.19 On the Design Bar. and click Open. Add lumber detail components 21 On the Design Bar. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood. 20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. 22 On the Options Bar.rfa.

click OK. select Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 2x8.Because you still have several components to load. Load components as a group 26 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. 29 On the Design Bar. Detailing the View | 723 . 32 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point. select Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 2x6. press SPACEBAR 3 times. and place it in the detail view as shown. 30 In the Type Selector. 33 In the Type Selector. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\i_Roof Edge Components. and click Open. 28 In the Duplicate Types dialog. click Training Files.rvt. click Detail Component. 27 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. you load them as a group from a single file. 31 To properly orient the component.

NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification. select Chain. 37 Click Modify. 36 Place the wallboard component as shown. 35 On the Options Bar. 38 Select the horizontal segment. select Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 5/8".Add wallboard detail component 34 In the Type Selector. The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist. and click Modify. 724 | Chapter 13 Detailing . click the Flip instance arrows.

as shown. select to near side. click Insulation. 42 Click Modify. For Offset. 41 Place 2 segments of insulation. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width. Detailing the View | 725 .Add insulation 39 On the Design Bar. (Move). and on the Edit toolbar. 43 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation. Select the right midpoint of the 2x8 component as the move end point. click Select the left midpoint of the 2x8 component as the move start point. enter 5 1/2".

Add rigid insulation 49 In the Type Selector. 51 Click Modify. Add lumber components 44 On the Design Bar. 48 Place the component directly above the 2x8 component. 726 | Chapter 13 Detailing . 45 In the Type Selector. as shown. 46 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. click Detail Component. select Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 2x12.■ Click Modify. select Plywood-Section : 3/4". 47 In the Type Selector. select Rigid Insulation-Section : 2 1/2". and lock the component. 50 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed.

rvt. select Thin Lines. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. enter 1/4". 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). drag the endpoint up to the top of the 2x8 component. 9 Select the lines at the top of the 2x12 component and the roof joist. as shown. you add lines to your detail.52 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar. 2 In the Type Selector. Like detail components. 4 Click Modify. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. Adding Detail Lines | 727 . select Thin Lines. click Detail Lines. Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. For Offset. 7 In the Type Selector. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 2x12 component to the lower left corner of the 2x8 component. click Detail Lines. meaning they display only in this view. 5 Select the vertical plywood component. they are view specific. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Adding Detail Lines on page 727. and press ENTER.

and clear Chain. Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. as shown. and draw the detail lines as shown. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Detail Lines. and press ENTER. click (Draw). 11 In the Type Selector.10 On the Design Bar. select Chain. enter 1/4". as shown. 13 Add detail lines around the 2x12 component. 15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 2x12 component. 728 | Chapter 13 Detailing . select Medium Lines. 16 On the Options Bar. For Offset.

and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. Adding Detail Lines | 729 . 18 In the Type Selector. 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 22 In the Project Browser. and click OK. When you turn the display model off. right-click. click ➤ Hide Crop Region. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. select Thin Lines. 20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. 24 On the View Control Bar. draw the detail lines as shown. for Graphics ➤ Display Model.17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. select Do not display. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Properties. right-click Roof Overhang Detail. select the Penthouse level line.

select Break Line. 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). For Offset. click Detail Lines.Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. 30 In the Type Selector. and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. and press ENTER. 29 On the Design Bar. TIP To rotate the break line as you place it. press SPACEBAR as necessary. 730 | Chapter 13 Detailing . select Vapor Barrier. click Detail Component. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail. enter 1/2". 26 In the Type Selector.

click the left edge of the corrugated metal component.32 Click Modify. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. Add a dimension to the detail 5 On the Design Bar. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command.rvt. 4 Add the leaders and notes as shown: Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the View Control Bar. specify 3/4" = 1'-0" for the scale. click Text. Adding Text Notes on page 731. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. Enter the text. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 6 Click the left outer edge of the 2x12 component. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Arc) to create an arced leader. Click again to specify the location of the text box. and click to place the dimension. Adding Text Notes | 731 . select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. 3 On the Options Bar. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Dimension. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you add text notes to complete the detail.

you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Text Fields. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. and click OK. on the Options Bar. 732 | Chapter 13 Detailing . right-click. enter Roof Overhang Detail . 11 Proceed to the next exercise. right-click. Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. Creating Detail Components on page 732. and save the exercise file. and press DELETE. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). (Filter Selection). 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click the dimension text. enter Typ. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Creating Detail Components In this exercise. clear Detail Items and Dimensions. Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail. 8 Select the dimension line.Keynotes. select a text note. for Suffix. and click OK. 9 In the Dimension Text dialog. and click OK.7 Click Modify. 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail. Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area. click 6 In the Filter dialog. click Select All Instances. right-click.rvt. click Roof Overhang Detail.

in the Type Selector. You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. select Medium Lines. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping. 14 Click Modify. 7 Click Modify. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 11 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. while pressing CTRL. and click Open. and selecting the chain. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. navigate to Imperial\Templates\Detail Component. select all the coping linework. 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard.rft. 16 Click Modify. click Training Files.The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework. Creating Detail Components | 733 . 15 Use a window to select all linework. pressing TAB.

27 On the Design Bar. click Load. select the coping. clear Detail Items. delete the underlying linework. double-click it in the Project Browser. While pressing SHIFT.17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\i_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click Load into Projects. 26 Press DELETE. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter Roof Edge. 24 On the Options Bar. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. The original linework remains selected. navigate to your preferred location. 21 To place the component. click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping. 734 | Chapter 13 Detailing .Keynotes view is not the open view. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . click . The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing. 18 In the Save As dialog. and click Open. Adding Keynotes on page 735. and the component can be placed in the detail. click Detail Component. 25 In the Filter dialog. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected. The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail. 30 In the drawing area. for File name. 31 Using the same method used previously. click Detail Component.rfa. and click Save. 22 Click Modify. click Training Files. 28 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 23 Using a window.

Adding Keynotes | 735 . i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 3 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. Roof Edge4. use keynote 06160.rfa.D11.C1. 5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking. 2 In the alert dialog. and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. you place keynotes on objects. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. In the Keynotes dialog. use keynote 07645. and click OK. For the metal coping.Adding Keynotes In this exercise. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag. 2-1/2" Rigid Insulation. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag. Click to place the leader arm.B5. 3/4" Plywood. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area. click Training Files. navigate to Imperial\Families\Annotations\Keynote Tag.rvt. and click Open. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Keynote ➤ Element.

and click .20 Ga.F1. use keynote 06110. 17 Keynote the component. 12 On the Design Bar. 13 Tag components: ■ (Element Properties). Creating Line-based Detail Components on page 737. select the metal fascia with drip edge.I1. FasciaProfile_1. select Corrugated Metal. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component. 7/8" Corrugated Steel . For the 3/4" Plywood Siding.A8. For the 2x12. 736 | Chapter 13 Detailing . use keynote 06160.G1. using keynote 07460. Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties. For the 2x6. use keynote 09250. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted.F1. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote.D11. 11 Click OK 3 times. click in the Value column. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. You do this in order to keynote the component. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 14 On the Design Bar. 15 In the Type Selector. click Detail Component. 18 Save the file. use keynote 06110. navigate to 07645.D1. For the 2 instances of the 5/8" Gypsum Wallboard. click Edit/New. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. click Keynote ➤ Element. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog.6 Click Modify. For the 2x8. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area. Tag the metal fascia with drip edge. use keynote 06110.

Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. click Lines. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Detail Component. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown. navigate to your preferred location. 8 In the Save As dialog. and click (Element Properties). you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Edit/New. and click Save. click Detail Component. 4 In the Type Selector. select the left end point of the reference line. 22 On the Options Bar. click Training Files. select Medium Line Detail Component. 13 In the Type Selector. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click Load into Projects. 20 Click OK 3 times.rft. click Duplicate. 11 Press DELETE. 18 In the Type Properties dialog. click Load. and select the right end point. 2 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. navigate to Imperial\Templates\Detail Component line based. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel.rvt. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. enter i_Medium Line Detail Component. 6 Lock the line. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 737 . for File name. 5 In the drawing area. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. 9 On the Design Bar. and click Modify. 16 Select the component.Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise. and click Open. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 19 In the Name dialog. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. 15 Click Modify. select Medium Lines. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line.

41 Select the component just added. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. select i_Hidden Line Detail Component.A5. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light. name the component 2 x 8 Framing. invisible. 38 On the Design Bar. and click . 24 While pressing CTRL. click Duplicate. 37 Click OK 3 times. and click . click the end points of the long detail line above the roof. click in the Value column. 34 In the Name dialog. click Edit/New. and click Open. 43 Zoom to the repeating component. click 50 Move the air barrier to the right. Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang.G1. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. 29 In the drawing area. 49 With the component selected. and hidden) used in the view. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. and click the lower end at the break line. (Move). select i_Light Line Detail Component. click Training Files. 738 | Chapter 13 Detailing . 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail. 40 Click Modify.A1. click Detail Component. 30 Click Modify. and i_Light Line Detail Component. 47 Select the component. and assign it keynote 07260. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. 31 Select the component. against the 3/4" plywood. 48 Using the same method used previously. 44 On the Design Bar. enter EPDM Membrane. click Detail Component. 28 In the Type Selector. 27 On the Design Bar. name the component Air Barrier. and click . on the Edit toolbar. 25 Next. 46 Click Modify. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components. You add the components to the project and keynote them. Single-Ply Membrane Roofing. 42 Using the same method used previously. and click OK. and assign it keynote 06110. and click . for Identity Data ➤ Keynote.23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. click Detail Component. 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. 36 In the Keynotes dialog. i_Invisible Line Detail Component.

57 Select the vertical hidden line component. select i_Hidden Line Detail Component. leaving the detail component lines. 56 Delete both dashed detail lines. click Detail Component. 52 In the Type Selector. 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier. 53 On the Options Bar. 55 Click Modify. select Chain. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 739 .Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar. and click .

click Load into Projects. Air Barrier. select i_Invisible Line Detail Component.A4. 60 On the Design Bar. 740 | Chapter 13 Detailing . 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select the component. and Vapor Barrier. select Invisible Lines. in the Type Selector. draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation. click Detail Component.58 Using the method used previously. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents. and assign it keynote 07260.rfa. click Keynote ➤ Element. 61 In the drawing area. 67 In the Type Selector. 63 In the drawing area. 64 Save the file as i_Invisible Line Detail Component. 2 x 8 Framing. name the component Vapor Barrier. Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ i_Medium Line Detail Component.rfa. 68 In the drawing area.

i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar. 71 In the drawing area. and press TAB. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.69 Select the component. under Path Type. In the Type Selector. add a keynote for the component. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. The database file opens in a text editor. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang). navigate to 07463. Update keynote settings 4 In Revit MEP. The descriptive text for each keynote displays. navigate to i_Example_RevitKeynotes. You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing. and press ENTER. click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting. click File menu ➤ Save.A1. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. 11 Click Modify. under Keynote Table.A9. ■ Modifying a Keynote Database | 741 .txt. Enter 07460. and click OK. select all the keynotes..A4. name the component Batt Insul. 9 In the drawing area. click to place the leader. click Keynote ➤ Element. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise. 73 Proceed to the next exercise. Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog.txt. and click to place the note. and close the text editor. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Number.rvt. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit. and click . click Browse. and double-click i_Example_RevitKeynotes. and click Open. and click OK. 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. 70 Using the method used previously. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Imperial. select Absolute. 3 In the text editor. Modifying a Keynote Database on page 741. 72 Save the file. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460. Enter 07463. and assign it keynote 07210.A1. 6 In the Browse for Keynote File dialog. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer. and press TAB. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file. Each keynote displays as a simple number.

select Black and White. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. The detail that you import is in DWG format. you learn how to create a drafted detail.Center to Center is selected. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. These details do not update with changes to the building model. 13 Click Modify.rvt. For Positioning. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit MEP or by importing details from an existing detail library.■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. for Scale. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. For Colors. Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. After you create a drafting view.dwg. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. click Training Files. select 3" = 1'-0". 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. and click OK. Training File Use the training file you used in a previous exercise. 4 In the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. 742 | Chapter 13 Detailing . i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Navigate to Imperial\i_Roof Edge Detail. 14 Save the file. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. verify that Auto .

rvt. and click OK. Creating a Reference Callout on page 743. double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. 7 In the Rename View dialog. click Callout. enter EPDM Metal Coping. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Rename. 4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping. Creating a Reference Callout | 743 . i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. right-click Drafting 1. 6 Select the callout. select Reference other view. Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail. 3 On the Options Bar.■ Click Open. 5 Click Modify. and use the callout grips to move the callout head. The detail is imported as an import symbol. and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping. 6 In the Project Browser. Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail).

Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail. and click OK.No Reference. click Rename.Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. for Graphics ➤ Reference Label. drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet.No Reference). 10 In the Rename dialog. 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view. 744 | Chapter 13 Detailing . delete the existing value. 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail . double-click A105 ./Sect. for New./Details. and click Properties. enter Detail . under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). right-click EPDM Metal Coping. click Modify. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 12 Click OK twice.Elev. The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays. The callout is updated with the sheet information. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. The callout head no longer displays a reference label. and double-click the callout. Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar.

and click OK. Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. There is no existing DWG file for this door detail. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 745 . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View on page 745 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise.18 Save the file. 3 On the View Control Bar. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.rvt. enter Header @ Sliding Door. click Detail Component. you create a door head condition in the new drafting view. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. verify that the scale is 3" = 1'-0". Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. for Name. so you use Revit MEP tools to draft the detail. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product.

click Duplicate. select the width dimension. select the left and bottom edges of the region. 17 Click Modify. and click OK. 20 On the Design Bar. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and enter 5/8". 14 Click OK 3 times. 746 | Chapter 13 Detailing . enter Gyp. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. 10 In the Type Properties dialog.5 In the Type Selector. Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. 18 While pressing CTRL. Select the lower left corner of the 2x6 lumber as the start point. click Region Properties. click Filled Region. 15 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ . Draw a rectangle as shown. select Wide Lines. click Edit/New. 16 Select the left edge of the region. 19 In the Type Selector. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. click . for Name. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. select Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 2x6. select Gypsum-Plaster. click Finish Sketch. 11 In the Name dialog. On the Options Bar. Board.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 747 . click 23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ (Mirror). and click above the top of the region as the end point. (Draw). 24 Select the mirrored region. click 22 On the Options Bar.Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. Select the midpoint of the upper 2x6 as the start point. and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 2x6. Move the cursor up. and on the Edit toolbar.

Draw a rectangle as shown.Finish. click Edit/New. 748 | Chapter 13 Detailing . for Name. in the Type Selector. click Region Properties. select Medium Lines.Finish. Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. 35 Select all the linework for the wood region. 29 In the Type Properties dialog. and select the right edge of the wood region. 33 Click OK 3 times. select Wood . 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Duplicate. click (Rectangle). On the Options Bar. and click OK.25 Click Modify. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. click (Align). Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point. 36 Align the wood region to the 2x6: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. 30 In the Name dialog. enter Wood . verify that the thickness is 3/4". click Filled Region. Select the right edge of the lower 2x6. 34 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ .

You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it. 41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region.37 On the Design Bar. select Medium Lines. Add a reference plane 43 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. click Finish Sketch. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 749 . click Filled Region. 45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it. click Ref Plane. click Finish Sketch. 38 On the Design Bar. click . 40 On the Options Bar. 39 In the Type Selector. 42 On the Design Bar. For Offset. enter 1/4". sketch the new region as shown. 44 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). verify that the width is 3/4" and the height is 2 1/2".

750 | Chapter 13 Detailing . For Offset. and click to select the point. (Align). 50 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). and press ENTER. 51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. enter 0. enter 3/8". 52 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click (Draw). For Offset.46 On the Tools toolbar. and click to select the point. Move the cursor right 1". Move the cursor down 1'. and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. Move the cursor left 1". click Filled Region. and click to select the point. 47 Click the reference plane. and press ENTER. click 48 Click Modify. Select Chain. Add a door panel 49 On the Design Bar. 53 Draw the door panel outline: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the top endpoint of the offset line.

56 On the Design Bar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 751 . For Offset. enter 1/8". select Medium Lines.54 On the Tools toolbar. 59 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch. top. 60 Select the left. and press ENTER. and select the bottom horizontal line. click Detail Lines. 58 In the Type Selector. click Finish Sketch. and right edges of the door panel region. Add detail lines for mounting/sliding hardware 57 On the Design Bar. click (Trim/Extend).

63 Repeat for the right detail line. click Load. enter 3". drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line. 69 Select the bolt. 65 On the Options Bar.61 Click Modify. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\A307 Bolts-Side. 66 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.rfa. 752 | Chapter 13 Detailing . and press ENTER. Add mounting/sliding hardware 64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click Open. click Detail Component. 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown. 68 Click Modify. click Training Files. 62 Select the left detail line. select the height dimension. TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation.

click Training Files. click Detail Lines. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 753 . 80 On the Options Bar. 74 Select the expansion bolt. 79 In the Type Selector. and click Open. 71 On the Options Bar.rfa. click Detail Component. click Load. use the images as a guide. click Detail Lines.70 On the Design Bar. 78 On the Design Bar. select Wide Lines. Add detail lines 75 On the Design Bar. drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 2x6. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\Expansion Bolts-Side. click . 81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown. select Thin Lines. 72 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail. 76 In the Type Selector. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 2x6. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown.

86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown. 85 On the Options Bar. click Detail Lines. 84 On the Design Bar. (Mirror). drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown. and on the Edit toolbar.82 Select the rectangle. click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. 754 | Chapter 13 Detailing . click . 87 Click Modify. 88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region.

90 In the Type Selector. 91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left. as shown.89 On the Design Bar. click Detail Lines. Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line. and on the Edit toolbar. 92 Select the line. 93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 755 . select Medium Lines. click (Mirror).

and press ENTER. 103 Add two break lines as shown. click Detail Lines. click Detail Component. 756 | Chapter 13 Detailing . draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. click . 97 On the Options Bar. 96 Beginning at the end of the 1/8" line. select Break Line. 95 On the Design Bar. select the length dimension. 98 Click the end of the detail line on the left. and click to place the arc as shown. 101 On the Design Bar. Add two break lines 100 Zoom to the drawing extents.94 Select the mirrored line on the right. TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements. 102 In the Type Selector. enter 1/8". 99 Click Modify.

You create a dimension style for detailing that rounds to a more precise measurement than the default. click Dimension. click Duplicate. 111 In the Type Properties dialog. for Text ➤ Units Format. the new style displays only inches. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 757 . 110 In the Name dialog. 109 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Detail Linear . click 108 In the Element Properties dialog. click Dimension. select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. The dimension display is updated. and click OK.Add dimensions 104 On the Design Bar. and click Modify.3/32" Arial. and on the Options Bar. 114 On the Design Bar. Select Suppress 0 Feet. 106 Click to place the dimension. 107 Select the dimension line. . click in the Value column. 113 Click OK 3 times. click Edit/New. and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region. select To the nearest 1/16". For Rounding. 112 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. 105 In the drawing area. Because detail measurements are typically less than a foot.

123 In the Type Selector select Linear Dimension Style: Detail Linear . using the Drag Text grip. drag the text for the smaller dimension.3/32”Arial. Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types 118 Select the wall dimension. 121 Click OK. under Dimension Value. and click Modify. select Replace With Text. 120 Under Text Fields. select Linear Dimension Style : Detail Linear 3/32" Arial. for Below. enter See Schedule. and then click the dimension text. 758 | Chapter 13 Detailing . click Dimension. and enter Varies.115 In the Type Selector. 119 In the Dimension Text dialog. 124 Click to place additional dimensions on the wall as shown. Add dimension strings based on the wall type 122 On the Design Bar. 117 Select the dimension line. 116 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown.

128 Click OK. 130 Click OK.125 Select Modify to end the command. and click the dimension text. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 759 . 127 In the Dimension Text dialog. select Replace With Text. 126 Select the topmost of the 3 wall dimensions. 129 Repeat this process for the next 2 dimensions: ■ ■ Enter 7 ½" “ @ Type B. Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types. under Dimension Value. and enter 6 7/8" @ Type A. Enter 9 ½" “ @ Type C.

and click to place the text. 138 On the Design Bar. click Text. 136 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region. Board. click to create an arced leader. click Modify to end the command. 139 Save the file. 135 Select the note. click (Add Right Arc Leader). 760 | Chapter 13 Detailing . and click Modify. select the gypsum board region on the left. 134 Enter Gyp.Add text notes to complete the detail 131 On the Design Bar. 132 In the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. 137 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown. 133 In the drawing area.

and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets.rvt. The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family. Creating a Note Block In this exercise.Finishing the Sheets 14 In this tutorial. including: ■ ■ ■ Creating a note block that contains typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources (images and text) from other applications into project sheets ■ ■ Using Note Blocks In this lesson. Load a generic annotation family 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the note text. click Training Files. you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation. 761 . and double-click East. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building.

type 1. and drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project. 7 On the Design Bar.Hexagon.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote . click Modify. 5 On the Options Bar. click Training Files. 8 Select the keynote.rfa. click Symbol. for Number of Leaders. 762 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag.

click (Copy). type Seal existing doors and insulate. 13 Select the tag. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating a Note Block | 763 . for Text.9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown: Create annotation marks for items requiring notes 10 With the tag selected. and click above the tag to place the copy. and click OK. 12 On the Edit toolbar. click (Element Properties). under Identity Data. on the Options Bar.

764 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays. type B. 19 With the tag selected. type Repair existing door surround. (Mirror). 15 For Text. on the Edit toolbar. on the Options Bar. and click. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building. click Copy. 18 Using the same method. 17 Click OK. and on the Options Bar. clear 20 To create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building.14 With the copy selected. click (Element Properties). 16 For Tag.

continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration: Tag A B Text Seal existing doors and insulate. and moving counter-clockwise. Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required. Repair as required. Tuckpoint as required. Remove all existing windows. using the table as a reference. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. Repair existing door surround. Clean existing concrete loading dock. Clean exterior brick wall. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation. click Modify. 22 Optionally. Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. C D E F G Creating a Note Block | 765 .21 On the Design Bar.

26 Click OK. 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. for Sort by. for Note block name. 27 In the column header (text). for Heading. select Center. for Header text. 30 Click to place the block in the upper left corner of the sheet. select Tag. under Available fields. Select Text. type Exterior Construction Notes. for the value. 766 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . 24 In the New Note Block dialog. and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. Create. type Mark. expand Sheets (all).Elevations.Tag H Text Saw cut existing brick wall. Clean cut and repair wall as required. and double-click A103 . 29 In the Project Browser. expand Schedules/Quantities. and place a note block on a sheet 23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. type Description. and click Add. and for Alignment. On the Appearance tab. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. format. On the Formatting tab. and click OK. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays. select Tag. and click Add. select Exterior Construction Notes. verify that Arial is selected. 28 In the Project Browser. and drag it to the sheet. type 1/4''. and select Bold.

click Modify. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.rvt. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. under Sheets (all). Using Drawing Lists In this lesson. Using Drawing Lists | 767 . Creating a Drawing List In this exercise.Title Sheet. you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project. 33 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. double-click T .rvt. you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project. 32 Zoom in to see the note block. 1 In the Project Browser.31 On the Design Bar.

On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 7 In the Project Browser. On the Filter tab. in the second field. and click Add. for Sort by.2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. change Drawing List to Sheet Index. select Sheet Number. and expand the right column to accommodate the text.Title Sheet. 8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower right corner. expand Schedules/Quantities. for Filter by. select Sheet Index. and in the third field. 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. under Available fields. and drag it to the sheet. 5 In the list title field. type T. ■ 4 Click OK. in the first field. select Sheet Number. 768 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . select Sheet Number. double-click T . Select Sheet Name. 6 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). and click Add. select does not equal. The drawing list displays.

The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit MEP building model. and door frames. Finally. door frame schedule. doors. you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference.9 On the Design Bar. Annotation legends are made up of components (such as section markers and door tags) that are paired with text that identifies them. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. you use a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. windows. and so on). and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block. For the text. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. On construction documents. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. 10 Zoom in to the drawing list. Training File Using Legends | 769 . 11 Save the file. On construction documents. click Modify.

type Typical Symbol Legend.Open Level Head . 770 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . click Text. click Edit/New. 8 In the Type Properties dialog.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view.Circle Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote . Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown. you create a text type with the necessary size. 6 On the Options Bar. click .Hexagon : Tag Create a text type 5 On the Design Bar. for Name. type Legend Text. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend.rvt. for Name. You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. click Symbol. and click OK. select Arial. Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. and click OK. 9 For Text Font. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Custom-Section Head: Section Head . 2 In the New Legend View dialog. and click OK twice. Add symbols to the legend 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. type 1/8''. click Duplicate. 10 For Text Size.

verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. and click to place it. 16 In the Project Browser. expand Sheets (all). type the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 15 In the Project Browser. verify that is selected. and for Leader. Creating a Symbol Legend | 771 . and double-click A101 . 14 Working from the top down. click Typical Symbol Legend. drag it to the lower right corner of the sheet. 12 Click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point.Site Plan/Floor Plan. expand Legends. 13 Type Detail Callout for the text note.Add text to the legend 11 In the Type Selector.

20 Drag Typical Symbol Legend to the lower right corner of the sheet. select Viewport : Viewport /no titlemark. click Modify.Unit 18. 18 On the Design Bar. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required. 19 In the Project Browser. The symbol legend is added to the project sheet. click Modify. 23 Save the file. select Viewport : Viewport /no titlemark. double-click A102 . and click to place it.17 In the Type Selector. 772 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . under Sheets. 22 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Type Selector.

i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. type 4th Floor Wall Types. 6 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. click Modify. type 3'. and on the Options Bar. 3 For Scale. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. for Name. 8 On the Design Bar.Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. for Family. and click OK. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. Creating a Component Legend | 773 . For View. 7 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall. select 3/4'' = 1'-0''. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. For Host length. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. select Section. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Family. select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. and press ENTER. click Legend Component. 9 Select the second wall.rvt.

and type Wall Type 1 Patio Divider. click Text. for Leader. 11 In the Type Selector. for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider.'' 14 Click below the lower wall and type Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall. 774 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . 12 On the Options Bar.Add titles to the legend components 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click to add text without a leader. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. 13 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text.

click to add text with a single-segment leader. 18 Type the following text. 19 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. 17 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. 16 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point. pressing ENTER between component descriptions. Creating a Component Legend | 775 .Add text to the legend 15 On the Options Bar. The text note with leader is added to the legend. and click Modify on the Design Bar: 1'' Decking 2x4 Stud 1'' Decking.

drag it onto the sheet. 21 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 23 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet. right-click Sheets (all). and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet. under Legends. 776 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . select Level 4. under Floor Plans. select 4th Floor Wall Types. and click New Sheet.Place the legend on a sheet 20 In the Project Browser. click OK to accept the default titleblock. and drag it to the new sheet. 24 In the Project Browser. 22 In the Project Browser.

double-click Level 4. 31 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view. under Floor Plans. Tile views in the drawing window 26 In the Project Browser. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. 27 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. 28 In the Project Browser. double-click 4th Floor Wall Types. 29 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. click Modify to end the command. select the Wall Type 2 component. The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. indicating that it captured the wall type properties. click (Match Type).25 On the Design Bar. Match a component type 30 On the Tools toolbar. Creating a Component Legend | 777 . allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. The open drawings are both visible.

The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend. 34 On the View Control Bar. 33 Select the patio divider wall. 778 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . zoom to the lower right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. select Detail Level: Medium.32 In the floor plan view.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. under Floor Plans. you open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. You can create a sequence of revisions. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. unanticipated changes in construction conditions. In this exercise. Using the table.35 Optionally. These changes can be due to owner requests. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. double-click Level 4. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. or changes in building material availability. if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. Using Revision Tracking Revit MEP provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. click 36 Save the file. contractor inquiries. Using Revision Tracking | 779 .rvt.

When Issued is selected. yet as concise as possible. In most instances. When you use this option. If you select Per Sheet. 780 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . 7 Under Show. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. For example. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. In general. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. if the active revision is number 1. If Visible is not selected. type Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. the revision is locked and issued to the field. 5 For Description. for Numbering.2 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. Add a revision to the project 4 For Date. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. 6 Verify that Issued is cleared. 3 On the right side of the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. verify that Per Project is selected. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. type a date.

you make changes to the project floor plan. move the cursor up. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision.rvt. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. Revision clouds have read-only properties. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Modify. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Edit toolbar. including revision number and revision date. 2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider. Sketching Revision Clouds | 781 .8 Click OK. double-click Level 4. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall. click (Move). but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. 9 Save the file. 5 Select the divider. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. under Floor Plans. 6 On the Design Bar. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. 3 Select the divider.

click Finish Sketch.Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. 782 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . 11 On the Design Bar. NOTE To turn off snaps when drawing a revision cloud. 8 In the drawing area. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. click Revision Cloud. select Snaps Off. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. In the Snaps dialog. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. and click OK. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition. click near the partition you moved. Revit MEP is now in sketch mode.

17 Save the file. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. click the Annotation Objects tab. 15 Under the Revision Clouds category. 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles.Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud. Training File Tagging Revision Clouds | 783 . 16 Click OK. select 6. for Line Weight. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. you load a revision tag into the project. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise.

double-click Level 4. scroll down to Revision Clouds. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. 10 In the drawing area. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left. click Tag ➤ By Category. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. Because you chose to number by project. 11 Click to place the tag. 4 On the Options Bar. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. You then issue a revision. under Floor Plans. Training File 784 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . 7 In the left pane of the dialog. you create additional revisions in the revision table. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. select Leader. click Training Files. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. you need to add one. notice that Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds.rvt.rfa. and because the revision is the first in the project. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Revision Tag. 6 Click Load. Working with Revisions In this exercise. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. click OK. 5 In the Tags dialog. 8 In the Tags dialog. 12 Save the file. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. you view a sheet on which you place a revised view. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. the cloud is tagged as number 1.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Tags.

Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. click Add. 8 Add another revision row. You can continue to add revisions. Working with Revisions | 785 . NOTE After you issue a revision. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area.rvt. select Issued. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. Create additional revisions 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. 6 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. under Sheets. you prevent further changes to the revision. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. 9 Click OK. and click OK. you can no longer modify it.Unnamed. 2 Zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. View the revision schedule on a sheet 1 In the Project Browser. double-click A107 . You do this by issuing the revision. Issue a revision 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. and enter a date. and enter a date for the revision. with the description Relocate Door. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. type Modify Paving Area. Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. 7 For Description. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table.

2 .Unnamed. apply Seq. click outside each of the two revision clouds you just drew. 15 On the Options Bar. 21 Zoom in to the revision schedule in the titleblock. 17 Using the same method learned previously.Relocate Door to the revision cloud. 20 On the Project Browser. 3 . 13 Click Finish Sketch. 10 In the Project Browser. 16 Add another revision cloud as shown.Change revision scheme from numeric to alphabetic You place the new revisions on a sheet. Information for all tagged revisions displays in the schedule. 786 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . select Tag ➤ By Category. 12 In the drawing area. double-click Level 4. for Revision. Tag the revision clouds 18 On the Drafting tab.Modify Paving Area. click to add a revision clouds. under Sheets (all). in the drawing area. select the revision cloud. 11 On the Drafting tab. select Seq. select Revision Cloud. Apply revisions to revision clouds 14 In the drawing area. double-click A107 . under Floor Plans. 19 To add tags. and then specify the revision table sequence to alphabetic.

you edit the titleblock family. You can modify the sequence of characters used for the alphabetic numbering scheme.Change the sequencing of revision to use alpha characters 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. select the titleblock. You want to change the numbering value from numeric to alphabetic for all sequences. Click Options. clear Issued. for Sequence. delete the first 3 characters. ■ ■ 24 In the Sequence Options dialog. beginning with "D". Edit the titleblock family The revision schedule is part of the titleblock family. height. select Alphabetic. You do this so that the revision can be changed. and rotation) to the revision schedule. In order to make formatting changes (appearance. Working with Revisions | 787 . The revision schedule now uses alphabetic characters. For each revision. 25 Click OK twice. 26 In the drawing area. 23 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog: ■ For Sequence 1. for Numbering.

37 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Select Outline. and then zoom in to the revision schedule. and delete the schedule lines because the table will be dynamically built. click Load into Projects. under Other. select Bottom-up. click Edit Family. 788 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . and drag it above the schedule area. click Yes. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Properties. Select Grid lines. for Build Schedule. for Appearance. expand Views (all) ➤ Schedules. Clear Blank row before data. on the Appearance tab: ■ ■ Under Graphics.27 On the Options Bar. 36 Drag the header to the bottom of the revision schedule area. Modify the revision schedule properties 29 In the Project Browser. 31 In the Revision Properties dialog. all sheets that use this titleblock in the project will be affected. 28 In the alert dialog. and select Wide Lines for the outline type. Grid lines will now be dynamically added as the revision schedule is built. and press DELETE. click Yes. click Edit. Reload the titleblock family into the project Because you changed the titleblock family. 34 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 35 Select the existing schedule lines. 38 In the Reload Family dialog. 33 Select the schedule header. right-click Revision Schedule. ■ ■ 32 Click OK twice. Relocate revision schedule You relocate the revision schedule to the bottom of the revision area.

click Edit.The revision schedule is now shown in a bottom-up format. Working with Revisions | 789 . the schedule continues to add rows as revisions are created. under Other. and on the Options Bar. 45 On the Appearance tab. 40 Select the revision schedule header. 48 Click the circular grip and drag it so that the schedule fills the revision area. enter Rev. Use grip editing to resize the revision schedule 47 In the drawing area. for Heading. Rotate revision schedule to display it vertically 39 Using the same method learned previously. and click Properties. 44 On the Formatting tab of the Revision Properties dialog. right-click Revision Schedule. for Height. With a user-defined height. When the height property is variable. Modify the properties of the revision schedule 42 In the Project Browser. select the revision schedule. select User defined. for Formatting. 41 Drag the header to the right side of the titleblock. the schedule is restricted to a specific size. open the titleblock family for editing. 43 In the Element Properties dialog. for Rotation on Sheet.. 46 Click OK twice. select 90° Counterclockwise. and the most current revisions display in the available rows.

you learn to import information (such as images. The modified revision schedule displays on the project sheet. and spreadsheets) from other applications into a project. text. click Yes. 790 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . click Load into Projects. 51 Save the file. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson.Load revised schedule into the project 49 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 50 In the Reload Family dialog.

1 In the Project Browser. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet. and place it on a sheet. 3 On the Options Bar. 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click T . Importing Text Documents In this exercise.rvt. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. click to add text without a leader.rvt. click Text.Title Sheet.JPG. under Sheets. double-click T . 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Training Files. click Modify. under Sheets. you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet.Importing Image Files In this exercise. you import a logo image in JPG format into a project. for Leader. and open Common\Freighthouse Logo. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.Title Sheet. Importing Image Files | 791 . 5 On the Design Bar.

6 Select the text. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy. The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet. you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project. Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit MEP window. Training File 792 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . click Modify. NOTE Some formatting may be required after the text is placed in Revit MEP. 9 On the Design Bar. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image. 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise.doc text file in another window.Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement. with the new text box still selected. 11 Save the file.

type Fixture Schedule. This process may vary from system to system. for File name.JPG. select the document writer.JPG. click Desktop.rvt. This exercise demonstrates a common method. 10 On the Design Bar. 9 Click to place the image on the sheet. click Modify. for Name. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. and open Common\Fixture Schedule.Unit 18. Importing Spreadsheets | 793 . 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet. 1 In the Project Browser. and saved as Fixture Schedule. 7 In the Revit MEP window. click Training Files. This step has been completed for you. and click Save. click File menu ➤ Print. you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures. 12 Save the file.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 4 Under Printer. 6 In the left pane of the Save the file as dialog. 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule. double-click A102 .mdi. 3 In Microsoft Excel. Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. 8 In the left pane of the Import Image dialog. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image.xls. 5 Click OK. under Sheets.

794 .

for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan. To effectively document this project. The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site. you break up the plan into sections. 795 . as well as a large lab building. or footprint. called dependent views. you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary.Using Dependent Views 15 In this tutorial. The large floor plan.

796 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views .Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes.

Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson. you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Imperial\i_Dependent_Views. you ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation ■ ■ Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise. click Training Files.rvt Using Dependent Views in Documentation | 797 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2.

2 In the Project Browser, right-click Level 2, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. The dependent view opens. 3 In the Project Browser, under Level 2, right-click Dependent on Level 2, and click Rename. 4 In the Rename View dialog, for Name, enter Level 2 - Aviary, and click OK. 5 Click in the drawing area, and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar, click Zoom To Fit. 6 In the drawing area, select the crop region. The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. The annotation crop is the exterior crop region, and the model crop is the interior crop region.

7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building.

798 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up, confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary).

9 On the View Control Bar, click

(Hide Crop Region).

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 799

10 Click in the drawing area, and on the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit. 11 In the Project Browser, right-click Level 2, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 12 In the Project Browser, right-click Dependent on Level 2, and click Rename. 13 In the Rename View dialog, for Name, enter Level 2 - Labs, and click OK. 14 Click in the drawing area, and on the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit. 15 Select the crop region. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs).

17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes.

800 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region.

18 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 19 On the View Control Bar, click (Hide Crop Region).

20 Click in the drawing area, and on the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit. Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Matchline. Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split for dependent views. 23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points:

Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary. (Align with the second column of lab cubicles.)

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 801

■ ■ ■ ■

Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building. Click above the left corner of the lab building. Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary. Move the cursor left about 16', and click.

24 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

802 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 26 In the Object Styles dialog, click the Annotation Objects tab. 27 Under Matchline, for Line Weight, select 9. 28 For Line Pattern, select Double Dash 5/8'', and click OK.

Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, click OK to accept the default titleblock. 31 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets, right-click A101 - Unnamed, and click Rename. 32 In the Sheet Title dialog, for Name, enter Level 2 Aviary, and click OK. 33 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, click Level 2 - Aviary, and drag it onto the sheet. 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet.

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 803

35 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 36 Use the same method to create another sheet, rename the sheet Level 2 Labs, and place the Level 2 - Labs dependent view on the sheet.

Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 38 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click View Reference. You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views. 39 On the Options Bar, for Target view, verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 - Aviary is selected. 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline.

804 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline.

41 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Floor Plan: Level 2 - Labs. 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline.

43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline. NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references.

44 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 45 On the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit.

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 805

46 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2 - Aviary. 47 On the View Control Bar, click (Show Crop Region).

48 Select the crop region, click the far right control, and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference. NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing. Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view.

49 If, after modifying the annotation crop region, the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display, select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area, right-click, and click Hide in view ➤ Elements.

806 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3), leaving 4 rooms visible in the view.

51 On the View Control Bar, click Apply dependent view settings to other plans

(Hide Crop Region).

52 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Level 2, and click Apply Dependent Views. After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view, you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. 53 In the Select Views dialog, select all views in the list, and click OK. New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view, but are not placed on sheets. 54 In the Project Browser, expand Level 1, and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. 55 On the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit. Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1.

56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1.

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 807

57 On the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views
In this exercise, you
■ ■ ■ ■

Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_Dependent_Views.rvt

Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click South Elevation. The matchline is already placed in the view.

2 In the Project Browser, right-click South Elevation, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.

808 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

The dependent view opens. 3 In the Project Browser, expand South Elevation, right-click Dependent on South Elevation, and click Rename. 4 In the Rename View dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation - Left, and click OK. 5 In the drawing area, select the Crop Region.

6 Select the inside crop region control on the right, and drag it toward the center of the view, cropping the view to the aviary.

7 On the View Control Bar, click

(Hide Crop Region).

8 In the Project Browser, right-click South Elevation, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 9 In the Project Browser, right-click Dependent on South Elevation, and click Rename. 10 In the Rename View dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation - Right, and click OK. 11 Select the crop region. 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left, and drag it toward the center of the drawing, cropping the view to the lab building.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 809

13 On the View Control Bar, click

(Hide Crop Region).

Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, click OK to accept the default titleblock. 16 In the Project Browser, under Sheets, right-click A103 Unnamed, and click Rename. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation, and click OK. 18 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Left, and drag it onto the sheet. 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet.

20 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Right, and drag it onto the sheet. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet.

810 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

22 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 23 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click South Elevation. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar, click View Reference. 25 On the Options Bar, for Target view, verify that Elevation: South Elevation - Left is selected. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline.

28 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Elevation: South Elevation - Right. 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 811

30 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 31 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A103 - South Elevation. NOTE If the view references are not visible, you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. Right-click the view, and click Activate View. Select the crop region, and use the annotation crop controls to modify it.

812 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

Using Advanced Features

813

814

Grouping

16

Using the grouping functionality in Revit® Architecture 2009, you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. By grouping objects, you not only simplify their placement, you also simplify the modification process. For example, when you make changes to a single instance of a model group, all instances in the building model are updated, and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. You can also nest groups within other groups. In this tutorial, you create a model group for a typical kitchen, and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project, or with those working on a different project. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose, creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create, place, and modify repetitive units.

Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups
In this lesson, you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units, hotel rooms, and typical office layouts. After you create a model group, you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. In another exercise, you add the new model group to a previously created group. The new group is considered nested within the host group, and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. When you make changes to a nested group, the host group is also updated automatically.

Creating and Placing a Group
In this exercise, you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. In this exercise, you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. You mirror one instance of the group, and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position.

815

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_Groups-Condominium.rvt. NOTE You may need to scroll the left pane to see the Training Files folder.

Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click First Floor.

2 Click in the drawing area, enter ZR, and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan.

816 | Chapter 16 Grouping

click (Group).3 Draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the kitchen. Creating and Placing a Group | 817 . 5 In the Create Model Group dialog. The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. enter Typical Kitchen. 4 On the Edit toolbar. and click OK.

818 | Chapter 16 Grouping . click Modify. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen. 7 On the Design Bar. select the center control for the group origin.Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area.

11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance.Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. expand Model. Creating and Placing a Group | 819 . click Modify. right-click Typical Kitchen. and click Create Instance. 13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan. under Groups. and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group. 12 On the Design Bar.

14 On the Edit toolbar. click (Mirror). The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan. 820 | Chapter 16 Grouping . clear Copy. 15 On the Options Bar. 16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following image.

19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement. and on the Edit toolbar.17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell. click (Rotate). Creating and Placing a Group | 821 . 18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen.

You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation. 822 | Chapter 16 Grouping . click Modify. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. 21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. as shown.NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following images. one mirrored. 20 On the Design Bar. and one rotated.

click Save As. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. and click to select it. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. you make changes to an instance of a group. and click Save. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated.rvt.rvt. 2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen. name the file i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. press TAB to highlight the wall. When you finish editing. Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair.Save the training file 22 On the File menu. 23 Navigate to your preferred directory. Modifying a Group | 823 . Modifying a Group In this exercise.

3 Click (Group Member. 4 Move the cursor over the door. select the element.). Click icon to exclude in this group instance. 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall. and click member to group instance. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. and click to select the door. and click to select the wall. (Restore excluded group 5 Click (Group Member.). 824 | Chapter 16 Grouping .). press TAB. NOTE To display an excluded element. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance. 7 Click (Group Member. press TAB.).

10 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 13 In the Type Selector. click Modify. click Wall. Modifying a Group | 825 . 12 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall. 14 On the Options Bar.8 On the Design Bar. select Bifold-4 Panel : 48'' x 84''. clear Tag on Placement. move the cursor to the left. click Door. 15 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet. click Modify.

17 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner. 23 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. 22 In the drawing area. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 18 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. move the cursor up. click Edit Group. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. 826 | Chapter 16 Grouping . All other elements in the model are grayed out. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow.16 On the Design Bar. 19 Select the Typical Kitchen group. In edit group mode. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. 20 On the Options Bar.

under Constraints. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save. for Unconnected Height. (Element Properties). enter 3' 4''.24 On the Design Bar. click Finish. and click OK. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. 25 Select the opening. and the wall and folding doors for the closet. you add the Typical Kitchen group. All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. enter 7'. and on the Options Bar. which acts as the host. click 27 For Base Offset. 28 On the group editor toolbar. click Modify. Nesting Groups In this exercise. created in an earlier lesson. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. Nesting Groups | 827 .

click (Add to Group). in the Project Browser. 3 On the Options Bar. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 5 In the drawing area. 2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan. select the Typical Kitchen group. double-click First Floor. 828 | Chapter 16 Grouping . 4 On the group editor toolbar. Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary.rvt. click Edit Group. under Floor Plans.Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Nesting Groups | 829 . select the wall between the folding doors.6 Press TAB. click Finish. double-click Second Floor. 8 In the Project Browser. 7 On the group editor toolbar. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group. and each of the bifold doors. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. under Floor Plans.

In the next exercise. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. such as door and window tags. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. you add door tags to a group. under Floor Plans. Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model.10 Click File menu ➤ Save.rvt. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 830 | Chapter 16 Grouping . You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. double-click First Floor. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson. and filled regions. such as text. and create an attached detail group containing the tags.

6 Move the cursor down and to the left. click to draw a rectangular region. click Filled Region. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle. and select a point below the left elevator. 4 On the Options Bar. Creating a Detail Group | 831 . 7 On the Design Bar.3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch.

click Text. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. and select the text note and the filled region. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. 832 | Chapter 16 Grouping . select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. 16 In the drawing area. and on the Design Bar. 12 Enter Tile. enter Elevator Lobby Tile. click Modify.Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. as shown. and click OK. 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. 14 On the Edit toolbar. click (Group). click to add an arc leader. Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft.

under Floor Plans. click to place the detail group in front of the elevators. click Modify. 20 In the Project Browser. click Modify 23 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. Because the detail group contains variables. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. expand Detail. and click Create Instance. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. 22 On the Design Bar. it cannot be added to a group in the same Using Attached Detail Groups | 833 . you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. under Groups. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile. 21 In the drawing area. Add a group instance to a different view 19 In the Project Browser. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. double-click Second Floor.18 On the Design Bar.

you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. double-click First Floor. NOTE Your door tag numbers may be different. 834 | Chapter 16 Grouping .manner that a drawing component can be added.rvt. as shown. under Floor Plans. click Tag ➤ By Category. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 3 On the Options Bar. draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. click Modify. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Place door tags (10 total) in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. clear Leader. 5 On the Design Bar. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area.

8 In the Filter dialog. click (Group). click Check None. Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser. enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. double-click Second Floor. under Floor Plans. Using Attached Detail Groups | 835 . 10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. select Door Tags. and click OK. click (Filter Selection).7 On the Options Bar. for Attached Detail Group Name. and click OK. 9 On the Edit toolbar. and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. 11 In the Project Browser. expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit.

you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects.13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. and click OK. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. Training File 836 | Chapter 16 Grouping . Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. 16 On the Design Bar. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. click Modify. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. 14 On the Options Bar. click Place Detail. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. therefore. When you load the group from the library into a new project. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group.

and click Open. under Groups\Model. 5 In the New Project dialog. accept the default template file. In this case. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. and click OK. for Create new. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser. expand Groups. click Modify. and expand Model. Load the group in a new project 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 12 On the Design Bar. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. and click Save Group. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog.rvt. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. select 2 Bedroom Unit. verify that Same as group name is selected. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. verify that Project is selected. click Desktop. click OK. and click Save. Saving and Loading Groups | 837 . browse to the Desktop. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser.Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. A warning dialog displays. and click Create Instance. right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. 3 For File name. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group.rvt. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance.

The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. and the link is removed. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. 838 | Chapter 16 Grouping . click Use Existing. and click OK. 17 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. 20 On the Options Bar. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. 23 In the confirmation dialog. 18 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. expand Revit Links. click Remove Link. When a group is converted to a link. click Bind. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. click OK. click Modify. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file.Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group. verify that Attached Details is selected only. select the linked Revit model. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. 24 In the message dialog.rvt. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt file is added as a link to the project. click Link. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file.

team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. stairs. Using Worksharing. use Element Borrowing. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. they cannot make changes to it. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element. When you are working on a shared project. Working in a shared project In a shared project. however. You can enable Worksharing for any project. All other team members can view this workset. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. and click Editable.Sharing Projects 17 When working with large building projects. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. go to the Worksets dialog. After the project is shared. select the desired workset. The first time you activate worksets within a project. such as walls. you must first enable Worksharing. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. To make a workset editable. doors. 839 . This prevents possible conflicts within the project. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. you specify an active workset. floors. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. A workset is a collection of building elements. Elements specific to a view. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Revit MEP 2009. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. In this tutorial. called Worksharing. a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. such as annotations and dimensions. and so on.

Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. Team size 840 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. Project size The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. When setting up Worksharing. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit MEP by opening only those worksets required for your work. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. Instead. In the lessons and exercises that follow. After learning the fundamentals. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. such as a tenant interior. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets dialog. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. In a multi-story structure. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. you can select which worksets are open or closed. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users.Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. In the next exercise. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team.

Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. You should have at least one workset for each person. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. As new members create worksets for their own use. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. and View worksets. not including the Project Standards. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. Shared Levels and Grids. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 841 . with each assigned a specific functional task. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. Regardless of the default setting. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. On this tab. When you create a new workset. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. This allows Revit MEP to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. When creating the new worksets. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Step 2:Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. Team member roles Typically. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. Experience has shown that. Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. for a typical project. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. In most projects. designers work in teams.You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. each team member has control over a portion of the design.

within the local file. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. When you save to the central file. Generally. However. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. the file is saved as the central file. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. 842 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. For example. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. if a workset named Interior was created. proceeds as usual. After saving to the central file. Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. When you save locally (to your local file). you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. This makes them available to other team members. your changes propagate to the entire team. however. As you work. Step 9:Work on the project Work on the project. This is called “Selective Open. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. When you save to the central file. you should then save to your local file. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment.Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. you make that workset editable by you. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. your changes are saved. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. When finished or at regular intervals. you can select which workset is active. Therefore. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. On the Options Bar.

If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. In this instance. make any required worksets editable. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. Alternatively. reload the latest changes from the central file. if you know who checked out the required workset. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit MEP. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. To do this. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. and then save the local file. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 843 . You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. using VPN. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. you should use it only when: ■ ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. for instance.Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. and make that workset editable. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. In this situation. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely is supported. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. save to the central file. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. you should check out the Materials workset. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. When working remotely. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. In this conceptual exercise. you work no differently then you would in the office. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. or You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Show. Your username displays as the present owner. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset names. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu. 844 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 4 Scroll down the list of workset names. click Worksets. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu.In the next exercise." Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and notice all are editable by you. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. The Worksets dialog displays. and open Common\c_Worksets. 3 In the Worksets dialog. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. click Training Files. Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets.rvt. A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing.

■ 5 Under Show. Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. click OK. a small number of team members are working on the building model. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. and click OK. type the name Exterior Shell. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. In this case.When you enable worksharing. however. For training purposes. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project Standards worksets. Project Standards. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. 7 Enter the name Interior Layout. 14 In the Worksets dialog. imagine four users including yourself. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. it is better to make them visible by default. 12 Click Rename. For example. Floor Plan Level 1 view moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1". 8 Click OK. 16 In the drawing area. select any of the exterior walls of the building model. select Workset1. a third team member is assigned furniture placement. In this training file. Because the interior walls appear in many views. expand Views (all). In this simple training project. You do. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. When you initially activate Worksharing. clear Visible by default in all views. 13 In the Rename dialog. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 845 . Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. currently named Workset1. 9 Click New. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. another is assigned the interior layout. clear Families. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. 10 Enter Furniture Layout. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. click New. and double-click Level 1. Only User-Created worksets should display. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. Subdividing the project into worksets 15 In the Project Browser. Therefore. 11 In the Worksets dialog. Creating new worksets 6 In the Worksets dialog. and Views. expand Floor Plans. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. you can rename the default workset. Revit MEP creates new worksets and moves project elements and settings into the new worksets: ■ ■ Families: Loaded families in the project move into separate worksets.

20 Select one of the interior walls. click Visibility/Graphics. stairs. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 846 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . 22 In the Element Properties dialog. including the interior doors. click the Worksets tab. Hold Shift down to deselect an element. 23 Select all of the interior elements. select Interior Layout for Workset. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. and click OK. under Identity Data. and click OK. You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. 21 On the Options Bar. click . click . click . 19 Click OK. 28 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data. 26 On the View menu. 24 On the Options Bar. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. 29 Click OK. under Identity Data. and walls. select Interior Layout for Workset. 27 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.17 On the Options Bar.

44 On the File menu. 33 In the Project Browser. select all of the interior elements of the building model. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. Checking in the worksets 40 On the File menu. Now that you have created the central file. 38 In the Save As dialog. under Floor Plans. under Identity Data. 42 On the right side of the dialog. Create the central file 37 On the File menu. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. 32 Select Interior Layout. 43 Click OK. 34 In the drawing area. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. click the Worksets tab. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. click Visibility/Graphics. make sure you remember the location of this central file. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. click Save As. 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. If any interior elements remain. 35 On the Options Bar. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. In this exercise. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. double-click Level 2. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. click Worksets. click Non Editable. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 847 . click . click Close. 39 Click Save. and click OK. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. you enabled Worksharing on a project. select Interior Layout for Workset. and click OK. 30 On the View menu. under Views (all). you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. 41 In the Worksets dialog. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial.

Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset.Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. In addition. If you have not yet completed the exercise. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. select all the User-Created worksets. 11 In the Worksets dialog. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. and select Yes for Editable. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. You have created a local file which is for your use only. expand Floor Plans. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. 12 Click OK. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. 7 In the Save As dialog. 14 On the Worksets toolbar. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets on page 844. 2 In the Open dialog. you create your local file. make modifications to the building model. 15 In the Project Browser. 13 On the Window menu. and click OK. Before working on the model. 4 Click Open. please do so before continuing. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. 3 Click the arrow next to the Open button. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. click Worksets. click Options. Next. In this case. click Save As. expand Views (all). and click OK. 5 In the Opening Worksets dialog. 9 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. and double-click Level 1. check out worksets. The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. select Interior Layout for Name. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. 848 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . and select Specify. select the central file. Checking out worksets 10 On the File menu. click Open. 6 On the File menu. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. select Interior Layout. 8 In the File Save Options dialog. and click Save.

Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. If it was owned by another user. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. 24 Click OK. but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. Because this element is not owned by another user. notice the Editable Only option. however. On the Options Bar. Working Individually with Worksets | 849 . Verify that it is cleared. you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. Revit MEP borrows it for you and applies your changes. 17 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. click . Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. 20 Under Constraints. In this case. If this is selected. The upper exterior wall should still be selected. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall.16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 23 On the File menu. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. In the Worksets dialog. click . click Modify. and click OK. you can still edit this wall. under Identity Data. 22 Click OK. 21 On the Options Bar. click Worksets. 18 On the Options Bar.

click Door. click Wall. select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm. 27 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door. and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. 850 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . 34 In the Type Selector.Modify the building model 25 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. The precise location is not important. add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner. 26 Delete the door.126mm Partition (2-hr). 28 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. select Basic Wall: Interior . 29 In the Type Selector. 33 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. 32 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner. 31 On the Design Bar. and modify the length so that the corridor is open.

At the end of a work session. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. save to central. In this exercise. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. The Save to Central dialog displays with the path to the central file automatically filled in. In this particular case. If you click Modify on the Design Bar and then place the cursor over any of the new elements. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 851 . make elements editable. please do so before continuing. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. and save locally immediately afterward. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. When working in your local file. displays the workset as well as the element type. By default. For training purposes. add two door openings into the rooms you created. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 38 Click OK. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. leave this file open in its current state. it is recommended. click Save to Central. 37 In the Save to Central dialog. Saving your work 36 On the File menu. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. each user must check out worksets. you should relinquish all worksets. You modified the building model. Throughout the process. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. two users access the central file through a network connection. checked out worksets.35 Using the following illustration as a guide. Whenever you save. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. you should perform regular saves. In addition. you created your local file. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. which matches the information in the Status Bar. and reload the latest changes. Borrowed Elements is selected. If you have not yet completed these exercises. a tooltip.

and select Yes for Editable. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. 7 In the Open dialog. and reset the Username to your computer login name. Using a second Revit MEP session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit MEP window. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. click Open. 9 Click Open.rvt. This is a system setting. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. 10 In the Opening Worksets dialog. This file is for your use only. one user has already created a local file. and click OK. under Username. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. User 2: Create a local file. select the central file. 15 On the File menu. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. select all the User-Created worksets. 4 Click the General Tab and. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. You now have a local copy of the project. consider that person to be User 1. and proceed to Creating a local copy. click Save As. click Options. For training purposes. click Worksets. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. 852 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . and click OK. 11 On the File menu. 3 On the Settings menu. enter User 2. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. return to the Settings dialog. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. 14 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. specifically sequenced. and click OK. skip the following section. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit MEP and setting the username to User 2.Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. 2 Start a new Revit MEP session by double-clicking the Revit MEP icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. 16 Select the Exterior Shell workset. and click Save. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. 12 In the Save As dialog. In the following section of this exercise. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. In addition. instructions are staggered. 13 In the File Save Options dialog. and select Specify. click Options. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. 8 Click the arrow next to the Open button. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2.

25 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. User 1: Check out worksets. and double-click Level 1. modify the building model. click Save to Central. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 853 . 20 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes.You are now the owner of that workset. If you only have one workset checked out. expand Views (all). 26 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. click Worksets. open it now. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 30 In the Project Browser. 19 On the File menu. 31 Using the following illustration as a guide. and double-click Level 1. expand Views (all). and publish changes 18 User 1 should still have the local file open. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. 17 Click OK. it becomes the active workset. If it is not open. expand Floor Plans. and select Yes for Editable. 21 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. 22 Select the Interior Layout workset. expand Floor Plans. 27 On the File menu. 24 In the Project Browser. 23 Click OK. 28 In the Save to Central dialog. and move it upward approximately 2 meters. select the lower exterior wall. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central.” 29 Click OK.

37 On the File menu. click Worksets. and click OK. 44 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 1.” 39 Click OK. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. 46 In the Project Browser. 33 On the File menu. click Save to Central. you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. right-click Level 1. 38 In the Save to Central dialog. 42 Select Furniture Layout. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. User 1: Reload latest worksets. under Views (all). select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 41 On the File menu. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. 36 Using the following illustration as a guide. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. The changes User 2 made are apparent. select Yes for Editable. 45 In the Rename View dialog. under Floor Plans. 854 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . When you save to central. 32 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. under Floor Plans. and click OK. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. 43 In the Project Browser. However. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. click Save to Central. click Reload Latest. you should create a furniture plan view. and click Rename. under Floor Plans. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them. Click Yes. Before adding any furniture. and check out additional worksets 40 On the File menu. 34 In the Save to Central dialog.” 35 Click OK. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan.A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model.

66 On the File menu. select Project Standards. 60 In the Rename dialog. 51 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and click inside any room. choose any desk. click Edit/New. 54 In the Save to Central dialog. under Show. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 68 Click OK.47 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Rename. click Save to Central. and click Element Properties. 59 In the Type Properties dialog. click Worksets. 52 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. Therefore. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. the Visible by default option was not selected. 50 On the View menu. 48 In the Type Selector. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. 58 In the Element Properties dialog. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 49 On the Design Bar. click the Worksets tab. click Reload Latest. are placed under Project Standards.200mm. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 855 . 67 In the Save to Central dialog. 62 On the File menu. 61 Click OK 2 times. 53 On the File menu. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. click Component. click Modify. and click OK. 64 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. and click OK. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. click Visibility/Graphics. enter Exterior Wall . 65 Click OK. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 56 On the File menu. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. such as Wall Types.” 55 Click OK. rather than Families. click Save to Central. 63 In the Worksets dialog. NOTE System families. 57 Right-click the upper exterior wall.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. At the appropriate point in this exercise. Save the training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. leave this file open in its current state. In subsequent steps. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages.rvt. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. 71 In the Save to Central dialog. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. There are specific instructions for each user. click Save As. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users on page 856. finished the previous workset exercises. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. click Options. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” In this exercise. and these problems are rectified. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. NOTE When you open the training file for this tutorial. and still have your local files open. throughout this training. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. Each user checked out worksets. 70 On the File menu. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. you save the training file as a central file. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. In the final exercise of this tutorial. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. User 1: Reload latest. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit MEP and setting the username to User 2. and click OK. 3 In the Save As dialog. you need to set up your central and local files. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. select Save to Central. This exercise requires two users and. Checking out worksets. As each of you work. click Training Files. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). and published their changes back to the central file.If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). 856 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . and save 69 On the File menu. and open Common\c_Worksets Project-Central. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select Reload Latest. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. Only one user needs to open the training file and save the central file to a network location. select the following. modified the building model. leave this file open in its current state. Each user must have network access to the central file.

Next. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. 18 In the Save As dialog. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. select Make this a Central File after save. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. click Save As. click Save As. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 857 . 8 In the Save As dialog. and click Save. 12 On the File menu. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. Set the Username to User 2. In addition. 15 Click Open. On the Settings menu. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2.4 In the File Save Options dialog. You have created a local file which is for your use only. click Options. and click Save. and click OK. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. and select Specify. and click OK. select the central file. User 1: Create local file For the sake of simplicity. This is a system setting. 17 On the File menu. and click OK. The central file should still be open. and click OK. click Options. 6 On the File menu. User 2: Create local file 11 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. 5 Click Save. click Options. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. return to the Settings dialog. click Open. 10 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. This is the local file for User 1. and click OK. 19 In the File Save Options dialog. 9 In the File Save Options dialog. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit MEP by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. 13 In the Open dialog. ■ ■ ■ This Revit MEP session is now set up for User 2. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. and reset the Username to your computer login name. 7 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. Click the General tab of the Options dialog. 14 Click the arrow next to the Open button. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected.

and select Yes for Editable. 26 In the Worksets dialog. select Interior Layout. 31 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. double-click Level 1. User 2: Check out worksets 25 On the File menu. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. click Worksets. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. and select Yes for Editable. After you submit the request. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values. 27 Under Active Workset. click the File menu. 858 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . At this point. and then click OK. select them. You are now the owner of that workset. select the second window from the top. select the Interior Layout workset. You are now the owner of that workset. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 28 In the Project Browser. User 1: Check out worksets 21 On the File menu. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. 29 On the Options Bar. if any User-Created worksets are not open. and click Editing Requests.Checking out worksets Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. 30 On the left exterior wall. 32 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. and click Open. select Exterior Shell. Afterwards. 24 Under Active Workset. 22 In the Worksets dialog. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 33 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. click Worksets. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. verify that Editable Only is cleared. 23 Select the Exterior Shell workset. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. and then click OK. under Floor Plans.

to Local. User 1 and 2: Save to Central. click Close. and the other user granted it. In this case. click Check Now. 36 Click Close. A message informs you that your request has been granted. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 859 . 38 Click OK. select Save to Central. select the request submitted by User 2. User 2: Check for editability grant 37 In the Check Editability Grants dialog. In this multi-user exercise. you requested permission to edit the element. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 41 On the File menu. select the following. 40 In the Save to Central dialog. and close 39 On the File menu.34 In the Editing Requests dialog. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. and click OK. and notice the window is in the new location. 35 Click Grant.

860 .

and each option set can have multiple schemes. you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. In addition. At any time in the design process. In this tutorial. Using design options. 861 . you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. For example. After you and the client agree on the final design. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. you can have multiple sets of design options. it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops.Creating Multiple Design Options 18 When working with a building model. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option).

Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. The client has asked you to create various options. After you create a design option. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. In the first exercise in this lesson. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. you design each of the structural options. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. each with multiple design options. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 3"round columns and 2" round bars. 2 In the Design Options dialog. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. click New. you learn how to manage and organize the design options. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. the roof and structure systems must work together.rvt. In the final exercise of this lesson. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. make your final design decision. In the second exercise. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). you can edit it. and open Imperial\i_Urban_House. therefore. the only available command is to create a new option set. and delete the unwanted options from the project. 862 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . you set up multiple design option sets. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. click Training Files. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. each is constructed for interchangeability. Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. With the second option. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Option Set. TIP In this exercise. The first time you open the Design Options dialog within a project. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house.In this particular case.

3 Select Option 1 (primary). Creating the Structural Design Options | 863 . Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. click Modify. and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. TIP To center the middle column. In this case. 4 In the Project Browser. select Round Column: 03" Diameter. 7 In the Type Selector. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. add three columns. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. click Edit Selected. and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. and double-click ROOF TERRACE. or add a dimension string between the columns. 11 On the Edit toolbar. 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. click 12 On the Options Bar. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. select: ■ ■ ■ . and click Close. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. By selecting Multiple. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. 5 On the View menu. and the third column centered between the two. 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). click Column. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. 9 On the Design Bar. expand Views (all). Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. In the following illustration. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. 6 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL.

864 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . they are difficult to see in this view. A copy of the three selected columns is added. 15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. using the same technique. click . 16 Zoom in around the notch construction. Because of the size of the columns.TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. When you are finished. and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. 17 Zoom out and. 18 On the View toolbar.

Creating the Structural Design Options | 865 . The first click specifies the beam start point. click Modify. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. Zoom in on the upper right column. The second click specifies the end of the beam.Notice the 12 columns that you added. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. under Floor Plans. Adding a beam is a two-click process. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. 21 In the Type Selector. 19 In the Project Browser. 20 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. you add the beams that span the columns. click Beam. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. In it. 24 Select the Beam you added previously. Use the following illustration as a guide. double-click TOP OF CORE. Next. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. and click at its center to set the beam start point. select Round Bar : 2". 23 On the Design Bar.

866 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . and click the center point. zoom into the left column. Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. and select the center of the column to add a copy. move down to the next set of columns. click 26 On the Options Bar. 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. 30 On the View toolbar.25 On the Edit toolbar. click . 28 Zoom out. This is the reference point for the subsequent copies. select: ■ ■ ■ .

select Option 1 (primary). 32 In the Design Options dialog. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. click Rename. not a new option set. 46 Under Option. 37 Select Option 2 and. 44 Select the option set Roofing and. click New. Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. 42 Select Option Set 1 and. click Rename. click Rename. enter Structure for New. click New. click New. enter Brackets for New. name the option Louvers.Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. and click OK. under Option Set. 36 In the Rename dialog. 33 Click Finish Editing. 38 In the Rename dialog. Creating the Structural Design Options | 867 . under Option. 40 In the Rename dialog. 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. enter Beam for New. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. under Option. under Option. There should now be two roofing design options. 43 In the Rename dialog. and click OK. and click OK. and click OK. 34 In the Design Options dialog. 41 Under Option Set. under Option. and click OK. click Rename. under Option Set. click Rename. enter Roofing for New. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. 45 Under Roofing. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them.

Under Now Editing. under Structure. When finished. it will resemble the following illustration. name the option Sunscreen.47 Under Roofing. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. 53 In the Project Browser. 868 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . 52 Click Close. click Rename. 51 Under Edit. under Floor Plans. double-click ROOF TERRACE. select Edit Selected. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. This allows you to more easily manage the project. select Beam. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. you create the second design option. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. 48 Under Option. 50 In the Design Options dialog. and click OK. select Option 2. Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise.

click Component.55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Roof Beam. click Align. 56 In the Type Selector. Creating the Structural Design Options | 869 . 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. Refer to the following illustration. 58 On the Tools menu. The second click represents the plane that is moved. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown. Using the Align tool requires two clicks. The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to.

61 On the Design Bar. Click to indicate the end point of the move. 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment. 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown. 62 Select the beam and. The second click represents the move end point. The first click sets the move start point. click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ .60 After aligning the beam. on the Edit toolbar. click Modify. 870 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks.

you need this file in its current state. Notice that even before you close the dialog. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise.rvt. Creating the Structural Design Options | 871 . 70 On the File menu. and click Save. i_Urban_House-in progress. click Save As. 66 On the View toolbar. click Finish Editing. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise. Design option visibility is covered in more detail later in the tutorial. click . the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than the structural beams you just created. That is because the brackets option is set to primary.Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam. 67 On the Tools menu. Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system. 71 Navigate to your preferred directory. which is visible by default. 68 In the Design Options dialog. name the file. 69 Click Close.

click Component. The second roofing system. 9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns and the beam traversing the span. Under Now Editing. Roofing: Louvers (primary) should display. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. 3 In the Design Options dialog. expand Floor Plans. the other for beams. open it now. you design each of the roofing options. If you have not completed the first exercise in this tutorial. 6 In the Project Browser. If you need to add dimensions. is a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. select Rafter 2 x 10. select Louvers (primary). you created a unique in-place family as the structural system.In this exercise. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options. 10 Referring to the following illustration. is constructed of 2" x 10"rafters and 2" x 6" louvers. 4 Under Edit. In the next exercise. and double-click TOP OF CORE. expand Views (all). Create the first roofing design option 1 If you do not have the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise open. The first option. place the rafter 3' 0" inside the wall shown and overlap the horizontal beam 3'. Sunscreen. a Louver system. you set up multiple design option sets. With the second option. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. click Edit Selected. You should have named it i_Urban_House-in progress. 5 Click Close. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. delete them after the rafter is in place. 8 In the Type Selector. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. 2 On the Tools menu. 872 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . The dimensions shown are for training purposes.rvt. Creating the Roof System Design Options In this exercise. under Roofing. each with multiple design options to pick from. do so now. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets.

The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system. click Modify. click in the center of the intersection to specify the array start point. 16 On the Options Bar. 15 On the Edit menu. under Other. enter 38' 6" for Length. Select Constrain. 12 Select the rafter you added previously. click Array. 13 On the Options Bar. You are creating an array of five rafters that are 3' 3" apart. Enter 5 for Number. and click OK. 17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam. click . specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 873 .11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. Select 2nd for Move To.

For example. when the listening dimension displays. The space separates feet and inches. TIP When entering a dimension value.18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and. enter 3' 3". and press ENTER. Zoom out to see that the rafter array is created. you do not need to type the foot and inch markers. 874 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . rather than entering 3' 3". you can enter 3 3.

and click Array. 22 On the Design Bar. 26 On the Options Bar. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. under Other. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 875 . 20 In the Type Selector. 21 Place the first horizontal louver in the upper left corner according to the following illustration. click Modify. click . and press Enter. click the Edit menu. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam. when the listening dimension displays. Select 2nd for Move To. select Louver 2 x 6.Add the louvers to the design option 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 28 Move the cursor vertically downward. and click OK. 25 With the louver still selected. click Component. enter 1’. Select Constrain. 23 On the Options Bar. Enter 34 for Number. The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system. 27 For the array starting point. and. enter 17' 6 1/2" for Length. and select the louver you just placed.

click .Zoom out to see that the 34 louvers array 1' 0" apart. 29 On the View toolbar. 30 On the Tools menu. 876 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . The louver roof system still displays in the 3D view because it is the primary option. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 31 In the Design Options dialog. under Edit. The louver roof system is complete. click Finish Editing.

The first two points define the ends of the line. 42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns. In this case.Create sunscreen roof system 32 In the Design Options dialog. 36 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. Notice that the louver roof system no longer displays. the top of the next column on the right. select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name. 39 On the Design Bar. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value immediately after you create the line. under Roofing. you must create a draped canvas sunscreen. select Sunscreen. You will fix this in a later step. 34 In the Project Browser. and then adjust the dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees. 37 In the Work Plane dialog. This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. Therefore. try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible. and double-click West. The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the training file specifically for this purpose and is hidden in all views. and then click Close. the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns. 41 Select the top of the left column. click . you only need to sketch a single line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. click Properties. click Lines. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. then you can modify it through the dimension. expand Elevations. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 877 . 43 On the Design Bar. Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect. and click OK. click Edit Selected. and the third point defines the arc. 35 Zoom in on the upper level where the roof design is taking place. Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it. Click OK. NOTE As you sketch the arcs. 40 On the Options Bar. 38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. 33 Under Editing.

The arcs should connect. enter -19' 0"for Extrusion End. a Louver system. and then click Close. 48 On the Design Bar. Sunscreen. 46 On the Tools menu. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sunscreen Fabric for Type. Under Constraints. then the center arc.44 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 1' 0" for Extrusion Start. 52 On the File menu. You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect to the columns. The roof sketch must be a continuous line. NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise. under Edit. click Save. The first option. You have completed the sunscreen roof system. Select the right arc. click Finish Sketch. 45 Click OK. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. Under Constraints. you designed each of the roofing options. The second roofing system. 47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. In this exercise. The louver roof system is complete. 51 In the Design Options dialog. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool. click Trim/Extend. 878 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . click . was a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. click Finish Editing. was constructed of 2" x 10"rafters and 2" x 6"louvers. 50 On the Tools menu. 49 On the View toolbar. you need this file in its current state.

click the Design Options tab.Managing Design Options In this exercise. 7 On the View menu. 9 Click OK. 12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. double-click Secondary Option. 10 In the Project Browser. and click OK. tertiary. Create new views for each design option 1 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. secondary. Notice that both option sets are set to automatic. Because the client wants to see 3D building models of each of the designs. click the Design Options tab. you select a design. After exploring the combinations. 4 In the Project Browser. make it part of the building model. Managing Design Options | 879 . This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. 5 Right-click each of the copies. and click Rename. and last options. enter Primary Option. This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and louver) are visible. right-click {3D}. you explore how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. double-click Primary Option. do so now. 2 In the Project Browser. Rename the three copies as follows: ■ ■ ■ Secondary Option Tertiary Option Last Option 6 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. you must create a named 3D view for the primary. If you have not completed the previous exercises in this tutorial. and delete the discarded design options. click Visibility/Graphics. under Views (all). expand 3D Views. under Views (all). right-click the 3D View Primary Option. under 3D Views. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. and click Rename. Repeat this step two more times until you have three copies of the view. under Views (all). click Visibility/Graphics. under 3D Views. under Views (all). 11 On the View menu. and click Duplicate.

and click OK. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. 15 On the View menu. 17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option. click the Design Options tab. 18 In the Project Browser. and click OK. double-click Tertiary Option. under Views (all). and click OK.13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. 14 In the Project Browser. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. 20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. 880 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . 19 On the View menu. double-click Last Option. 21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. click Visibility/Graphics. 16 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under Views (all). click the Design Options tab. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option.

click Accept Primary. 34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed to the client. the beam option becomes part of the model. click Yes. 30 Under Option Set.At this point. 26 Under Option Set. select Make Primary. the current primaries are no longer options. 27 In the alert dialog. click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model. the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design. and you get a dialog asking if you want to delete dedicated option views. since you no longer need them. Managing Design Options | 881 . 25 Select Structure. 23 In the Design Options dialog. delete the other design option geometry and any dedicated option views. click Delete. the beam and the louver roofing should be selected as primary. double-click Primary Option. This was the client choice for structural. The other options were removed along with any dedicated option views. Because the client has selected the design option. The set is deleted. 32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. but should be accepted as part of the building model. 33 In the Design Options dialog. click Close. In your design options. 24 Under Option. under Structure. 22 On the Tools menu. 29 Select Roofing. select Beam. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. In this case. 28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this option set and remove the option set. click Yes. click Delete to remove the views that used options. 31 In the alert dialog. An alert is displayed.

click Save. In this exercise. After exploring the combinations.The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model. 882 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . you learned how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. 35 On the File menu. and deleted the discarded design options. you selected a design. made it part of the building model.

then add new walls and doors in a different location. For the client. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase. In the second exercise. demolish existing construction. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. demolish existing walls and doors. This changes room definition and total building model area. and then add new building model elements. You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information into views and schedules. You create new phases. You create new phases. You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific phases. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase and observe the differences in the phase-specific room schedules. This allows you to create phase-specific project documentation. you or the client may want to view the model according to phases. Using Phasing In the lesson and exercises that follow. you can create a visual time line of phase-specific 3D views. Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project.Project Phasing 19 In any project. complete with schedules. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. In the lesson and exercises that follow. 883 . In the second exercise.

then new building model elements are assigned to a phase according to those settings. click Project Units. under Phasing. regardless of phase. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. notice that New Construction is selected for Phase Created. 7 Click Cancel. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. This phase assignment is controlled by a setting within the view properties. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. If you change the view property settings and the phase definitions within a template file. expand Views (all). and double-click Level 1. In the Element Properties dialog. go to the Settings menu. As you add new elements to the building model. You can control the default phases and view phase setting by changing the settings within a template. you do not need to change the project units to metric. click (Element Properties). they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default. and click OK. Any new elements that you add to the building model are assigned to the New Construction phase. 6 On the Options Bar. click Modify. When you create a new project. you create new phase-specific views in order to visualize the changes that you make to the model. click Training Files. If you wish to do so. You create new phases and phase filters and modify graphic overrides. 884 | Chapter 19 Project Phasing . expand Floor Plans. During the demolition and renovation process. 5 Select any of the exterior walls. and None is selected for Phase Demolished. are visible in this view. View current phase conditions 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Phasing Your Model In this exercise. notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter and New Construction is selected for Phase. two phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction. under Phasing. define the units. you work in a simple model that requires renovation. and open Common\c_Phasing. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. This means that all building model elements. 4 Click Cancel.

right-click Level 1 . 20 In the Rename dialog. You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views. under Floor Plans. 11 In the Filter dialog. Because this is a renovation project. 10 On the Options Bar. 16 In the Rename dialog. under Phasing. for Phase Created. right-click Level 1. you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level. you may want to select the building model in a 3D view to ensure you capture all of the components. you modify their view properties to make each view phase specific. Phasing Your Model | 885 . enter Level 1 . select Existing. Create phase-specific views 15 In the Project Browser. are highlighted in red. 19 In the Project Browser. and click OK.Existing. click . enter Level 1 . 12 On the Options Bar. 18 In the Project Browser. This refers to the ceiling plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views.Change the phase of the existing building model elements 9 In the drawing area. right-click Copy of Level 1 . Door tags are not phase-specific and must be filtered from the selection.Demo. Because this is a phase-specific view. and click OK. After you release the mouse button. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Rename. 14 On the Design Bar. TIP If this were a multi-story building. under Floor Plans. and click OK. click Modify. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. including the door tags. under Floor Plans. and click OK.Existing. it requires a plan view for demolition and for new construction. 17 Click No. click (Filter Selection).Existing. After you create the views. Notice that the line style of the walls and doors is displayed as gray rather than black because of the phase and phase filter settings in the view properties. clear Door Tags. and click Rename. draw a selection window around the entire building model to select all of the elements in it. all of the building model elements.

Because of this time relationship.You should now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and the planned demolition.Existing. click the Phase Filters tab. This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements: New. to which all the building model elements belong. There are five default phase filters. a graphic override is used to make “older” elements use the gray line style. select Overridden. enter Composite Plan. 21 In the Project Browser. Existing. The line style of the walls and doors returns to black. 26 In the Phasing dialog. A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list. On a logical time line. under New. 29 For Composite Plan. and Temporary. This view uses a different line style because the phase property of this view is set to New Construction. double-click Level 1 . 23 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. new construction occurs after existing construction. Demolished. double-click Level 1 .Demo. you use phase filters to define which building model elements display in a particular view. Notice that the line pattern is still gray. Graphic Overrides define the appearance of building model elements according to their phase status. you need a filter that takes all of the phases into account with a particular graphic override. Phase status is time-dependent. Define phase filters 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. 28 Under Filter Name. Next. You may need to zoom in to see this. you modify these settings. under Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. In this case. for Phase. 27 Click New. Later in this exercise. View graphic overrides 30 Click the Graphic Overrides tab. 24 In the Project Browser. under Phasing. select Existing. 22 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. however. 886 | Chapter 19 Project Phasing . You can change the cut and projection line color for a demolished object.

Demolish building model elements 40 On the Tools toolbar. or you can use the demolish tool. you demolish all elements hosted by it. under Floor Plans. select Demolished. As you click each wall. 39 In the Phasing dialog. 38 For New ➤ Cut ➤ Patterns. Phasing Your Model | 887 . 36 Using the same method. click OK. select a lighter blue. specify red for the Projection/Surface line style for the Demolished phase. Add new construction 43 In the Project Browser.Existing. The cursor is displayed as a hammer. click (Demolish). Notice that the doors display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. When you demolish the host. you begin demolition. Change cut lines and patterns for new objects 37 Change the line style for New ➤ Cut ➤ Lines to blue. under Cut ➤ Lines. click the value for Color. under Floor Plans. select the interior walls one at a time. Next. 35 Click OK twice. 32 In the Demolished row. Notice that the demolished walls continue to display. That is because doors are wall-hosted elements. 33 In the Line Graphics dialog.Demo. its display changes to a red dashed line. select the line style. double-click Level 1 . double-click Level 1 . select red. 34 In the Color dialog. This was the display override that was set for demolished objects in the previous steps. You can select it and change its Phase parameter to Demolished. 42 In the Project Browser. 41 Referring to the walls that display as dashed lines in the following illustration. There are two ways to demolish an element. This is because the view phase filter is set to Show All.31 Under Phase Status.

46 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar.4 7/8" Partition (1-hr). 888 | Chapter 19 Project Phasing . for Phase Filter. select Sgl Flush: 34" x 84". 52 Open Level 1 . 45 In the Element Properties dialog. 53 Open Level 1 .Existing. select Basic Wall: Interior . 47 In the Type Selector. under Phasing.44 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. for Phase Filter. under Phasing. 50 In the Type Selector. select Composite Plan for Phase Filter. Notice this view still displays the original walls and doors. add a long horizontal wall. select Show Previous + New. Click the control arrows to adjust the opening and face directions.Demo. 55 In the Element Properties dialog. 54 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 48 Using the following illustration as a guide. click Wall. 49 On the Design Bar. and click OK. and click OK. and then add four short vertical walls between it and the upper exterior wall. The demolished walls no longer display. click Door. 51 Add a door leading into each room.

and change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + New. 60 On the View toolbar. because the phase filter is set to Show All. spin the building model so you can see the demolished walls. click (Default 3D View). The renovated building model plan is displayed.Demo. 62 If necessary. right-click Level 1 .New. You could create multiple 3D views that display each phase just as you did with the floor plans. 59 Open Level 1 . 61 On the View Control Bar. 58 Rename the copy to Level 1 . This filter displays all original components that were not demolished (Show Previous) and all new components added to the building model (+ New). which are displayed as red. Notice that all building model elements display using the composite filter. and existing shows as half-tone.New. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Phasing Your Model | 889 . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 57 In the Project Browser. regardless of phase. new is shown in blue.The composite plan phase filter uses graphic overrides and shows demolished as red dashed. Create a new construction view 56 Change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + Demo. All elements are displayed in this view.

Demo. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Views (all). define the units. They are the same walls that display as red in the 3D view. you learn how to use phase-specific room tags. and click OK. In this exercise. and new construction. 2 Open Level 1 . the rooms change in both definition and size. you add room tags to a building model that has multiple phases. All room boundaries are phase-specific. sizes.rvt. If you wish to save this file. expand Floor Plans. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. therefore. click Training Files. and open Common\c_Phase_Specific_Room-tags.Existing. 890 | Chapter 19 Project Phasing . If you wish to do so. you do not need to change the project units to metric. 63 Close the file. In this view. The three level 1 floor plan views show the progression of the renovation. you can do so at this time. As the renovation process continues. Floor plans have been created to display each phase of the project: existing conditions. In the next exercise. You can also see that the room quantities. Notice that this view is the original building model. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and the information that each room tag reports adjusts accordingly. room tags report information based on the phase of the view in which the rooms were added. In this view. click Project Units. go to the Settings menu. you created a building model with three distinct phases and created views with appropriate phase filters to display each phase. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial.New. 3 Open Level 1 .Notice that all the elements are displayed using the material defined by the graphic overrides. the walls marked for demolition display using a dashed line style. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags In this exercise. and locations change depending on the phase of the project. you can see the new walls added to the building model. and double-click Level 1 . Add room tags 1 In the Project Browser. demolition.

notice that there are two phases defined in this project. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags | 891 . 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. yet they have different room numbers. 9 On the Design Bar. click Room. Notice that the two rooms in the lower corners are identical to both the existing phase and the new phase. 6 Open Level 1 . click in each room as you move to the right. click in each room to create a room and place a room tag. and maximize the view.Existing. 5 Click OK. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 12 Starting in the room in the upper left corner. 10 Open Level 1 . In the Phasing dialog. 13 Open Level 1 . Phase 0 is for existing conditions and Phase 1 is for demolition and new construction. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. click Room Tag. click Room.4 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases.Demo. click Modify. Use the following illustration as a guide.New. 11 On the Design Bar.

New Construction. 892 | Chapter 19 Project Phasing . notice the new construction has 25 less total square feet than the original building model. you added room tags to various floor plans that are assigned different phases. The two schedule views tile. expand Schedules/Quantities.15 Using the following illustration as a guide. 17 On the Window menu. Notice the room tags in this view get the same room tag numbers as the tags in the view displaying new construction.Existing. both views are assigned the same phase yet have different phase filters. This is because the additional interior walls in the new construction occupy more space than the original. click Close Hidden Windows. 16 In the Project Browser. Notice that in each phase-specific schedule. and double-click Room Schedule . room information differs based upon the phase of the view the tags are in. click Tile. You also opened two schedules to observe how the room information is reported by phase. View phase-specific room schedules. That is because the same phase is assigned to both views. In this exercise. The room tag command allows you to tag existing rooms. 19 On the Window menu. 20 Close the file. In this case. In addition. add a room tag to the three rooms adjacent to the lower exterior wall. 18 Open Room Schedule .

and productivity by working in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger context. performance. or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects. This maximizes efficiency. A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area. In the final lesson. Comparison of alternatives on a site. you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project. you can use model linking and shared coordinates to create the campus within one project file while allowing work to proceed on the individual building models in other project files. You position the building models on the site plan. In these situations. In this tutorial. and manage the links throughout the project. you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has been developed.Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates 20 Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus. modify their visibility. Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates: ■ ■ ■ A campus plan that contains links to several structures. 893 .

Linking Building Models from Different Project Files In this exercise. you work within a project in which only the site components have been developed. This center changes as the footprint of your model changes. 894 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .Linking Building Models In this lesson. Automatic placement options: ■ Auto . you have the option to manually place the linked building model or allow Revit MEP 2009 to automatically place it. NOTE You must complete the exercises in this lesson in sequence. One building model is a condominium. and the other is a townhouse. You position the building models on the site. modify their visibility. you open a project in which only site components have been developed.Center to Center: Revit MEP places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the model. NOTE The center of a Revit MEP model is the center of the model geometry. You link two building models to the project. Placement options when linking building models When you link a building model in a project. and manage their locations in coordination with their originating project files. You link multiple instances of one building model and a single instance of another.

Base Point: Not applicable for linked Revit MEP Files. 6 Repeat the previous five steps for the following files: ■ ■ c_Townhouse c_Condo_Complex 7 Open the Model Linking folder. If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer.■ Auto . however. select the three files. in the Model Linking folder that you created. Otherwise.Origin to Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit MEP model. Select c_Site. Auto . and click OK. 4 On the File menu. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 911. with write permission. this system is not exposed to the user. ■ Manual placement options: ■ Manual . you need to copy the three training files to a different directory and make them writable. 5 On the File menu. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and save the file there. This option is grayed out. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 895 . 2 On the File menu. click Save As. and open Common\c_Site. click Close. NOTE Revit MEP projects have an internal coordinate system. The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site.By Shared Coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates. click Training Files. use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location. This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used. ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. 8 Clear Read-only.Origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor. and click Properties. Manual . NOTE You may need to scroll down in the left pane to see the Training Files folder. All three files now reside. Link condo complex into site project 9 On the File menu. right-click. click Open. c_Condo_Complex. click Open. you can do so.Center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location. Save training files to different folder 1 Create a new folder on your hard drive called Model Linking. RELATED See the lesson. c_Townhouse. ■ ■ Manual . this option will place the link at a predefined location. Because training files are used in multiple tutorials and are normally installed as read-only.rvt.

The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. 896 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . select Auto .■ Click Open. 10 In the Project Browser. 13 Click Open. Notice the blue detail lines.Origin to Origin. For Positioning. These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model sites. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. and double-click Level 1. 11 On the File menu. 12 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder and select c_Condo_Complex.

click (Move). the linked file displays within the confines of the blue detail li